JP7387293B2 - slot machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a slot machine that can generate a predetermined prize according to the display result of a variable display section that can variably display a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified.

This type of slot machine can be controlled into a normal section and an advantageous section, and after controlling to a specific state (ART) that is advantageous for the player in the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends after the end of the specific state. A method has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 6338309

Although the slot machine described in Patent Document 1 can be controlled to a specific state, there is room for improvement regarding control after the specific state ends.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine with improved control after a specific state ends.

The slot machine according to claim 1 includes:
Equipped with a variable display section that can variably display multiple types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
A slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
A section control means capable of controlling a normal section and an advantageous section;
state control means capable of controlling a plurality of states including a normal state and a specific state more advantageous than the normal state in the advantageous section;
Counting means for counting the number of occurrences of a specific event after controlling to the normal state;
prescribed number selection means for selecting a prescribed number at the start of the normal state;
After controlling to the normal state, a termination lottery means determines by lottery whether or not to terminate the normal state;
Equipped with
The state control means includes:
Control to a normal state with the start of the advantageous section,
When the number of occurrences of the specific event reaches the predetermined number selected by the predetermined number selection means based on the counting result of the counting means in the normal state, or the number of occurrences of the specific event reaches the predetermined number. When it is determined by the termination lottery means to terminate the normal state before the normal state is reached, the normal state is terminated and controlled to the specific state;
The normal state that is controlled after the end of the specific state includes a first normal state that is controlled by ending the advantageous section and starting the advantageous section again after the end of the specific state, and a first normal state that is controlled after the end of the specific state. , a second normal state in which the advantageous section is controlled while continuing.
The specific state controlled from the second normal state is the specific state controlled from the first normal state.
It is more advantageous than
The termination lottery means is capable of performing a lottery to determine whether or not to terminate the normal state with the same probability in the first normal state and the second normal state; The selection means selects the specified number such that an expected value of the specified number selected at the start of the second normal state is smaller than an expected value of the specified number selected at the start of the first normal state. choose,
The state control means controls the second normal state at a higher rate when the amount of gaming value acquired by the player in the specific state is less than or equal to a predetermined amount than when it exceeds the predetermined amount.
It is characterized by

According to this feature, after the end of a specific state, the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is returned again to control the normal state. Since the game may be controlled in various ways, it is possible to vary the flow of the game.
Further, since the specific state controlled from the second normal state is more advantageous than the specific state controlled from the first normal state, it is possible to increase the interest by being controlled to the second normal state after the specific state. Can be done.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a slot machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a medal selector. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of ROM and RAM of the main control unit. It is a diagram showing the relationship between a gaming area and a non-gaming area. It is a diagram for explaining a gaming state. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing data to be initialized due to a setting change. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a situation when transitioning from a RAM initialization state to a normal state. It is a diagram showing a situation when a special winning combination is won in the RAM initialization state. It is a figure which shows the winning suggestion performance in a normal state. It is a diagram showing a modified example of the situation when a special winning combination is won in the RAM initialization state. It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 1, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 1, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining internal lottery target combinations (set value 2, 3 bet game). It is a diagram for explaining internal lottery target combinations (set value 2, 3 bet game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 3, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 3, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 4, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 4, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 5, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 5, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 6, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining an internal lottery target combination (set value 6, 3-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining internal lottery target combinations (set values 1 to 6, 2-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining internal lottery target combinations (set values 1 to 6, 2-card bet game). It is a diagram for explaining technical matters related to internal lottery target combinations. It is a diagram for explaining technical matters related to internal lottery target combinations. It is a diagram for explaining the configuration of a game auxiliary display. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an execution mode of navigation notification and navigation performance. It is a diagram showing the flow of a game in a normal section and an advantageous section. It is a figure for explaining continuous lottery. It is a figure for explaining mode lottery. It is a diagram for explaining point lottery. It is a diagram for explaining a normal state start effect and a normal state effect. It is a figure which shows the transition of the AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the transition of the effect in the AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the content of the effect performed in the AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the execution situation of the effect performed in the AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the execution probability of the effect performed in the AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the setting value suggested in the ED performance pattern in the AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the lighting condition of the AT related display part in the AT state of a 1st form. It is a figure which shows the modification of the lighting condition of the AT related display part in the AT state of a 1st form. It is a diagram for explaining control related to continuous performance during the AT state of the first form. It is a diagram for explaining control related to continuous performance during the AT state of the first form. It is a diagram for explaining control related to continuous performance during the AT state of the first form. It is a figure which shows the transition of the AT state of a 2nd form. It is a figure showing the winning probability of the navigation stock lottery and the additional state lottery executed in the AT state of the second form. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of the decreasing state game number lottery performed in the AT state of a 2nd form. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating characteristics of a plurality of states constituting a second form of AT state. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of initial setting processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of main processing performed by a main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of main processing performed by a main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of main processing performed by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the group information setting process (general role) performed by a main control part. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of continuous data processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of continuous data processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a continuous data processing table. It is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control section. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of error processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal input signal process performed by a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal sensor process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the medal sensor check process performed by a main control part. 12 is a timing chart for explaining the state transition of a medal insertion signal for determining whether a medal passes normally in medal insertion signal processing and medal sensor check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the ball output control process performed by a main control part. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of operation information signal output processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the data processing for role ratio monitor which a main control part performs. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing the control contents of each state counting process performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the accessory ratio update process performed by a main control part. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the update status of the cumulative total buffer, the 6000-time calculation buffer, and the total cumulative calculation buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the continuous accessory ratio update process performed by a main control part. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the instruction|indication accessory ratio update process which a main control part performs. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of AT state management processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a net increase number counter. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of timer interrupt processing performed by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the time monitoring update process performed by a main control part. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of sensor monitoring processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of sensor monitoring processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of test signal output processing performed by the main control section. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of timer update processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of display monitor output data selection processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing control details of display monitor output data selection processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flow diagram showing control details of counter update processing performed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the installation position of a gaming machine information display device. It is a figure showing an example of a display of a gaming machine information display. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display test pattern of a gaming machine information display device. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode of notification during section display LED lighting. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the notification during section display LED lighting.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

[form]
Type 1 slot machine is
Equipped with a variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) that can variably display multiple types of identification information (symbols) that can be identified,
In a slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
A section control means (main control section 41) capable of controlling the normal section and the advantageous section;
a state control means (main control unit 41) capable of controlling a plurality of states (normal state, CZ state) in the advantageous section;
Equipped with
The state control means includes:
Control to a normal state with the start of the advantageous section,
Controlling to a specific state (CZ state) when a specific condition (CZ state transition condition) is satisfied in the normal state,
After the end of the specific state (CZ state), the advantageous section is ended, and the advantageous section is started again to control the normal state; and after the end of the specific state (CZ state), the advantageous section is The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to perform the second control of controlling to the normal state while the section continues.
According to this feature, not only does the advantageous section end after a specific state ends and the control returns to the normal state by moving to the advantageous section again, but also the control returns to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the end of the specific state. Since it is sometimes controlled, the flow of the game can be varied.

The slot machine of form 2 is the slot machine described in form 1,
The state control means (main control unit 41) performs the first control after the specific state controlled from the normal state ends when the advantageous section starts and the control is returned to the normal state; The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether to perform the second control (whether to continue the advantageous section after the CZ state).
According to this feature, since it is determined at the start of the advantageous section whether the first control or the second control will be performed after the end of the specific state, it is determined at the stage before being controlled to the specific state. , it becomes possible to perform control according to the control after the end of the specific state.

The slot machine of form 3 is the slot machine according to form 2,
Equipped with advance determination means (internal lottery) to decide whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize,
The section control means (main control section 41) determines whether or not to control to the advantageous section according to the determination result of the advance determination means (a winning combination in an internal lottery);
The state control means (main control section 41) determines whether to perform the first control or the second control depending on the determination result of the advance determination means (the winning combination in the internal lottery) (CZ state After that, it is decided whether or not to continue the advantageous section.
According to this feature, it is determined whether or not to control to the advantageous section according to the decision result of the advance decision means, and the end of the specific state is determined according to the decision result of the advance decision means when the advantageous section starts. After that, it is determined whether the first control or the second control is to be performed, so that attention can be paid to the determination result of the advance determination means.

The slot machine of form 4 is the slot machine according to form 2 or 3,
In the normal state controlled with the start of the advantageous section, whether the first control or the second control is performed after the end of the specific state (the advantageous section is continued after the CZ state) The present invention is characterized in that it includes a control suggestion means (normal state start performance, change of stage of normal state performance).
According to this feature, in the normal state before being controlled to the specific state, it can be suggested whether the first control or the second control will be performed after the specific state ends.

The slot machine of Form 5 is the slot machine described in Form 1,
The specific state (CZ state) is a first specific state (when the CZ state ends without transitioning to the AT state), a second specific state (when the CZ state is controlled to the AT state), including;
The rate at which the second control is performed after the first specific state (the rate at which the advantageous section continues when the CZ state ends without transitioning to the AT state) and the second control after the second specific state It is characterized in that the ratio at which control is performed (the ratio at which the advantageous section continues after being controlled to the AT state after the CZ state) is different.
According to this feature, the ratio of being controlled to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section is different depending on whether it is controlled to the first specific state or the second specific state. The subsequent flow of the game can be varied depending on whether the control is carried out or whether the second specific state is controlled.

The slot machine of Form 6 is the slot machine according to Form 5,
The second specific state (when controlled to the AT state after the CZ state) is more advantageous to the player than the first specific state (when the control ends without transitioning to the AT state after the CZ state). It is characterized by certain things.
According to this feature, the subsequent flow of the game can be varied depending on the degree of advantage of a particular state.

The slot machine of Form 7 is the slot machine according to Form 5 or 6,
After the second specific state, the second control is not performed (the advantageous section does not continue after being controlled to the AT state after the CZ state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second control is not performed after the second specific state, when the first specific state is controlled in which there is a possibility that both the first control and the second control are performed, the subsequent It is possible to draw attention to the flow of the game.

The slot machine of Form 8 is the slot machine described in Form 1,
In the normal state controlled by the second control (the normal state in which the advantageous section continues after the CZ state), the normal state controlled by the first control (the advantageous section ends after the CZ state). However, the specific condition (CZ state transition condition) is more likely to be satisfied (a mode in which transition to the CZ state can be expected with a small number of games is selected) than the normal state that is controlled when the advantageous section starts again. Cheap)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the normal state where the control is performed while the advantageous section continues due to the second control, the specific condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the normal state where the control is performed as the advantageous section starts again due to the first control. Therefore, after the specific state, the advantageous section is continued and the vehicle is controlled to the normal state, thereby increasing the interest.

The slot machine of Form 9 is the slot machine described in Form 8,
comprising a specific determining means (end lottery) for determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied each time the determining condition is satisfied in the normal state (performing an end lottery);
In the normal state controlled by the second control (the normal state in which the advantageous section continues after the CZ state), the normal state controlled by the first control (the advantageous section ends after the CZ state). However, there is a higher probability that the specific determining means determines that the specific condition is satisfied (a mode with a high probability of winning the ending lottery) than a normal state that is controlled when the advantageous section starts again. likely to be selected)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is determined whether or not the specific condition is satisfied each time the decision condition is met in the normal state, so it is possible to expect control to be in the specific state every time the decision condition is met. .

The slot machine of Form 10 is the slot machine according to Form 8 or 9,
Predetermined number determining means for determining the number of occurrences of a specific event (number of completed games) required for the specific condition to be satisfied (CZ state transition condition) from a plurality of predetermined numbers (selecting the number of completed games according to the mode); (game number lottery),
In the normal state controlled by the second control (the normal state in which the advantageous section continues after the CZ state), the normal state controlled by the first control (the advantageous section ends after the CZ state). However, the proportion of the prescribed number (number of finished games) smaller than the specified number (the normal state controlled when the advantageous section starts again) is determined by the prescribed number determining means is high (the proportion of the small number of finished games is selected). (higher modes are likely to be selected)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, control can be performed according to the number of occurrences of a specific event required until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied.

The slot machine of Form 11 is the slot machine described in Form 1,
The specific state (CZ state) that is controlled from the normal state controlled by the second control (the normal state in which the advantageous section continues after the CZ state) is the normal state controlled by the first control. (The normal state which is controlled when the advantageous section ends after the CZ state and the advantageous section starts again) is characterized by being more advantageous than the specific state (CZ state) that is controlled.
According to this feature, the specific state that is controlled from the normal state that is controlled while the advantageous section is continued by the second control is more advantageous than the specific state that is controlled from the normal state that is controlled with the start of the advantageous section. Therefore, after the specific state, the advantageous section is continued and the vehicle is controlled to the normal state, thereby increasing the interest.

The slot machine of Form 12 is the slot machine according to Form 11,
The specific state (CZ state) includes a first specific state that is ended in the first state (CZ state) (when the state ends without transitioning to the AT state after the CZ state), and the first state (CZ state). a second specific state (when controlled to the AT state after the CZ state), which is controlled to a second state (AT state) advantageous to the player;
The specific state (CZ state) that is controlled from the normal state controlled by the second control (the normal state in which the advantageous section continues after the CZ state) is the normal state controlled by the first control. (The normal state which is controlled when the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section starts again after the CZ state) is controlled from the first state (CZ state) to the second state. It is characterized by a high rate of control by the state (AT state).
According to this feature, the specific state that is controlled from the normal state that is controlled while the advantageous section is continued by the second control is lower than the specific state that is controlled from the normal state that is controlled with the start of the advantageous section. Since the rate of control from the first state to the second state, which is advantageous to the player, is high, the interest can be increased by controlling to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the specific state.

The slot machine of Form 13 is the slot machine described in Form 1,
An advantageous section ending means (main control unit 41) that ends the advantageous section when the number of games played after the start of the advantageous section (number of advantageous section games) reaches a specific value (first specified number);
Depending on the number of games played since the start of the advantageous section (number of games in the advantageous section), the rate at which the second control is performed after the specific state differs (the rate at which the advantageous section continues after the CZ state differs) )
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when controlling to the normal state while continuing the advantageous period by the second control, it is possible to control to the normal state within the range of the number of games that can be controlled in the advantageous period.

The slot machine of Form 14 is the slot machine according to Form 13,
The amount of gaming value (number of medals) that can be increased in the number of games (remaining number of games in the advantageous section) until the specific value (first specified number) is reached is less than the predetermined amount (predetermined number). (when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is less than 400 games), and when the second amount is greater than or equal to the predetermined amount (when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 400 or more), the second The rate at which control is performed is low (the rate at which the advantageous section continues after the CZ state is low)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the second control is performed, it is possible to avoid as much as possible a situation in which less than a predetermined amount of gaming value can be acquired.

The slot machine of Form 15 is the slot machine according to Form 13 or 14,
Depending on the number of games played since the start of the advantageous period (number of games in the advantageous period), the normal state controlled by the second control (the normal state controlled while the advantageous period continues after the CZ state). Change the number of games to be controlled (by changing the mode selection rate, change the average number of games stayed in the normal state)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when controlling to the normal state while continuing the advantageous period by the second control, it is possible to control to the normal state within the range of the number of games that can be controlled in the advantageous period.

The slot machine of Form 16 is the slot machine described in Form 1,
The state control means (main control unit 41) is capable of controlling the normal state into multiple types of modes with different degrees of advantage (normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, high probability mode, heaven preparation mode, heaven mode),
When controlled to the normal state by the first control (when controlled to the normal state when the advantageous section ends after the CZ state and when the advantageous section starts again), and when the control is carried out to the normal state by the second control. It is characterized in that the selection rate of the mode type is different between when the vehicle is controlled to the normal state (after the CZ state, the advantageous section is continued and the vehicle is controlled to the normal state).
According to this feature, the degree of advantage in the normal state is changed between when the second control is controlled to the normal state while the advantageous section continues, and when it is controlled to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section. be able to.

The slot machine of Form 17 is the slot machine according to Form 16,
Equipped with advance determination means (internal lottery) to decide whether or not to allow the occurrence of a prize,
Even when controlled to the normal state by the first control (when controlled to the normal state when the advantageous section ends after the CZ state and the advantageous section starts again), the second control also controls the normal state. Even when controlled to the normal state (when controlled to the normal state with the advantageous section continuing after the CZ state), the mode is changed according to the decision result of the advance decision means (the winning combination in the internal lottery). The feature is that you can select the type of
According to this feature, the degree of advantage in the normal state can also be changed depending on the decision result of the advance decision means.

The slot machine of Form 18 is the slot machine according to Form 16 or 17,
In the normal state, the present invention is characterized by comprising mode suggesting means (stage stay rate in normal state performance) for suggesting the type of the mode.
According to this feature, the degree of advantage in the normal state can be recognized.

The slot machine of Form 19 is the slot machine according to any of Forms 16 to 18,
In the plurality of modes (normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, high probability mode, heaven preparation mode, heaven mode), the first control causes the normal state (after the CZ state, the advantageous section ends, and the advantageous section returns again. It is characterized by including a specific mode (Heaven Preparation Mode) that is selected only when controlled to the normal state (controlled when the system starts).
According to this feature, after the specific state, the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section starts again, and the control is returned to the normal state, thereby increasing the interest.

The slot machine of embodiment 20 is the slot machine according to embodiment 19,
The specific mode (heaven preparation mode) has a higher rate of performing the second control after the specific state ends than other modes (normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, high probability mode, heaven mode) (CZ After the state, there is a high probability that the advantageous section will continue)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, only when the advantageous section ends after a specific state and the advantageous section starts again and the control returns to the normal state, after the specific state ends, the normal state continues while the advantageous section continues. The rate of control can be increased.

The slot machine of Form 21 is the slot machine described in Form 1,
The state control means (main control unit 41) controls the state of the specific state (CZ state) according to the game result (the number of point-up games, the number of games until the condition determination game ends, etc.) in the specific state (CZ state). After the completion of the above, it is possible to decide whether to perform the first control or the second control (whether to continue the advantageous section after the CZ state).
According to this feature, since it is determined whether the first control or the second control is performed depending on the result of the game in the specific state, attention can be drawn to the result of the game in the specific state.

The slot machine of Form 22 is the slot machine according to Form 21,
If the result of the game in the specific state (CZ state) is a first result (relatively disadvantageous result), and if the result is a second result (relatively advantageous result) that is more advantageous than the first result It is characterized in that the rate at which the second control is performed (continuing the advantageous section after the CZ state) is higher than the above.
According to this feature, even if the result of the game in the specific state is disadvantageous, the player can expect that the second control will be performed.

The slot machine of Form 23 is the slot machine according to Form 21 or 22,
The state control means (main control unit 41) performs the first control after the end of the specific state, depending on the period (number of point-up games) during which the specific state (CZ state) was controlled. , it is possible to determine whether to perform the second control (whether to continue the advantageous section after the CZ state).
According to this feature, it is determined whether the first control or the second control is performed depending on the period during which the control is in a specific state, so that control suitable for the period in which the control is in the specific state is performed. can be determined.

The slot machine of Form 24 is the slot machine according to any one of Forms 21 to 23,
The state control means (main control unit 41) performs the first control after the end of the specific state, or performs the first control depending on the amount of increase in gaming value (medals) in the specific state (CZ state). The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to determine whether to carry out the second control (whether or not to continue the advantageous section after the CZ state).
According to this feature, it is determined whether the first control or the second control is performed depending on the amount of increase in gaming value in a specific state. A suitable control can be determined.

The slot machine of Form 25 is the slot machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 24,
The present invention is characterized in that it includes a start performance execution means (sub-control unit 91) that executes a start performance (normal state start performance) at the start of the normal state.
According to this feature, it can be recognized that control in the normal state has started.

The slot machine of Form 26 is the slot machine according to Form 25,
The degree of advantage in the normal state (the possibility that the advantageous section will continue after the subsequent CZ state) is suggested by the performance mode of the start performance (whether the type of the normal state start performance is start performance A to C). It is characterized by being
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the performance mode of the start performance.

The slot machine of Form 27 is the slot machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 26,
The present invention is characterized in that it includes advantageous section notification means (main control section 41) for notifying that the vehicle is in the advantageous section.
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the vehicle is in an advantageous section.

The slot machine of Form 28 is the slot machine according to Form 27,
Equipped with derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player to derive the display result,
The advantageous section notification means (main control section 41) displays the display result at the end in the final game of the specific state (the case where the advantageous section ends at the end of the CZ state, and the last game of the CZ state). It is characterized in that the notification that the vehicle is in the advantageous section is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the derivation operating means for deriving the vehicle is operated (final stop operation).
According to this feature, in the final game in a specific state, even if the derivation operation means for deriving the display result is finally operated, the notification that the game is in an advantageous area continues for a while, so that the game is in an advantageous area. It can make you realize something.

An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is comprised of a housing 1a with an open front, and a front door 1b rotatably supported at the side end of the housing 1a. There is. Inside the slot machine 1, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter referred to as left reel, middle reel, and right reel) are horizontally arranged with the same number of symbols of a plurality of types that can be identified from each other in a predetermined order. As shown in FIG. 1, three consecutive symbols out of the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in a transparent window 3 provided approximately at the center of the front of the slot machine 1. They are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, and are arranged so that they can be seen from the player's side. In addition, as shown in Figure 2, each reel has multiple types of symbols that can be identified ("Red 7", "Blue 7", "White 7", "BAR", "Watermelon", "Cherry A"). ", "cherry b," "bell," "replay," and "plum") are arranged in a predetermined order.

In this embodiment, a configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, a configuration using four or more reels may also be used. . In addition, in this embodiment, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R constitute a variable display section that variably displays symbols, but the variable display section may be other than the reels, for example, a plurality of symbols may be displayed on the outer peripheral surface. A configuration may also be used in which the symbols can be displayed in a variable manner by moving the belt on which the symbols are arranged. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display section is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display section may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front of the slot machine 1 includes a medal insertion section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as gaming value owned by the player). ) is used to determine the maximum bet number (in this embodiment, 2 or 3 for RT0, RT1, and RT2, and 3 for BB1 and BB2, which will be described later) determined according to the gaming state. In this embodiment, the MAXBET switch 6 is operated when setting the number of bets (3 coins), the medals stored as credits and the medals used to set the number of bets are settled (the amount used to set the credits and number of bets). a settlement switch 10 that is operated when the medals are returned), a start switch 7 that is operated when starting the game, and stop switches 8L and 8C that are operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. , 8R are provided so as to be operable by the player.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the front of the slot machine 1, there is a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, and a credit display 11 that displays the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of winnings and the details when an error occurs. A gaming auxiliary display 12 that displays error codes and operation information (navigation display) corresponding to the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc., a 1BET LED 14 that lights up to notify that the number of bets is set to 1, 2BETLED 15 lights up to notify that the number of bets is set to 2, 3BETLED 16 lights up to notify that the number of bets is set to 3, and a specific number of bets (in this example, 2 coins) is set. The status display LED 17 and start switch 7 are illuminated to notify that the special winning combination in the game (in this embodiment, BB1) is controlled to be carried over to the internal medium state (in this embodiment, RT1). A start valid LED 18 lights up to indicate that the game start operation is valid, a section display LED 19 lights up to indicate that the section status is controlled to an advantageous section, and a section display LED 19 lights up to indicate that a replay game is in progress. A game display unit 13 is provided with a replay LED 20.

Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 3) that lights up to notify that the operation to set the number of bets by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside 8R, there are left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see Figure 3), respectively, which illuminate to indicate that the operation to stop the reels by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid. It is provided.

In addition, on the front of the slot machine 1, there is a liquid crystal display 51 that can display images, etc., an AT display section 61 that notifies you that it is in an AT (assist time) state, which will be described later, by lighting up; An AT2 state display section 62 that notifies the AT2 state (to be described later) by being in a lighting mode; A CZ display section 64 is provided to notify that the vehicle is in a CZ (opportunity zone) state by turning on a lighting mode, and an additional state display section 65 is provided to notify that an additional state of the AT state, which will be described later, is in a lighting mode. AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e (see FIG. 3) are built-in corresponding to the AT display section 61, AT2 status display section 62, AT1 status display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional status display section 65, respectively. There is. Note that hereinafter, the AT1 state, AT2 state, CZ state, additional state, and ED state to be described later may be collectively referred to as an AT-related state.

Inside the front door 1b of the slot machine 1, there is a reset switch 23 that detects a reset operation for canceling an error state from the outside of the slot machine 1 by operating a predetermined key. A set value display 24 that displays the set value at that time, a door open detection switch 25 that detects the open state of the front door 1b, and a flow path for medals inserted from the medal input section 4 into the inside of the slot machine 1. A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the hopper tank side or the medal payout port 9 side, which will be described later, is provided to detect medals that have been input from the medal input section 4 and flowed down to the hopper tank side. A medal selector 29 having input medal sensors 31a to 31c is provided.

Also, inside the slot machine 1, a reel unit 34 for rotating and stopping the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R described above according to control signals from the main control section 41, A hopper unit 35 is provided for dispensing medals from the medal dispensing port 9 in response to a signal.

Also, inside the slot machine 1, there is a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which normally functions as a reset switch to cancel an error state, and in a setting change state, as described below. A reset/setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the set value of the winning probability (ball output rate) of the internal lottery, and a power switch 39 that is operated when turning the power on/off are provided.

Inside the slot machine 1, with the game control board 40 installed at a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, there is a 7-segment display at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. A gaming machine information display 50 is arranged (see FIG. 80). The game machine information display device 50 is configured such that the display contents can be viewed from outside the board case 120a when the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a, and the main control unit 41 aggregates the display contents to display the game information. The game information displayed on the machine information display 50 based on the history of games in the slot machine 1 can be recognized by a clerk or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40 and a performance control board 90. The game control board 40 controls the game, and the performance control board 90 controls the game state. The performance is controlled according to the

The game control board 40 includes the aforementioned MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, settlement switch 10, reset switch 23, inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and a reel sensor of the reel unit 34 (not shown). , a payout sensor and a full tank sensor (not shown) of the hopper unit 35, a setting key switch 37, and a reset/setting switch 38 are connected, and detection signals from these connected switches, etc. are input. .

In addition, the gaming control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the gaming auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the status display LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the section display LED 19, the replay LED 20, the BET switch valid LED 21, and the left , middle and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, reel unit 34, and hopper unit 35 are connected, and these electrical parts and the game control board 40 are mounted. The gaming machine information display 50 is driven under the control of a main control section 41 mounted on the gaming control board 40.

The game control board 40 is equipped with a main control section 41 that is configured by a microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I/O port 41d, and controls the game.

The main control unit 41 includes a plurality of registers used by the main CPU 41a to perform calculations. The plurality of registers include registers such as an accumulator register, a flag register, a general-purpose register, an index register, an interrupt register, a refresh register, and a program counter. Furthermore, among these registers, the accumulator register, flag register, and general-purpose register each include a front register and a back register configured in pairs (hereinafter, the front register and back register may be simply referred to as registers). be). The main CPU 41a updates the value of a predetermined register by executing various instructions such as arithmetic instructions and read instructions included in the program, and updates the memory of the RAM 41c specified by the value (address) of a predetermined register. It is possible to update the values (data) stored in the area.

Further, among the registers provided in the main control unit 41, the flag register is configured so that its state changes to indicate the result of an operation based on an instruction executed by the main CPU 41a, and the change in the state of the flag register is utilized. This allows the main CPU 41a to perform processing in accordance with the calculation result of the previous instruction.

In addition, the flag register is composed of a plurality of bits (8 bits in this embodiment), and the plurality of bits contain information for calculations of arithmetic instructions executed by the main CPU 41a in order to reduce the processing load on the main CPU 41a. The state changes depending on the result, but the first bit (hereinafter referred to as the first zero flag) is configured so that the state does not change for a specific instruction (for example, read instruction LD (hereinafter sometimes referred to as LD instruction), etc.). ), and the second bit (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the second zero flag TZ) whose state changes depending on the calculation result of the operation instruction, and whose state changes even with a specific instruction. ) etc. In addition, in each process included in the game program to be described later, when proceeding with the process based on the instruction, the values of bits other than the second zero flag included in the flag register are referred to for determination, etc. , the value of the bit of the second zero flag is not referred to for determination or the like.

The main control unit 41 also sends various commands to the sub control unit 91. Commands sent from the main control section 41 to the sub control section 91 are sent in only one direction, and no commands are sent from the sub control section 91 to the main control section 41.

Further, the I/O port 41d includes output ports 0 to 9, and the main control unit 41 can output control signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R from the output port 0 and the output port 1, and the output port 2 It is possible to output control signals for the left, middle, and right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, and a control signal for the flow path switching solenoid 30, and it is also possible to output a control signal for the hopper motor 34b and an external output signal from the output port 3. , output port 4 and output port 5 output control signals for credit display 11, gaming auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, status display LED 17, start valid LED 18, section display LED 19, replay LED 20, and BET switch valid LED 21. A test signal can be outputted from the output port 6 , a test signal and an external output signal can be outputted from the output port 7 , and a command can be outputted from the output port 8 and the output port 9 .

In addition, as main processing, the main control unit 41 repeatedly loops processing according to the control state until the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes, and Execute the step-by-step migration process accordingly. The main control unit 41 also executes timer interrupt processing (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 milliseconds in this embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time for the processing that repeats according to the control state in the main processing and the execution time of the timer interrupt processing (main). Therefore, at least one cycle of processing that is always repeated depending on the control state will occur between this time and the next timer interrupt processing (main).

In this embodiment, the instructions executable by the main control unit 41 include a save instruction that saves the values of the registers provided in the main control unit 41 by storing them in a predetermined order in the stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP. , the values of the registers that were saved to the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction are sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of the save and set in the registers corresponding to the order, thereby saving the corresponding registers. and a return instruction for returning the state to the state when it was evacuated by the evacuation instruction.

The save instruction includes a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c, and a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41, and a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41, and a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41. A second save instruction (PUSH AF) that saves the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction that requires a 2-byte program capacity, and the second save instruction is an instruction that requires a 1-byte program capacity. By executing a save instruction in a gaming program, it is possible to save the register value to the gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the gaming program, and by executing the save instruction in a non-gaming program. Then, it is possible to save the register value to the non-gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-gaming program.

The return instructions include a first return instruction (POP ALL) that sets and restores the values saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all registers included in the main control unit 41; Among them, a second return instruction (POP AF) that sets and restores the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for the flag register in which the operation result is stored is included. The first return instruction is an instruction that requires a 2-byte program capacity, and the second return instruction is an instruction that requires a 1-byte program capacity. By executing a return instruction in the game program, the value of the register that was saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program can be called, set in the corresponding register, and restored. This is possible, and by executing a return instruction in a non-gaming program, the value of the register that was saved from the non-gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-gaming program is called, and the value is transferred to the corresponding register. It is possible to set and restore.

The performance control board 90 is connected to performance devices such as the aforementioned liquid crystal display 51, a speaker capable of outputting audio, a performance LED 57 used for performance and visible from the player side, and AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e. The output states of these production devices can be controlled by a sub-control unit 91 mounted on the production control board 90. The sub-control unit 91 receives commands sent from the main control unit 41 and performs various controls for performing effects.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which the payout rate of medals changes depending on a set value. Specifically, the payout rate of medals is changed by using a winning probability according to a set value in a lottery that affects the advantage to players, such as an internal lottery. The set value is comprised of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and decreasing values in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

In order to change the set value, it is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 37 and then turn on the power switch 39 of the slot machine 1. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset/setting switch 38. Move to setting change state. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the displayed value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (if the setting value is further operated from setting value 6, it is updated to setting value 1). return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the displayed value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control section 41, and the game transitions to a state where the game can proceed.

The setting key switch 37 and the reset/setting switch 38 are provided inside the slot machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the front door 1b, which can be opened by operating a predetermined key, is opened. Of the clerks at the game parlor where the system is installed, only those who possess a predetermined key can operate the system. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires an additional key operation, it can only be operated by an employee of the game parlor who has a key for operating the setting key switch 37. Further, although the reset switch 23 does not require opening the front door 1b, it requires key operation using a predetermined key, and therefore can only be operated by a store clerk who possesses the predetermined key. Further, the reset/setting switch 38 also functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state in normal times.

When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, the player inserts medals from the medal inserter 4 or operates the MAXBET switch 6 to set the number of bets using credits. When a predetermined number of bets is set according to the gaming state, a predetermined winning line LN (see FIG. (set across the symbols) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 becomes valid, that is, the game becomes ready to start. It should be noted that if more medals are inserted than the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount will be added to the credits. Further, in this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R is rotated, and the symbols on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously changed. When any stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is operated while the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are being rotated, stop control is performed for the corresponding reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and the rotation of the relevant reel is stopped. The reels are stopped and the symbols on the reels are derived and displayed on the transparent window 3 as a display result.

In the stop control, the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R corresponding to the operation is stopped within the maximum stop delay time (in this example, 190 ms (milliseconds)) from the time when each stop switch is operated. will be held. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated 80 times per minute, and the symbols are varied by 80 (rotations) x 21 (number of symbols per reel, for example, 21 symbols) = 1680 symbols, so the maximum number of symbols that has been determined in advance is Until the stop delay time (190ms) elapses, a maximum of four symbols can be drawn in. In other words, in stop control, one symbol is selected from among the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols up to 4 frames ahead, for a total of 5 frames (pull-in range). It is possible to select and derive the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

As a result, in the stop control, when the rotation is stopped by operating the corresponding stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the winning combination won in the internal lottery to be described later is displayed. If the constituent symbols are within the pull-in range of 4 frames ahead from the symbol when the stop switch was operated, the symbol is pulled onto the winning line LN and the rotation of the reel when the stop switch was operated is stopped. On the other hand, if the symbols constituting the winning combinations that have been won in the internal lottery are not within the drawing range, the symbols constituting the winning combinations that have not been won in the internal lottery will be moved to the winning line LN. In order to prevent the reel from stopping above, it is possible to draw symbols that do not constitute any winning combination onto the winning line LN and control the rotation of the reel on which the stop switch is operated to stop.

In addition, in the stop control, if the winning of the special prize (BB1, BB2 in this example) is carried over, a small prize (such as a common multi-piece bell in this example) is won in the internal lottery. , When a special prize and a minor prize are won at the same time, the symbols constituting the winning minor prize are controlled to be drawn into the winning line LN with priority within the above-mentioned pulling range, and the winning is achieved. When the constituent symbols of a small winning combination cannot be drawn into the winning line LN, the constituent symbols of a winning special winning combination are controlled to be drawn into the winning line LN. For this reason, in a game where a special prize and a minor prize are won at the same time, it is difficult to win the winning special prize.

In addition, in the stop control, if the winning of the special winning combination (in this embodiment, BB1, BB2) is carried over, a replay winning combination (in this embodiment, Replay 1A, etc.) is won in the internal lottery, When the special winning combination and the replaying combination are won at the same time, the constituent symbols of the winning replaying combination are given priority and drawn into the winning line LN. The symbols that make up the replay combination on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R are arranged within a predetermined pull-in range, and when a replay combination is won, the symbols that make up the replay combination are always drawn into the winning line LN. Become. For this reason, in a game where a special winning combination and a replay winning combination are won at the same time, the winning special winning combination cannot be won.

In addition, in the stop control, the winning of the special winning combination (in this example, BB1, BB2) is carried over, and the specified number of winnings corresponding to the winning special winning combination (2 in the case of BB1, 2 in the case of BB2, In a game where the number of bets is set as (3 pieces), it is possible to draw the constituent symbols of the winning special prize onto the winning line LN, but if the specified number does not correspond to the winning special prize. In a game in which the number of bets is set, the symbols constituting the winning special combination are controlled not to be drawn into the winning line LN. For this reason, in games where a special prize is won, if the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the winning special prize is not set, the special prize will not be won. . As a result, in RT1, which is the gaming state in which the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) is carried over, the number of bets (first number of bets) of three cards is selected and the game is played, which results in an internal lottery. Even if the winning combination is not won, the specific special winning combination (BB1) will not be won and the gaming state can be maintained at RT1.

Then, one game ends when all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and a predetermined winning symbol combination is displayed on each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the result is stopped on the winning line LN. In this case, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player according to the winning and are added to the credits. Further, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are directly paid out from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). Additionally, if a combination of symbols that involves a shift in gaming status (in this example, RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2) is stopped on the winning line LN as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, The game mode is changed to a gaming state according to the combination of symbols.

In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a valid state, and ends when all the reels have stopped. In addition, one unit of control (game control) for executing a game starts when all controls associated with the end of the previous game are completed, and when all controls associated with the end of the current game are completed. finish.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the types of winning combinations (hereinafter referred to as winning combinations) are determined according to the gaming state, and include small winning combinations that involve the payout of medals, and small winning combinations that do not require setting the number of bets. There are two types of winning combinations: a re-gaming combination that grants a replay that allows the player to start the next game, and a special combination that involves a shift to a gaming state (special state) that is advantageous to the player. Hereinafter, the small role and the replayed role will be collectively referred to as the general role. In order to win a prize for each role determined according to the gaming state, it is necessary to win the internal lottery and set the winning flag for that role. In the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to allow winnings for each of the above-mentioned winning combinations before the display results of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, after a specified number of This is determined using random numbers when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the number of bets set.

Of the winning flags for each role, the winning flags for small roles and replayable roles are valid only in the game in which the flag was set, and will be invalid in the next game, but the winning flag for the special role is valid only in the game in which the flag was set. It is valid until the combination of combinations allowed by the flag is completed, and becomes invalid in the game where the combination of combinations allowed by the flag is completed. In other words, once a special winning flag is won, the winning flag will not be invalidated and will be carried over to the next game, even if it is not possible to match the combination of winnings allowed by the flag. It has become.

In addition, in the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode (for example, the order of stop operations, the operation timing), a small number that is more advantageous than when the stop operation is performed in other operation modes. It is possible to win a winning role or a replaying role (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a navigation target role). The navigation target winnings include, for example, winnings in which the stopping mode is more advantageous when the stopping operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode than the stopping mode when the stopping operation is performed in another operation mode. , including combinations in which when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation manner, the rate of stopping is higher in a more advantageous stop operation than when the stop operation is performed in another operation manner. Further, the advantageous stopping mode includes not only a stopping mode that involves the awarding of medals, but also a stopping mode that involves a transition to an advantageous gaming state, a stopping mode that avoids a transition to a disadvantageous gaming state, and the like.

The main control unit 41 executes navigation notification that notifies navigation information that allows specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to control the assist time (AT) which is a possible notification period. When the right to be controlled by the AT is granted to the player, the main control unit 41 starts controlling the AT and controls the AT. If AT is being controlled, by winning the navigation target winning combination, navigation notification is executed and the operating modes of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player (for example, the order in which they are pressed, Operation timing, etc.) is notified using the game auxiliary display 12, and a command that can specify the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is sent to the sub-control unit 91, so that the operation mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display. 51 etc. to execute the navigation effect to be notified. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the operation mode notified by the navigation notification and navigation performance, it is possible to reliably win the navigation target combination won in the internal lottery.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a gaming auxiliary display 12 that can display the number of medals to be paid out, an error code, and navigation information, and uses the gaming auxiliary display 12 in controlling the navigation notification. Although the configuration is such that the navigation information is notified by using the navigation information, it is also possible to provide a dedicated display that can display only the navigation information, and use the dedicated display to notify the navigation information in controlling the navigation notification.

[About medal selector]
The structure of the medal selector 29 arranged inside the front door 1b will be explained based on FIG. 4. In the following description, the state in which the medal selector 29 is viewed from the back side of the front door 1b will be described as the front side of the medal selector 29.

The medal selector 29 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape as shown in FIG. 4, and an inlet 141 is provided on the upper wall of the main body of the medal selector 29 to allow medals to flow into the main body. The left side wall of the main body is provided with an outlet 142 through which medals can flow out from the inside of the main body to the outside of the hopper tank 34a, and the lower wall of the main body is provided with a medal payout port 142 from the inside of the main body to the outside of the hopper tank 34a. A discharge port 143 through which medals can be discharged to the outside on the 9 side is provided. Inside the main body of the medal selector 29, there is formed a medal flow path that is approximately L-shaped in front view and communicates from the inlet 141 to the outlet 142. As shown in FIGS. 4(b) and 4(c), the side walls of this medal flow channel are inclined forward from the bottom to the top so that the upper ends of the medals flowing down are inclined more forward than the lower ends. There is. Further, a medal flow path is formed which is approximately S-shaped in front view and communicates from the inlet 141 to the outlet 143. Hereinafter, among the medal flow paths inside the main body of the medal selector 29, the flow path on the inlet 141 side will be referred to as the medal inflow flow path 29a, the flow path on the outlet 142 side will be referred to as the medal receiving flow path 29b, and the flow path on the outlet 143 side will be referred to as the medal inflow flow path 29a. The flow path is called a medal return flow path 29c.

The medal selector 29 is configured to determine the authenticity (shape, size, thickness, etc.) of the inserted medals, and genuine medals are passed through the main body of the medal selector 29 after flowing in through the inflow port 141. The medals flow down the internal medal inflow channel 29a and the medal receiving channel 29b, pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, are detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and then flow to the outlet 142. It is leaked from. The medals are guided to the hopper tank 34a via a medal chute 142a (not shown). On the other hand, after flowing in from the inflow port 141, the fake medals are dropped into the medal return channel 29c while flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a, flow down the medal return channel 29c, and flow out from the discharge port 143. Ru. The medals are then returned to the lower tray from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1) via a medal return passage (not shown) provided below the medal selector 29.

In addition, at the confluence of the medal inflow channel 29a, the medal receiving channel 29b, and the medal return channel 29c, a channel switching solenoid 30 (see FIG. 3) provided on the front side of the main body of the medal selector 29 is energized. In conjunction, before the medals flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a flow into the medal receiving channel 29b, the medals are forcibly dropped downward from the medal inflow channel 29a, and the medals are returned. A flow path switching plate 147 for flowing into the flow path 29c is swingably provided.

The flow path switching plate 147 opens the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a as shown in FIG. state, and can be swung so that the medal inflow channel 29a and the medal return channel 29c are in communication with each other. In addition, when the flow path switching solenoid 30 is energized, that is, when acceptance of medals is permitted, the upper part of the flow path switching plate 147 moves toward the left in the figure (arrow By swinging in the A direction), the upper end surface of the flow path switching plate 147 becomes in a state forming the bottom surface of the medal inflow flow path 29a, and the lower side of the medal inflow flow path 29a is closed, and the medal inflow flow path 29a It is configured to be able to swing so that the medal return channel 29c is out of communication with the medal return channel 29c. With this configuration, when the channel switching solenoid 30 is excited, the medals flowing from the inlet 141 and flowing down the medal inflow channel 29a flow down along the upper end surface of the channel switching plate 147. It flows into the medal receiving channel 29b and flows out from the outlet 142.

Further, an input port sensor 26 is provided on the upstream side of the medal inflow channel 29a to detect the passage of medals that have flowed in from the inflow port 141, and an input port sensor 26 is provided on the downstream side of the medal receiving channel 29b at the outflow port 142. Inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are provided to detect passage of ejected medals.

Among the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the inserted medal sensors 31a and 31c detect the passage of the medal when the medal passes between the light emitting part and the light receiving part, and the light receiving part detects the interruption of light from the light emitting part. The input medal sensor 31b is a physical sensor that detects the passage of a medal by detecting the operation of the movable piece 180 that operates in conjunction with the passage of the medal using the detector 183. Hereinafter, the inserted medal sensor 31a may be referred to as the inserted medal sensor 1, the inserted medal sensor 31b as the inserted medal sensor 2, and the inserted medal sensor 31c as the inserted medal sensor 3. Further, the range in which passage of a medal is detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c may be referred to as a detection range A.

Next, the configuration of the inserted medal sensor 31b, which is a physical sensor, will be explained. A movable piece 180 of the inserted medal sensor 31b is provided on the side wall of the lower downstream portion of the medal receiving channel 29b in the medal selector 29 so as to be able to move in and out of the medal receiving channel 29b. Further, a detector 183 is installed at a position corresponding to the movable piece 180 outside the medal receiving channel 29b. In the detector 183, a detection section 183a is provided with a light projecting section and a light receiving section. The movable piece 180 is provided at the end of the movable piece 180 by pushing the tip end 180b of the movable piece 180 out of the medal receiving passage 29b when the medal passes through the medal receiving passage 29b. The detected part 180a is inserted between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the detecting part 183a, and the light emitted from the light emitting part to the light receiving part is blocked and the detector 183 detects the medal. Passage is now detected. On the other hand, the movable piece 180 is biased so that the tip end 180b of the movable piece 180 protrudes into the medal receiving passage 29b when no medal is passing through the medal receiving passage 29b. In this state, the detected part 180a of the movable piece 180 does not enter between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the detecting part 183a, and cannot block the light irradiated from the light emitting part to the light receiving part of the detecting part 183a. Therefore, the detector 183 does not detect the passing of the medal.

[About the memory area and program of the main control unit]
The main control unit 41 includes a ROM 41b and a RAM 41c having a memory area for storing predetermined programs and data.

FIG. 5 is an address map of the program/data area in the ROM 41b and the usable area in the RAM 41c. As shown in FIG. 5(a), the program/data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area where game programs related to the progress of the game are stored, a game data area where game data used by the game programs are stored, and a game data area where the game data used by the game program is stored. Includes a used area 1, a non-gaming program area where a non-gaming program unrelated to the progress of the game is stored, a non-gaming data area where non-gaming data used by the non-gaming program is stored, and an unused area 2. .

The progression of the game is the progression of a series of processes that make up the game, and in the case of a slot machine, there are two stages: setting the number of bets and starting the game, and starting the game and spinning the reels. , a step of stopping the reels and deriving a display result, and a step of assigning value such as medals according to the display result.

As shown in FIG. 5(b), the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a gaming RAM area used as work by gaming programs, a non-gaming RAM area used as work by non-gaming programs, and an unused area 4. The gaming RAM area includes special work, important work, general work, an unused area 3, and a gaming stack area where the gaming program saves data, and the non-gaming RAM area includes the gaming It includes an area that can be referenced by programs, an area that cannot be referenced by gaming programs, and a non-gaming stack area where non-gaming programs save data. In this embodiment, the gaming stack area and the non-gaming stack area are individually provided in different areas, but it may be configured to include one stack area that is shared by the gaming program and the non-gaming program.

The unused area 3 is an area that is not used by either gaming programs or non-gaming programs, and is an area that is surplus to the gaming RAM area of a predetermined capacity.

Further, the unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more that is not used by either gaming programs or non-gaming programs. Since the gaming RAM area and the non-gaming RAM area are allocated to discontinuous areas with the unused area 4 in between, the gaming RAM area used by gaming programs related to the progress of the game and the non-gaming RAM area that is not related to the progress of the game are allocated to non-contiguous areas with the unused area 4 in between. The non-gaming RAM area used by the gaming program can be easily specified according to the difference in storage area.

Below, the gaming program area, gaming data area, and gaming RAM area may be collectively referred to as the gaming area, and the non-gaming program area, non-gaming data area, and non-gaming RAM area may be collectively referred to as the non-gaming area. . Furthermore, the unused area 1, the unused area 2, the unused area 3, and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

[About instructions used by the program]
The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine that manages the progress of the entire program, and subroutines that are called during the execution of other programs.

Further, the calling command that causes the main control unit 41 to call and execute a program stored in the program/data area includes a CALL command, a CALLV command, a RST command, and the like.

The CALL instruction is an instruction that calls and executes a subroutine stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine. When calling a subroutine using a CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the calling source in the stack area, calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specified address. After the subroutine ends, the program returns to the caller's address stored in the stack area, that is, to the caller's main routine or subroutine program that executed the CALL instruction.

Further, the CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction, which is a special CALL instruction. A normal CALL instruction is an instruction that specifies both an upper address and a lower address and calls a subroutine by specifying an address using the specified upper address and lower address, whereas a CALLV instruction specifies only a lower address. By specifying this, it is an instruction to specify an address using an upper address set in advance in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and a specified lower address, and call a subroutine.Compared to a normal CALL instruction, the subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data. It is possible to call.

The RST instruction is an instruction that calls and executes a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to the specified value by specifying values corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses. It is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to an instruction or a CALLV instruction. When calling a subroutine using the RST command, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the calling source in the stack area, and calls and executes the subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to the specified value. After the subroutine ends, the process returns to the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, to the main routine or subroutine of the caller that executed the RST instruction.

A jump instruction is an instruction that moves to a program stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump instruction, and executes the program at the move destination. In this case, unlike the CALL and RST instructions, even if the program after the move ends, the program does not return to the source program.

Of the game programs stored in the ROM 41b, subroutines that are particularly frequently used are stored in an area of the game program area of the ROM 41b whose leading address has a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, a specific value is set in the vector table area of the ROM 41b as the upper address of the subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. When the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the start address has a specific value, the main control unit 41 uses the CALLV instruction to specify only the lower address, thereby specifying the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. The subroutine stored at the combined upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, the upper addresses that form part of the addresses used when calling subroutines that are particularly frequently used in the game program are set in advance as specific values in the vector table, and based on the specific values set in the vector table, Since the address is specified by the address, it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both an upper address and a lower address, and when calling these subroutines, It is possible to reduce waste in programs for specifying addresses.

In this embodiment, the start address of the subroutine of the game program is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction and the specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the RST instruction. Since it is possible to call a subroutine with a smaller amount of data than a normal CALL command, by using the CALLV command or RST command in a game program, it is now possible to reduce the data capacity of the game program. ing. In addition, the vector table area and the specific address area of the ROM 41b store the start address of the subroutine of the gaming program, so that the beginning of the non-gaming program is not stored. This prevents the program from being called and hindering the reduction of the data capacity of the gaming program.

In addition, among the non-gaming programs stored in the ROM 41b, particularly frequently used subroutines are stored in an area where the start address has a specific value in the non-gaming program area of the ROM 41b, and the CALLV instruction is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the subroutine called with , and specifying only the lower address using the CALLV instruction when the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine whose upper address of the start address is a specific value, these subroutines can be Even when configured to call and execute subroutines, it is possible to call subroutines with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both an upper address and a lower address. It is possible to reduce the waste of the program for specifying an address when calling.

Further, the upper address used when calling with the CALLV instruction may be set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of in the vector table area.

In addition, not limited to the CALLV instruction, part of the address is specified using a value stored in the vector table area, a value set in a specific register, etc., and by specifying the remaining part of the address, the subroutine If the configuration uses a special CALL instruction that allows the storage address of the subroutine to be specified, it is possible to reduce waste in the program for specifying an address when calling a subroutine. In addition, by assigning identification values with a smaller amount of data than the address to each of the multiple areas that make up the vector table area, and setting the storage address of the subroutine to each of these multiple areas and specifying the identification value, the identification value can be set. Even in a configuration that uses a special CALL instruction that makes it possible to specify the storage address of a subroutine stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce waste in the program for specifying an address when calling a subroutine. .

The main control unit 41 is activated by the occurrence of a system reset by inputting a system reset signal, a WDT reset by a WDT (watchdog timer, not shown), or an illegal access reset. The set values, that is, the upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main), are values indicating the area in the program area where the program etc. are actually stored, or are FFFFH (unused The value set in the vector table area of This makes it possible to prevent unintended processing from being executed due to the occurrence of an interrupt or the like.

An LD command is included as a read command that causes the main control unit 41 to read data stored in the program/data area. The LD instruction is an instruction for reading data stored at a specified address in a main routine or subroutine into a specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD command, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD command.

Further, the LD instructions include a normal LD instruction and an LDQ instruction which is a special LD instruction. A normal LD instruction is an instruction to read data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c by specifying both the upper address and lower address, whereas the LDQ instruction By specifying only the lower address, the address is specified by the upper address preset in the special register (Q register) in the internal function register area of the RAM 41c and the specified lower address, and the address is specified in the ROM 41b or RAM 41c. This is an instruction that reads data stored in a specific area and stores the read data in a specified register.Compared to normal LD instructions, it is possible to store specified data in a specified register with a smaller amount of data. It becomes possible.

When reading data stored in a specific area of the ROM 41b or RAM 41c in the main routine or subroutine, by using the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, all addresses (upper part and lower part) indicating the specific area can be read. It is possible to read data in a specific area by specifying only the lower part of the address instead of specifying the address. By using the LDQ instruction, it is possible to read data with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both the upper address and lower address, and it is possible to read data with a smaller amount of data. It is possible to reduce program waste.

In addition, among the game data stored in the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, particularly frequently used game data is stored in an area of the game RAM area where the start address has a specific value, and the specific value is stored in a special register ( Q register) as the upper address of the game data, and when the main control unit 41 reads the game data, only the lower address is specified using the LDQ command. A program that allows gaming data to be read with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal LD instruction that reads data by specifying both an address and a lower address, and that specifies the address when reading these gaming data. waste can be reduced.

In addition, the main control unit 41 can change the value set in a special register (Q register) in the main routine or subroutine, and can change the value set in the built-in register in the initial setting process performed at startup as described later. In the settings, a specific value indicating the start address of gaming data that is frequently used by gaming programs is set in a special register (Q register). Also, when calling a non-gaming program from a gaming program, save the value set in a special register (Q register), and when returning to the gaming program, save the value set in the special register (Q register). It is now set again to the previous value. As a result, when a game program is being executed, a specific value indicating the start address of game data that is frequently used by the game program is set in a special register (Q register), and the game program Frequently used game data can be read using the LDQ command.

Note that the upper address used when reading with the LDQ instruction as a special LD instruction may be set in a predetermined storage area other than a special register (for example, Q register), for example, in a vector table area. A special LD instruction is used in which a part of the address is specified using a value stored in a predetermined storage area such as , and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address by a program. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the waste of programs for specifying addresses when reading data. Also, for example, by assigning an identification value with a smaller amount of data than the address to each of the multiple areas that make up the vector table area, and setting a data storage address to each of these multiple areas and specifying the identification value. To reduce the waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data even in a configuration that uses a special LD instruction that can specify the storage address of data stored in an area corresponding to an identification value. Can be done.

Further, in this embodiment, the Q register stores the same value as the specific value used in the specific program, but it may be configured to store a different value from the value used in the specific program. For example, when a non-specific program is called, a value different from the value used in the specific program is set as a specific value in the Q register, and the start address of the storage area where frequently used data in the non-gaming program is stored. By storing values and using an LDQ instruction when calling data in a non-specific program, the data capacity of the non-specific program can be reduced.

The gaming program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing processing that would hinder the progress of the game if the processing based on the program is not executed. On the other hand, a non-gaming program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and allows the game to progress even if it is called from a gaming program and returns to the gaming program without executing the processing based on the program. This is a program for executing processing.

In a gaming program, any of the above-mentioned CALL commands and LD commands may be used, including special CALL commands such as CALLV command, RST command, and special LD command LDQ command. It is also possible to specify an address and call a subroutine using , or to read specific gaming data and non-gaming data in the ROM 41b and RAM 41c using a special LD command.

In the non-gaming program, while the normal CALL instruction is used for the above-mentioned CALL instruction, the CALLV instruction, which is a special CALL instruction, is not used, and the address is specified using the normal CALL instruction. Although a subroutine may be called, a special CALL command is not used to call the subroutine, so that the gaming program area in the ROM 41b is not accessed by a non-gaming program.

In addition, in non-gaming programs, ordinary LD instructions and LDQ instructions, which are special LD instructions, may also be used in relation to the above-mentioned LD instructions. It is also possible to read subroutines and data using special LD instructions.

As described above, in this embodiment, the vector table area and specific address area of the ROM 41b used by the CALLV instruction and RST instruction, which are special CALL instructions, store the start addresses of subroutines of the gaming program. It is possible to call a game program by using a special CALL command. If it is possible to call only the gaming program using a special CALL command like this, if the special CALL command is used by a non-gaming program, the gaming program will be called by the non-gaming program, resulting in unintended gaming. There is a risk that the game data may be overwritten or the game data may be rewritten by an unintended game program. On the other hand, by calling a non-gaming program using a normal CALL command instead of a special CALL command, and by not using the vector table area and the area at a specific address, the gaming program may be called unintentionally and the game cannot be played. It is now possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, specifies the gaming RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register) and reads out predetermined gaming data. By using a special LD command even in a non-specific program, it is possible to easily read game data while reducing the data capacity of the non-specific program.

Furthermore, the LDQ instruction, which is a special LD instruction, specifies the gaming RAM area using a specific value stored in a special register (Q register), making it possible to read out predetermined gaming data. However, when reading game data using a special LD command, if the specific value of the special register (Q register) is damaged, the game RAM area cannot be correctly specified, and unintended data may be generated. There is a risk that it may be read out. In contrast, by making the non-gaming program read data using a normal LD command instead of using the LDQ command, which is a special LD command, the specific value could be corrupted when switching from a gaming program to a non-gaming program. Even in such a case, data is read out by specifying the gaming RAM area from the non-gaming program, so it is possible to prevent unintended data from being read out.

In this embodiment, the instructions executable by the main control unit 41 include a save instruction that saves the values of the registers provided in the main control unit 41 by storing them in a predetermined order in the stack area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP. , the values of the registers that were saved to the stack area of the RAM 41c by the save instruction are sequentially read from the stack area in the reverse order of saving, and set in the registers corresponding to the order, so that the corresponding registers are saved. and a return instruction for returning the state to the state when it was evacuated by the evacuation instruction.

The save instruction includes a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41 to the stack area of the RAM 41c, and a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41, and a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41, and a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) that saves the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41. A second save instruction (PUSH AF) that saves the value of the flag register to the stack area of the RAM 41c. The first save instruction is an instruction that requires a 2-byte program capacity, and the second save instruction is an instruction that requires a 1-byte program capacity. By executing a save instruction in a gaming program, it is possible to save the register value to the gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the gaming program, and by executing the save instruction in a non-gaming program. Then, it is possible to save the register value to the non-gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-gaming program.

The return instructions include a first return instruction (POP ALL) that sets and restores the values saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for all registers included in the main control unit 41; Among them, a second return instruction (POP AF) that sets and restores the value saved in the stack area of the RAM 41c for the flag register in which the operation result is stored is included. The first return instruction is an instruction that requires a 2-byte program capacity, and the second return instruction is an instruction that requires a 1-byte program capacity. By executing a return instruction in the game program, the value of the register that was saved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the game program can be called, set in the corresponding register, and restored. This is possible, and by executing a return instruction in a non-gaming program, the value of the register that was saved from the non-gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP set for the non-gaming program is called, and the value is transferred to the corresponding register. It is possible to set and restore.

[Relationship between gaming area and non-gaming area]
As shown in FIG. 6, the main CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls a non-gaming program in the process based on the gaming program, executes the process based on the non-gaming program, and after finishing the process based on the non-gaming program, the main CPU 41a executes the process based on the non-gaming program. Return to processing based on .

As shown in FIG. 6, in principle, when executing processing based on a gaming program, the main CPU 41a refers to gaming data in the gaming data area to execute processing based on the gaming program, and also uses the gaming RAM area as work. However, it is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. In addition, in principle, when executing processing based on a non-gaming program, the main CPU 41a refers to non-gaming data in the non-gaming data area to execute processing based on the non-gaming program, and also uses the non-gaming RAM area as a work. However, it is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-gaming RAM area.

Furthermore, when executing processing based on the gaming program, the main CPU 41a does not refer to the non-gaming data area and does not update the non-gaming RAM area, but it is possible to refer to the non-gaming RAM area. When executing processing based on a non-gaming program, the gaming data area is not referenced and the gaming RAM area is not updated, but it is possible to refer to the gaming RAM area.

In addition, processing based on a gaming program can only refer to a specific area of the non-gaming RAM area that is necessary for the gaming program (for example, an area where an error flag is set to indicate detection of an abnormality). The processing based on this allows only specific areas of the gaming RAM area necessary for the non-gaming program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) to be referenced. Furthermore, a specific area of the non-gaming RAM area that can be referenced by processing based on a gaming program, and a specific area of the gaming RAM area that can be referenced by processing based on a non-gaming program, may be allocated to consecutive address areas. Although it is preferable, a configuration may be adopted in which part or all of the address areas are allocated to non-contiguous address areas.

In this way, in this embodiment, there is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data referred to by the game program is stored in a readable manner, and work data referred to by the game program. a gaming RAM area in which is stored in a readable and writable manner; a non-gaming program area in which non-gaming programs that are called by the gaming program and are not related to the progress of the game are stored; and non-gaming RAM areas referenced by the non-gaming programs. Since the non-gaming data area where data is stored in a readable manner and the non-gaming RAM area where work data referenced by the non-gaming program is stored in a readable and writable manner are allocated separately, the gaming program, Game data and work data of a game program, and non-gaming program, non-gaming data, and work data of a non-gaming program can be easily specified according to the difference in storage area.

In addition, by separating the gaming program area and gaming data area from the non-gaming program area and non-gaming data area, it is possible to compactly manage the area occupied in the ROM 41b according to each function. It becomes easier to identify the relevant data.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when executing a gaming program, it is possible to refer to the non-gaming RAM area, and when executing a non-gaming program, it is possible to refer to the gaming RAM area. To easily use data used by a non-game program when executing a game program, and to easily use data used by a game program when executing a non-game program. On the other hand, it is impossible to update the non-gaming RAM area when executing a gaming program; does not affect the processing of non-gaming programs, and the non-gaming programs do not affect the processing of gaming programs.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, processing based on the gaming program can refer to only a specific area (for example, an area where an error flag is set indicating detection of an abnormality) that is necessary for the gaming program in the non-gaming RAM area. , processing based on a non-gaming program can only refer to specific areas of the gaming RAM area necessary for the non-gaming program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a gaming state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.). Since the data that can be referenced by the gaming program in the non-gaming RAM area and the data that can be referenced by the non-gaming program are limited to a specific area, it is easy to identify the reference destination of the gaming program or the non-gaming program. be able to.

[About gaming status]
As shown in FIG. 7, the main control unit 41 sets the gaming state to RT0 (not inside), RT1 (inside BB1), RT2 (inside BB2), or special state (BB1, BB2). It is possible to control. The gaming state is a state in which the type of re-gaming combination to be drawn by the internal lottery and the probability of winning the re-gaming combination by the internal lottery are common. Although the probability of winning a re-gaming combination differs for each gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2), the probability of winning a re-gaming combination within the same gaming state is uniform.

RT0 (non-internal) is a state in which the winning of the special winning combination (BB1, BB2) is not carried over. When the slot machine 1 is started in a state where a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which data regarding the factory shipping state of the slot machine 1 and the gaming state is stored has been initialized, the slot machine 1 is first controlled to a non-internal state. . Further, when the special state (BB1, BB2) is terminated, control is performed to RT0. Then, in RT0, a special winning combination is won in the internal lottery in the RT0 game, and the special winning combination is lost and transferred to RT1 (inside BB1) or RT2 (inside BB2). It ends with. Furthermore, in a game where a special winning combination is won in an internal lottery, the game ends when the special winning combination is won and the game is transferred to a special state (BB1, BB2).

Further, in RT0 (non-internal), it is possible to play the game by setting a bet amount of 2 or 3 as the specified number. In a game where the prescribed number of bets is 2 coins, BB1 can be won as the special prize, while in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 3 coins, BB2 can be won as the special prize. It has become. It is possible to move to RT1 (inside BB1) by playing a game with a bet of 2 in RT0 (non-internal), while it is possible to move to RT2 (inside BB1) by playing a game with a bet of 3 in RT0 ( (inside BB2).

In addition, in RT0 (non-internal), by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode that is advantageous for the player in a game within a predetermined period, medals per game during the period are While the payout rate exceeds 100%, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so that the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. It has become. As will be described later, in RT0, the payout rate of medals per game does not exceed 100% because the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not reported.

RT1 (inside BB1) is a state in which the winning of the special winning combination (BB1) is carried over. It starts when the special winning combination (BB1) is won in the internal lottery at RT0 (non-internal), and ends when the carried-over BB1 is won.

In RT1 (inside BB1), in a game where the specified number of bets is set to 3, it is possible to shift the section state described later to an advantageous section that is advantageous for the player; In a game where the number of bets is set as 2, there is no transition to the advantageous section. In the advantageous section, the AT is controlled so that an operating mode that is advantageous to the player can be notified. As a result, in RT1, the player is prompted to set a bet number of 3 coins as the prescribed number and play the game.

In addition, in RT1 (inside BB1), by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode that is advantageous for the player in a game within a predetermined period, medals per game during the period are If the payout rate exceeds 100%, but the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated in an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, the payout rate of medals per game during the period does not exceed 100%. In the period when the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is reported, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%, while during the period when the operation mode that is advantageous to the player is not notified. , the payout rate of medals per game is set not to exceed 100%. In addition, in RT1 (inside BB1), the probability of winning a small role in the internal lottery is the same as that in RT0 (non-internal) and RT2 (inside BB2), which will be described later. The probability that a game winning combination (in this example, a replaying winning combination) will be won in an internal lottery is set higher than RT0 and RT2, and RT1 has a higher probability of winning a winning combination during a predetermined period than RT0 and RT2. The payout rate of medals per game is high, which is an advantageous situation.

In addition, as mentioned above, the special prize (BB1) can win in games where the prescribed number of bets (2 coins) is set, which is the same as the prescribed number in the game that triggered the winning of the special prize. You will not be able to win in games where the specified number of bets (3 coins) is set different from the specified number in the game that triggered the winning of the special prize, and once you are transferred to RT1. Since the game is played with the prescribed number of bets set to 3, the special winning combination (BB1) does not win and the RT1 is continued. In addition, as will be described later, in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 2 in RT1, the probability of not winning any role in the internal lottery is 0, and the probability of not winning is 0. It is becoming difficult to win prizes for BB1. As a result, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled by RT1 (inside BB1) for most of the game. , 1 to 6), it is determined whether or not to control to AT in RT1, for example, whether to control to AT so that the payout rate of medals according to (1 to 6) becomes a value determined according to each setting value. By setting the probability of winning the AT lottery, etc., the medal payout rate is set according to the set value, and the medal payout rate is designed to be appropriate in RT1 (inside BB1). has been done.

In addition, in this embodiment, the payout rate of medals per game during the predetermined period is higher in RT1 where BB1 is carried over compared to RT2 where RT0 and BB2 are carried over. However, in RT1 where BB1 is carried over, the right to be controlled by AT can be granted, whereas in RT2 where RT0 and BB2 are carried over, the right to be controlled by AT is granted. By not giving medals, the payout rate of medals can be made appropriate, or in RT1 where BB1 is carried over, the right to be controlled by AT is granted under more preferential conditions than in RT2 where RT0 and BB2 are carried over. A configuration may be adopted in which the payout rate of medals is made appropriate by doing so.

In addition, since the medal payout rate is set according to the set value on the premise that the control is in RT1 (inside BB1), if the gaming state is controlled in a state other than RT1, the medal payout rate is set. Since there is a possibility that the payout rate may deviate from the designed payout rate, it is preferable to control the payout rate to RT1 as much as possible. For this reason, in this embodiment, in order to make it easier to transition to RT1 in gaming states (RT0, RT2, BB1, BB2) other than RT1 (inside BB1), recommended operating modes and special The operation mode for winning the winning combination (BB1) is different. That is, as long as the player performs the stop operation in the recommended operation mode in RT1, the special winning combination (BB1) will not be won.

RT2 (inside BB2) is a state in which the winning of the special winning combination (BB2) is carried over. It starts when the special winning combination (BB2) is won in the internal lottery at RT0 (non-internal), and ends when the carried-over BB2 wins.

As mentioned above, the special prize (BB2) can be won in a game where the specified number of bets (3 coins) is set to be the same as the specified number in the game that triggered the winning of the special prize. It is not possible to win in a game where the specified number of bets (2 pieces) is set different from the specified number in the game that triggered the winning of the hand, and in RT2, the specified number of bets is 3 pieces. By setting the number of bets and playing the game, it is possible to win the winning BB2 and move it to the special state (BB2).

In RT2 (inside BB2), in games where either 2 or 3 bets are set as the specified number, the section state will not shift to the advantageous section, and RT2 will end. It is designed to prompt the user to move to RT1. As a result, as mentioned above, the game is not played in game states other than RT1, where the medal payout rate is in accordance with the set value, and the medal payout rate is as designed. .

In addition, in RT2 (inside BB2), it is possible to win the winning BB2 in a game where the specified number of bets is set to 3, and it is possible to end RT2 and move BB2 and RT0. By then shifting to RT1, it is possible to control the gaming state in which the medal payout rate becomes the designed payout rate.

The special state includes BB1, which is controlled when the special winning combination BB1 wins, and BB2, which is controlled when the special winning combination BB2 wins. The special states (BB1, BB2) are more advantageous for players than other gaming states (non-internal (RT0), internal (RT1, RT2)) by increasing the probability of winning a small prize in the internal lottery. This is a gaming state that ends when a predetermined end condition (in this embodiment, the total number of medals to be paid out exceeds a specified number) is met. In BB1 and BB2, the probability of winning a small winning combination is high (1/1), which is higher than the state not controlled by BB1 and BB2, but the payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%. .

BB1 is started when BB1 wins a prize in a game in which special role BB1 wins in the internal lottery of RT0 (non-internal), or when BB1 wins in RT1 (inside BB1). The game ends when the ending condition is satisfied (for example, the total number of medals to be paid out during the special state exceeds a predetermined number). In addition, BB2 is started when BB2 wins a prize in a game in which special role BB2 wins in the internal lottery of RT0 (non-internal), or when BB2 wins in RT2 (inside BB2). , due to the establishment of a predetermined end condition (for example, the total number of medals paid out during the special state exceeds a predetermined number, the condition may be the same as the end condition of BB1, or it may be a different condition) be terminated. After completion of BB1 and BB2, both are transferred to RT0 (non-internal).

In this embodiment, the special states (BB1, BB2) are configured to be continuously controlled to the same gaming state. It consists of a general game and an RB that is transferred when the RB is won and the symbol combination of the RB is stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. During the special state, either the general game or the RB during the BB A configuration in which the control is controlled may also be used.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game in which a special winning combination is carried over, if the prescribed number of bets corresponding to the carried over special winning combination is not set, the carried over special winning combination will not be won. It has become. As a result, in RT1, which is the gaming state in which the winning of BB1 has been carried over, if the game is played by selecting the number of bets of 3 cards, there will be a case where none of the roles are won in the internal lottery (non-winning). Even if BB1 wins, the gaming state can be maintained at RT1.

In addition, in this embodiment, when BB1 is carried over and the gaming state shifts to RT1 as described later, in RT1, the internal lottery is not allowed in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 2 coins. There is no chance of a win, that is, a loss, and a re-game winning combination or a minor winning combination is sure to be won, and BB1 does not win because the control of aligning the winning re-gaming winning combination or minor winning combination is given priority. Specifically, the constituent symbols of the replay winning combination are placed within the pull-in range on all reels, and the constituent symbols of the special winning combination are placed within the pull-in range of the minor winning winnings on all reels. Therefore, priority is given to controlling to align the winning re-game winning combinations or small winning combinations, so that BB1 will never be aligned with the winning line LN, and BB1 will not win. Furthermore, as described above, in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 3, the bet is controlled so that BB1 does not win. Therefore, once BB1 is won and carried over, the gaming state will shift to RT1, so even if you set the bet number of 2 coins and play the game, you will not be able to play the game with the bet number of 3 coins set. Even if the medal payout rate is appropriate, RT1 is maintained.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled by RT1 (inside BB1) in most of the games as described above, so it is assumed that the slot machine 1 is controlled by RT1, and the setting value (in this embodiment) Then, it is determined whether or not to control to AT in RT1, for example, whether to control to AT or not so that the medal payout rate according to 1 to 6) becomes a value determined according to each setting value. By setting the probability of winning the AT lottery, etc., the medal payout rate is set according to the set value, so that the medal payout rate is appropriate in RT1 (inside BB1). Designed. When the medal payout rate is controlled to RT1, which is appropriate, the status display LED 17 is controlled to be lit. Thereby, by checking the lighting state of the status display LED 17, it is possible to confirm that the slot machine 1 is in a state where the payout rate of medals is appropriate.

The status display LED 17 provided in the main control unit 41 of this embodiment has a predetermined value (1) different from the initial value (0) set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The lighting state is controlled by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 41 sets a predetermined value (1) in the output buffer of the status display LED 17 when it is determined that a special winning combination (BB1) has been won in an internal lottery process that is included in the main process described later and performs an internal lottery. By doing so, the status display LED 17 is controlled to be lit at the start of the game in which the special winning combination (BB1) is won. Then, when the winning special prize (BB1) is won, the output buffer of the status display LED 17 is initialized and set to the initial value (0), so that at the end of the game in which the special prize (BB1) is won. The status display LED 17 is controlled to be turned off. If the special winning combination (BB1) is not won at the end of the game and the winning is carried over, the output buffer of the status display LED 17 should not be initialized and the state set to the predetermined value (1) should be maintained. In the state (RT1) in which the winning of the special winning combination (BB1) is carried over, the status display LED 17 is always maintained in a lit state.

In addition, when the special winning combination (BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the winning of the special winning combination (BB2) is carried over, the main control unit 41 sets a predetermined value (1) to the output buffer of the status display LED 17. There is no setting required, the initial value (0) is maintained, and the status display LED 17 is controlled to be turned off.

Further, when controlling the slot machine 1 to a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed, the main control unit 41 controls the output buffer of the status display LED 17 while maintaining the state before transitioning to the setting confirmation state. If a predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, the status display LED 17 will remain lit even during the period of being controlled to the setting confirmation state. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, if the gaming state is controlled to RT1, the output buffer of the status display LED 17 is set to a predetermined value (1), and the status display LED 17 is controlled to be lit, after shifting to the setting change state, Even after the advantageous section ends, the gaming state is maintained at RT1 and the state display LED 17 is maintained in a lit state.

In this way, when a specific special winning combination (BB1) is won and carried over, the status display LED 17 is controlled to be lit and the status is displayed, so that the bet number of 2 cards (second bet number) is is set, it will be announced that the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to an internal lottery has been carried over. In addition, once the status display is started, it continues even if controlled to the settings change state or settings confirmation state, so even if the status display is controlled to the settings change state or settings confirmation state, a specific special role ( It is now possible to confirm that the winning of BB1) has been carried over.

In addition, in a game in which a specific special winning combination (BB1) is won in an internal lottery, the main control unit 41 starts the status display before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, and When the winning combination (BB1) is won, the status display is ended, while when the special winning combination (BB1) is not won in the game, the status display is continued. As a result, in games where a specific special winning combination (BB1) is won in an internal lottery, the status display will start before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, so whether or not the status display is displayed. After confirming this, it becomes possible to operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 8, a section display LED 19 is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is initialized when a setting change state is entered under the control of RT1 or when an advantageous section is ended. Although it includes information regarding the advantageous section such as the output buffer of After the power is cut off in the current state, the advantageous section ends and the section is displayed even if power supply is started while setting operations are being performed or when power supply is started while initialization operations are being performed. can be ended, while RT1 is maintained, so it is not necessary to perform work to set the gaming state to RT1 every time the advantageous section and section display are ended.

On the other hand, in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is initialized when the setting change state is entered while being controlled by a gaming state other than RT1 (RT0, RT2, BB1, BB2), the output buffer of the status display LED 17, Since information regarding the gaming state is included, if the power is turned off while the gaming state is controlled to a state other than RT1, and then power supply is started while a setting operation is being performed, the gaming state before the power cut will be changed. If it is controlled by RT2, BB1, or BB2, the gaming state before the power cut is not maintained, and in any case, it becomes RT0, that is, non-internal state. Therefore, even if the setting is mistakenly shifted to RT2, BB1, or BB2, it is possible to shift to RT0 by shifting to the setting change state without having to manually shift to RT0.

[About the performance during non-innai]
As shown in FIG. 9(a), when the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), the main control section 41 turns off the state display LED 17, and the sub control section 91 turns off the normal performance. Execute. The normal performance is a performance that is executed in the non-AT state that occupies most of the time after transitioning to RT1.

In a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), if a game start operation is performed and BB1 is won in the internal lottery, as shown in FIG. 9(b), the main control unit 41 controls the status display LED 17 to be lit at the start of the game in which BB1 is won. Also, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 an internal winning command that can specify the winning of BB1 after the internal lottery. Then, when receiving the internal winning command and identifying the winning of BB1, the sub-control unit 91 executes a specific effect to display a white navigation image on the liquid crystal display 51 while continuing the normal effect.

In a game where BB1 won, a stop operation is performed to prevent BB1 from winning, and when all reels stop, BB1 does not win and the winning flag of BB1 is carried over, as shown in Figure 9(c). As shown, the main control unit 41 maintains the status display LED 17 in the lit state. Also, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a winning determination command that can specify that BB1 did not win. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command and specifies that BB1 did not win, the sub-control unit 91 continues the specific performance, so that the winning flag of BB1 is carried over. In other words, it is suggested that the gaming state has become RT1 (internal). Thereafter, at the time when the next game start operation is performed, that is, at the time when the next game's internal winning command is received, the sub control unit 91 ends the specific performance, while the main control unit 41 starts the next game. Even if a start operation is performed, the state display LED 17 continues to be lit as long as RT1 (inside BB1) is maintained, thereby notifying that the gaming state is RT1 (inside BB1).

On the other hand, in a game in which BB1 wins, if BB1 wins when all reels stop and the winning flag of BB1 is not carried over, the main control unit 41 as shown in FIG. 10(c) , the status display LED 17 is controlled to be turned off at the timing after the final stop operation, that is, the last reel stop operation. Also, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 a winning determination command that can specify that BB1 has won. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command and specifies that BB1 has won a prize, the sub-control unit 91 displays a special image in the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51, which is a presentation different from the normal presentation. By executing the special performance, it is announced that BB1 has won, that is, the gaming state has not become RT1 (inside BB1). Thereafter, the sub-control unit 91 continues the special performance until the special state (BB1) due to the winning of BB1 ends, and when the special state (BB1) ends and the gaming state becomes RT0 (non-internal), Execute the normal performance again.

In addition, if the game start operation is performed and BB2 is won in the internal lottery in a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), the main control The unit 41 keeps the status display LED 17 in the off state at the start of the game in which BB2 is won. Also, at this time, the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 an internal winning command that can specify the winning of BB2 after the internal lottery. Then, when receiving the internal winning command and identifying the winning of BB2, the sub-control unit 91 does not execute the specific performance and continues the normal performance.

In a game in which BB2 wins or a game in which BB2 is carried over, if BB2 wins when all reels stop, the main control unit 41 executes the final stop operation as shown in FIG. 10(e). At a later timing, a winning determination command that can specify that BB2 has won is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Then, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the winning determination command and specifies that BB2 has won a prize, it executes a special effect in the same way as when it specifies that BB1 has won a prize, so that BB2 has won a prize. That is, the gaming state is not RT1 (inside BB1). Thereafter, the sub-control unit 91 continues the special performance until the special state (BB2) due to the winning of BB2 ends, and when the special state (BB2) ends and the gaming state becomes RT0 (non-internal), Execute the normal performance again.

In addition, when the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), the sub control unit 91 always executes the normal effect, and executes the special effect only when BB1 is won, and internal lottery including BB2. The special effect is not executed unless the result is BB1 winning. Therefore, by executing the specific performance when the game start operation is performed, it becomes possible to specify that BB1 has been won.

Furthermore, when the gaming state is RT1 (inside BB1), the sub-control unit 91 can execute a winning combination suggestion effect that suggests a winning combination based on the result of the internal lottery specified from the internal winning command. The winning combination suggestion performance is a performance that suggests a winning combination by displaying a color navigation image corresponding to the internal lottery result on the liquid crystal display 51, as shown in FIG. 11(b). ), by displaying a red color navigation image (red navigation image), it is suggested that one of cherries 1 to 3 (described later) will be won, and a green color navigation image (green navigation image) is displayed. The winning of the watermelon, which will be described later, is suggested, and by displaying the yellow color navigation image (yellow navigation image), the winning of the common multi-piece bell, which will be described later, is suggested, and the blue color navigation image (blue navigation image) is displayed. This suggests winning of Replays 1 and 2, which will be described later, and displaying a white color navigation image (white navigation image) suggests a loss in which neither the small winning combination nor the replay winning combination has been won. Among these, the winning role suggestion effect in which the white navigation image is displayed is the same effect as the specific effect described above. That is, the sub-control unit 91 controls the game state to be RT1 (internal to BB1) as a specific effect to be executed when BB1 is won in a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (inside non-internal). The same effect as the winning role suggestion effect that could be executed in the current situation is executed.

As described above, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is designed so that the medal payout rate is appropriate at RT1 (inside BB1). On the other hand, at the time of shipment from the factory or in a state where the data regarding the gaming state has been initialized, the gaming state is RT0 (non-internal). , it is necessary to shift the gaming state to RT1 (inside BB1) where the medal payout rate is appropriate, but if BB1 is won in a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal) At the start of the game in which BB1 won, the status display LED 17 changes from an off state to a lit state, and a specific effect is executed in which a white navigation image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, thereby specifying that BB1 has won. Since it becomes possible to prompt a stop operation in which BB1 does not win, it is possible to efficiently perform the work of shifting to RT1 (inside BB1).

On the other hand, if BB2 wins in a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), the status display LED 17 will not be lit at the start of the game in which BB2 won, and the liquid crystal display 51 will be displayed. Since the specific effect in which the white navigation image is displayed is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken as having won BB1 even though BB2 has won.

In addition, the specific performance is the same performance as the winning combination suggestion performance that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to RT1 (inside BB1), and the specific performance is the same performance as the winning combination suggestion performance that can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (not inside BB1). In addition to suggesting that BB1 won in a situation where the game is in progress, it is also possible to suggest that the result of the internal lottery is a loss in a situation where the gaming state is controlled by RT1 (inside BB1). You can eliminate unnecessary production.

In addition, in a game where BB1 wins, if BB1 wins, that is, if it is not possible to move to RT1 (inside BB1), the specific performance will end at the timing after the final stop operation of the game. On the other hand, in a game in which BB1 won, if BB1 does not win after the final stop operation and BB1's winning flag is carried over and moves to RT1 (inside BB1), the specific effect will continue. After the final stop operation, it is possible to check whether the transition has been made to RT1 (inside BB1) depending on whether the specific performance continues.

In addition, when BB1 wins, the timing at which the specific performance ends may be the timing after the final stop operation, the timing when the final stop operation is started, the timing when the final stop operation is canceled, or the timing when the final stop operation is canceled or the corresponding timing. It may be the timing at which the reel stops, whichever is later.

In addition, when BB1 wins and shifts to the special state (BB1), or when BB2 wins and shifts to the special state (BB2), the performance is different from the normal performance, and the liquid crystal display 51 A special effect is executed to display a special image in the entire display area of It is possible to prompt the player to move to RT1 (inside BB1) where the medal payout rate becomes appropriate.

In addition, when BB1 wins and enters the special state (BB1), the special performance starts at the timing after the final stop operation that triggered BB1 to win, so BB1 wins and enters the special state (BB1). It is possible to clearly recognize that the transition has occurred.

The same is true when BB2 wins and enters the special state (BB2), and the special effect starts at the timing after the final stop operation that triggered BB2 to win, so BB2 wins and enters the special state. (BB2) can be clearly recognized.

In addition, when BB1 or BB2 wins, the timing to start the special effect may be the timing after the final stop operation, the timing when the final stop operation is started, or the timing when the final stop operation is released. Alternatively, it may be the later timing of when the corresponding reel stops.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing a special effect that displays a special image on the liquid crystal display 51, it is suggested that it is not RT0 (non-internal), which is a prerequisite for transitioning to RT1 (inside BB1). However, by controlling the lighting mode of the LED to a special mode different from the normal effect, and controlling the output mode of the sound effect to a special mode different from the normal effect, it is possible to It may be configured to indicate that the system is not RT0 (non-internal medium), which is a prerequisite for transitioning to It is possible to encourage the transition to RT1 (inside BB1) where the value is appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, if BB2 is won in a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), the normal performance continues, but as shown in FIG. 12(d), In a situation where the gaming state is controlled to RT0 (non-internal), when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command and identifies the winning of BB2, that is, when the winning flag of BB2 is carried over, It may also be configured to perform special effects. Further, in such a configuration, the special effect may be continuously executed even in RT2 (inside BB2) where the winning flag of BB2 is carried over. With this configuration, even when the gaming state is controlled to RT2 (inside BB2), the performance is different from the normal performance, and a special image is displayed on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51. A special effect that displays is executed, and it is suggested that it is not RT0 (non-internal), which is a prerequisite for transitioning to RT1 (internal to BB1), so it is transitioned to RT0 (non-internal), Furthermore, it is possible to prompt the player to move to RT1 (inside BB1) where the medal payout rate is appropriate.

In addition, as described above, when the game state other than RT1 (RT0, RT2, BB1, BB2) is controlled and the setting change state is entered, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is initialized has a special Since it contains information related to the gaming status such as the winning flag and the flag indicating the gaming status, if the power supply is turned off while the game is being controlled to a gaming status other than RT1, then power supply is started while the setting operation is being performed. In this case, if the game state before the power cut was controlled to RT2, BB1, or BB2, the game state before the power cut is not maintained, and in either case, it becomes RT0, ie, non-internal. Therefore, even if you accidentally shift to RT2, BB1, or BB2, you can reset the setting values to shift to RT1 (inside BB1) without having to manually shift to RT0. It becomes possible to shift to the prerequisite RT0 (non-internal), and it becomes easy to shift to RT1 (inside BB1), where the medal payout rate is appropriate. In addition, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c that is initialized when the state is changed to the setting change state while being controlled by RT1 (internal to BB1) does not include information regarding the gaming state. If the power supply is started while a setting operation is being performed after the power is cut off while being controlled by the internal After transitioning to RT1 (inside BB1), even if setting values are set, there is no need to perform work to transition to RT1 (inside BB1).

[About the roles eligible for internal lottery]
The internal lottery target combinations that are the lottery targets in the internal lottery performed by the main control unit 41 will be explained based on FIGS. 13 to 28.

The internal lottery target role includes a plurality of internal lottery target roles. Each internal lottery target role includes one or more winning combinations, and when one internal lottery target role is won in the internal lottery, the winning combinations included in the internal lottery target roles are considered to have been won at the same time. .

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 30, the internal lottery target combinations include Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, and Chance Replay 1. , Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, common 1-card role, common 3-card role, common multi-piece bell, multi-piece bell 123A, multi-piece bell 123B, multi-piece bell 123C, multi-piece bell 123D, multi-piece bell 132A, multi-piece bell 132B, multi-piece bell 132C, multi-piece bell 132D, multi-piece bell 213A, multi-piece bell 213B, multi-piece bell 213C, multi-piece bell 213D, multi-piece bell 231A, multi-piece bell 231B, multi-piece bell 231C, multi-piece bell 231D, multi-piece bell 312A, multi-piece bell 312B, multi-piece bell 312C, multi-piece bell 312D, multi-piece bell 321A, multi-piece bell 321B, multi-piece bell 321C, multi-piece bell 321D, BB1, BB2, BB medium A, Includes B in BB.

As shown in FIGS. 13 to 24, among the internal lottery winning combinations, each winning combination except BB1, BB2, A in BB, and B in BB is a slot machine in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 3. Regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set to 1, when the gaming state is RT0, RT1, or RT2, it becomes a lottery target, but when the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, it is not a lottery target. It has become. In addition, in a game where the prescribed number of bets is set to 3, BB1 among the internal lottery target combinations is determined by the setting value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and the controlled gaming state ( RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2) are not eligible for lottery. In addition, for BB2 among the internal lottery targets, in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 3, the gaming state will be RT0 regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. When it is controlled, it becomes a lottery target in an internal lottery, while when the game state is controlled to RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2 other than RT0, it does not become a lottery target in an internal lottery. In addition, among the internal lottery target roles, A in BB and B in BB are available regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 3. When the game state is BB1 or BB2, it becomes a lottery target, but when the game state is controlled to RT0, RT1, or RT2 other than BB1 or BB2, it is not a lottery target in an internal lottery. In addition, among the internal lottery target winning combinations, Replay 1B is controlled regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 3 coins. The probability of winning in the internal lottery differs depending on the gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2). In addition, in a game where the specified number of bets is set to 3, the probability of not winning any of the internal lottery target roles in the internal lottery (non-winning) is the setting value (1 to 1) set in the slot machine 1. 6) and the gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2), the predetermined probability is greater than 0.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, among the internal lottery target combinations, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2 , BB1, BB2, A in BB, and B in BB in games where the prescribed number of bets is 2, regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in slot machine 1. First, when the gaming state is RT0, RT1, or RT2, it becomes a lottery target. In addition, among the internal lottery target roles, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, and Chance Replay 2 have a specified number of 2 pieces. In games where the number of bets is set, players are not eligible for lottery regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in slot machine 1 and the controlled gaming status (RT0, RT1, RT2). ing. In addition, for BB1 among the internal lottery targets, in a game where the prescribed number of bets is set to 2, the gaming state will be RT0 regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1. When it is controlled, it becomes a lottery target in the internal lottery, while when the gaming state is controlled to RT1 or RT2 other than RT0, it does not become a lottery target in the internal lottery. In addition, in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 2 coins, BB2 among the internal lottery target combinations is determined by the set value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 and the controlled gaming state ( Regardless of RT0, RT1, RT2), they are not eligible for lottery. Furthermore, among the internal lottery target winning combinations, replay 1A is controlled regardless of the setting value (1 to 6) set in the slot machine 1 in a game where the prescribed number of bets is set to 2. The probability of winning in the internal lottery differs depending on whether the gaming state is non-internal (RT0) or internal (RT1, RT2). In addition, in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 2, the probability of not winning any of the internal lottery target roles in the internal lottery (non-winning) is the setting value (1 to 1) set in the slot machine 1. 6) and the gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, BB2). In addition, when the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, the prescribed number is only 3, so the bet number of 2 coins is not set as the prescribed number, and when the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, the internal lottery A in BB and B in BB, which are to be drawn, are not to be drawn in the internal lottery in games where the prescribed number of bets is 2 coins.

When the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, it is possible to play the game when the prescribed number of bets is 3, and as shown in FIGS. 13 to 26, when the gaming state is BB1 , and when the number is BB2, A in BB with the payout of 8 medals and B in BB with the payout of 1 medal are the lottery targets of the internal lottery. On the other hand, the probability of winning A in BB and B in BB is different when the gaming state is BB1 and BB2. Specifically, either A in BB or B in BB will win when the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, but it is better to win when the gaming state is BB1. , the winning ratio of A in BB with the payout of 8 medals is set high, and the medal payout ratio is higher when the gaming state is BB1 than when it is BB2. This is because BB2 wins when the game is played when the bet number is set to 3, and in this case, the payout rate of medals is increased by the navigation notification as described below. However, BB1 will win if the game is played when the bet amount is set to 2. In this case, the navigation notification will be made as described below. This is to prevent the payout rate of medals from increasing due to the navigation notification, and to prevent the payout rate of medals from becoming extremely low even if the game is played with the number of bets of two coins. On the other hand, by making the payout rate of medals relatively low when the gaming state is BB2, even if the game is played when the bet number of 3 coins is set and the navigation notification is performed, This is also to prevent the medal payout rate from becoming extremely high. In this way, when the gaming state is BB1 and when the gaming state is BB2, the winnings that are subject to the internal lottery are the same, and when the gaming state is BB1 and when the gaming state is BB2, the winnings that are subject to the internal lottery are the same. By setting different winning probabilities for A in BB and B in BB, which are subject to the lottery, the winnings that are subject to the internal lottery will be changed when the gaming status is BB1 and when the gaming status is BB2. The medal payout rate in BB1 and the medal payout rate in BB2 can be adjusted without doing so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is BB1 and when the gaming state is BB2, only A during BB with the payout of 8 medals and B during BB with the payout of 1 medal are played. This is a configuration in which either A in BB or B in BB is always selected as a lottery target in the internal lottery, but at least when the gaming state is BB1 and when it is BB2, In a configuration where the target lottery results are common, if at least some of the lottery results have different winning probabilities, the internal lottery will be drawn when the gaming state is BB1 and when it is BB2. It is possible to adjust the medal payout rate in BB1 and the medal payout rate in BB2 without changing the prize winnings, and the winning probability is different for some lottery results and the winning probability is different for other lottery results. Similar effects can be obtained even if the probabilities are the same.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, when the gaming state is BB1, the winning probabilities for A in BB and B in BB are the same regardless of the setting value, but when the gaming state is BB2, the winning probability is the same for A in BB and B in BB. The probability of winning A in BB and B in BB differs depending on the setting value. Specifically, when the gaming state is BB2, either A in BB or B in BB will be won, but the larger the setting value is, the more likely it is that A in BB will be won with the payout of 8 medals. The winning ratio is set to be high, and the higher the set value, the higher the medal payout ratio. This is a configuration in which if you play a game with a bet of 2 cards, the winning probability is the same regardless of the setting value, but if you play a game with a bet of 3 cards, The larger the setting value, the higher the medal payout rate in RT0 to RT2.When playing a game with 3 bets, the medal payout rate when the gaming state becomes BB2 and RT0 This is to prevent the magnitude relationship between the medal payout rate and the medal payout rate in RT2 from being reversed regardless of the set value. In this way, when the gaming state is BB1 and when it is BB2, the winnings that are subject to the internal lottery are the same, and when the gaming state is BB1, the winnings that are subject to the internal lottery are the same regardless of the setting value. The winning probability is the same for target A in BB and B in BB, but when the gaming state is BB2, the probability of winning for A in BB and B in BB that are subject to the internal lottery is determined according to the setting value. By setting different values, the payout rate of medals for each set value in BB2 can be adjusted without changing the prizes to be drawn in the internal lottery between when the gaming state is BB1 and when it is BB2. be able to.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is BB1, the probability of winning is the same for A in BB and B in BB, which are subject to the internal lottery, regardless of the setting value, whereas when the gaming state is BB2, the probability of winning is the same for A in BB and B in BB , the probability of winning differs for A in BB and B in BB, which are subject to the internal lottery according to the setting value, but when the gaming state is BB1, they become the subject of the internal lottery according to the setting value. While the winning probabilities are different for A in BB and B in BB, when the gaming state is BB2, the winning probability is the same for A in BB and B in BB, which are subject to the internal lottery, regardless of the setting value. Alternatively, even when the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, the winning probability may be different for A in BB and B in BB, which are the lottery targets of the internal lottery, depending on the setting value. Even with this configuration, the payout rate of medals for each set value in BB1 or BB2 can be changed without changing the prizes to be drawn in the internal lottery between when the gaming state is BB1 and when the gaming state is BB2. Can be adjusted.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is BB1 and when the gaming state is BB2, only A in BB with the payout of 8 medals and B in BB with the payout of 1 medal are in both cases. This is a configuration in which either A in BB or B in BB is always selected as a lottery target in the internal lottery, but at least when the gaming state is BB1 and when it is BB2, In a configuration where the target lottery results are common, when the gaming state is BB1 or BB2, if the winning probability differs depending on the setting value for at least some lottery results, when the gaming state is BB1. It is possible to adjust the medal payout rate for each set value in BB1 or BB2 without changing the prizes that are subject to the internal lottery in BB1 and BB2, and some lottery results The same effect can be obtained even if the probability of winning differs depending on the set value for other lottery results, and the probability of winning for other lottery results is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIG. 27, a predetermined role number is assigned in advance to each internal lottery target role. Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, Common 1-card role, Common 3-card role, A value within the range of 1 to 16 is assigned as each role number of the common multi-bell. Also, multi-piece bell 123A, multi-piece bell 123B, multi-piece bell 123C, multi-piece bell 123D, multi-piece bell 132A, multi-piece bell 132B, multi-piece bell 132C, multi-piece bell 132D, multi-piece bell 213A, multi-piece bell 213B, multi-piece bell 213C, multi-piece bell 213D, multi-piece bell 231A, multi-piece bell 231B, multi-piece bell 231C, multi-piece bell 231D, multi-piece bell 312A, multi-piece bell 312B, multi-piece bell 312C, multi-piece bell 312D, multi-bell 321A, multi-bell 321B, multi-bell 321C, and multi-bell 321D, values within the range of 17 to 40 are assigned as each role number. The winning number of BB1 is 41, and the winning number of BB2 is 42. The winning number of A in BB is 43, and the winning number 44 is assigned to B in BB.

Among the winning combinations eligible for internal lottery, Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, and Chance Replay 2 will be replayed as winning combinations. In a game that includes game winning combinations and in which these internal lottery target winning combinations are won, the replaying combination will be won and a replay will be awarded. Hereinafter, Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, and Chance Replay 2 may be collectively referred to as replay combinations. .

In addition, among the internal lottery winning roles, watermelon, common 1-card winning role, common 3-card winning role, common multi-card winning role, and common multi-card winning roles each include a small winning role, and the winning winning combinations included in these winning internal lottery winning roles are By winning a prize, you will receive a predetermined number of coins (for example, 3 for watermelon, 1 for common 1-card role, 3 for common 3-card role, 8 for common multi-card bell, 8 for A in BB, 1 for B in BB) ) medals will be paid out.

Also, multi-piece bell 123A, multi-piece bell 123B, multi-piece bell 123C, multi-piece bell 123D, multi-piece bell 132A, multi-piece bell 132B, multi-piece bell 132C, multi-piece bell 132D, multi-piece bell 213A, multi-piece bell 213B, multi-piece bell 213C, multi-piece bell 213D, multi-piece bell 231A, multi-piece bell 231B, multi-piece bell 231C, multi-piece bell 231D, multi-piece bell 312A, multi-piece bell 312B, multi-piece bell 312C, multi-piece bell 312D, multi-piece bell 321A, multi-piece bell 321B, multi-piece bell 321C, and multi-piece bell 321D are operated by stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in a predetermined operation manner assigned to each role (in this example, in the order of operation). is operated, and among the winning combinations included in each winning combination, an increasing combination in which a larger number of medals (in this example, 8 medals) is paid out than the number of bets (3 medals) is won, while the corresponding By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in an operation mode other than the operation mode of The reduced winning combination that is paid out may win a prize, but neither of the winning combinations may win a prize. Therefore, multi-bell 123A, multi-bell 123B, multi-bell 123C, multi-bell 123D, multi-bell 132A, multi-bell 132B, multi-bell 132C, multi-bell 132D, multi-bell 213A, multi-bell Bell 213B, multi-piece bell 213C, multi-piece bell 213D, multi-piece bell 231A, multi-piece bell 231B, multi-piece bell 231C, multi-piece bell 231D, multi-piece bell 312A, multi-piece bell 312B, multi-piece bell 312C, multi-piece bell When winning the bell 312D, multi-piece bell 321A, multi-piece bell 321B, multi-piece bell 321C, and multi-piece bell 321D, whether or not the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in an operation mode according to the type of winning combination. It is now possible to change the expected value of the number of medals that will be paid out.

Below, multi-piece bell 123A, multi-piece bell 123B, multi-piece bell 123C, multi-piece bell 123D, multi-piece bell 132A, multi-piece bell 132B, multi-piece bell 132C, multi-piece bell 132D, multi-piece bell 213A, multi-piece bell 213B, multi-piece bell 213C, multi-piece bell 213D, multi-piece bell 231A, multi-piece bell 231B, multi-piece bell 231C, multi-piece bell 231D, multi-piece bell 312A, multi-piece bell 312B, multi-piece bell 312C, multi-piece bell 312D, multi-piece bell 321A, multi-piece bell 321B, multi-piece bell 321C, and multi-piece bell 321D may be collectively referred to as a multi-piece pressing order.

When any of the multi-card winning winning combinations is won, there are many operating modes that can make it possible to win an increased winning combination among the winning combinations included in the multi-card pushing winning combination, that is, operating modes that are advantageous for the player. For the sheet bell 123A, multi-piece bell 123B, multi-piece bell 123C, and multi-piece bell 123D, the left reel 2L is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. This is an operation in order (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a left-center-right stopping operation), and in the multi-piece bell 132A, multi-piece bell 132B, multi-piece bell 132C, and multi-piece bell 132D, the left reel 2L is stopped first. This is an operation in which the right reel 2R is stopped second and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as left and right middle stop operation). 213B, multi-piece bell 213C, and multi-piece bell 213D, the operation order is as follows: the middle reel 2C is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the right reel 2R is stopped third. (This is sometimes referred to as a middle left/right stop operation), and in the multi-piece bell 312A, multi-piece bell 312B, multi-piece bell 312C, and multi-piece bell 312D, the middle reel 2C is stopped first, and the right reel 2R is stopped second. This is an operation in which the left reel 2L is stopped third and the left reel 2L is stopped third (hereinafter sometimes referred to as middle right/left stopping operation). In the sheet bell 231D, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the left reel 2L is stopped second, and the middle reel 2C is stopped third (hereinafter referred to as right/left middle stopping operation). ), and in the multi-piece bell 321A, multi-piece bell 321B, multi-piece bell 321C, and multi-piece bell 321D, the right reel 2R is stopped first, the middle reel 2C is stopped second, and the left reel 2L is stopped. This is an operation in the order of the third stop operation (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a right-center-left stop operation).

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 can shift the game section to be described later to an advantageous section when a predetermined internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. In a game where the prescribed number of bets is 2, the game section is not shifted to the advantageous section even if any of the internal lottery target winning combinations is won in the internal lottery. In addition, in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 3, an internal lottery is held to determine the advantageous section non-shifting combinations (in this example, Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F). , Replay 2) is won, the game section will not be transferred to the advantageous section, and an internal lottery will be held to select the advantageous section transition winning combinations (in this example, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay). 2. Watermelon, common 1-card winning combination, common 3-card winning combination, common multi-card winning combination, common multi-card winning winning combination), the game section is shifted to an advantageous section.

In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to shift the game section to an advantageous section when a predetermined internal lottery target combination is won in the internal lottery. It may also be configured such that a lottery is held to determine whether or not to move to an advantageous section upon winning of the target combination, and the transfer to the advantageous section is made by winning the lottery.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 can transmit to the sub-control unit 91 an internal winning command that includes group information that can identify the type of internal lottery winning combination. Yes, the group information includes special role information that can identify the winning status of the special role, and general role information that can identify the winning status of the general role. The special prize information in the group information is set to 0 when the special prize (BB1, BB2) has not been won in the internal lottery, and is set to 1 when the special prize BB1 has been won, and when the special prize BB2 has been won. 2 is set when the General role information of group information is determined by internal lottery: Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, When either watermelon, common 1-card role, common 3-card role, common multi-card role, common multi-card role, A in BB, or B in BB is won, the winning role number is set, and the winning combination is determined by an internal lottery. When the winning winning combination is won, a common number 17 is set regardless of which winning combination in the multi-card winning winning combination, and if any general winning combination is won in the internal lottery. If it does not exist, 0 is set.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 is capable of transmitting a test signal that can identify the winning number of the internal lottery target winning combination to the test device connected to the slot machine 1. The test signal includes special part information that can specify the winning situation of the special part, and general part information that can specify the winning situation of the general part. The special prize information is set to 0 when the special prize (BB1, BB2) is not won in the internal lottery, is set to 1 when the special prize BB1 is won, and is set to 1 when the special prize BB2 is won. 2 is set. General role information is set to the winning role number when any of the internal lottery target roles is won in the internal lottery, and 0 is set when no general role is won in the internal lottery. It is now set.

The test device connects to the slot machine 1 and automatically performs a simulation test to determine medals between specific games (for example, between 400 games, between 1600 games, between 6400 games, and between 17600 games) in the slot machine 1. It is possible to calculate the payout rate between each specific game by totaling the total number of coins inserted and total number of coins paid out, and to check whether the payout rate falls within a predetermined value range. It is a device.

As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 can set a flag category (FC) to which the type of internal lottery target combination won in the internal lottery belongs. The flag category can be used, for example, in an AT lottery, a navigation stock lottery, an additional status lottery, etc., which will be described later. Flag categories (FC) are internal lottery results not winning, Replay 1A, Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, common 1-card role, common 3-card role, common multi-card role. , 0 is set if it is a multi-card push order, 1 is set if the internal lottery result is chance replay 1, watermelon, 2 is set if the internal lottery result is cherry 1, 3 is set when the internal lottery result is cherry 2 and chance replay 2, and 4 is set when the internal lottery result is cherry 3. In this way, a flag category (FC) is set to which the type of internal lottery target winning role belongs in the internal lottery, and a common flag category (FC) is set for multiple types of internal lottery target roles. By performing a lottery using (FC), there is no need to set individual probabilities for all internal lottery target combinations, and it is sufficient to set probabilities for each flag category (FC). In particular, as in this embodiment, there are internal lottery target roles that have a high probability of winning in the internal lottery and are of many types, such as some replayable roles and multi-card winning winnings, and non-game roles that have a relatively high probability of winning. By setting a common flag category for internal lottery target roles such as winning and common multi-piece bell, it is possible to significantly reduce the lottery probability that needs to be set for internal lottery target roles.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main control unit 41 can control the AT to provide navigation notification, and in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 2, the main control unit 41 can perform navigation notification as described later. On the other hand, in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 3, the processing related to navigation notification is performed when a predetermined navigation target wins as described later. This may cause navigation notifications. In a game where the number of bets is 3, for example, a multi-card winning combination is won in an internal lottery as a navigation target combination, and navigation notification may be executed.

In addition, in the process related to navigation notification, the main control unit 41 determines that a navigation target winning combination has been won in an internal lottery, and when performing navigation notification, a stop mode that is advantageous for the player is determined according to the navigation target winning combination. It is possible to send a navigation number that can identify the navigation number to the sub-control unit 91. However, even if the navigation target role is not won in the internal lottery, or even if the navigation target role is won, the navigation information may not be sent. If this is not done, it is possible to transmit to the sub-control unit 91 a navigation number that does not allow the identification of a stopping mode that is advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main control unit 41 controls games in which navigation notification is not performed even if a navigation target role is won in an internal lottery, games in which a role other than the navigation target role is won in an internal lottery, and games in which a role other than the navigation target role is won in an internal lottery. In games where no winning role is won, 0 is set as the navigation number, while in games where a navigation target role is won in an internal lottery and navigation notification is performed, 1 is set according to the winning navigation target role. Set ~6 as the navigation number.

In addition, by performing processing related to navigation notification, the main control unit 41 displays a navigation display on the game auxiliary display that can specify a stop mode advantageous to the player according to the navigation target winning combination in the internal lottery. 12, it is possible to perform navigation notification to notify the player of a stopping mode that is advantageous to the player. As shown in Figure 28, there are games in which navigation notification is not made even if the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, games in which a role other than the navigation target role is won in the internal lottery, and games in which any role is won in the internal lottery. In a game in which the game auxiliary display 12 is not displayed, the navigation display is not displayed by controlling the game auxiliary display 12 to be turned off, while in a game in which a navigation target winning combination is won in an internal lottery and navigation notification is performed, the game auxiliary display 12 is turned off and the navigation display is not displayed. The auxiliary display 12 is controlled to a predetermined lighting state (for example, "12", etc.) to display a navigation display corresponding to the winning navigation target combination.

[About navigation notification and navigation performance]
The mode of navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 and the mode of navigation performance performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described based on FIGS. 29 and 30.

The main control unit 41 selects the winning navigation system in an internal lottery during a predetermined game that performs processing related to navigation notification (from when the reels start rotating until when all the reels stop rotating). By displaying the navigation display corresponding to the target winning combination on the game auxiliary display 12, it is possible to perform navigation notification that notifies the player of a stopping mode that is advantageous to the player according to the navigation target winning combination. Furthermore, at the start of a predetermined game that performs processing related to navigation notification, the main control section 41 can transmit a command including a navigation number that can specify a stopping mode advantageous to the player to the sub-control section 91. It is possible.

On the other hand, in a game where a stop mode advantageous to the player can be specified based on the command received from the main control section 41, the sub control section 91 displays a navigation effect on the liquid crystal display 51 etc. to notify the player of the stop mode. It is possible to do this using

As shown in FIG. 29, the game auxiliary display 12 consists of two indicators 12L and 12R that can turn on/off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and the main control unit 41 can turn on and off the respective segments. This is a display device that allows By controlling predetermined segments of each display 12L, 12R in a lighting mode, predetermined numbers ("0" to "9"), symbols (e.g. "-", ".", etc.), alphabetic characters (e.g. "E") can be displayed. ", etc.) in one or two digits, it is possible to display an error code that can identify the number of medals to be paid out (not shown) and the type of error that has occurred, as well as a navigation display that informs you by navigation notification. It is possible.

As shown in FIG. 30, during a game in which "1" is set as the navigation number by performing processing related to navigation notification, the main control unit 41 performs a left-center-right stop operation that is advantageous for the player. During a game in which navigation display 1 (a display displaying "12" on the game auxiliary display 12) indicating that "12" is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and "2" is set as the navigation number, the game The navigation display 2 (the display displaying "13" on the gaming auxiliary display 12) indicating that the stopping mode that is advantageous for the player is the left/right center stop operation is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number is "3". ” is set, the navigation display 3 (the display displaying “21” on the game auxiliary display 12) indicating that the stopping mode advantageous to the player is the middle left/right stop operation is displayed as a game auxiliary display. During a game in which "4" is set as the navigation number, the navigation display 4 ("4" on the game auxiliary display 12) indicates that the stopping mode advantageous to the player is the center right/left stop operation. 23") is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 to suggest that during a game where "5" is set as the navigation number, the stopping mode advantageous to the player is the right/left/center stopping operation. During a game in which the navigation display 5 (a display that displays "31" on the game auxiliary display 12) is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and "6" is set as the navigation number, the stop mode is advantageous for the player. A navigation display 6 (a display displaying "32" on the gaming auxiliary display 12) indicating that is a right-center-left stop operation is displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, during a game in which the navigation number "1" is specified based on a command received from the main control section 41, the sub-control section 91 selects a stop mode that is advantageous for the player. Navigation image 1 that suggests that is a left-center-right stop operation (for example, "1" is displayed in the display area corresponding to the stop switch 8L of the display area of the liquid crystal display 51, and a display corresponding to the stop switch 8C is displayed) During a game in which the navigation number "2" is specified by displaying an image (such as an image in which "2" is displayed in the area and "3" is displayed in the display area corresponding to the stop switch 8R) on the liquid crystal display 51, the navigation number "2" is specified. The liquid crystal display 51 displays a navigation image 2 that suggests that the stopping mode that is advantageous for the player is a left/right middle stopping operation, and during the game in which the navigation number "3" is specified, the stopping mode that is advantageous for the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. During a game in which the navigation image 3 suggesting that the mode is a center right/left stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the navigation number "4" is specified, the stop mode advantageous for the player is the center right/left stop operation. Displays the navigation image 4 on the liquid crystal display 51 suggesting that the navigation number "5" is specified, and suggests that the stopping mode advantageous to the player is the right/left/center stopping operation during the game in which the navigation number "5" is specified. The navigation image 5 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and during the game in which the navigation number "6" is specified, the navigation image 6 is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, indicating that the stopping mode advantageous to the player is the right middle left stopping operation. It is designed to be displayed on the display 51.

In this embodiment, the navigation notification is configured to notify the operation order (correct answer pressing order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as the operating modes that are advantageous to the player. It may be configured to suggest operation timings of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that are advantageous to the player, or it may be configured to suggest a combination of operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that is advantageous to the player. For example, if the operation mode of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is a predetermined operation timing on a predetermined reel, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined operation timing on the predetermined reel. It is possible to suggest the operation mode by displaying the corresponding number, etc., or by displaying an image of a symbol corresponding to the predetermined operation timing on the liquid crystal display 51 at a position corresponding to the predetermined reel. be.

[About the gaming section]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control the game period to be either a normal period or an advantageous period.

The normal section is a game section in which navigation notification is not performed, and is started by starting the next game after the advantageous section ends. After that, in the normal section, the advantageous section transition hand is determined by an internal lottery in a game where the prescribed number of bets is 3 coins as described above, and the game is controlled to a gaming state other than the special state (BB1, BB2). The winning game ends. In the normal section, the section display LED 19 is always controlled to be off.

The advantageous section is a game section in which navigation notification may be performed, and is a game section that is advantageous compared to the normal section because navigation notification can be performed. In the advantageous section, the number of bets of 3 coins is set as the specified number in the normal section, and the advantageous section transfer combination is won in an internal lottery in a game that is controlled to a gaming state other than the special state (BB1, BB2). It is decided that the game should be moved to the advantageous section, and the next game is started. Thereafter, the process ends when predetermined advantageous section end conditions (end conditions 1 to 3 described later) are satisfied. In an advantageous section, when the medal payout rate (number of medals paid/number of bets) can exceed 100% due to navigation notification being performed first after the start of the advantageous section, an initial value is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 at the start of the game. By setting a predetermined value (1) different from the value (0) and controlling the corresponding section display LED 19 to a lit state, a section display is started to notify that the vehicle is being controlled to an advantageous section. , it becomes possible to recognize that the vehicle is in an advantageous section. The output buffer of the section display LED 19 is a RAM 41c that is initialized when the setting change state is entered or when the end conditions for the advantageous section (end conditions 1 to 3 described later) are satisfied and the advantageous section is ended. is included in a predetermined area of The section display LED 19 is controlled to be turned off, and the section display is ended. In particular, when the end conditions for an advantageous section (end conditions 1 to 3 described later) are met and the advantageous section ends, in a game where the end conditions for the advantageous section are met, after the final stop operation is performed, After a period of time (in this embodiment, a period in which the freeze state is controlled for 5 seconds at the end of an advantageous section) has elapsed, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized and set to the initial value (0), so that the section display The LED 19 is controlled to be turned off to end the section display, and even after the final stop operation is performed, the section display LED 19 will notify that the section is in an advantageous section until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. continues, so it can be recognized that the game is in an advantageous period.

Note that "after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the final stop operation was performed" may be the timing at which a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the final stop operation was started, or the timing at which the final stop operation is canceled or the corresponding time. It may also be a timing when the opening time has elapsed from whichever of the timings at which the reels stopped, whichever is later.

In this embodiment, after the start of the advantageous section, the section display LED 19 is turned on at the start of the game in which the payout rate of medals (number of payouts/number of bets) can exceed 100% due to navigation notification being performed first. However, at the start of the advantageous section, the section display LED 19 may be controlled to be lit.

In the advantageous section, predetermined navigation conditions must be met (in this example, the control is controlled to the CZ state or AT state described later, the prescribed number of bets is set to 3, and the navigation target is determined by an internal lottery. When a winning combination is won), it is possible to perform a navigation notification, and the operating mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player is notified.

The main control unit 41 controls the vehicle to be in the CZ state or AT state in which navigation notification is performed when controlling the vehicle in an advantageous section. When the control is in the CZ state or the AT state, when the navigation target combination is won in the internal lottery, the navigation notification control (control to display the navigation display on the game auxiliary display 12, control to display the navigation display on the navigation display It is possible to notify the player of the operating mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player by controlling the control (such as sending a command that can identify the corresponding navigation number), and the advantageous section is the normal section. This is a game section that is more advantageous for the player than the previous one.

The end conditions for the advantageous section include termination condition 1, which is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section (number of games in the advantageous section) reaches a first prescribed number (1500 games in this example) determined as the upper limit number of games. , the net increase in the number of medals after the increase or decrease in the number of medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend in the advantageous section is the second specified number (in this example, 2395 (in this example, the maximum number of medals is 2400) Termination condition 2, number of advantageous section games, which is satisfied by exceeding the value obtained by subtracting the maximum number of coins to be paid out in step 1 (8) and adding the maximum number of coins used for setting the number of bets (3 coins)) and a termination condition that can be satisfied without being based on the net increase in the number of medals, and is a predetermined arbitrary condition (in this example, the CZ state ends without transitioning to the AT state, and the termination condition of the AT state is satisfied) The advantageous section is terminated when at least one of the termination conditions 1 to 3 is satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game period is controlled to be the normal period, the game period is shifted to the advantageous period by winning a predetermined advantageous period transition combination, but if the game period is controlled to be the normal period. When the control is in the normal section, by winning the lottery target hand for advantageous section transfer in the internal lottery, a lottery for transfer to advantageous section will be performed, and by winning in the lottery for transfer to advantageous section, the game section will be changed to the advantageous section. It may also be configured to move to .

[About the flow from normal section to AT state]
Next, the flow from the normal section to the AT state by the main control section 41 will be described based on FIGS. 31 to 34.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the game played in the normal section, if the advantageous section transition combination is won in an internal lottery, the main control unit 41 causes the game to shift to the advantageous section from the next game. The advantageous section consists of a normal state, a CZ (chance zone) state, and an AT state.

The normal state is a state in which navigation notification is not performed, and is a relatively disadvantageous state for the player. The CZ state is a state that transitions after the end of the normal state, a navigation notification is performed, and a state that can shift to the AT state, which is more advantageous for the player than the normal state. The AT state is a state in which navigation notification is performed for a long period of time, and is the most advantageous state for the player in an advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 performs a continuation lottery 1, a mode lottery 1, and a game number lottery when an advantageous section shift combination is won in the normal section and the game shifts to the advantageous section.

In the continuation lottery 1, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section after the end of the CZ state. In mode lottery 1, a normal mode to be controlled thereafter is determined. In the game number lottery, the number of finished games is determined from the range of values corresponding to the mode determined in the mode lottery 1 with a probability according to the mode.

There are five modes in the normal state: normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, high probability mode, heaven preparation mode, and heaven mode.

In the normal 1 mode, as shown in FIG. 31(b), the number of ending games is determined from 200 to 500, and a low probability is applied as the winning probability of the ending lottery that determines whether or not to end the normal state. If the normal mode is selected, the average number of games played until the normal state ends is approximately 400 games.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), the normal 2 mode is a mode in which the number of finished games is determined from 100 to 300, and a low probability is applied as the probability of winning the final lottery, and the normal 2 mode is selected. In this case, the average number of games played until the normal state ends is approximately 250 games. The normal 2 mode is more advantageous than the normal 1 mode because the average number of games stayed is smaller than the normal 1 mode, and it can be expected that the player can move to CZ with a smaller number of games than the normal 1 mode.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), the high probability mode is a mode in which the number of completed games is fixed at 300 and a high probability is applied as the winning probability of the final lottery, and when the high probability mode is selected. The average number of games played until the normal state ends is approximately 150 games. In high probability mode, the probability of winning the final lottery is high, so you can expect to transition to CZ with fewer games than in normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, and heaven preparation mode. It is more advantageous than Mode or Heaven Preparation Mode.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), the heaven preparation mode is a mode in which the number of ending games is determined from 300 to 500, and a low probability is applied as the winning probability of the ending lottery, and the heaven preparation mode is selected. In this case, the average number of games played until the normal state ends is approximately 420 games. Heaven preparation mode has the highest average number of games and is more difficult to transition to CZ than other modes, and is at a disadvantage compared to other modes in this respect, but even if it does not transition to AT state after transitioning to CZ. Since the mode always shifts to heaven mode, it is more advantageous than normal 1 mode or normal 2 mode in this respect.

As shown in FIG. 31(b), the heaven mode is a mode in which the number of ending games is determined from 1 to 100, and a low probability is applied as the winning probability of the ending lottery, and when the heaven mode is selected. The average number of games played until the normal state ends is approximately 80 games. Heaven mode is the most advantageous mode because the average number of games stayed is the smallest, and the player will transition to CZ after a maximum of 100 games, and CZ that transitions from Heaven mode will always transition to AT state. .

As shown in FIG. 31(a), when the main control unit 41 shifts to the advantageous section, it first controls the vehicle to the normal state. For each game in the normal state, the main control unit 41 adds 1 to the number of games played after the control is brought to the normal state (referred to as the number of normal games). At this time, only if the number of bets set for the game is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1, the number of normal games is added. If the number is not 3 or if the gaming state is not RT1, the number of normal games is not added. Then, the main control unit 41 determines whether the number of normal games after addition has reached the number of finished games determined by the number of games lottery, and if it has reached the number of finished games, the main control unit 41 enters the normal state. is terminated and controlled to the CZ state.

In addition, if the number of normal games has not reached the number of ending games, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to end the normal state with a probability according to the mode determined in mode lottery 1. A lottery will be held. At this time, similarly to updating the number of normal games, the ending lottery will be performed only if the number of bets set for the game is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1. Thus, if the number of bets is not 3 or the gaming state is not RT1, the ending lottery will not be held. Then, even if the end lottery is won, the normal state is ended and control is performed to the CZ state.

In this way, in the normal state that starts with the transition to the advantageous section, after the start of the normal state, the number of normal games is the ending game determined by the game number lottery according to the mode determined in mode lottery 1. The normal state ends when the number reaches a certain number, or when the end lottery is won with a probability according to the mode determined in the mode lottery 1, and control is made to the CZ state.

Also, only when the set number of bets is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1, the number of regular games will be updated and the ending lottery will be held. The normal state does not end if the number of bets is not 3 or the gaming state is not RT1, and the game is designed to encourage games with a bet of 3 and games in RT1. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal state ends when the number of games controlled in the normal state reaches the end number of games selected according to the mode of the normal state, or when the end lottery is won. However, only when the number of games controlled in the normal state reaches the number of ending games selected according to the mode of the normal state, the normal state ends and the CZ state is controlled. Alternatively, the normal state may end only when the ending lottery is won, and the state may be controlled to the CZ state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ending lottery is held for each game, but the ending lottery is held when a specific combination is won or a prize is won, and the normal state ends when the ending lottery is won. , CZ state may be adopted.

The CZ state consists of 10 or 20 point-up games and a maximum of 3 condition determination games. In any game, if the target combination of navigation notification is won, navigation notification will be performed, so an increase in medals can be expected.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), at the start of the CZ state, the main control unit 41 determines either 10G or 20G as the number of point-up games in the CZ state. Then, with the start of the CZ state, the main control unit 41 first controls the point up game, and when the number of games determined at the start of the CZ state has elapsed, controls the condition judgment game of up to three games. .

In this embodiment, the number of games for the point-up game is determined at the start of the CZ state. The point-up game is ended by winning the ending lottery, and the point-up game is ended by winning the ending lottery, and the point-up game is ended after a preset guaranteed number of games has elapsed. A configuration may also be adopted in which control is performed using a conditional judgment game. In such a configuration, the number of point-up games may be changed by selecting the probability of the ending lottery from a plurality of probabilities or selecting the number of guaranteed games from a plurality of probabilities. Furthermore, the point-up game may be configured to end when the number of winnings or winnings of a specific combination reaches a specified number of times in the point-up game, and the control is controlled to a condition determination game. In such a configuration, the number of point-up games may be varied by selecting the prescribed number of times from a plurality of times.

The main control unit 41 performs a condition determination lottery for each game in the condition determination game, and by winning the condition determination lottery for three games in a row, ends the CZ state and controls the AT state as the condition is achieved. On the other hand, if the game is not won even once in the condition determination lottery, the CZ state is terminated as the condition is not achieved in that game.

In the condition determination lottery, a value obtained by adding a value obtained by multiplying the number of points accumulated since the start of the advantageous section by 0.1 to the initial value 50 is applied as the winning probability. For example, if the number of points accumulated since the start of the advantageous section is 100 points, the probability of winning the condition determination lottery is 50+100×0.1=60%. The number of points is awarded by winning a point lottery held in each game in the normal state and the CZ state, and is cumulatively accumulated until the advantageous section ends. In addition, if the normal state mode before transitioning to the CZ state is Heaven mode, the probability of winning the conditional judgment lottery will be 100% regardless of the number of points, and in this case, the winning probability of the condition judgment lottery will be 100%. By winning the condition determination lottery, after the CZ state ends, the AT state will be controlled without fail.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), when the CZ state ends due to non-achievement of the conditions, the main control unit 41 controls the continuous lottery 1 performed when starting the normal state before being controlled to the CZ state. It is determined whether the continuation has been won or not, and if the continuation has been won, after the end of the CZ state, control is again made to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section. Further, if the continuation lottery is not won in the continuation lottery 1, the main control unit 41 performs the continuation lottery 2. In the continuation lottery 2, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section after the CZ state ends. Then, even if the continuation is won in the continuation lottery 2, the main control unit 41 controls the state again to the normal state after the end of the CZ state while continuing the advantageous section.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31(a), the main control unit 41 performs the continuation lottery 3 when the AT state ends. In the continuation lottery 3, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section after the AT state ends. Then, even if the continuation is won in the continuation lottery 3, the main control unit 41 again controls the normal state after the end of the AT state while continuing the advantageous section.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31(a), the main control unit 41 determines that the CZ state ends with the condition not being achieved, the continuation is not won in the continuation lottery 1, and the continuation is not won in the continuation lottery 2. In this case, after the AT state ends, if the continuation is not won in the continuation lottery 3, the advantageous section is ended and controlled to the normal section, and then the advantageous section transition combination is won in the normal section, When the vehicle shifts to the advantageous zone again, control is resumed to the normal state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31(a), the main control unit 41 controls the vehicle to return to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the CZ state ends with the condition not being achieved or after the AT state ends. In the first game after the end of the CZ state or the AT state, a mode lottery 2 and a game number lottery are performed.

In the mode lottery 2, as in the mode lottery 1, the mode of the normal state to be controlled thereafter is determined, but the mode to be determined is different from the mode lottery 1 as described later. In addition, the game number lottery is similar to the game number lottery which is controlled to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section, and the probability according to the mode is determined from the value range according to the mode determined in mode lottery 2. The number of games to be completed is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31(a), after the CZ state ends without the condition being achieved, or after the AT state ends, the main control unit 41 controls the vehicle to return to the normal state again while continuing the advantageous section. In this case, it is the same as the normal state that is controlled with the start of the advantageous section, and the number of normal games is added by 1 for each game, and the number of normal games after addition reaches the ending number of games determined by the number of games lottery. If so, the normal state is ended and controlled to the CZ state, and if the number of normal games has not reached the number of ending games, an ending lottery is performed with a probability according to the mode determined in mode lottery 2. Even if the user wins the termination lottery, the normal state is terminated and the control is performed to the CZ state.

In addition, the main control unit 41 determines 10 or 20 games as the number of point-up games in the CZ state after being controlled to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section, whereas the CZ state determines the number of point-up games as the number of games. After ending without achieving the goal or after ending the AT state, if the control is returned to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section, 20 games will always be determined as the number of point-up games in the subsequent CZ state. In this respect, it is more advantageous than the CZ state after being controlled to the normal state at the start of the advantageous section.

In this way, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment can be controlled to the normal state, CZ state, and AT state in the advantageous section, and when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section, the control is first performed to the normal state, and the normal state ends. As a result, it is controlled to the CZ state. Then, when the transition condition for the AT state is achieved in the CZ state, the state is controlled to be in the AT state.

If the conditions for transitioning to the AT state are not achieved in the CZ state, after the CZ state ends, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, and the control returns to the normal state by shifting to the advantageous section again; There are cases where the advantageous section continues and is controlled to the normal state, and the continuation is won in the continuation lottery 1 held at the beginning of the advantageous section, or the continuation is won in the continuation lottery 2 held at the end of the CZ state. As a result, the advantageous section will continue to be controlled to the normal state, and if the continuation is not won in the continuation lottery 1 and the continuation is not won in the continuation lottery 2, the advantageous zone will end and the continuation will be changed to the normal zone. However, after that, the vehicle will be controlled to the normal state by shifting to the advantageous section again.

In addition, continuation lottery 1 is performed when transitioning to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section, and after the subsequent CZ state ends, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section, and in continuation lottery 1, the advantageous section is continued. If it is determined that this is the case, after the CZ state ends, the control is returned to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section. After the end of the CZ state, it is possible to perform control depending on whether or not to continue the advantageous section, such as suggesting the possibility that the CZ state may continue.

Also, even after the AT state ends, there are cases where the advantageous section ends and the transition is made to the normal section, and then the control is returned to the normal state by shifting to the advantageous section again, and there are cases where the advantageous section continues and the control is returned to the normal state. If the continuation is won in the continuation lottery 3 held at the end of the AT state, the advantageous section will continue and be controlled to the normal state after the AT state ends, and the continuation will be continued in the continuation lottery 3. If it does not win, after the AT state ends, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section, and then the control returns to the normal state by shifting to the advantageous section again.

In addition, in this embodiment, continuation lottery 1 is performed when transitioning to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section, and continuation lottery 2 is also performed at the end of the CZ state, and by winning the continuation in either one, , After the end of the CZ state, the control is controlled to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section, but the continuous lottery can be carried out either when the advantageous section starts and the normal state is entered, or when the CZ state ends. By doing this and winning the continuation, after the end of the CZ state, it may be configured to be controlled to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the AT state is controlled by achieving a condition in the condition judgment game in the CZ state, but the AT state is directly controlled according to the result of an internal lottery in the normal state or the CZ state. It is also possible to conduct an AT lottery to determine whether or not to proceed, and by winning the AT lottery, the AT state is controlled.With such a configuration, in the normal state that occupies most of the advantageous section, the AT state is always controlled. It is possible to expect that the AT state will be controlled.

In addition, the AT state is controlled by the number of games since the start of the advantageous section and the value of the ED transition game counter reaching a predetermined ceiling value, and by being controlled to the CZ state a specified number of times in the first advantageous section. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being extremely disadvantaged.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), in the continuous lottery 1 that is held when the control is returned to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section, the FC (flag category) of the advantageous section transition combination won in the internal lottery is Whether or not to continue the advantageous section is determined based on probability. The probability of winning each FC continuation is 1% if you win FC0, 10% if you win FC1, 20% if you win FC2, 30% if you win FC3, and 100% if you win FC4.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 32(b), in the continuous lottery 2 that is held when the AT state is not entered at the end of the CZ state, the number of remaining games in the current advantageous section and the number of point-up games that make up the CZ state are determined. It is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section with a probability according to the number of games and the number of games in which the condition determination game has been completed. If the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 1000 or more and the number of point-up games is 10, the probability of winning the continuation is 40% if the number of games in which the condition judgment game has been completed is 1 or 2; If the number of games in which the end determination game has ended is 3, it becomes 50%. In addition, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 1000 or more and the number of point-up games is 20, the probability of winning the continuation is 30 if the number of games in which the condition judgment game has been completed is 1 or 2. %, and if the number of games in which the end determination game has ended is 3, it becomes 40%. In addition, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 999 to 400 games and the number of point-up games is 10 games, the probability of winning the continuation is regardless of whether the number of games in which the condition judgment game is completed is 1 or 2. If the number of games in which the end judgment game has been completed is three, the percentage is 40%. In addition, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 999 to 400 games, and the number of point-up games is 20 games, the probability of winning the continuation is regardless of whether the number of games in which the condition judgment game is completed is 1 or 2. If the number of games in which the end judgment game has been completed is three, the percentage is 30%. Furthermore, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is less than 400 games, the winning probability of continuation is 0%, regardless of the number of point-up games and the number of games for which the end determination game has been completed. In addition, if the normal state mode before transitioning to the CZ state is heaven preparation mode, regardless of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section, the number of point-up games, and the number of games in which the end judgment game has ended. The probability of winning the continuation is 100%.

In this way, in continuation lottery 2, the advantageous section is continued with a probability depending on whether the number of remaining games in the current advantageous section is 1000 or more, between 999 and 400, or less than 400. If the number of point-up games and the number of games in which the conditional judgment game has been completed are the same, the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 1000 or more, and the number of games is from 999 to 400. The continuation has a higher probability of winning. In particular, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is less than 400 games, 100% non-continuation will be won.

Therefore, in continuation lottery 2, it is easier to win a continuation when there are more games remaining in the advantageous section than when there are fewer, and the advantageous section continues and is controlled to the normal state, passing through the CZ state and becoming the AT state. Even in this case, a certain number of games remaining in the advantageous section is secured. In particular, the continuation of the advantageous section can be won only when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 400 or more, so the maximum number of games that can be controlled in the subsequent normal state is 300 games (as described later, if the advantageous section is If the mode is continuously controlled to the normal state, the mode will be normal 2 mode, high probability mode, or heaven mode, and the maximum number of games at that time will be normal 2 mode, if controlled to high probability mode. 300 games), and since it requires 20 point-up games and 3 condition judgment games in the CZ state, even if the AT state is controlled afterwards, the minimum score will be 300 games by the end of the advantageous period. 77 games (400-300-20-3=77 games) are secured. That is, it becomes possible to control the subsequent normal state, CZ state, and AT state within the range of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section. After transitioning to the AT state, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 77 games, the control will be made to the ED state described later, and in the ED state, the net increase in the number of cards per game is 2. , it is possible to secure a net increase of at least 154 medals.

In addition, in continuation lottery 2, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section with a probability according to the number of point-up games, and the conditions of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section and the number of games in which the condition judgment game has ended are the same. In this case, when the number of point-up games is 10, the probability of winning a continuation is higher than when the number of point-up games is 20. For this reason, the number of point-up games, that is, the period in which the CZ state is controlled, is short, resulting in a low advantage for the player, the longer the period in which the CZ state is controlled, and the player's It is easier to win a continuation than when the result is highly advantageous to the player, and even if the result of the CZ state is disadvantageous to the player, the player can expect the advantageous section to continue. In addition, since the period in which the CZ state is controlled is short and there are many remaining games in the advantageous section, it is easy to win a continuation. Even if this happens, a certain number of games remaining in the advantageous section will be secured.

Furthermore, in continuation lottery 2, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section with a probability according to the number of games in which the condition judgment game has been completed, and the conditions of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section and the number of point-up games are the same. In this case, when the condition determination game ends after three games, the probability of continuation winning is higher than when it ends after one or two games. Therefore, if the number of condition judgment games that have been completed is 3 games, that is, if the number of games that have been completed is 1 game or 2 games when the AT state is not controlled in a situation where there is a high possibility of being controlled to the AT state, In other words, in a situation where there is a low possibility of being controlled by the AT state, continuation is more likely to be won than if it were not controlled by the AT state, and if it is not controlled by the AT state when there is one step left, the advantageous section continues. You can now expect that.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the continuation lottery 2, the number of point-up games, that is, the period controlled by the CZ state is shorter, the continuation is easier to win than if it is longer, but in the continuation lottery 2, If the number of medals paid out in the CZ state and the number of medals increased in the CZ state are below a predetermined number, it may be possible to have a configuration in which it is easier to win the continuation than if the number exceeds the predetermined number, and even in such a configuration, Even if the result of the CZ state is disadvantageous to the player, the advantageous section can be expected to continue.

In addition, as mentioned above, in a configuration in which the point-up game ends when a winner is won in the final lottery, or in a configuration in which the point-up game ends when the number of times a specific combination is won or won reaches a specified number of times, the continuous lottery In 2, the configuration may be such that when the number of point-up games is less than or equal to a predetermined number of games, it is easier to win the continuation than when the number of point-up games exceeds the predetermined number of games, and even in such a configuration, the result of the CZ state is Even if the situation becomes disadvantageous for some, it can be expected that the advantageous section will continue.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), in the continuation lottery 3 performed at the end of the AT state, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section with a probability according to the number of remaining games in the current advantageous section. If the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 1000 games or more, the probability of winning the continuation is 10%, and if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is less than 1000 games, the probability of winning the continuation is 0%.

In this way, in the continuation lottery 3, the continuation can be won only when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 1000 or more, but in that case, the probability of winning the continuation is as follows in the continuation lottery 2 after the end of the CZ state: The probability of winning a continuation is lower than when there are 1000 or more games left, and after the AT state ends, it is harder to continue the advantageous section than after the CZ state ends, making it excessively advantageous. This situation will not continue.

In addition, in this embodiment, by winning a continuation in the continuation lottery 3 held at the end of the AT state, the control is returned to the normal state while the advantageous section continues after the end of the AT state. After the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section always ends and the transition is made to the normal section, and then the control returns to the normal condition by shifting to the advantageous section again. You can prevent the situation from continuing.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), in mode lottery 1, which is carried out when the control is returned to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section, the FC (flag category) of the advantageous section transition combination won in the internal lottery is Normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, high probability mode, heaven preparation mode, and heaven mode are determined by probability.

The probability of winning the mode in each FC of mode lottery 1 is 50% for normal 1 mode, 30% for normal 2 mode, 5% for high probability mode, 10% for heaven preparation mode, and 10% for heaven mode when winning FC0. 5%, and when winning FC1, 40% for normal 1 mode, 30% for normal 2 mode, 10% for high probability mode, 15% for heaven preparation mode, and 5% for heaven mode. , When winning FC2, Normal 1 mode is 40%, Normal 2 mode is 30%, High probability mode is 15%, Heaven preparation mode is 10%, Heaven mode is 5%, and when winning FC3 , Normal 1 mode is 20%, Normal 2 mode is 20%, High probability mode is 20%, Heaven preparation mode is 20%, Heaven mode is 20%, and when winning FC4, Normal 1 mode is 0. %, normal 2 mode is 0%, high probability mode is 0%, heaven preparation mode is 50%, and heaven mode is 50%.

In addition, in mode lottery 2, which is performed when the control is returned to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the end of the CZ state or the AT state, if the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is 500 or more, As shown in b), in the first game after the end of the CZ state or AT state, there is a probability of winning in the normal 2 mode, high probability mode, or heaven mode according to the FC (flag category) of the winning hand in the internal lottery. If the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is less than 500 games, as shown in FIG. Either high probability mode or heaven mode is determined.

The probability of winning the modes in each FC of Mode Lottery 2 is 70% for normal 2 mode, 20% for high probability mode, and 20% for heaven mode when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 500 or more. 10%, when winning FC1, normal 2 mode is 60%, high probability mode is 30%, heaven mode is 10%, and when winning FC2, normal 2 mode is 50%, High probability mode is 30%, heaven mode is 20%, and when winning FC3, normal 2 mode is 20%, high probability mode is 40%, heaven mode is 40%, and FC4 is winning. At this time, the normal 2 mode is 0%, the high probability mode is 0%, and the heaven mode is 100%. In addition, if there are less than 500 games remaining in the advantageous section, when winning FC0, the high probability mode is 80% and heaven mode is 20%, and when winning FC1, the high probability mode is 75%. %, heaven mode is 25%, when winning FC2, high probability mode is 60%, heaven mode is 40%, when winning FC3, high probability mode is 50%, heaven mode is 50%, and when winning in FC4, high probability mode is 0% and heaven mode is 100%. Furthermore, if the advantageous section continues after the CZ state ends, and the normal state mode before the transition to the CZ state is heaven preparation mode, heaven mode will be determined with a 100% probability. It looks like this.

In this way, in mode lottery 2, which is performed when the advantageous section continues and the control is returned to the normal state after the end of the CZ state or the AT state, the mode lottery 2 is performed when the control is returned to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section. Compared to Mode Lottery 1, the average number of games played is smaller and is more convenient for players, such as the normal 2 mode, which has a relatively small number of completed games, the high probability mode, which has a relatively high probability of winning the final lottery, and the Heaven mode, which has the least number of completed games. An advantageous mode, that is, a mode in which the next transition to the CZ state can be expected with a small number of games, is likely to be determined. Therefore, after the end of the CZ state or AT state, if the advantageous section is continued and the control is returned to the normal state, after the advantageous section ends and the transition is made to the normal section, the advantageous section is changed again to the normal state. It can be expected to shift to the CZ state in fewer games than when controlled by the state.

In addition, in mode lottery 2, the normal 1 mode with the highest average number of games stayed is not selected, and if the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is less than 500 games, the next CZ will be moved to the next CZ with a smaller number of games. Since either the high-probability mode or the heaven mode is determined, in which a transition can be expected, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section will be reduced even if the advantageous section continues and is controlled to the normal state, and the AT state passes through the CZ state. is guaranteed to some extent.

In addition, the heaven preparation mode in which heaven mode is determined in the next normal state is determined in mode lottery 2, which is held when the advantageous section is continued and the normal state is controlled again after the end of the CZ state or AT state. Instead, it will be determined only in the mode lottery 1 that is performed when the control is returned to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section. Heaven preparation mode is a mode in which heaven mode is determined in the subsequent normal state even if the AT state does not change in the subsequent CZ state, and only when heaven preparation mode is controlled to the normal state with the start of the advantageous section. By being determined, it is possible to increase the interest at the beginning of the advantageous section, and by determining the heaven preparation mode at the beginning of the advantageous section where the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is maximum, the CZ state is ended. Even if the vehicle is then controlled to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section, the subsequent advantageous section can be sufficiently secured. On the other hand, heaven preparation mode has the highest average number of games, so it is not determined if the advantageous section continues and the normal state is controlled, so even if the advantageous section continues and the normal state is controlled. , it is possible to secure the remaining number of games in the advantageous section.

Next, the number of points accumulated in advantageous sections will be explained. The main control unit 41 is configured to draw points for each game in the normal state and the CZ state after transition to the advantageous section, and the number of points won is accumulated. In the point lottery, the probability of winning one of 0Pt, 10Pt, 20Pt, 30Pt, 40Pt, or 50Pt is determined according to the FC (flag category) to which the internal lottery result of each game belongs, and the number of points won is accumulated. It looks like this. These points are not deleted until the current advantageous section ends, and are accumulated as long as the advantageous section continues, and if controlled under normal conditions for a long period of time, many points will be accumulated. Accumulation can be expected.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 34(a) and (b), in the point lottery, the winning probability is more favorable in the CZ state than in the normal state, and by shifting to the CZ state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal state. You can expect to accumulate points. In particular, in the CZ state, after being controlled by 10 or 20 point-up games, it is controlled by the condition judgment game, so that the condition judgment lottery can be performed with the points increased in the point-up game. It has become.

In addition, the number of points from the start of the advantageous section is accumulated and will not be erased even if the advantageous section continues and is controlled to the normal state after the end of the CZ state. If the section continues and is controlled to the normal state and then further controlled to the CZ state, the winning probability of the conditional judgment lottery in the conditional judgment game is higher than the winning probability of the conditional judgment lottery in the previous CZ state. The probability is high. Therefore, after the CZ state ends without achieving the conditions, or after the AT state ends, the advantageous section continues and the control returns to the normal state again. The possibility of transitioning to the AT state is higher than the CZ state after being controlled.

The main control unit 41 also performs the point lottery only when the set number of bets is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1. If the number of bets is not 3 or the gaming state is not RT1, the number of points is not accumulated, and the game is encouraged to play with the number of bets of 3 and RT1.

[About normal state start effect and normal state effect]
Next, the normal state start performance performed when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section and the normal state performance performed during the normal state will be explained based on FIG. 35.

At the end of the game, the main control unit 41 determines whether the playing section in the next game is a normal section or an advantageous section, and if it is an advantageous section, whether it is in a normal state, a CZ state, or an AT state. When the mode is normal, a status command that can specify which mode the mode is is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 uses the status command to control the main control. It is possible to specify the game section on the part 41 side, the state when it is an advantageous section, and the mode when it is a normal state. In addition, when the continuation lottery 1 is held with the start of the advantageous section, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the continuation lottery was won in the continuation lottery 1, that is, whether or not the continuation is won in the continuation lottery 1, that is, whether the continuation lottery is entered into the subsequent CZ state and the CZ state is When the lottery ends, a continuation lottery result command is sent to the sub-control unit 91 that can specify whether or not the control will be returned to the normal state while the advantageous section continues, and the sub-control unit 91 , from the continuation lottery result command, it is possible to identify whether or not the continuation has been won.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 controls the start of the normal state when it is specified that the normal state will be controlled from the next game based on the state command after the main control unit 41 wins the advantageous section transition combination. Execute the suggested normal state start effect. The normal state start effect consists of three types of start effects A to C with different presentation modes, and the sub-control unit 91 controls the normal state mode specified from the state command and the continuous lottery 1 specified from the continuous lottery result command. A start performance selection lottery is performed to select the type of start performance based on the result, and the selected type of normal state start performance is executed.

In the start performance selection lottery, as shown in FIG. 35(a), if it is not determined that the control will be returned to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the end of the next CZ state, that is, the mode of the normal state is If the mode is other than the heaven preparation mode and the continuation is not won in continuation lottery 1, start performance A is selected with a probability of 80%, start performance B with 20%, and start performance C with a probability of 0%. On the other hand, if it is certain that after the next CZ state ends, the control will return to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section, that is, if the normal state mode is the heaven preparation mode, or if the continuation is not possible in the continuation lottery 1. In the case of winning, start performance A is selected with a probability of 50%, start performance B with a probability of 40%, and start performance C with a probability of 10%.

In this way, in the start effect selection lottery, if it is certain that after the end of the next CZ state, the advantageous section will continue and the control will be returned to the normal state, the advantageous section will be continued after the next CZ state ends. Since the ratio of start effects B being selected among start effects A and B is set higher than when it is not certain that the control will be controlled to the normal state again, the normal state start effect is the same as that of start effect B. In this case, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility that after the end of the next CZ state, it will be controlled to the normal state again while continuing the advantageous section than in the case of start effect A. By executing the normal state start performance in the performance mode of start performance B, even if the state does not shift to the AT state after the end of the CZ state next time, it will be controlled to the normal state while the advantageous section continues. It can make you look forward to it.

In addition, start effect C is selected only when it is certain that after the end of the next CZ state, it will be controlled to the normal state again while continuing the advantageous section, so if the normal state effect is start effect C This indicates that it is certain that after the end of the CZ state next time, the control will return to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section, so the normal state start performance will be performed in the performance mode of start performance C. By executing this, it is possible to make it possible to recognize that when the next time the CZ state ends and the AT state is not changed, the control will be continued to the normal state while the advantageous section continues.

The sub-control unit 91 executes normal state performance in the normal state. The normal state performance consists of four types, stages A to D, and the performance mode differs depending on the type. The sub-control unit 91 performs a stage selection lottery to select one of stages A to D at the start of the normal state and when winning the stage transition lottery, and executes the selected type of normal state performance.

In the stage transition lottery, based on the normal state mode specified from the status command and the result of continuous lottery 1 specified from the continuous lottery result command, after the next CZ state ends, the normal state is returned while continuing the advantageous section. It is determined whether or not to change the stage with a probability depending on whether it is certain that it will be controlled. As shown in FIG. 35(b), if it is not certain that the control will return to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the end of the next CZ state, the stage will be changed with a probability of 1/30. If it is determined that the next time the CZ state ends and it is determined that the control will be returned to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section, it is determined that the stage will be changed with a probability of 1/25. Therefore, depending on the frequency with which the type of normal state production is changed, it is suggested whether or not it is certain that the next time the CZ state ends, the control will be returned to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section. By frequently changing the type of normal state performance, it is possible to make the user expect that after the end of the CZ state, the control will return to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section.

In the stage selection lottery, one of stages A to D is selected with probability according to the mode of the normal state specified from the state command. As shown in FIG. 35(c), if the normal state mode is normal 1 mode, stage A is selected with a probability of 50%, stage B with a probability of 15%, stage C with a probability of 30%, and stage D with a probability of 5%. , in the normal 2 mode, stage A is selected with a probability of 50%, stage B with a probability of 30%, stage C with a probability of 15%, and stage D with a probability of 5%; in the high probability mode, stage A is selected with a probability of 20%, Stage B is selected with a probability of 50%, stage C is 20%, and stage D is selected with a 10% probability, and if it is in heaven preparation mode, stage A is 50%, stage B is 20%, stage C is 20%, and stage D is selected. is selected with a probability of 10%, and in the heaven mode, stage A is selected with a probability of 10%, stage B with a probability of 20%, stage C with a probability of 20%, and stage D with a probability of 50%.

In this way, in the stage selection lottery, in the case of normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, and heaven preparation mode, the selection rate of stage A is higher than other modes, so if the stay rate of stage A is high, It is suggested that it is likely to be in 1 mode, normal 2 mode, or heaven preparation mode. In addition, in the normal 1 mode, the selection rate of stage C is higher than that of the normal 2 mode and heaven preparation mode, so if the stay rate of stage C is the second highest after the stay rate of stage A, it is possible that the selection rate of stage C is normal 1 mode. It is suggested that the quality is high. In addition, in the normal 2 mode, the selection rate of stage B is higher than that of the normal 1 mode and heaven preparation mode, so if the stay rate of stage B is the second highest after the stay rate of stage A, it is possible that the selection rate of stage B is normal 2 mode. It is suggested that the quality is high. In addition, in heaven preparation mode, the selection rate for stage D is higher than in normal 1 mode and normal 2 mode, so if the stay rate in stage A is high and the stay rate in stage D is also high, in heaven preparation mode This suggests that there is a high possibility. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, the selection rate of stage B is higher than that of other modes, so if the stay rate of stage B is high, it is suggested that the possibility of being in the high probability mode is high. Further, in the case of heaven mode, the selection rate of stage D is higher than that of other modes, so if the stay rate of stage D is high, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of being in heaven mode.

As described above, since the selection rate of the type of normal state performance differs depending on the normal state mode, the normal state mode can be suggested by the difference in the stay rate for each type of normal state performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the frequency at which the type of normal state performance is changed, it is possible that after the next CZ state ends, it is certain that the control will be returned to the normal state again while continuing the advantageous section. However, there are differences in the stay rate for each type of normal state effect, and the number of games in which a precursor effect indicating that there is a high possibility of being controlled by the CZ state is likely to be executed (from the start of the normal state). A configuration that suggests whether or not it is certain that the next time the CZ state ends, the control will be returned to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section, depending on the difference in the number of games), the difference in the execution frequency of specific effects, etc. It's good as well.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the normal state mode is suggested by the difference in the stay rate for each type of normal state performance, but the difference in the type of normal state start performance and the type of normal state performance are changed. The number of games in which a precursor effect indicating that there is a high possibility of being controlled by the CZ state is likely to be executed (the number of games since the start of the normal state), the frequency of execution of specific effects, etc. It is also possible to have a configuration that suggests this mode.

[About AT status]
Next, the control regarding the AT state performed by the main control section 41 will be explained. In this embodiment, a first type of AT state and a second type of AT state, which have different aspects regarding the AT state, will be described.

[About the AT state of the first form]
First, the control regarding the first AT state of the first embodiment performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 36(a), the main control unit 41 changes the AT state when the transition condition to the AT state (achievement of the condition in the CZ state) is satisfied in the non-AT state that is not controlled to the AT state. to control.

The main control unit 41 can control the AT state to a plurality of states including an AT1 state, an AT2 state, an additional state, and an ED state.

When the main control unit 41 shifts to the AT state, it first controls the AT1 state as shown in FIG. 36(a). In the AT1 state, as shown in Figure 36(b), navigation notification will be performed with a 100% probability when a multi-card winning combination is won, and the number of medals per game will vary slightly depending on the setting value. The payout rate is approximately 200%, and the average net number of coins added per game is approximately 3.0 coins. In addition, in the AT1 state, a specific combination (in this example, combinations belonging to flag categories 1 to 4 (cherry 1 to 3, chance replay 1, 2, watermelon), replay 1A, replay 2, common 1-card combination) is won. At times, a navigation stock lottery is held to determine whether or not to grant navigation stock, which is the right to control the AT1 state. The probability of winning the navigation stock in the AT1 state is set to a low probability (in this embodiment, about 1/5 to about 1/40). The AT1 state is set to 20 times as the remaining number of navigation notifications at the start, and ends when the remaining number of navigation notifications becomes 0, that is, when navigation notifications are performed 20 times in the AT1 state.

When the AT1 state ends, the main control unit 41 controls the AT2 state as shown in FIG. 36(a). In the AT2 state, as shown in Figure 36(b), there is a 50% probability that a navigation notification will be made when a multi-card winning combination is won, and although it differs slightly depending on the setting value, the number of medals per game is The payout rate is approximately 133%, and the average net increase in number of coins per game is approximately 1.0 coins. In addition, in the AT2 state, a Navi stock lottery is performed when a specific combination is won. The winning probability of the navigation stock in the AT2 state is also set to a low probability (in this embodiment, about 1/5 to about 1/40). The AT2 state is set to 30 as the number of remaining games at the start, and ends when the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 30 games have elapsed after the start of the AT2 state. The main control unit 41 determines whether or not there is any navigation stock left at the end of AT2, and if there is any navigation stock left, it controls the AT1 state again. On the other hand, if there is no navigation stock remaining, the AT state is ended and the state is shifted to a non-AT state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36(a), when the main control unit 41 wins the additional state lottery in the AT2 state, the main control unit 41 interrupts the AT2 state and controls the additional state. In the add-on state, as shown in Figure 36(b), there is a 50% probability that a navigation notification will be made when a multi-card winning combination is won, and although it varies slightly depending on the setting value, the number of medals per game is The payout rate is approximately 133%, and the average net increase in number of coins per game is approximately 1.0 coins. In addition, in the add-on state, a Navi stock lottery is performed in all games. The probability of winning the Navi stock in the add-on state is set to be higher than that in the second AT state (in this embodiment, about 1/5 except when a specific combination is won, and 1/1 when a specific combination is won). In the add-on state, either 10 games or 20 games is set as the number of remaining games at the start, and the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 10 games or 20 games have passed after the start of the add-on state. It ends with this. When the addition state ends, the main control unit 41 returns to the interrupted AT2 state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36(a), the main control unit 41 enters the ED state when the ED transition condition is satisfied, regardless of whether it is controlled to be in the AT1 state, AT2 state, or additional state. to control. At this time, the main control unit 41 controls the game to enter the ED state from the game following the game for which the ED transition condition is satisfied. In particular, when the second ED transition condition described below is satisfied, the game progresses (the reels start rotating) for a predetermined period of time (in this example, 2 seconds) at the timing when the game start operation that starts the ED state is performed. control to an ED freeze state that delays the In the ED state, as shown in Figure 36(b), there is a 75% probability that a navigation notification will be made when a multi-card winning combination is won, and although it varies slightly depending on the setting value, the number of medals per game is The payout rate is approximately 167%, and the average net number of coins added per game is approximately 2.0 coins. Further, in the ED state, the navigation stock lottery is not performed. In the ED state, the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games in the advantageous section) reaches the first specified number (1500 games in this example) and the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied, or the number of medals increases or decreases in the advantageous section. It is advantageous if the net increase in the number of medals after the number changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, that is, the net increase in the number of medals after the AT state is controlled, exceeds the second specified number (2395 in this example). When the section ending condition 2 is satisfied, the section ends together with the advantageous section. The number of advantageous section games used when determining the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is counted using the advantageous section game number counter allocated to the RAM 41c, and the advantageous section game number counter value is calculated when the number of bets is 2. It is updated regardless of whether there is a bet, whether the number of bets is 3, or whether the gaming state is RT0 to RT3. Further, the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state used when determining the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is counted using the net increase in medal counter allocated to the RAM 41c, and the net increase in medal number counter value is It is updated regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3, or whether the gaming state is RT0 to RT3.

Note that the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number, but it may also be satisfied when the number of games in the advantageous section exceeds the first specified number. good. Furthermore, condition 2 for ending the advantageous section is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number, but when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number. It may be something that is established.

The ED transition condition is that the net increase in the number of medals after the increase or decrease in the number of medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend in the advantageous section, that is, the net increase in the number of medals after the AT state is controlled is the third specified number (main In the example, the first ED transition condition is satisfied when the number of medals exceeds 1700 to 2200), and the fourth specified number (in this example 1600) and the remaining Navi stock is equal to or more than a predetermined number (in this example, 8 pieces), and the second ED transition condition is satisfied when the number of bets is 3 in the advantageous section and the gaming state is and a third ED transition condition that is satisfied when the number of games that were RT1 (the number of ED transition games) reaches a fifth specified number (1150 to 1400 in this embodiment). For the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state, which is used when determining the first ED transition condition and the second ED transition condition, the above-mentioned net increase number counter value used when determining the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is used. . On the other hand, the number of ED transition games used when determining the third ED transition condition is counted using the ED transition game number counter allocated to the RAM 41c, and the ED transition game number counter value is calculated when the number of bets is 3. It is updated when the game status is RT1 and the game status is RT1, and it is not updated when the number of bets is 2 or the game status is a game status other than RT1.

The main control unit 41 selects any value from a plurality of values (1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, and 2200 in this embodiment) as the third specified number when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section. A 3rd specified number lottery is held, and the winning value is set as the 3rd specified number, so that the 3rd specified number at which the 1st ED transition condition is satisfied changes for each advantageous section. It has become. In addition, the main control unit 41 converts any value from a plurality of values (1150, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, and 1400 in this embodiment) into a fifth specified number when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section. A 5th specified number lottery is held to select the 5th specified number, and the winning value is set as the 5th specified number, and the 5th specified number at which the 3rd ED transition condition is satisfied changes for each advantageous section. It looks like this.

In any state, AT1 state, AT2 state, or add-on state, if an increase combination is won by performing a stop operation according to the stop order notified in the game where the navigation notification was performed, the net increase number counter value will increase. As a result, the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition may be satisfied, and the state may transition to the ED state.

In addition, in the AT2 state or the additional state, navigation notification is not performed 50% of the time when winning a multi-push winning combination that can increase the net increase in the number of medals, but even in games where navigation notification is not performed. If you win an increasing combination on your own, the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition may be satisfied due to the net increase number counter value increasing, and the game may transition to the ED state.

In addition, in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, if a watermelon that is not subject to navigation notification is won, the net increase number counter value increases and the 1st ED transition condition or 2nd ED transition condition is met. may be established and shift to the ED state.

In addition, in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, if Navi Stock is won in a game in which a specific combination eligible for Navi Stock lottery is won, the remaining Navi Stock number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. As a result, the second ED transition condition may be satisfied and the state may transition to the ED state.

In addition, in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and add-on state, the 3rd ED transition condition is satisfied as the number of games in which the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1 increases in the advantageous section, and the ED It may move to the state.

Note that the first ED shift condition is established when the net increase number counter value exceeds the third specified number, but may be established when the net increase number counter value becomes equal to or greater than the third specified number. Further, the second ED transition condition requires that the net increase number counter value exceeds the fourth specified number, but may also require that the net increase number counter value exceeds the fourth specified number. Further, the second ED transition condition requires that the number of remaining navigation stocks be greater than or equal to a predetermined number, but may also be one that requires that the number of remaining navigation stocks exceeds a predetermined number. The third ED transition condition is satisfied when the number of ED transition games reaches the fifth specified number, but may be satisfied when the number of ED transition games exceeds the fifth specified number.

In one AT1 state, it takes an average of 29.6 games to finish, that is, until the navigation notification is performed 20 times, and the average net increase in the number of cards per game is about 3.0. The average net increase in number of sheets per session is approximately 88.8 sheets. Also, in one AT2 state, it takes 30 games to finish, and the average net number of cards added per game is about 1.0, so the average net number of cards added per game in the AT2 state is about 30. be. Furthermore, since one navi stock remains, the AT1 state and AT2 state are each controlled once, so a net increase of about 111.8 medals can be expected for each navi stock. If the second ED transition condition is met, the net increase number counter value exceeds 1600 at that point, and a net increase of approximately 894.4 can be expected by consuming all 8 navigation stocks. Because of this, the predicted net increase in the number of medals in the future when all the Navi stock is consumed is 2494.4. Therefore, the second ED transition condition is such that the predicted net increase number of sheets can be set to the third specified number (in this example, 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100). , 2200), and the number of sheets exceeds 2395 sheets, which makes the end condition 2 of the advantageous section satisfied.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, the 1st ED transition condition or the 2nd ED transition condition is satisfied when the net increase number counter value increases when winning a small role that involves payout of medals. In addition, when a specific role is won, there is a possibility that the conditions for moving to the 2nd ED will be met by the Navi stock lottery being held, while when winning a role that is neither a minor role nor a specific role, the 1st ED There is no possibility that neither the transition condition nor the second ED transition condition will be satisfied. That is, it includes a transferable combination in which the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition can be satisfied, and a transferable combination in which neither the first ED transition condition nor the second ED transition condition is satisfied. Then, in the state after the transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the sub-control unit 91 determines the performance mode when the transferable combination is won, the performance mode when the transferable combination is won, may be controlled to be different, and with such a configuration, it is possible to specify whether or not the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition can be satisfied in the game based on the difference in presentation mode. be able to.

In this manner, in the AT state of the first form, after the transition to the AT state, the ED transition condition is satisfied, so that the ED state is controlled. In this embodiment, the ED state is maintained until the ED transition condition is satisfied, which is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals and the number of navigation stocks satisfy a predetermined condition, after the transition to the AT state, and the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. That is, it is a state in which it is guaranteed that the AT state will continue until the period in which it can be controlled in the AT state ends. Therefore, by transitioning to the ED state after transitioning to the AT state, a certain amount of increase in medals is guaranteed, and compared to the state where the ending conditions fluctuate before transitioning to the ED state, you can play with peace of mind. It can be carried out.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, after the transition to the AT state, when the ED transition condition is satisfied, the AT state is controlled to the ED state where the AT state continues until the advantageous section end condition is satisfied. At least after transitioning to the AT state, the ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is controlled to the ED state, so that a predetermined profit (the number of games controlled to the AT state, the number of times navigation notifications are performed, etc., can be increased in the AT state). Any configuration is sufficient as long as the possible number of medals, etc.) is guaranteed, and it is not necessarily necessary for the ED state to continue until the end conditions of the advantageous section are met, but after the transition to the ED state, before the end conditions of the advantageous section are satisfied. The configuration may be such that the ED state ends immediately.

Furthermore, in the AT state of the first form, after the transition to the AT state, until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the control can be performed in a plurality of states including the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the additional state, while the ED transition condition is not satisfied. After transitioning to the ED state, the game is controlled only to the ED state until the AT state ends, and until the ED transition conditions are met, the gameplay can be varied. After the ED transition condition is satisfied, stable gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the number of navigation times (the number of times navigation notification is performed), which is the condition for ending the AT1 state, is fixed at 20, but any number of times from a plurality of times can be set. The number of times of navigation, which is the condition for ending the AT1 state, may be changed by adding the number of times of navigation due to selection or when an additional condition is satisfied. Further, the AT1 state is configured to end depending on the number of times of navigation, but it may be configured to set the number of remaining games and end when the remaining number of games becomes 0, as in the AT2 state. Even in such a configuration, the number of remaining games that is the end condition for the AT1 state changes by selecting the initially set number of remaining games from a plurality of options, or by adding the number of remaining games when the additional condition is satisfied. It may also be used as a configuration.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the number of remaining games, which is the end condition for the AT2 state, is fixed at 30 games, but the number of remaining games can be selected from a plurality of numbers, or additional conditions can be set. The remaining number of games, which is the condition for ending the AT2 state, may be changed by adding the number of remaining games when the condition is satisfied. Furthermore, although the AT2 state is configured to end when the number of remaining games becomes 0, it may be configured to end according to the number of navigations like the AT1 state. Even in such a configuration, the number of navigations that is the condition for ending the AT2 state can be changed by selecting the number of navigations initially set from a plurality of numbers, or by adding the number of navigations when the additional condition is satisfied. good.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the additional state is such that the number of remaining games, which is the condition for ending the additional state, is selected from either 10 games or 20 games, but the initially set number of remaining games is A fixed configuration may also be used. Alternatively, the number of remaining games may be added when the addition condition is satisfied. Further, although the additional state is configured to end when the number of remaining games becomes 0, it may also be configured to end according to the number of navigations like the AT1 state. Even in such a configuration, the number of times of navigation that is the condition for ending the additional state may be changed by selecting the number of times of navigation initially set from a plurality of numbers or adding the number of times of navigation when the additional condition is satisfied. Moreover, although the configuration is such that the additional state is transferred by winning the additional state in the AT2 state, it may be configured to be transferred by winning the additional state in the AT1 state. In addition, in the add-on state, the probability of winning the Navi stock is set higher than in other states, so the Navi stock is easily added, but the period during which the Navi stock is controlled to be in the AT2 state, such as the number of remaining games in the AT2 state, etc. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which this is more likely to be added than when controlled to the AT2 state. Further, as long as the configuration can be shifted to the additional state in the AT1 state, the period during which the AT1 state is controlled, such as the number of navigations in the AT1 state, may be more likely to be added than when the AT1 state is controlled.

In the first form of AT state, after the transition to the AT state, the states until the ED transition condition is satisfied are the AT1 state in which the navigation notification is performed at a rate of 100% when a multi-push winning combination is won, and the multi-push Since it is a configuration including an AT2 state in which navigation notification is performed at a rate of 50% when a winning combination is won, that is, a configuration including a plurality of states in which navigation notification is performed at a different rate when a multi-card winning combination is won, The amount of medals acquired can be changed until the ED transition condition is satisfied.

In addition, after transitioning to the AT state, the states until the ED transition condition is met are the first state where navigation notification is performed when a multi-card winning winning combination is won, and the first state where navigation notification is performed when a multi-card pushing winning combination is won. In such a configuration, the amount of medals obtained can be changed until the ED transition condition is satisfied, and the amount of medals can be changed between the first state and the second state. You can significantly change the amount of medals you earn.

In addition, in a configuration including a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed as a state after transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, in the second state There is a high possibility that the net increase in the number of medals will decrease, but even in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, if you win an increase winning combination on your own in a game where a multi-push winning combination was won, , the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition may be satisfied due to an increase in the net increase number counter value, and the transition to the ED state may occur.

In addition, even in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, if a watermelon that is not subject to navigation notification is won, the net increase number counter value increases and the 1st ED transition condition or 2nd ED transition condition is satisfied. However, it may shift to ED state.

In addition, even in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, if the navigation stock is won in a game in which a specific combination eligible for the navigation stock lottery is won, the remaining number of navigation stocks will be greater than or equal to the predetermined number. As a result, the second ED transition condition may be satisfied and the state may transition to the ED state.

In addition, even in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, the conditions for transition to the third ED are satisfied as the number of games in which the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1 increases in the advantageous section, and the ED state It may shift to

In this way, even in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, the 1st ED transition condition, 2nd ED transition condition, and 3rd ED transition condition may be satisfied, so navigation notification will be sent when a multi-card winning combination is won. In a configuration including a first state in which a multi-card winning combination is won, and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed when a multi-card winning combination is won, whether it is controlled in the first state or in the second state. Regardless of , if the ED transition condition is met, the state will transition to the ED state.

Furthermore, navigation notification is performed in a configuration including a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed as states after transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied. In the first state, the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning an increasing combination in the game in which the navigation notification is performed, and the transition is made to the ED state, while in the second state where the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation notification is not performed. Even if the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning an increasing combination without being played, it may be configured such that the transition to the ED state is not made.With such a configuration, the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed is further increased. can be increased.

Furthermore, navigation notification is performed in a configuration including a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed as states after transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied. In the first state, when a watermelon that is not subject to navigation notification is won, the ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the ED state, while in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, the watermelon is not subject to navigation notification. Even if the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning a watermelon, it may be configured not to transition to the ED state, and with such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed. .

Furthermore, navigation notification is performed in a configuration including a first state in which navigation notification is performed and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed as states after transition to the AT state until the ED transition condition is satisfied. In the first state, the ED transition condition is satisfied when the navigation stock is won, and the transition to the ED state is made. In the second state, where navigation notification is not performed, the ED transition condition is satisfied when the navigation stock is won. A configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the ED state is not made even if the condition is established, and by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed.

In addition, in a configuration in which the state is not transitioned to the ED state even if the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, the ED transition condition is satisfied when the state is subsequently transitioned to the first state where navigation notification is performed. If so, the state will shift to the ED state.

In addition, after the transition to the AT state, the states until the ED transition condition is satisfied are a first state in which navigation notification is performed in part when winning a multi-card winning combination, and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed. In the configuration including the following, in the first state where navigation notification is performed in part when winning a multi-card winning winning combination, even in a game where navigation notification is not performed, by winning the increasing combination on your own. When the ED transition condition is satisfied, the system moves to the ED state, but in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, the system does not transition to the ED state even if the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning an increasing combination on its own. With this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in part when a multi-card winning combination is won.

In addition, after the transition to the AT state, the states until the ED transition condition is satisfied are a first state in which navigation notification is performed in part when winning a multi-card winning combination, and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed. In the configuration including, in the first state where navigation notification is performed as part of the winning of the multi-card winning combination, the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning a watermelon that is not subject to navigation notification. In the second state in which the navigation notification is not performed, the system may be configured to not transition to the ED state even if the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning a watermelon that is not subject to navigation notification. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is performed in a part of the winning of the multi-card winning combination.

In addition, after the transition to the AT state, the states until the ED transition condition is satisfied are a first state in which navigation notification is performed in part when winning a multi-card winning combination, and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed. In the configuration including, in the first state in which navigation notification is performed in part when the multi-card winning combination is won, the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning the navigation stock, and the state is transitioned to the ED state. On the other hand, in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, the configuration may be such that the transition to the ED state is not made even if the navigation stock is won and the ED transition condition is satisfied. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the first state in which the navigation notification is given in a part of the time when the winning position is won.

In addition, in a configuration in which the transition to the ED state is not made even if the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second state where navigation notification is not performed, thereafter, in the first state where navigation notification is performed as part of the winning of the multi-card winning combination. If the ED transition condition is satisfied when the state is shifted to the ED state, the state is shifted to the ED state.

Further, after transitioning to the AT state, the state until the ED transition condition is satisfied is a state in which the average net increase in medals per game exceeds 100% due to navigation notification being performed, that is, a first state in which the number of medals increases; A configuration including a state in which the average net increase in medals per game is 100% or less due to no navigation notification or a low rate of navigation notification, that is, a second state in which the number of medals does not increase or the number of medals decreases. In the first state where the medals increase, the ED transition condition is satisfied by winning the increasing combination that is the target of the navigation notification and the state shifts to the ED state, while in the first state where the medals do not increase or the medals decrease. In the 2nd state, even if the increasing combination targeted for navigation notification wins and the ED transition condition is satisfied, the configuration may be such that the transition to the ED state is not made.With such a configuration, the first This can make the situation even more interesting.

Furthermore, in a configuration including a first state in which the number of medals increases and a second state in which the number of medals does not increase or decreases as states until the ED transition condition is satisfied after the transition to the AT state, the number of medals increases. In the first state where the number of medals does not increase, the ED state is entered by satisfying the ED transition condition by winning a watermelon that is not subject to navigation notification, while in the second state where the number of medals does not increase or decreases, the number of medals does not increase or decrease. Even if a watermelon that is not subject to notification wins and the ED transition condition is met, the system may be configured not to transition to the ED state. With such a configuration, the first state in which the number of medals increases can be further enhanced. Can be done.

Furthermore, in a configuration including a first state in which the number of medals increases and a second state in which the number of medals does not increase or decreases as states until the ED transition condition is satisfied after the transition to the AT state, the number of medals increases. In the first state, when the Navi stock is won, the ED transition condition is satisfied and the state is shifted to the ED state. In the second state, where the number of medals does not increase or the number of medals decreases, the Navi stock is won and the ED state is entered. A configuration may also be adopted in which the transition to the ED state is not made even if the transition conditions are met, and with such a configuration, the first state in which the number of medals increases can be further enhanced.

In addition, in a configuration in which the transition to the ED state is not made even if the ED transition condition is satisfied in the second state where the number of medals does not increase or the number of medals decreases, when the transition to the first state where the number of medals increases, the ED transition condition is If this holds true, the state will shift to the ED state.

In the AT state of the first form, after the transition to the AT state, the winning probability of the Navi stock is set to a low probability as a state until the ED transition condition is satisfied, thereby extending the period of being controlled to the AT state. This includes the AT1 state and AT2 state in which the probability of winning is low, and the additional state in which the probability of winning the Navi stock is set to a high setting to extend the period in which the AT state is controlled is high. In other words, the configuration includes multiple states with different rates of control to extend the period controlled to the AT state, so until the ED transition condition is met, the period controlled to the AT state is extended depending on the state It can be changed.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the AT state, the states until the ED transition conditions are satisfied are a first state in which control can be performed to extend the period during which the AT state is controlled such as navigation stock lottery, and a first state in which control to the AT state is possible. The second state may include a second state in which no control is performed to extend the period in which the AT state is controlled, and even in such a structure, the period in which the AT state is controlled cannot be changed until the ED transition condition is satisfied. In addition, the period during which the AT state is controlled can be greatly changed depending on whether the AT state is controlled to the first state or the second state.

In the AT state of the first form, after transitioning to the AT state, regardless of whether it is controlled to the AT1 state, AT2 state, or additional state, the ED state is controlled when the ED transition condition is satisfied, so the ED state There is no need to change the control for transitioning to the ED state depending on the state at that time, and the process for transitioning to the ED state can be simplified.

In the AT state of the first form, the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is the highest among the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state that are controlled before the ED transition condition is established. Since the average net number of added coins is set lower than in the AT1 state where it is set high, it prevents gambling from increasing excessively even if the ED transition conditions are met and the ED state is established after transitioning to the AT state. can.

Furthermore, in the AT state of the first form, in the ED state, the navigation notification probability (75%) is controlled to be different from the navigation notification probability (100% or 50%) in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state. Since the average net increase in medals per game in the ED state is different from the average net increase in medals per game in any of the AT1, AT2, and additional states, the characteristics of the ED state The amount of increase in medals can be adjusted appropriately.

In addition, in the ED state, the navigation notification probability is controlled to be the same as the navigation notification probability in any one of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, and the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is the AT1 state, The configuration may be the same as the average net increase in the number of medals per game in either the AT2 state or the additional state, and with such a configuration, the control in the ED state and the control in other states, can be shared.

In the first AT state, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be obtained per AT1 state is approximately 88.8, and the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be obtained per AT2 state is approximately 30. Yes, the minimum number of medals that can be expected to be obtained in one add-on state is approximately 10. On the other hand, if 2200, the largest number, is selected as the third specified number and the first ED transition condition is satisfied, or if 1400, the largest number, is selected as the fifth specified number and the third ED transition condition is satisfied, the second ED transition condition Although the number of medals that can be expected to be acquired in the ED state is smaller than when the following is true, even in that case, it is possible to expect to acquire about 200 medals. In this way, after the ED transition condition is met, the number of medals that can be expected to be earned in the ED state is the lowest in one of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state that are controlled before the ED transition condition is met. Since the number of medals that can be obtained is greater than the number of medals that can be expected to be acquired, the interest in being controlled to the ED state can be increased.

In the AT state of the first form, the ED transition condition for transitioning to the ED state after transitioning to an advantageous state is the net increase in the number of medals after the increase or decrease in the number of medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend in an advantageous section. , that is, it is established that the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third specified number (in this example, any one of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, and 2200). The second ED transition condition is established based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is expected to increase in the future according to the remaining number of Navi stocks. Not only does the net increase in the number of medals since being controlled by the AT state exceed the third specified number, but even if the net increase in the number of medals since being controlled by the AT state is less than the third specified number, there will be no increase in the future. may be controlled to the ED state when the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net increase in medals is met, so if the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number. It is possible to expect that the vehicle will be controlled to the ED state even under certain circumstances.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is expected to increase in the future is specified based on the number of Navi stocks, but the number of medals that are expected to increase in the future is specified based on the number of remaining games in the AT state and the remaining number of Navi notifications. The configuration may be such that the predicted net increase number of medals is specified, and if the end condition of the AT state is a configuration in which the net increase number of medals is managed, the predicted net increase number of medals is specified based on the net increase number of medals that can be obtained thereafter. It's good as well.

In addition, the second ED transition condition is based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is expected to increase in the future in the AT state of the first form, and the net increase in the number of medals that is expected to increase in the future after the AT state is controlled. The predicted net increase number and the third specified number (in this example, 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, or 2200), and is a condition that can be established when the number of medals is increased after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number. By doing so, it can be recognized that the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the third specified number.

In addition, the second ED transition condition is based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is expected to increase in the future in the AT state of the first form, and the net increase in the number of medals that is expected to increase in the future after the AT state is controlled. The total value of the predicted net increase in medals exceeds the second specified number (2395 in this example) at which the advantageous section ends when the net increase in medals after the actual AT state is controlled. This is a condition that can be established by controlling to the ED state in a situation where the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number. It can be recognized that the number of sheets exceeds the second specified number which is the end condition of the advantageous section.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, after the transition to the AT state, both when the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the ED state, and when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition is made to the ED state, Although the configuration is such that the ED state continues until the end conditions 1 and 2 of the advantageous section are satisfied, the ED state may end after transitioning to the ED state but before the end conditions 1 and 2 of the advantageous section are satisfied. .

In addition, the second ED transition condition is based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals that is expected to increase in the future in the AT state of the first form, and the net increase in the number of medals that is expected to increase in the future after the AT state is controlled. The predicted net increase number and the third specified number (in this example, 1700, 1800 , 1900, 2000, 2100, 2200), and the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds the fourth specified number (1600 in this example), which is smaller than the third specified number. This is a possible condition, and even if the total value of the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net increase in the number of medals that are expected to increase in the future exceeds the third specified number, the AT state will not be controlled. Since the ED state is not controlled until the net increase in the number of medals since the start exceeds the fourth specified number, which is less than the third specified number, the ED state is not controlled at an early stage after being controlled to the AT state. You can prevent this from happening.

Further, in the AT state of the first form, when the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is controlled to the ED state, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the second ED transition condition is satisfied until the AT state ends. If the second ED transition condition is not performed and the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is controlled to the ED state, it is not determined whether the first ED transition condition is satisfied until the AT state ends, and the first ED transition condition is not determined. After either the transition condition or the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is controlled to the ED state, it is not determined whether the other of the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is satisfied, so the control is controlled to the ED state. This simplifies the control after the

Further, in the AT state of the first form, the main control unit 41 controls the non-AT state and the AT state after shifting to the advantageous section, and further in the AT state, the AT1 state and the AT2 state before shifting to the ED state. The configuration is such that it can be controlled in either state or additional state, but regardless of which state it is controlled in, it is determined for each game whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied, and the current state Since there is no need to change the control depending on the state, the control for transitioning to the ED state can be simplified.

Note that until the transition to the AT state, it is not determined whether the ED transition condition is satisfied, and after the transition to the AT state, before the transition to the ED state, any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state Even if the state is controlled by the AT state, it may be configured to determine whether the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game, and even in such a configuration, after the transition to the AT state, the current state Since there is no need to change the control depending on the state, the control for transitioning to the ED state can be simplified.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the main control unit 41 determines that the first ED transition condition, which is satisfied when the net increase number counter value updated in the advantageous section exceeds a third specified number, is satisfied, and that the net increase number counter value updated in the advantageous section is satisfied. The third ED transition condition, which is established when the number of ED transition games reaches the fifth prescribed number, is established to control the ED state, and the third prescribed number and the fifth prescribed number are set when transitioning to the advantageous section. , a plurality of values (in this example, the third specified number is any value of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, 2200, and the fifth specified number is 1150, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, 1400) is selected and set, and the third specified number and the fifth specified number are the conditions for transition to the ED state. Since this can be varied, it is possible to change the period until the ED state is controlled each time the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous section.

In addition, in the AT state of the first form, the main control unit 41 can change the period until it is controlled to the ED state, so the timing of transition to the ED state can be ambiguous. Since the notification probability (75% in this example) is different from the navigation notification probability (50% or 100% in this example) in the AT1 state, AT2 state, or additional state, the navigation notification is not performed. The possibility that the patient is in an ED state can be inferred from the frequency at which the patient's condition occurs.

[About the performance during the AT state of the first form]
Next, the performance during the AT state of the first form will be explained. The main control section 41 transmits a state command that can specify the state of the next game to the sub control section 91 when the game ends. The state command can specify whether the next game state is a non-AT state or an AT state, and if it is an AT state, it can also specify whether it is an AT1 state or an AT2 state. It is possible to specify whether it is in the current state or the ED state. Further, in the AT1 state, the remaining number of navigations can be specified, and in the AT2 state and the additional state, the remaining number of games can be specified. Further, when the first to third ED transition conditions are satisfied, the main control unit 41 can specify that the ED transition conditions were satisfied at the end of the game and which one of the first to third ED transition conditions was satisfied. An ED transition command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. Further, in the ED transition command in which the satisfaction of the first ED transition condition is specified, it is possible to specify the third specified number for which the first ED transition condition is satisfied. Further, in the ED transition command in which the satisfaction of the third ED transition condition is specified, it is possible to specify the fifth specified number for which the third ED transition condition is satisfied.

The sub-control unit 91 can perform effects specific to the AT state according to the state of the main control unit 41 that is specified from the state command and the ED transition command. Note that the effects specific to the AT state include effects based on the image display mode on the liquid crystal display 51, sound effects from the speakers 53 and 54, and effects on the light emission mode of the effect LED 57. We will explain the production using .

When the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command in which an AT state is specified in a situation where a non-AT state is specified, that is, when the start of an AT state is specified, the number of bets for the next game is set. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 37(a), an AT state start effect indicating the start of the AT state is executed. In the AT state start effect, an AT start image is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

At the start of the AT state, the control is first performed in the AT1 state, so when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command while executing the AT start effect and specifies the game start operation, , as shown in FIG. 37(b), performs an AT1 state effect specific to the AT1 state. In the AT1 state production, the LCD display 51 displays an AT1 state image specific to the AT1 state, the remaining number of navigation notifications, the number of games played since the transition to the AT state, the net increase in the number of tickets since the transition to the AT state, etc. Ru.

Furthermore, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command specifying the AT2 state in a situation where the AT1 state is specified, that is, when the start of the AT2 state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command and controls the game. When the start operation is specified, as shown in FIG. 37(c), an AT2 state effect specific to the AT2 state is executed. The AT2 state production is a different image from the AT1 state image, and includes an AT2 state image unique to the AT2 state, the number of remaining games, the number of games since the transition to the AT state, the net increase in the number of sheets since the transition to the AT state, etc. is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command specifying the AT1 state in a situation where the AT2 state is specified, that is, when the start of the AT1 state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command and controls the game. When the start operation is specified, the AT1 state rendering is executed again, as shown in FIG. 37(b).

Further, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command specifying an add-on state in a situation where the AT2 state is specified, that is, when the start of an add-on state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 receives an internal winning command and controls the game. When the start operation is specified, as shown in FIG. 37(d), an additional state effect peculiar to the additional state is executed. In the additional state production, the image is different from the AT1 state image and the AT2 state image, and the additional state image unique to the additional state, the number of remaining games, the number of games since the transition to the AT state, and the number of games since the transition to the AT state. The net increase in number of sheets, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

Furthermore, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command that specifies a non-AT state in a situation where the AT2 state is specified, that is, when the end of the AT state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 performs a process as shown in FIG. Then, perform the result notification performance. In the result notification performance, the number of games played since the transition to the AT state, the net increase in the number of tickets since the transition to the AT state, a message urging prevention of addiction, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. The result notification performance may end at the timing when the number of bets for the next game is set, it may end at the timing when the start operation for the next game is performed, or it may continue until the next game ends. It may be configured such that the game ends at the timing when the number of bets for the next game is set or when the game start operation is performed.

Furthermore, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an ED transition command that specifies that the second ED transition condition is satisfied in a situation where any one of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state is specified, When the start of the ED state is specified by establishment, when the internal winning command of the next game is received and the game start operation is specified, as shown in FIG. 37(e), an ED start effect indicating the start of the ED state is generated. Execute. The main control unit 41 sets an ED freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 2 seconds) at the time of a start operation of the next game in which the second ED transition condition is satisfied, that is, a game that starts the ED state. The ED start effect is executed during the period in which the ED freeze state is controlled. In the ED start effect, an ED start image is displayed on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an ED transition command specifying that the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition is met in a situation where any one of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state is specified, that is, If the start of the ED state is specified by the establishment of the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition, even if the internal winning command is received and the game start operation is specified, even if the state until then is AT1 state. For example, the AT1 state presentation may be continued, if the previous state was the AT2 state, the AT2 state presentation may be continued, and if the previous state was the additional state, the additional state presentation may be continued.

Specifically, when the sub-control unit 91 receives an ED transition command in which the satisfaction of the first ED transition condition is specified and the third specified number specified from the ED transition command is the maximum 2200, the sub-control unit 91 sets the third ED transition condition. If an ED transition command whose fulfillment is specified is received and the fifth specified number specified from the ED transition command is the maximum 1400, the internal winning of the next game will be performed as in the case where the second ED transition condition is satisfied. When the command is received and the game start operation is specified, an ED start effect indicating the start of the ED state is executed.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 receives the ED transition command in which the satisfaction of the first ED transition condition is specified and the third specified number specified from the ED transition command is other than the maximum 2200, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the third ED transition condition is satisfied. If an ED transition command in which is specified is received and the fifth specified number specified from the ED transition command is other than the maximum 1400, the ED state (before notification) suspends the execution of the ED start effect, and the AT1 state Continue the performance, AT2 state performance, or additional state performance. That is, in the ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 performs the same effect as before being controlled to the ED state.

Furthermore, in the ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 determines the end conditions on the display of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state before transitioning to the ED state (displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 at the time of transition to the ED state). If the remaining number of Navi notifications and the number of remaining games become 0), if the ED condition is not established, an ED start effect lottery will be executed when a specific role eligible for the Navi stock lottery is won, and an ED start effect will be executed. When winning the lottery, when an internal winning command for the next game is received and the game start operation is specified, an ED start effect indicating the start of the ED state is executed.

In this way, the conditions for executing the ED start effect after transitioning to the ED state (hereinafter referred to as ED notification conditions) are whether the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition is satisfied, or the second ED transition condition is satisfied. It depends on whether you are Further, hereinafter, the ED state before the ED notification condition is satisfied is referred to as the ED state (before notification), and the ED state after the ED notification condition is satisfied is referred to as the ED state (after notification).

In addition, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, addition state, and ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 makes it possible to execute navigation performance when a multi-card winning combination is won as described later, and when a specific combination is selected. The configuration is such that the specific winning combination suggestion effects (A) and (B) can be executed in the event of a winning. However, in a game where the ED notification condition is met, if a multi-card winning winning combination is won and the navigation effect is executed, , Even when a specific role is won and the specific role winning suggestion performance (A) is executed, the ED start performance is executed with priority, and the navigation performance and the specific role winning suggestion performance (A) are executed after the ED start performance is finished. Execute.

In addition, in a game where the ED notification condition is satisfied in the AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state, or ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 does not perform a production that suggests that the ED notification condition is satisfied, Performances are executed according to the internal lottery results of the game or the results of the game, such as navigation performance, specific role winning suggestion performance (A) (B), small role winning performance, chance performance, etc., which will be described later.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the ED start effect (when in the ED freeze state, this is the timing at which the ED freeze state ends), the sub control unit 91 performs a function specific to the ED state, as shown in FIG. 37(f). Execute the ED performance. In the ED effect, the images are different from the AT1 state image, AT2 state image, and additional state image, and include the ED state image specific to the ED state, the number of games played since the transition to the AT state, and the number of games since the transition to the AT state. The number of net additions, the number of remaining games in the ED state, the number of net additions remaining in the ED state, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. In the ED state, the main control unit 41 calculates the remaining number of games in the ED state by subtracting the number of games in the advantageous section from the first specified number for which the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is met, and also calculates the number of remaining games in the ED state when the end condition 2 of the advantageous section is met. The remaining net increase in the number of medals in the ED state is calculated by subtracting the net increase in the number of medals after transitioning to the AT state from the second specified number that is established, and the remaining number of games in the ED state and the remaining net increase in medals in the ED state are calculated. At the same time, the sub-control unit 91 sends an ED end condition command that can specify the ED ending condition command to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 determines the number of remaining games in the ED state and the remaining net increase number of tickets in the ED state, which are specified from the ED ending condition command in the ED production. Display.

Furthermore, when the sub-control unit 91 receives a state command that specifies a non-AT state in a situation where the ED state is specified, that is, when the end of the AT state is specified, the sub-control unit 91 performs a process as shown in FIG. Then, perform the result notification performance. In addition, even if the AT state ends in the AT2 state or in the ED state, a common result notification effect will be executed, but it depends on whether it ends in the AT2 state or the ED state. It is also possible to perform different types of result notification effects.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 controls the common ED when the start of the ED state is identified and the ED notification condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the AT1 state, AT2 state, or additional state is specified. A start effect is executed, a common ED effect is executed in the subsequent ED state, and a common result notification effect is executed at the end of the ED state.

Further, the sub-control unit 91 also predicts an increase in the future when the first ED transition condition, which is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the third specified number, is satisfied after transitioning to the AT state and transitioning to the ED state. Even in the case where the second ED transition condition based on the predicted net increase in the number of medals to be added is satisfied and the transition to the ED state is made, the start of the ED state is identified and the common ED start effect is executed when the ED notification condition is satisfied. However, in the subsequent ED state, a common ED effect is executed, and at the end of the ED state, a common result notification effect is executed.

Further, after the sub-control unit 91 shifts to the AT state, after the net increase in the number of medals exceeds a fourth specified number that is smaller than the third specified number, the navigation stock becomes a predetermined number or more, and the second ED transition condition is satisfied. Even when transitioning to the ED state, after transitioning to the AT state, after the Navi stock reaches a predetermined number or more, the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is less than the third specified number, and the transition to the second ED occurs. Even when the conditions are met and the transition to the ED state occurs, the start of the ED state is specified, and if the ED notification conditions are met, a common ED start effect is executed, and in the subsequent ED state, a common ED A performance is executed, and at the end of the ED state, a common result notification performance is executed.

In the AT state, the sub-control unit 91 can execute a navigation performance, a specific role winning suggestion presentation (A), a specific role winning suggestion presentation (B), a small role winning presentation, and a chance presentation.

As shown in FIGS. 38(a) and 38(b), in the navigation effect, when the game start operation is performed, an image showing the order in which the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed is superimposed on a part of the currently displayed effect image. This is an effect that suggests a pressing order advantageous to the player by displaying it on the liquid crystal display 51, and is executed when a multi-card pressing order winning combination is won. Further, the navigation effects include navigation effects A and B that have different presentation modes (for example, the size, color, shape, etc. of images indicating the order of pressing).

As shown in FIGS. 38(c) and 38(d), the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) is such that when the game start operation is performed, an image indicating the winning of a specific role is superimposed on a part of the currently displayed effect image. is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to suggest that a specific winning combination has been won, which suggests the possibility that the navigation stock may be added or the possibility of moving to an added state. be done.

As shown in FIGS. 38(e) and 38(f), the specific role winning suggestion effect (B) changes the effect image currently displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to an image different from the effect image when the game start operation is performed. By switching to a specific image that indicates the winning of a specific role, in addition to suggesting that the specific role has been won, there is a possibility that navigation stock will be added or added compared to the specific role winning suggestion production (A). This is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of transitioning to the state, and is executed when a specific combination is won.

As shown in FIG. 38(g), the small role winning performance is performed by displaying an image in the shape of the characters "GET!" on the liquid crystal display 51 overlapping a part of the currently displayed performance image. This is a performance that suggests that a winning combination has been won, and is executed when a multi-push winning combination is won, a stop operation is performed in the pressing order specified by the navigation performance, and a small winning combination is won.

As shown in FIG. 38(g), the chance effect displays an image in the shape of the letters "CHANCE!" on the liquid crystal display 51 overlapping a part of the effect image currently being displayed, so that the navigation stock is added. This is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning or moving to an additional state, and is executed at the end of a game in which a specific combination has been won.

As shown in FIG. 39, the sub-control unit 91 controls the multi-sheet press in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state, ED state (before notification), and ED state (after notification), which constitute the AT state. Navigation performance A can be executed when a winning role is won.

In addition, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, addition state, and ED state (before notification) that constitute the AT state, the sub control unit 91 makes it possible to execute navigation performance B when a multi-card winning combination is won; In the state (after notification), navigation performance B is not executed when a multi-card push order winning combination is won.

In addition, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, addition state, and ED state (before notification) among the states constituting the AT state, the sub control unit 91 performs a specific winning suggestion production when a specific winning combination is won, regardless of its type. While (A) can be executed, in the ED state (after notification), if a specific combination is won that cannot be won unless the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing (in the case of a key press) In this case, it is possible to execute the specific role winning suggestion performance (A), but if a specific role that wins regardless of the timing of the stop operation is won (in the case that no eye press is required), then the specific role winning is possible. Suggestive performance (A) is not executed.

In addition, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, addition state, and ED state (before notification) among the states constituting the AT state, the sub control unit 91 performs a specific winning suggestion production when a specific winning combination is won, regardless of its type. While (B) is made executable, in the ED state (after notification), when a specific winning combination is won, regardless of the type, the specific winning combination suggestion performance (B) is not performed.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 controls the multi-card pressing order in any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state, ED state, ED state (before notification), and ED state (after notification) that constitute the AT state. At the time of winning, a stop operation is performed in the push order designated by the navigation performance and a small role is won, thereby making it possible to execute a small role winning performance.

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 can execute a chance production when a specific combination is won, regardless of its type, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, add-on state, and ED state (before notification) among the states that constitute the AT state. On the other hand, in the ED state (after notification), no chance performance is performed when a specific combination is won, regardless of its type.

As shown in FIG. 40(a), the sub-control unit 91 determines that the net increase number counter value is a third specified number (in this embodiment, any one of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, and 2200). If there are 50 or fewer cards remaining until reaching , the ED transition game counter value becomes the fifth specified number (in this example, any one of 1150, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, and 1400). If there are 25 games or less remaining until the game is reached, navigation effect B is executed with a high probability (in this embodiment, 1/5).

Further, when the value set as the third specified number is 1900 or less, and when the value set as the fifth specified number is 1250 or less, In the embodiment, navigation effect B is executed at 1/10).

Further, the sub-control unit 91 controls the number of remaining games until the net increase number counter value reaches the third specified number, exceeding 50 remaining games, the remaining 25 games until the ED transition game number counter value reaches the fifth specified number, and the third specified number. If the value set as the specified number exceeds 1900 and the value set as the fifth specified number exceeds 1250, navigation effect B is performed with a low probability (in this example, 1/15) lower than the medium probability. Execute.

Therefore, by increasing the ratio of navigation performance B among navigation performances A and B, it is assumed that the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition will be satisfied soon, and a small value will be set as the third specified number or the fifth specified number. It has been suggested that there is a high possibility that the ED state is likely to occur at an early stage.

As shown in FIG. 40(b), the sub-control unit 91 determines that a specific winning combination is won in a state before transitioning to the ED state (before notification), that is, a state in which the ED transition condition is not satisfied. When neither the navigation stock nor the additional state has won, the state after executing the specific role winning suggestion performance (B) with a low probability (1/10 in this example) and moving to the ED state (before notification) That is, in the ED state (before notification), when a specific winning combination is won, the specific winning combination suggestion performance (B) is executed with a high probability (1/3 in this embodiment).

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the specific combination is won and the navigation stock and additional state are also won in the state before shifting to the above-mentioned ED state (before notification), that is, in the state in which the ED transition condition is not satisfied. If not, a chance performance is executed with a low probability (1/4 in this example), and the specific combination is won in the state after transitioning to the ED state (before notification), that is, in the ED state (before notification). In this case, a chance effect is executed with a high probability (in this embodiment, 1/2).

For this reason, even if the specific role winning suggestion effect (B) or chance effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of winning in the Navi stock or additional state is executed, and the Navi stock or additional state is not won, the ED state It has been suggested that there is a high possibility that it is controlled by

The sub-control unit 91 selects one of a plurality of patterns as the ED effect, and executes the ED effect in a mode corresponding to the selected pattern.

As shown in FIG. 41, the ED effect patterns are comprised of four types, patterns A, B, C, and D, and are different in at least some of the elements constituting the ED effects, such as the background of the effect image and the characters that appear.

The sub-control unit 91 selects one of patterns A, B, C, and D with a probability according to the currently set setting value, and depending on which pattern's ED effect is executed. , the currently set setting value will be suggested.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41, pattern A is selected regardless of whether the setting value is an odd number setting, an even number setting, or a high setting (setting value 4 or more). possibility, and it will be selected with almost the same probability whether the setting is an odd number or an even number, and whether it is a high setting or a low setting (setting value 3 or less). Since they are selected with almost equal probability, if pattern A is executed, both the high probability of odd number setting and the high probability of even number setting are high settings. There is no indication that this is likely.

Pattern B may be selected when the setting value is an odd number setting, an even number setting, or a high setting (setting value 4 or more), and when the setting value is an odd number setting. Pattern B is executed because, while it is selected with a higher probability than when the setting is even, it is selected with almost the same probability when the setting is high or when the setting is low. , it is suggested that the odd setting is likely, but it does not suggest that the high setting is likely.

Pattern C may be selected when the setting value is an odd number setting, an even number setting, or a high setting (setting value 4 or more), and when the setting value is an even number setting. Pattern C is executed because it is selected with a higher probability than when the setting is an odd number, but it is selected with almost the same probability when the setting is high or when the setting is low. , it is suggested that the even number setting is likely, but it is not suggested that the high setting is likely.

Pattern D may be selected when the setting value is an odd number setting, an even number setting, or a high setting (setting value 4 or more), and in the case of a high setting. Pattern D is executed because it is selected with a higher probability than when the setting is low, but with almost the same probability when the setting is odd or even. , it is suggested that the high setting is likely, but it is not suggested that the odd number setting is high or the even number setting is likely.

As described above, in this embodiment, after transitioning to the AT state, the ED state is transitioned when the ED transition condition is satisfied, and after transitioning to the ED state, when the ED notification condition is satisfied, the ED start effect is executed. In addition, when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the ED state occurs in a situation where any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state is specified, the start of the ED state is identified and the ED notification condition is satisfied. In this case, since a common ED start effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the ED state is controlled.

In addition, even if the first ED transition condition, which is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the third specified number, is satisfied after transitioning to the AT state and the transition to the ED state is made, the predicted net increase in medals that is expected to increase in the future Even when the second ED transition condition based on the number of sheets is satisfied and the transition is made to the ED state, the start of the ED condition is specified, and when the ED notification condition is met, a common ED start effect is executed, so the ED state It is possible to make it easy to understand that the system is controlled by the system.

Also, after transitioning to the AT state, after the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is smaller than the third specified number, the navigation stock becomes a predetermined number or more, the second ED transition condition is satisfied, and the transition to the ED state occurs. Even in this case, after transitioning to the AT state, after the Navi stock reaches a predetermined number or more, the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is less than the third specified number, and the second ED transition condition is satisfied and ED Even when the vehicle enters the ED state, the start of the ED state is identified and when the ED notification conditions are met, a common ED start effect is executed, making it easy to recognize that the vehicle has been controlled to the ED state. can.

In addition, in the ED state, the ED effect is executed, and in a situation where any of the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state is specified, the ED transition condition is satisfied, the transition to the ED state is made, and the ED notification condition is satisfied. Even in this case, since a common ED effect is executed in the ED state, it is possible to clearly recognize that the vehicle is controlled in the ED state.

In addition, even if the first ED transition condition, which is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the third specified number, is satisfied after transitioning to the AT state and the transition to the ED state is made, the predicted net increase in medals that is expected to increase in the future Even when the second ED transition condition based on the number of sheets is satisfied and the transition to the ED state is made, a common ED effect is executed when the ED notification condition is satisfied, so it is easy to recognize that the control is in the ED state. can be done.

Also, after transitioning to the AT state, after the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is smaller than the third specified number, the navigation stock becomes a predetermined number or more, the second ED transition condition is satisfied, and the transition to the ED state occurs. Even in this case, after transitioning to the AT state, after the Navi stock reaches a predetermined number or more, the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is less than the third specified number, and the second ED transition condition is satisfied and ED Even when shifting to the ED state, a common ED effect is executed when the ED notification condition is satisfied, so that it is possible to clearly recognize that the vehicle is being controlled to the ED state.

In addition, in addition to executing the result notification effect at the end of the ED state, the ED state is Since a common result notification effect is executed at the end of the state, it is possible to easily recognize that the ED state has ended.

In addition, even if the first ED transition condition, which is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the third specified number, is satisfied after transitioning to the AT state and the transition to the ED state is made, the predicted net increase in medals that is expected to increase in the future Even when the second ED transition condition based on the number of sheets is satisfied and the transition is made to the ED state, a common result notification effect is executed at the end of the ED state, making it easy to recognize that the ED state has ended. .

Also, after transitioning to the AT state, after the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is smaller than the third specified number, the navigation stock becomes a predetermined number or more, the second ED transition condition is satisfied, and the transition to the ED state occurs. Even in this case, after transitioning to the AT state, after the Navi stock reaches a predetermined number or more, the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the fourth specified number, which is less than the third specified number, and the second ED transition condition is satisfied and ED Even when transitioning to the state, a common result notification effect is executed at the end of the ED state, so that it can be easily recognized that the ED state has ended.

In this embodiment, the third specified number for which the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the fifth specified number for which the third ED transition condition is satisfied vary, and the sub control unit 91 is controlled to be in the ED state by the main control unit 41 side. Even after the ED start effect is not executed, the ED effect may not be executed, so even in a situation where the ED start effect or ED effect is not executed, it is possible to make the user expect that the ED state is controlled. .

In addition, the sub-control unit 91 gives a higher probability in the state after transitioning to the ED state (before notification) than in the state before transitioning to the ED state (before notification), and when the specific combination is won, the sub-control unit 91 suggests a specific winning combination. The special role winning suggestion performance (B) and chance performance are executed, which suggests that there is a high possibility of winning in the navigation stock and additional state. Even if the winning state or the additional state is not won, it is possible to make the player expect that the ED state is controlled.

In addition, in the ED state (before notification), the sub-control unit 91 generates an ED start effect when a specific combination is won, which is a trigger for performing a navigation stock lottery or an additional state lottery if the AT state is in a state other than the ED state. The lottery is executed and the ED start performance is executed by winning the ED start performance lottery, so when a specific role is won, not only the navigation stock and additional state are won, but also the ED start performance is executed. In other words, it is possible to expect that the vehicle is controlled to be in the ED state. Also, after transitioning to the ED state, even if a specific role is won, the navigation stock or additional state will not be won, but after transitioning to the ED state, the winning of a specific role can be used as a trigger for the ED start effect. can.

Furthermore, the sub-control unit 91 increases the execution probability of navigation performance B among navigation performances A and B as the ED transition condition approaches the fulfillment of the ED transition condition, and the ratio of navigation performance B among navigation performances A and B is increased. By increasing , it can be expected that the first ED transition condition or the third ED transition condition will soon be satisfied.

Furthermore, when the value set as the third specified number is 1900 or less, that is, when a value with which the first ED transition condition is relatively likely to be satisfied is selected as the third specified number, the sub-control unit 91 controls the fifth specified number. If the value set as the specified number is 1250 or less, that is, if a value that makes it relatively easy to satisfy the 3rd ED transition condition is selected as the 5th specified number, navigation effect B of navigation effects A and B is selected. The probability of execution is increased, and by increasing the ratio of navigation performance B among navigation performance A and B, it is possible to make the user expect to transition to the ED state at an earlier stage.

In addition, in this example, it is suggested that a value with which the ED transition condition is relatively likely to be satisfied in the navigation performance executed after transition to the AT state is likely to have been selected as the third specified number or the fifth specified number. However, due to the difference in the production mode of the AT start production, it is a configuration that suggests that there is a high possibility that values for which the ED transition condition is relatively likely to be satisfied are selected as the third specified number or the fifth specified number. It's good as well.

In this embodiment, the ED start effect is an effect in which an ED start image is displayed in the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51, that is, the start of the ED state is suggested using the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51. , it is possible to clearly recognize that the ED transition condition is satisfied and the state is controlled to be in the ED state.

In addition, since the ED start effect is executed when the start operation is performed in the next game for which the ED notification condition is met, it is possible to draw attention to the effect at the start of the game, and the ED start effect is the effect after the start of the game. Since it is not affected by the content, the number of patterns for ED start effects can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ED start effect is executed when a start operation is performed in the game following the game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied, but the ED start effect is executed in the game after the game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied. Even if the ED start effect is executed when the start operation is performed, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In addition, in games where the ED notification condition has been met, instead of the performance suggesting that the ED notification condition has been met, navigation performance, special role winning performance (A) (B), small role winning performance, chance performance, etc. Since the effect according to the result of the internal lottery of the game or the result of the game is executed, it is possible to increase the surprise of the ED start effect in the game following the game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied.

In addition, in a game where the ED notification condition is met, when a multi-card winning winning combination is won and the navigation effect is executed, or when a specific role is won and the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) is executed, the ED Since the start performance is executed with priority, the surprise caused by the ED start performance can be prevented from being weakened by the navigation performance and the specific role winning suggestion performance (A).

In this embodiment, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, add-on state, and ED state (before notification), navigation performance is executed when a multi-push winning combination is won, and when a specific combination is won, a specific combination winning suggestion presentation (A )(B) is executed, while in the ED state (after notification), the navigation effect is executed when a multi-push order winning combination is won, but when a specific combination is won, a specific combination that requires a special combination The specific winning combination suggestion effect (A) is not executed except when ``is won'', and in the ED state (after notification), compared to the AT1 state, AT2 state, add-on state, and ED state (before notification), Since the rate of execution of performances suggesting the results of internal lottery, such as navigation performances and performances suggesting winning of specific roles (A) and (B), is lowered, attention can be drawn to the ED performances after the ED notification condition is established.

In particular, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and add-on state, if a specific combination is won, it suggests the possibility that the Navi stock will be added or the possibility of moving to the add-on state, but it will shift to the ED state. After that, even if a specific winning combination is won, the Navi stock will not be added to it, nor will it shift to the added state, so the importance of recognizing the winning of a specific winning combination in the ED state (after notification) is low, so ED By lowering the rate at which specific role winning suggestion effects (A) and (B) are executed in the ED state (after notification), the winning of a specific role with low importance is suggested in the ED state (after notification), thereby increasing the game play. It can reduce the hassle of people.

In addition, in the ED state (after notification), by switching the effect image being displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to a specific image that is different from the effect image and indicating that the specific role has been won, the specific role has been won. The special role winning suggestion effect (B) that suggests that the winning of a specific role is not executed is not executed, and the flashy effect in which images change during the execution of the ED effect is restricted, so that after the ED notification condition is established, attention is paid to the ED effect. can be done.

In particular, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and add-on state, by executing the specific winning combination suggestion effect (B), it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the Navi stock will be added or will move to the add-on state. However, even if a specific role is won, the Navi stock will not be added on, nor will it shift to the added state. After the ED notification condition is met, the performance suggesting the specific role win will not be added. By restricting the execution of (B), it is possible to prevent meaningless effects from being performed in the ED state (after notification).

In addition, as mentioned above, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, additional state, and ED state (before notification), by executing navigation effect B, it is possible to make people expect to be controlled to the ED state at an earlier stage. However, after the ED notification condition is met and the ED state is specified, the execution of navigation effect B will be restricted, resulting in meaningless effects being performed in the ED state (after notification). can be prevented.

In this embodiment, since the currently set setting value is suggested by the pattern of the ED effect executed in the ED state (after notification), it is possible to increase the interest of being controlled in the ED state.

In this example, the pattern of the ED effect suggests whether the current set value is likely to be an odd number setting, an even number setting, or a high setting. However, from the pattern of the ED production, there are configurations that suggest that there is a high possibility of specific setting values, odd number settings, even number settings, high settings, and specific setting values. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is determined that .

[About AT-related display section]
Notification of the AT-related state by the AT-related display section will be explained based on FIG. 42.

As for the AT-related display parts, an AT display part 61, an AT2 state display part 62, and an AT1 state display part 63 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a CZ display part 64 and an additional state display part 65 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C. . By controlling the lights to turn off, it is possible to notify the current status.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), when the main control unit 41 is in the normal state (non-AT state), the sub-control unit 91 controls all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e to turn off the AT display. 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the additional state display section 65 are all turned off. This allows the player and the like to recognize that the current state is not one of the AT-related states but the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 42(b), when the main control unit 41 shifts from the normal state to the CZ state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58d to turn on, while turning off the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58c and 58e. The state is maintained, and among the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65, only the CZ display section 64 is turned on. This allows the player and the like to recognize that the current state is the CZ state among the AT-related states.

As shown in FIG. 42(c), when the main control unit 41 shifts from the CZ state to the AT1 state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58d to turn off, and controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58c to turn on. On the other hand, the AT-related LEDs 58b and 58e remain off, and the AT display section 61, AT1 state display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are maintained. Only the status display section 63 is in a lighting mode. This allows the player and the like to recognize that the current state is the AT state and the AT1 state.

On the other hand, when the main control section 41 shifts from the CZ state to the normal state, the sub-control section 91 controls the AT-related LED 58d to turn off, while maintaining the off-state of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58c and 58e, and turns off the AT display section. 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the additional state display section 65 are all turned off (see FIG. 42(a)).

As shown in FIG. 42(d), when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT1 state to the AT2 state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58c to turn off, and controls the AT-related LED 58b to turn on. , the AT-related LEDs 58d and 58e remain off, and the AT-related LED 58a remains lit. Only the AT display section 61 and the AT2 status display section 62 are in a lighting mode. This allows the player and the like to recognize that the current state is the AT state and the AT2 state.

As shown in FIG. 42(e), when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state to the additional state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58b to turn off, and controls the AT-related LED 58e to turn on. , the AT-related LEDs 58c and 58d remain off, and the AT-related LED 58a remains lit. Only the AT display section 61 and the additional state display section 65 are in a lighting mode. This allows the player and the like to recognize that the current state is an AT state and an additional state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the additional state to the AT2 state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58e to turn off, and controls the AT-related LED 58b to turn on, while turning off the AT-related LEDs 58c and 58d. The AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are maintained. Only the portion 62 is in a lighting mode (see FIG. 42(d)).

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state to the AT1 state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LED 58b to turn off, and controls the AT-related LED 58c to turn on, while turning off the AT-related LEDs 58d and 58e. The AT display section 61, AT1 state display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are maintained. Only the portion 63 is in a lighting mode (see FIG. 42(c)).

On the other hand, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state to the normal state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58b to turn off, while maintaining the off-state of the AT-related LEDs 58c to 58e, and controls the AT display. 61, the AT2 state display section 62, the AT1 state display section 63, the CZ display section 64, and the additional state display section 65 are all turned off (see FIG. 42(a)).

As shown in FIG. 42(f), when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT1 state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 then lights up the AT-related LEDs 58b, 58d, and 58e when the ED notification condition is satisfied. At the same time, the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58c are maintained in the lighting state, and the AT display section 61, AT2 status display section 62, AT1 status display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional status display section 65 are all in the lighting mode. Become. This allows the player and the like to recognize that the current state is the AT state and the ED state.

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58c to 58e to turn on when the ED notification condition is met, while turning on the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58b. The state is maintained, and the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 all turn on (see FIG. 42(f)).

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the additional state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58b to 58d to turn on when the ED notification condition is met, while turning on the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58e. The state is maintained, and the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 all turn on (see FIG. 42(f)).

That is, when the main control section 41 shifts from the AT1 state, AT2 state, or additional state to the ED state, the sub control section 91 changes the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, and the AT1 state when the ED notification condition is satisfied. Of the display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65, all the displays can be changed to the lighting mode while maintaining the lighting mode of the display section that is already in the lighting mode, and setting the other display sections that are in the off mode to the lighting mode. The part is the lighting mode.

On the other hand, when transitioning from the ED state to the normal state, the sub-control unit 91 controls all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e to turn off, and the AT display unit 61, AT2 status display unit 62, AT1 status display unit 63, and CZ display The section 64 and the added state display section 65 are all turned off (see FIG. 42(a)).

In this way, in this embodiment, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state other than the ED state, all the AT-related display parts do not turn on at the same time, and in the ED state, all the AT-related display parts turn on. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that the state is controlled to be in the ED state.

In this embodiment, the AT-related display section includes an AT display section 61, an AT2 state display section 62, an AT1 state display section 63, a CZ display section 64, and an additional state display section 65. In a configuration that can be controlled to a plurality of states other than the ED state, it is sufficient that the configuration includes two or more AT-related display sections corresponding to a plurality of states other than the ED state, such as an AT2 state display section 62 and an AT1 state display section 63. It may also consist of only Furthermore, in this embodiment, the AT-related display section is configured to be turned on or off to notify that the corresponding state is being controlled. It may be configured to notify that the state is being controlled.

Further, in this embodiment, as AT-related display sections, an AT1 state display section 63, an AT2 state display section 62, and an additional state display section 65 are provided corresponding to the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, respectively, and the corresponding AT It is possible to specify that the corresponding state is being controlled by lighting the related display parts, and until the transition to the ED state, each display part can be used as a light emitting part to notify the corresponding state. After the AT state is established and the ED state is established, and the ED notification condition is satisfied, these AT-related display parts can be used as a light emitting part to notify the ED state. In particular, the ED state is a state that transitions less frequently than the AT1 state and AT2 state, and it is possible to notify that the ED state has been controlled without providing a dedicated display section for such a state. becomes possible.

Further, in this embodiment, when the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and the transition is made to the ED state, the AT2 state display section 62 and the additional state display section 65 are turned on while the AT1 state display section 63 remains in the lighting mode. When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT2 state and the transition is made to the ED state, the AT1 state display section 63 and the additional state display section 65 are set to the lighting state while the AT2 state display section 62 remains lit. , when the ED transition condition is satisfied in the addition state and the transition is made to the ED state, the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are set to the lighting state while the addition state display section 65 remains lit. When controlling the state, it is only necessary to set the light-emitting portions that are not in the lighting mode to the lighting mode, so the control becomes easy.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the AT-related display section includes the AT display section 61 that lights up in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state, Since the AT display section 61 is also lit regardless of whether it is in the ED state or not, it becomes easy to understand that the ED state is controlled.

Further, in this embodiment, the AT display section 61, the AT2 state display section 62, and the AT1 state display section 63 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the CZ display section 64 and the additional state display section 65 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. , 2C, and 2R, so that the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are easily visible during the game. Since they are arranged on the left and right sides of 2C and 2R, it is easy to understand that the control is in the ED state.

Next, a modification example when transitioning to the ED state in notification by the AT-related display section will be described based on FIG. 43.

In the example shown in FIG. 42, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT1 state, AT2 state, or additional state to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 changes the state of the AT-related display unit to Although the configuration was such that the lighting mode of the display section that is the lighting mode is maintained, and the other display sections that are in the off mode are set to the lighting mode, in the modified example shown in FIG. When the state or additional state shifts to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 turns off the AT-related display parts that are already in the lit state when the ED notification condition is satisfied, and turns off all the AT-related display parts. This is a configuration in which all of the AT-related display sections are turned on after being turned off.

As shown in FIG. 43, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT1 state (see FIG. 43(a)) to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 turns off the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58c when the ED notification condition is satisfied. At the same time, the AT-related LEDs 58b, 58d, and 58e are kept in the off state, and the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are all turned off. The light is turned off (see FIG. 43(d)). Then, all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e are controlled to be lit, and all of the AT display section 61, AT2 status display section 62, AT1 status display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional status display section 65 are turned on. (See FIG. 43(e)).

Further, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the AT2 state (see FIG. 43(b)) to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58b to turn off when the ED notification condition is satisfied. , the AT-related LEDs 58c to 58e remain off, and the AT display section 61, AT2 status display section 62, AT1 status display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional status display section 65 are all turned off (Fig. 43 (see (d)). Then, all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e are controlled to be lit, and all of the AT display section 61, AT2 status display section 62, AT1 status display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional status display section 65 are turned on. (See FIG. 43(e)).

Furthermore, when the main control unit 41 shifts from the additional state (see FIG. 43(d)) to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 controls the AT-related LEDs 58a and 58e to turn off when the ED notification condition is satisfied. , the AT-related LEDs 58b to 58d remain off, and the AT display section 61, AT2 status display section 62, AT1 status display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional status display section 65 are all turned off (Fig. 43 (see (d)). Then, all of the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e are controlled to be lit, and all of the AT display section 61, AT2 status display section 62, AT1 status display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional status display section 65 are turned on. (See FIG. 43(e)).

As shown above, the AT display section 61, AT2 status display section 62, AT1 status display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional status display section 65 are all turned off once and then turned on, so that the current Not only can the player etc. recognize that the state is the ED state among the AT-related states, but it is also easy to make the player etc. clearly recognize that the state has been switched to the ED state.

Furthermore, the AT display section 61, AT2 status display section 62, AT1 status display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional status display section 65 may be configured to go through a blinking mode and then to the lighting mode before being set to the lighting mode. With this configuration, when controlling to the ED state, the light emitting parts that were in the lighting mode depending on the state are once turned off, and then all the light emitting parts are turned on after going through the blinking mode. Since it is in a lighting mode, it becomes easier to understand that the state has shifted to the ED state.

[About continuous performance in AT state]
In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 indicates the possibility of transitioning to the AT1 state from five games before the end of the AT2 state to the game in which the AT2 state ends, and also indicates whether or not to transition to the AT1 state in the final game. A continuous performance is performed to notify the results.

On the other hand, the main control unit 41 controls the performance execution state in which continuous performance is permitted for a period from five games before the AT2 state ends until the AT2 state ends, and also controls the performance execution state as shown in FIG. When the second ED shift condition is satisfied in the execution state, control is performed to shift to the ED state from the next game after the performance execution state, that is, the AT2 state has ended, instead of shifting to the ED state from the next game. At this time, when an operation is performed to start the next game after the performance execution state has ended, that is, a game in which the ED state starts, control is performed to the ED freeze state at the start of the ED state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the sub control unit 91 executes the continuous performance during the period in which the main control unit 41 is controlling the performance execution state, and when the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance. Even if the continuous performance is finished, the continuous performance is continued, and after the continuous performance is finished, that is, when the main control part 41 shifts to the ED state and the game start operation is performed, the ED start performance is executed, and then the ED performance is executed.

Therefore, if the second ED transition condition is met during the execution of a continuous performance, the continuous performance will not be interrupted and the game will transition to the ED state from the next game where the continuous performance has ended, and the next game after the continuous performance has ended. When the game start operation is performed, the ED start effect is executed, and thereafter the ED effect is executed.

As described above, in this embodiment, during execution of a continuous performance spanning multiple games, control related to the ED state is restricted, that is, control to transition to the ED state is limited, so the control related to the ED state can control the interest of the continuous performance. can be prevented from being damaged.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 suggests the possibility of transitioning to the AT1 state, that is, the possibility of the AT state continuing, from five games before the end of the AT2 state until the end of the AT2 state. This is a configuration that executes a continuous performance, but in a configuration that can execute a continuous performance over multiple games at least in the AT state, if the configuration restricts control related to the ED state while the continuous performance is being executed, the same as above can be applied. It is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous performance from being lost due to the interruption of the continuous performance due to control related to the ED state. For example, when a specific combination is won in the AT2 state, it may be configured to execute a continuous performance that suggests the possibility of shifting to the add-on state over a plurality of games. In addition, if the configuration is such that it is possible to shift to the add-on state when a specific combination is won in the AT1 state, it is possible to shift to the add-on state over multiple games when a specific combination is won in the AT1 state. It is also possible to have a configuration that executes a continuous suggestion.

In this embodiment, when the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance, that is, during the period when the main control unit 41 is controlling the performance execution state, the ED state starts after the continuous performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous performance from being lost due to transition to the ED state during the execution of the continuous performance.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the ED state is made, when the start operation of the game that transitioned to the ED state is performed, the game is controlled to an ED freeze state that delays the progress of the game. Even if the continuous performance is continued even after the transition to the ED state, the transition to the ED state will be identified by being controlled to the ED freeze state midway through, suggesting the possibility that the AT state will continue in the continuous performance. However, in this embodiment, even if the second ED transition condition is met during the execution of a continuous performance, the ED state remains until the continuous performance ends. , the ED freeze state is not controlled in the middle of the continuous performance, and the establishment of the ED transition condition is not specified in the middle of the continuous performance.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to determine whether the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game if the advantageous period is in progress, regardless of whether or not the performance is being executed. When it is determined that the second ED transition condition is satisfied in the performance execution state, the control is not controlled to the ED state until the performance execution state ends, and the control is controlled to the ED state when the performance execution state ends. However, by not determining whether or not the ED transition condition is satisfied when the main control unit 41 is in the performance execution state, even if the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance, the continuous It may be configured such that the transition to the ED state is not performed until the performance ends. With such a configuration, the main control unit 41 can avoid making unnecessary determinations in the performance execution state where transition to the ED state is restricted. You don't have to do it.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the control related to the ED state is restricted during the execution of the continuous performance, and the transition to the ED state is restricted during the execution of the continuous performance, but as shown in FIG. When the second ED transition condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 controls the transition to the ED state from the next game, regardless of whether or not continuous production is being executed, and when the start operation of the game is performed, While controlling to the ED freeze state, the sub control unit 91 continues the continuous performance that is being executed even if the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance, and the transition to the ED state is controlled to the ED freeze state. However, the ED start effect may be executed when the start operation of the next game after the continuous effect is completed, and the ED effect may be started subsequently.With such a structure, the continuous effect can be There is no need to perform any special control on the main control unit 41 side regarding the execution, and even if the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance and the transition to the ED state occurs, the continuous performance will continue and the continuous performance will continue. Since the ED start effect is executed and the ED effect is started after the end, the continuous effect will not be interrupted even if the ED state is entered while the continuous effect is being executed, and the interest of the continuous effect will not be lost. It can be prevented.

In this embodiment, when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and an operation to start the game that has transitioned to the ED state is performed, the game is controlled to an ED freeze state that delays the progress of the game. It may be possible to have a configuration in which the ED freeze state is not controlled in a game that has been established and has transitioned to the ED state.With such a configuration, the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the game has transitioned to the ED state during the execution of a continuous performance. Even in the case where the sub-control unit 91 continues the ongoing continuous performance, the progress of the game is not delayed while the continuous performance is being executed, so the continuous performance can be continued without any discomfort.

In addition, in a configuration in which the sub-control unit 91 continues the ongoing continuous performance even if the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance and the transition to the ED state is satisfied, one of the contents of the continuous performance may be changed. It is preferable to change the part, and with such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the content of the continuous performance is changed, thereby transitioning to the ED state by the continuous performance. In particular, it is preferable to change the performance result that is initially announced in the final game of a continuous performance to a performance result that indicates the transition to the ED state.With such a configuration, after the continuous performance ends, the ED can be played without any discomfort. It can be connected to the start performance and ED performance.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the control related to the ED state is restricted during the execution of the continuous performance, and the transition to the ED state is restricted during the execution of the continuous performance, but as shown in FIG. When a continuous performance is executed, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution period (5 games) of the continuous performance and there is a possibility that the second ED transition condition is satisfied, that is, the medal after transition to the AT state. If the net increase in the number of sheets exceeds the fourth regulation number of 1600 and there is a possibility that the number of navigation stocks will be 8 or more, the continuous performance regulation period will be applied until the second ED transition condition is met, and during that period By not performing the continuous performance, the control related to the ED state may be restricted during the execution of the continuous performance, and with such a configuration, the second ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance. If there is a possibility, the continuous performance will not be executed, so that the interest of the continuous performance can be prevented from being lost due to transition to the ED state during the execution of the continuous performance.

[About the AT state of the second form]
Next, the second form of control regarding the AT state performed by the main control unit 41 will be described. Note that the AT state of the second form includes common configurations with the AT state of the first form, such as ED transition conditions, and here, the different configurations from the AT state of the first form will be explained. Furthermore, since the modified examples having common configurations and similar configurations to the AT state of the first form are also applicable to the AT state of the second form, their descriptions will be omitted here.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), in the AT state of the second form, the main control unit 41 operates in an increasing state, a decreasing state (end), a decreasing state (continuing), an additional state (1), an additional state (2). , it is possible to control to a plurality of states including the ED state.

When transitioning to the AT state, the main control unit 41 first controls the increase state as shown in FIG. 47(a).

In the increasing state, as shown in Figure 47(b), navigation notification will be performed with a 100% probability when a multi-card winning combination is won, and although it varies slightly depending on the setting value, the number of medals per game will increase. The payout rate is approximately 200%, and the average net number of coins added per game is approximately 3.0 coins. In the increasing state, a navi stock lottery is performed to determine whether or not to grant navi stock, which is the right to control the increasing state, and an additional state lottery is performed to determine whether to control to the additional state. In the increasing state, 25 is set as the number of remaining games at the start, and the remaining number of games becomes 0. In other words, after the start of the increasing state, 25 games must elapse, or the additional state lottery must occur before the number of remaining games reaches 0. It ends when you win.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), when the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the increasing state ends, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not there is any navigation stock remaining at the end, and determines whether or not the navigation stock is If there is no remaining amount, control is performed to reduce the amount (end). On the other hand, if the navigation stock remains, it is controlled to decrease (continue).

In the decreasing state (end) and decreasing state (continuing), as shown in FIG. 47(b), navigation notification is not performed, and the payout rate of medals per game is approximately 66, although it varies slightly depending on the setting value. %, and the average net increase in the number of coins per game is approximately -1.0. In other words, the number of medals will decrease. Also, in the decreasing state (end) and decreasing state (continuation), the Navi stock lottery and the additional state lottery are performed. The decreasing state (end) means that 11 is set as the number of remaining games at the start and the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 11 games have passed after the start of the decreasing state (end), or the remaining number of games has become 0. It ends by winning the Navi stock lottery or winning the additional state lottery before the event. In addition, in the decreasing state (continuing), the number of remaining games is determined from 1 to 11 at the start, and the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 1 to 11 games have passed after the decreasing state (continuing) started. Or, the game ends by winning the additional state lottery before the number of remaining games reaches 0.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the main control unit 41 ends the AT state and controls to the non-AT state when the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the decreasing state (end) ends. On the other hand, if the Navi Stock is won and the decreasing state (end) ends, the number of remaining games is determined as one of 0 to 3, and if the number of remaining games is determined to be 0, the Navi Stock is Consume one and control the increase again. In addition, if 1 to 3 are determined as the number of remaining games, the control is performed in a decreasing state (continuing), and then the decreasing state (continuing) is ended when the remaining number of games becomes 0, and then the decreasing state (continuing) is changed again to the increasing state. Control.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47(a), when the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the decreasing state (continuation) ends, the main control unit 41 consumes one navigation stock and returns to the increasing state again. Control.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 47(a), the main control unit 41 controls whether the additional state (1) is won in any of the increasing state, decreasing state (end), and decreasing state (continuation). , and if the winning state (2) is won, control is performed to the winning state (2).

In the add-on state (1) and the add-on state (2), as shown in FIG. 47(b), navigation notification will be performed with a 100% probability when a multi-card winning combination is won, and there will be a slight difference depending on the setting value. Although it is different, the payout rate of medals per game is about 200%, and the average net increase in the number of medals per game is about 3.0. In the add-on state (1), a navigation stock lottery is performed. At this time, the winning probability of Navi Stock is given preferential treatment than in the increasing state, decreasing state (end), and decreasing state (continuation), and relatively more Navi Stocks can be expected to be won. In addition, additional status lottery will not be conducted. The additional state (1) is set to 10 as the number of remaining games at the start, and ends when the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 10 games have elapsed after the start of the additional state (1). Further, the additional state (2) is set to 25 as the number of remaining games at the start, and ends when the remaining number of games becomes 0, that is, 25 games have elapsed after the start of the additional state (2). For this reason, the Navi stock lottery will be held with a higher probability of preferential treatment over a long number of games in the additional state (2) than in the additional state (1), and therefore in the additional state (2) than in the additional state (1) ) is more advantageous for the player.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), when the number of remaining games becomes 0 and the additional state (1) or the additional state (2) ends, the main control unit 41 restarts the game without consuming the navigation stock. Control to increase state.

In this way, in the AT state in the second form, an increasing state in which the number of medals increases due to the navigation notification being performed, and a decreasing state in which the number of medals decreases without the navigation notification being performed, are repeatedly looped alternately. In addition, the payout rate of medals in the increasing state and decreasing state is changed depending on the presence or absence of navigation notification in the AT state.

In addition, in the AT state in the second form, the configuration is such that an increasing state in which the number of medals increases due to the navigation notification being performed and a decreasing state in which the number of medals decreases without the navigation notification being performed are repeatedly looped alternately. In the AT state in the second form, the first state and the second state with different probabilities of navigation notification are alternately looped, and the rate of navigation notification in the AT state is different from the first state. A configuration may also be adopted in which the payout rate of medals in the second state is varied.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47(a), the main control unit 41 is configured to select one of the following states: increasing state, decreasing state (end), decreasing state (continuing), additional state (1), and additional state (2). Even if it is controlled, it is controlled to the ED state when the first to third ED transition conditions are satisfied, similar to the AT state of the first embodiment. In the ED state, as shown in Figure 47(b), navigation notification will be performed with a 75% probability when a multi-card winning combination is won, and although it varies slightly depending on the setting value, the number of medals per game is The payout rate is approximately 167%, and the average net increase in number of coins per game is approximately 2.0 coins. Further, in the ED state, the Navi stock lottery and the additional state lottery are not performed. In the ED state, the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of games in the advantageous section) reaches the first specified number (1500 games in this example) and the end condition 1 of the advantageous section is satisfied, or the number of medals in the advantageous section is increased. When the number of sheets exceeds the second specified number (2395 in this embodiment), the second condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied, and the process ends together with the advantageous section.

The winning probability of Navi stock in the increasing state is set to low probability 1, as shown in FIG. is 1% for stock number 1 and 0% for stock number 2, and the probability of winning when FC1 is won is 10% for stock number 1 and 0% for stock number 2, and the probability of winning when FC2 is won is: Stock number 1 is 30%, stock number 2 is 0%, and when winning FC3, the winning probability is 79% for stock number 1 and stock number 2 is 1%, and when winning FC4, the winning probability is based on stock number. 1 is 25%, stock number 2 is 0%, the number of Navi Stocks that can be expected to win per game in the increasing state is approximately 0.02, and the number of Navi Stocks that can be expected to be won per game in the increasing state is approximately It becomes 0.47 pieces.

After transitioning to the AT state, the main control unit 41 is configured to count the number of controlled increase states in the AT state, and the probability of winning the Navi stock in the decrease state (end) is determined by the number of times the Navi stock is controlled in the AT state. Different probabilities are applied depending on the number of increased states. In addition, here, the winning probability of Navi stock in the decreasing state (end) is different depending on the number of controlled increasing states in the AT state, but after the increasing state ends, the decreasing state changes to the increasing state again. The number of loops performed is counted, and the winning probability of the navigation stock in the decreasing state (end) may be different depending on the number of loops in the AT state.

As shown in FIG. 47(b), the winning probability of Navi stock in the decreasing state (end) is the decreasing state (end) after the second to fourth consecutive increasing states (after the second to fourth increasing states in the AT state). It is set to a high probability, and it is low in the decreasing state (end) after the first increasing state (after the first increasing state in AT state) or after the fifth consecutive increasing state (after the fifth increasing state in AT state). The probability is set to 2.

At high probability, as shown in FIG. 48(c), the probability of winning when FC0 is won is 20% for stock number 1, and the winning probability when winning FC1 to FC4 is 100% for stock number 1. The number of Navi stock wins that can be expected per game in a decreasing state (end) after 2 to 4 consecutive increases is approximately 0.23, and is expected per game in a decreasing state (completed) after 2 to 4 consecutive increasing states. The number of winning Navi stocks that can be won is approximately 0.94.

In low probability 2, as shown in FIG. 48(b), the probability of winning when FC0 is won is 0% for both stock number 1 and stock number 2, and the winning probability when winning FC1 is 0% for stock number 1. %, stock number 2 is 3%, the winning probability when winning FC2 is 6% for stock number 1, 3% for stock number 2, and the winning probability when winning FC3 is 7% for stock number 1, Stock number 2 is 2%, and the probability of winning when winning FC4 is 8% for stock number 1 and 4% for stock number 2. Decrease state (end) after 1st or 5th consecutive increase state (end) 1 The number of Navi Stocks that can be expected to be won per game is approximately 0.003, and the number of Navi Stocks that can be expected to be won per game is approximately 0.03 in the Decrease state (end) after 1 consecutive increase or 5 consecutive times. become individual.

As shown in Figure 47(b), the winning probability of Navi Stock in the decreasing state (continuation) is set to low probability 2, and the number of Navi Stock winnings that can be expected per game in the decreasing state (continuing) is approximately The number of winning Navi stocks that can be expected per decreasing state (continuation) varies depending on the number of games, and is about 0.003 to about 0.03.

The probability of winning the Navi stock in the add-on state (1) and the add-on state (2) is set to a high probability, as shown in FIG. The number of winning Navi stocks that can be expected per round is approximately 0.23, and the number of Navi stock winnings that can be expected per round in the added state (1) is approximately 2.31, and the number of won Navi stocks per round in the added state (2) is approximately 2.31. The number of winning Navi stocks that can be expected is approximately 5.78.

Different probabilities are applied to the winning probability of the additional state in the increasing state depending on the number of controlled increasing states in the AT state. Note that here, the winning probability of the additional state in the increasing state is different depending on the number of controlled increasing states in the AT state, but the winning probability of the additional state in the increasing state is different depending on the number of loops in the AT state described above. A configuration with different probabilities may also be used.

As shown in Figure 47(b), the winning probability of the add-on state in the increasing state is high in the increasing state of the fifth consecutive last digit (the increasing state of the number of times the last digit becomes 5 in the AT state). The probability is set to be low in the increasing state other than the fifth consecutive last digit.

In the low probability case, as shown in FIG. 48(d), the probability of winning when FC0 is won is 0% in both additional states (1) and (2), and the winning probability when winning FC1 is in the additional state (1). is 0%, additional state (2) is 2%, and the probability of winning FC2 is 1% in addition state (1) and 0% in addition state (2), and the probability of winning when FC3 is selected is , additional state (1) is 5%, additional state (2) is 1%, and when winning FC4, the winning probability is 53.5% for additional state (1) and 1.5% for additional state (2). Therefore, the probability of winning an additional state that can be expected per game in an increasing state other than the fifth consecutive last digit is approximately 0.2%, and the winning probability that can be expected per increasing state other than the fifth consecutive last digit is approximately 0.2%. The state's winning probability is approximately 5%.

In the high probability case, as shown in FIG. 48(e), the probability of winning when FC0 is won is 0% in both the additional states (1) and (2), and the winning probability when winning FC1 is in the additional state (1). is 0%, additional state (2) is 33%, the winning probability when winning FC2 is 0% for additional state (1), and 3% for additional state (2), and the winning probability when winning FC3 is , the probability of winning FC4 is 0% in the addition state (1) and 75% in the addition state (2), and the probability of winning FC4 is 0% in the addition state (1), 67% in the addition state (2), and 75% in the addition state (2). The winning probability of an additional state that can be expected per game with an increase of 5 consecutive single digits is approximately 2.8%, and the winning probability of an additional state that can be expected per game with an increase of 5 consecutive lower digits is approximately 51%. .1%. In addition, when the probability is high, not only is the probability of winning in the add-on state higher than when the probability is low, but also the probability of winning in the add-on state (2), where you can expect to win more Navi stocks than in the add-on state (1), is higher. It is set as follows.

In addition to the above, in addition to the above, when winning Replay 1A and Replay 2, there is a 100% probability of winning the additional state (1), and when winning the common 1-card combination, there is a 100% probability of winning the additional state (2). be elected. In addition, in the decreasing state (end) and decreasing state (continuation), additional state lottery will not be held for winning FC0 to 4, but as in the increasing state, the probability of winning Replay 1A and Replay 2 is 100%. When winning the common 1-card combination, you win the additional state (2) with a 100% probability. However, the winning probabilities for Replay 1A, Replay 2, and the common 1-card combination are 14/65536 in total, which is extremely small.

When the main control unit 41 is controlled to the decreasing state (continuation) after the increasing state ends, that is, when one or more navigation stocks remain and it is determined that the increasing state is to be controlled again, At the start of the decreasing state (continuation), a decreasing state game number lottery is performed in which the remaining number of games in the decreasing state (continuing), that is, the number of games until the control is again controlled to increase the state, is selected from 1 to 11G.

In the decreasing number of games lottery where the decreasing state (continuation) is controlled after the increasing state ends, the selection rate of the number of games varies depending on the number of increasing states controlled in the AT state and the set value. Note that here, the selection rate of the number of games in the decreasing game number lottery is different depending on the number of controlled increase states in the AT state, but the selection rate of the number of games in the decreasing game number lottery is different depending on the number of loops in the AT state described above. A configuration with different selection rates for the number of games may be used.

The selection rate of the number of games at the start of the decreasing state (continuation) after 1 consecutive increasing state (after the first increasing state in AT state) or after 5 consecutive increasing states (after the first increasing state in AT state) As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the setting value is 1 to 5, 1G is 61%, 2G is 1%, 3G is 6%, 4G is 5%, 5G is 5%, and 6G is 0. %, 7G is 6%, 8G is 5%, 9G is 1%, 10G is 2%, and 11G is 8%, the average number of games is approximately 3.25G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 1G. becomes. Also, when the setting value is 6, 1G is 60%, 2G is 1%, 3G is 7%, 4G is 4%, 5G is 5%, 6G is 1%, 7G is 6%, 8G is 5%, 9G is 1%, 10G is 2%, and 11G is 8%, the average number of games is approximately 3.29G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 1G.

As shown in FIG. 49(b), the selection rate of the number of games at the start of the decreasing state (continuation) after two consecutive increasing states (after the second increasing state in the AT state) is as follows: In this case, 1G is 1.75%, 2G is 1.75%, 3G is 70%, 4G is 4.5%, 5G is 4.5%, 6G is 0%, 7G is 3.5%, 8G is 3.5%, 9G 3.5%, 10G 3.5%, 11G 3.5%, the average number of games is approximately 4.13G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 3G. Become. Also, when the setting value is 6, 1G is 2.5%, 2G is 2.5%, 3G is 70%, 4G is 4.5%, 5G is 4.5%, 6G is 1%, and 7G is 3%, 8G 3%, 9G 3%, 10G 3%, 11G 3%, the average number of games is 3.99G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 3G. Further, regardless of the setting value, the selection rate for the number of games of 4G or more, which is larger than 3G, which has the highest selection rate, is higher than the selection rate for the number of games, 2G or less, which is smaller than 3G, which has the highest selection rate.

As shown in FIG. 49(c), the selection rate of the number of games at the start of the decreasing state (continuation) after three consecutive increasing states (after the third increasing state in the AT state) is as follows: In this case, 1G is 1.75%, 2G is 1.75%, 3G is 4.5%, 4G is 4.5%, 5G is 70%, 6G is 0%, 7G is 3.5%, 8G is 3.5%, 9G 3.5%, 10G 3.5%, 11G 3.5%, the average number of games is approximately 5.44G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 5G. Become. Also, when the setting value is 6, 1G is 2.5%, 2G is 2.5%, 3G is 4.5%, 4G is 4.5%, 5G is 70%, 6G is 1%, and 7G is 3%, 8G 3%, 9G 3%, 10G 3%, 11G 3%, the average number of games is 5.3G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 5G. Moreover, regardless of the setting value, the selection rate for the number of games of 6G or more, which is larger than 5G with the highest selection rate, is higher than the selection rate of the number of games of 4G or less, which is smaller than 5G, which has the highest selection rate.

The selection rate for the number of games at the start of the decreasing state (continuation) after four consecutive increasing states (after the fourth increasing state in the AT state) is as shown in FIG. 49(d), when the setting value is 1 to 5. In this case, 1G is 4%, 2G is 4%, 3G is 4%, 4G is 4%, 5G is 4%, 6G is 0%, 7G is 2.5%, 8G is 25%, 9G is 25%, 10G is 25% and 11G is 2.5%, the average number of games is approximately 7.8G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 8 to 10G. Also, when the setting value is 6, 1G is 3%, 2G is 4%, 3G is 4%, 4G is 4%, 5G is 4%, 6G is 1%, 7G is 2.5%, 8G is 25%. %, 9G is 25%, 10G is 25%, and 11G is 2.5%, the average number of games is 7.85G, and the number of games with the highest probability of being selected is 8 to 10G.

In addition, the main control unit 41 determines that when the decreasing state (end) is controlled to the decreasing state (continuation), that is, in the decreasing state (ending), the navigation stock is won and the control is again controlled to the increasing state. In this case, at the start of the decreasing state (continuation), the number of games remaining in the decreasing state (continuing), that is, the number of games remaining until the decreasing state (continuing) is controlled again, is selected from 0 to 3G. I do. Note that if 0G is won, the number will not be controlled to a decreasing state (continuation), but will be directly controlled to an increasing state.

In the decreasing game number lottery when the control is controlled from a decreasing state (end) to a decreasing state (continuing), as shown in FIG. The number of games varies depending on the number of games, and the number of games that does not exceed 11G in total with the number of games in which the Navi stock wins in the reduced state (end) will be selected.

In this way, in the AT state of the second form, in a configuration in which an increasing state where the medal payout rate is high and a decreasing state where the medal payout rate is low are repeatedly looped, after the increasing state ends, the increasing state is resumed. If it is decided that the game will be controlled, the number of games will vary after the start of the decreasing state until it is controlled again to the increasing state, so after the increasing state ends, it will be decided that it will be controlled again to the increasing state. Until the maximum number of games that can be selected in the decreasing state has elapsed, it is possible to expect a transition to the increasing state again.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period during which the decreasing state (continuing) is controlled is changed by selecting the number of games from a plurality of games in the decreasing game number lottery. However, it may be possible to terminate the decreasing state (continuation) by winning the ending lottery in the decreasing state (continuing) and control it to the increasing state. In such a configuration, the winning probability of the ending lottery is A configuration may also be adopted in which the period during which the decreasing state (continuation) is controlled varies by selecting from a plurality of probabilities depending on the number of times the increasing state is performed in the AT state and the set value.

In addition, in the decreasing state game number lottery, both a number of games smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate and a number of games larger than the number of games with the highest selection rate can be selected according to the number of increasing states. In particular, if the number of games with the highest selection rate is greater than the number of games with the highest selection rate than the number of games with the highest selection rate is smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate, that is, after the end of the second continuous increase state. , or after the end of the third consecutive increasing state, the selection rate for the number of games with the highest selection rate is higher than the selection rate for the number of games smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate. Since this is set, it is possible to expect that the transition to the increasing state will occur even if the number of games with the highest selection rate has elapsed after the start of the decreasing state, depending on the number of times the game has been controlled to the increasing state.

Note that if the number of games with the highest selection rate is smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate is greater than the number of games with the highest selection rate, that is, after the end of the fourth consecutive increase state, the number of games with the highest selection rate is greater than the number of games with the highest selection rate. The selection rate for the number of games with the highest selection rate is set higher than the selection rate for the number of games with the highest selection rate. After the second or third consecutive increase, the selection rate for a number of games greater than the number of games with the highest selection rate is greater than the selection rate for a number of games smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate. may be set high, and by doing this, the number of games that is smaller than the number of games with the highest selection rate and the number of games that is larger than the number of games with the highest selection rate depending on the number of increasing states. If both of and can be selected, in either case, after the start of the decreasing state, the increasing state will be entered even if the number of games with the highest selection rate has elapsed according to the number of times the increasing state has been controlled. I can make you look forward to it.

In addition, in the decreasing game number lottery, 6G is not selected when the setting value is 1 to 5, but 6G is selected only when the setting value is 6, which indicates that the number of games increasing. After the game ends, the number of games until the game is controlled to increase again becomes 6G, which suggests that the setting value is likely to be 6. In other words, the setting value is suggested by the number of games until the increasing state is controlled again after the increasing state ends, and it is possible to focus on the period until the increasing state is controlled again in the decreasing state. .

Note that a specific setting value is not limited to the one in which a specific setting value is suggested by selecting the number of games in a decreasing state game number lottery, but the setting value can be set by selecting the number of games in a decreasing state game number lottery at a selection rate according to the setting value. It may be a configuration that suggests whether it is likely to be an odd number, is likely to be an even number, is likely to be greater than or equal to a specific set value, etc. Even in this case, it is possible to focus on the period from the decreasing state until the increasing state is controlled again.

Furthermore, after the increasing state ends, whether or not the increasing state is controlled again is determined by the presence or absence of the navigation stock, and whether the increasing state is controlled again before the decreasing state starts in the AT state. If it has been decided whether or not to do so, and if it has also been decided to control the game to an increasing state again, the number of games to be played before being controlled to an increasing state again at the start of a decreasing state is determined by a lottery for the number of games in a decreasing state. Therefore, when the increasing state is controlled again after the increasing state ends, there is no need to perform a lottery etc. to decide whether to end the decreasing state and start the increasing state. The control after the process can be simplified.

In addition, after the increase state ends, whether or not to be controlled to the increase state again, and if it is determined to be controlled to the increase state again, the number of games until it is controlled to the increase state again is determined by the number of games in the decrease state. If the configuration is determined before the start, the control after being controlled to the decreasing state can be simplified, and if the configuration is such that it is determined at the start of the decreasing state whether or not to control to the increasing state again, it is possible to control the increasing state again. The same effect as described above can be obtained even if the configuration is such that when it is determined that the control is to be performed in the increasing state, the number of games until the control is again changed to the increasing state is determined before the start of the decreasing state.

Next, the characteristics of the increasing state, decreasing state (continuation), and decreasing state (end) in the AT state of the second form will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the increasing state other than the fifth consecutive last digit, the probability of winning in the add-on state is low; In the increasing state of consecutive rows...), the probability of winning in the additional state is high, and the increasing state of the fifth consecutive digit in the last digit is larger than the increasing state other than the fifth consecutive digit in the last digit. can be expected to win.

In addition, the probability of winning Navi Stock in the Navi Stock lottery is low in the decreasing state (continuation) after the end of the 1st consecutive increasing state, and the decreasing state (terminating) after the 5th consecutive increasing state. , In the decreasing state (end) after the 2nd to 4th consecutive increasing state, the probability of winning Navi stock in the Navi stock lottery is high, and as the increasing state continues until the 2nd consecutive period, the increasing state will continue It can make you expect it to continue up to the 5th series. In particular, as mentioned above, in the fifth consecutive increasing state of the last digit, you can expect to win a larger amount of Navi stock than in other increasing states. It is possible to expect that the increasing state will not only continue until the increasing state, but also continue after that.

In addition, when controlled to a decreasing state (continuation) after the end of the first increasing state, the number of games until it is controlled to an increasing state again will be reduced after the second to fourth increasing state ends. (continuation), the average number of games is smaller than the number of games until it is controlled again to the increasing state, and after the end of the first increasing state, the period until it is controlled to the increasing state again is 2 ~ After the end of the 4th continuous increase state, the period is likely to be shorter than the period until it is controlled to the increase state again, and after being controlled to the AT state, the medals increased in the 1st continuous increase state will not be reduced. Since it becomes easier to shift to the second continuous increase state, a large amount of medals can be acquired in the initial stage of the AT state, which loops between the increase state and the decrease state.

In particular, when controlled to a decreasing state (continuation) after the end of the first increasing state, the number of games until it is controlled to an increasing state again is the highest. After the increasing state ends, it is easy to shift to the increasing state again at 1G, and it is easy to shift to the second consecutive increasing state without reducing the medals increased in the first consecutive increasing state as much as possible.

In addition, the fifth consecutive increasing state is more advantageous for the player than the fourth consecutive increasing state, and when the increasing state after the fifth consecutive increasing state is controlled to decrease (continue), The average number of games before being controlled to the increasing state again is higher than the number of games until being controlled to the increasing state again when the decreasing state (continuation) is controlled after the end of the second to fourth consecutive increasing states. The number is small, and the period until it is controlled again to the increasing state after the end of the increasing state after the fifth consecutive one is longer than the period until it is controlled to the increasing state again after the end of the second to fourth consecutive increasing state. Since the period tends to be short, in the AT state in which the increasing state and the decreasing state are looped, a large amount of medals can be acquired starting from the particularly advantageous fifth consecutive increasing state.

In particular, in the 5th consecutive increase state, there is a higher possibility of winning the additional state than in the 4th consecutive increase state, and you can expect to win a large amount of Navi stock, so AT loops between the increase state and the decrease state. By continuing the AT state until the fifth consecutive increase state, it is possible to expect that the AT state will continue after that.

In addition, in the 5th consecutive increasing state, you can expect to win a large amount of Navi stock, so after the 5th consecutive increasing state ends, the period until the increasing state is controlled again is 2 to 4 After the continuous increase state ends, the period until it is controlled to increase again is shorter than the period, so the accumulated Navi stock can be used up quickly, while a large amount of Navi stock has been accumulated. In the 2nd to 4th consecutive increase states, which are unlikely, even if Navi stock is accumulated, the period after the increase state ends until it is controlled to increase again is a relatively long period. By doing so, it is possible to expect that the increasing state will continue.

In addition, in the 5th consecutive increase state, there is a higher possibility of winning in the additional state than in the 4th consecutive increase state, and also in the additional state (1) and the additional state (2) than in the 4th consecutive increase state. By setting the add-on state (2), where you can expect to win more Navi stocks, to have a higher chance of winning, the 5th consecutive increase state is more convenient for players than the 4th consecutive increase state. This is an advantageous configuration, but in the 5th consecutive increase state, the possibility of winning in the additional state is higher than in the 4th consecutive increase state, and in the 5th consecutive increase state, the 4th consecutive increase state The player is more likely to win in the add-on state (1) and the add-on state (2) in which he or she can expect to win more Navi stock than in the increase state up to The configuration may be advantageous for the player, or the winning probability of Navi Stock or the average number of Navi Stocks won may be set higher in the 5th consecutive increase state than in the 4th consecutive increase state, so that it is advantageous for the player. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, when controlled to a decreasing state (continuation) after the end of the 2nd to 4th consecutive increasing state, the number of games until it is controlled to an increasing state again is the 1st increasing state or the 5th consecutive increasing state. When the state is controlled to decrease (continue) after the state ends, the average number of games is greater than the number of games until it is controlled to increase again after the end of the state, and after the end of the 2nd to 4th consecutive increase state, the state increases again. The period until it is controlled is likely to be longer than the period until it is controlled again to the increasing state after the end of the first increasing state or the fifth consecutive increasing state, while the period from the second to fourth consecutive increasing state In a decreasing state (end) in which it is not determined that the increasing state will be controlled again after the increasing state ends, the increasing state will be controlled again after the first increasing state or the fifth consecutive increasing state ends. Since the conditions for granting benefits are more preferential than the decreasing condition (end) where the condition has not been determined, after the end of the 2nd to 4th consecutive increasing condition, the period until the condition is controlled to increase again becomes longer. However, it is possible to make people expect both the transition to the increasing state again and the granting of benefits.

In particular, in a decreasing state (end) in which it is not determined to be controlled to an increasing state again after the end of the 2nd to 4th increasing state, after the end of the 1st increasing state or the 5th consecutive increasing state, Since the winning probability of Navi stock is higher than in the decreasing state (end) where it is not decided to be controlled to the increasing state again, after the end of the 2nd to 4th consecutive increasing state, until it is controlled to the increasing state again. Even if the period becomes longer, if Navi Stock wins, it can be expected that the number will shift to an increasing state again.

In addition, as mentioned above, the fifth consecutive increasing state is more advantageous for the player than the fourth consecutive increasing state, and after the fourth consecutive increasing state ends, it is necessary to control the increasing state again. is determined, the number of games until it is controlled again to the increasing state is controlled again to the increasing state after the end of the increasing state up to the third consecutive time, if it is determined to be controlled to the increasing state again. The average number of games is greater than the number of games until the end of the 4th consecutive increase state, and the period until it is controlled to increase again after the end of the 4th consecutive increase state is increased again after the end of the 3rd consecutive increase state. Since the period is likely to be longer than the period until control is achieved, it can be expected that the state will shift to the relatively advantageous fifth increase state over a long period of time.

In the AT state of the second form, the end condition for the increase state or additional state is fixed to a specific number of games, but it is possible to select the number of games to be the end condition from a plurality of numbers of games, or to set the additional condition. The end condition may be changed by increasing the number of games if the condition is satisfied. Further, although the increase state and the add-on state end as the number of games progresses, the end condition may be satisfied depending on the number of times navigation notifications are performed, the number of times a specific combination is won, or the like.

In addition, in the AT state of the second form, in the decreasing state (end) after the end of the 2nd to 4th increasing state, the winning probability of the Navi stock lottery is more favorable than in the increasing state. Even in the decreasing state (end), the conditions for granting benefits, such as the probability of winning the Navi stock lottery, may be treated more favorably than in the increasing state. With such a configuration, medals will be paid out more favorably than in the increasing state. Even if the rate is controlled to be in a decreasing state with a low rate, it is possible to make the user expect to receive benefits.

Furthermore, in both the decreasing state (end) and decreasing state (continuing), conditions regarding the granting of benefits, such as the probability of winning the Navi stock lottery, may be treated more favorably than in the increasing state, and such a configuration may be adopted. Therefore, even if the player is controlled to be in a decreasing state where the medal payout rate is lower than in an increasing state, it is possible to make the player expect to receive benefits.

[About the number of games in the advantageous section]
In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes an advantageous section game number counter and an ED transition game counter as counters for counting the number of games in the advantageous section. The number of advantageous section games counter is determined by the number of advantageous section games counted by the advantageous section game number counter, depending on whether the number of bets is 2 or 3, and whether the gaming state is RT0 to RT3. In contrast, the number of ED transition games counted by the ED transition game counter is updated when the number of bets is 3 and the gaming status is RT1. On the other hand, if the number of bets is two, or if the gaming state is other than RT1, it is not updated. Then, the main control unit 41 uses the number of games in the advantageous section, which is updated regardless of the conditions, as the number of games for determining the end condition 1 of the advantageous section, so that the advantageous section does not become too long. Then, by using the number of games to determine the 3rd ED transition condition mentioned above, the number of ED transition games that will not be updated unless the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1, it is possible to play the game under the recommended conditions. It is now possible to encourage people to do something.

In addition, the area of the RAM 41c that is initialized at the end of the advantageous section includes an advantageous section game number counter and an ED transition game counter, and at the end of the advantageous section, the number of advantageous section games and the number of ED transition games are initialized. It is now possible to do so. Therefore, even after the advantageous section ends, it is possible to prevent the events of the ended advantageous section from affecting the next advantageous section, such as the number of games in the advantageous section and the number of ED transition games being carried over.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1, the number of ED transition games updated reaches the fifth specified number, and the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied. Since the game is controlled to the ED state even if the game is played without meeting the conditions, the game is not controlled to the ED state, so it is possible to effectively encourage the player to play the game under the recommended conditions. .

Further, as described above, the sub-control unit 91 displays the number of remaining games in the ED state in the ED performance executed in the ED state, and the remaining number of games in the ED state is calculated based on the number of games in the advantageous section. This makes it possible to accurately indicate the number of remaining games in the ED state.

In addition, the number of ED transition games is not only used to determine the third ED transition condition that is the transition condition for the ED state, but also the number of ED transition games is used to count the number of games until the transition to the CZ state in the normal state. It may also be configured to be used for determining conditions for transition to an AT state or lottery conditions, such as for counting the ceiling value that is a condition for transition to an AT state in a non-AT state, and such a configuration may be used. Thus, the number of ED transition games can be shared in determining the conditions for transition to the ED state, and determining the conditions for transition to the AT state and the lottery conditions.

In addition, the number of ED games used to determine the conditions for transition to the ED state, the conditions for transition to the AT state, and the lottery conditions will be updated on the condition that the number of bets is 3. It is possible to encourage players to play a game with a bet number of three medals at which the payout rate of medals is appropriate.

In addition, the number of ED games used to determine the conditions for transition to the ED state, the conditions for transition to the AT state, and the lottery conditions will be updated on the condition that the gaming state is RT1. It is possible to encourage the user to play the game at RT1, where the payout rate of medals is appropriate.

Further, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a net increase number counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state in the advantageous section, and is controlled to the AT state as counted by the net increase number counter. The net increase in medals from It is updated in any gaming state. In this way, the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled by the AT state, which is used to determine the end condition 2 of the advantageous section, is updated regardless of the conditions. The end condition 2 of the advantageous section can be determined by taking into account the amount of increase in medals in other games, so even if you play with a bet of 2 coins or play the game in a gaming state other than RT1, the end condition of the advantageous section will not be reached. The fulfillment of termination condition 2 cannot be delayed.

[About various processes executed by the main control unit]
The control contents of various processes performed by the main control unit 41 by executing the gaming program and the non-gaming program will be explained based on FIGS. 51 to 81.

[About initial setting process]
The startup process and initial setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described based on FIG. 51. The startup process and the initial setting process are subroutines included in the game program.

When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control section 41 starts with timer interrupts set to disabled due to the occurrence of a reset, and performs various processes according to the programs stored in the ROM 41b. After startup, first, a startup setting process included in the game program is performed to initialize all output ports 0 to 9, and the internal registers provided in the main control section 41 are preset in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Performs initial setting processing included in the game program, which is initialized based on the built-in register initialization table.

As shown in FIG. 51, the initial setting process is started with timer interrupts disabled, and in the initial setting process, first, a predetermined area of the input port is referred to (Sa1), and the output from the power failure detection circuit 48 is detected. It is determined whether the power interruption detection signal is in the ON state (Sa2). If the power interruption detection signal is in the ON state, the controller waits until the power interruption detection signal becomes OFF. After that, after the power supply voltage of the slot machine 1 becomes normal and the power failure detection signal turns OFF, the parity of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated (Sa3), and a predetermined initial address is set in the stack pointer. (Sa4). Then, it is determined whether the parity calculated in step Sa3 is normal or not (Sa5), and if the parity is normal, the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis set in a predetermined area of RAM 41c at the time of power outage is The RAM 41c is acquired (Sa6), and based on the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis, it is diagnosed whether or not the storage contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed (Sa7).

If it is determined that the parity is not normal in step Sa5, and if the memory contents of RAM 41c are diagnosed in step Sa7, it is determined that the RAM 41c is abnormal based on the RAM parity calculated in step Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7. It is determined whether or not there is (Sa8). Note that the case where there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c is the case where the parity is not normal, or the case where the parity is normal but it is diagnosed that there is an abnormality in the stored contents.

If there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 is transferred to the game stack area of the game RAM area using the second save instruction described above. After saving by storing in a predetermined order (Sa9), the non-gaming RAM area initialization process included in the non-gaming program is called and executed using the above-mentioned CALL command (Sa10).

In the non-gaming RAM area initialization process, first, using the above-mentioned LD instruction, the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP is retrieved from the gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling gaming program. It is read out, stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, and evacuated. Then, using the LD command, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. In this way, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-gaming program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are are saved by being stored in a predetermined order in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the LD command is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the one for the gaming program to the one for the non-gaming program. Then, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is called from a gaming program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is The state of the register may be different from the state when the program calls the non-gaming RAM area initialization process.

After that, specify the start address (first address of unused area 4) and end address (last address of non-gaming RAM area) of the RAM to be initialized, and set the start address as the initial value of the specified address and data of the specified address. The area from the start address to the end address of the RAM to be initialized (in this example, by repeatedly executing the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the The area from the beginning of the unused area 4 to the end of the non-gaming RAM area) is initialized. In addition, in the non-gaming RAM area initialization process, by specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated, and the RAM area corresponding to the capacity is used as the initialization target RAM. A configuration may be adopted in which the area from the start address to the end address of the RAM to be initialized is initialized by sequentially clearing from the start address.

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers that were stored and saved in the non-game stack area when the non-game RAM area initialization process was started are restored in the reverse order of the save. By sequentially reading data from the gaming stack area and setting in registers corresponding to the order, all registers are returned to the state when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process was started. Then, using the above-mentioned LD command, read the value of the stack pointer SP that was saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process was started, and set it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. As a result, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-game RAM area initialization process was started, and the non-game RAM area initialization process is ended. In addition, in order to finish the non-gaming RAM area initialization process included in the non-gaming program and return to the gaming program, restore the values of all registers that were saved at the start of the non-gaming RAM area initialization process. After that, when changing the stack pointer SP from a non-gaming program to a gaming program, the LD instruction is used, and the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the LD instruction is executed. The state of the flag register may change before and after. That is, the state of the register when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is started.

When the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is performed in step Sa10, the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c is initialized, and the process returns to the initial setting process, the above-mentioned second return command is used to initialize the non-gaming RAM area in step Sa9. By sequentially reading the values of the flag registers saved in the stack area from the gaming stack area in the reverse order of the saving and setting them in the flag registers, the flag registers are restored to the state before the non-gaming RAM area initialization process. The state is restored (Sa11). By performing the saving and restoring processing of all registers within the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing in step Sa10 and the saving and restoring processing of flag registers in steps Sa9 and Sa11, the non-gaming RAM area After the initialization process is performed, the states of all registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the process was performed.

If it is determined in step Sa8 that there is no abnormality in RAM41c, and if the register is restored in step Sa11, the fixed data for RAM destruction diagnosis set in RAM41c is cleared (Sa12), and the RAM41c is determined to be abnormal. If there is, a RAM destruction initialization start address is set to specify the address of the game RAM area to be initialized (Sa13). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state with reference to the input port 2 (Sa14).

If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is in the ON state, a setting change process is performed. In the setting change process, the setting value is confirmed by operating the reset/setting switch 38 and the start switch 7 in a predetermined procedure, and when it is detected that the setting key switch 37 has been turned OFF, the setting change process starts. , and move the game to a state where you can proceed. In addition, in the setting change process, when starting the setting change process, a setting command (start) indicating that the setting change process is to be started is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and when ending the setting change process, A setting command (end) indicating that the setting change process is to be ended is sent to the sub-control unit 91. Further, in the setting change process, when the setting change process is ended, the start address of the RAM area to be initialized at the time of setting change is specified, and the process returns to step Sb4 of the main process. Then, by performing RAM initialization processing in step Sb4, the area from the start address of the RAM area to be initialized at the time of setting change to the end address of the gaming RAM area, that is, all gaming RAM areas, is initialized. It has become so. Incidentally, a configuration may be adopted in which all the gaming RAM areas except the stack area in use of the RAM 41c are initialized. In the RAM initialization process performed after the end of the setting change process, the area to be initialized includes a storage area in which information regarding the advantageous section is stored, and the information regarding the advantageous section will be initialized. The area to be initialized does not include a storage area in which information regarding the carryover state in which the winning of the special winning combination (BB1, BB2) is carried over is stored, and the information regarding the carryover state is not initialized.

If it is determined in step Sa14 that the setting key switch 37 is not in the ON state, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c based on the RAM parity calculated in step Sa3 and the diagnosis result in Sa7 (Sa15). , if it is determined that there is no abnormality in the RAM 41c, the output buffer for outputting the external output signal is cleared (Sa16). It also clears a reel error counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is used to count the number of times a reel rotation error has been detected in the main process described later (Sa17). Thereafter, by setting the address at the time of power outage in the stack pointer SP based on the memory contents of the RAM 41c, the stack pointer is restored to the state at the time of power outage (Sa18), and port input processing is performed twice consecutively (Sa19). , Sa20).

Port input processing is performed using input state data related to input states such as detection signals of various switches input to the parallel input port 511 (input data indicating the current input state of various switches, the previous and current input data being in the same state) This is a process of updating the final data indicating that the final data has been changed, and the edge data indicating that the final data has changed from the previous time. Input buffers 0 to 2 for storing input status data of various switches are provided in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c, and the input status data of various switches updated by port input processing (this embodiment In this case, input data, final data, edge data) are stored in predetermined bits of an input buffer that are predetermined for each type of switch and type of input state data. In the port input processing, the detected states (ON state or OFF state) of various switches among the input state data of various switches are stored as input data in input port 0 of the parallel input port 511, thereby inputting various sensors. The data is updated to the detection state at the current execution timing of port input processing. Input data of various switches are stored in predetermined bits of input port 0 corresponding to each switch. Also, in port input processing, when storing input data in input buffer 0, the input data stored in the input buffer by the previous port input processing and the input data stored in the input buffer by the current port input processing are Comparing each type of sensor, the detection state of the current input data (ON state) for various sensors whose current and previous input data are in the same state (both last time and this time are ON state, or both last time and this time are OFF state) or OFF state), and store it in a predetermined bit of input buffer 1, while the current and previous input data are in a different state (the previous ON state is now OFF state, or the previous OFF state is now ON state). By creating fixed data to maintain the detection state of the previous input data for various sensors whose status is 1) and storing it in a predetermined bit of input buffer 1, various sensors stored in input buffer 1 can be stored in input buffer 1. Update the finalized data. In addition, in port input processing, when storing the finalized data in the input buffer 1, the current and previous finalized data are compared, and for various sensors whose confirmed data changed from OFF state to ON state, the confirmed data is OFF. ON edge data indicating that the state has changed from the ON state to the ON state is stored in a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2, and for various sensors whose confirmed data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the confirmed data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. The edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 is updated by storing OFF edge data indicating that the OFF edge data has been changed into a predetermined bit of the input buffer 2. The input data, final data, and edge data of various switches stored in the port input buffers 0 to 2 can be referenced from gaming programs and non-gaming programs.

In addition, in the initial setting process, by performing the port input process twice consecutively, when the port input process is performed thereafter, the input state of various switches after the initial setting process is performed, that is, the slot machine 1 Since input state data regarding input states such as detection signals of various switches is created based on the input states of various switches after power supply is resumed, unintended input situations may be identified. can be prevented. Further, in the port input process, the final data may be created based on input data obtained through three or more port input processes (for example, input data from this time, the previous time, and the time before the previous time). In such a configuration, the initial setting process is performed by performing the port input process one consecutive time less than the number of port input processes required to create the final data. When port input processing is performed after the initial setting processing is performed, input state data can be created based on the input states of various switches after the initial setting processing is performed.

After performing the port input processing in steps Sa19 and Sa20, a predetermined input port is referred to (Sa21), it is determined whether the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state (Sa22), and the reset/setting is performed. When the switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, when the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while being in the ON state, the advantageous section information related to the advantageous section is initialized. Section data initialization processing is performed (Sa23). In the advantageous section data initialization process, information regarding advantageous sections in the storage area of the RAM 41c (output buffer of signal during advantageous section, flag during advantageous section, output buffer of section display LED 19, number of games played in advantageous section, net increase of medals in advantageous section) Initialize the area where the number of sheets, etc.) is stored. In the advantageous section data initialization process, the area where information regarding the internal winning flag of the special role (non-winning: 0, BB1 winning: 1, BB2 winning: 2), setting values (1 to 6), etc. is stored. is not initialized, and the information regarding the internal winning flag and setting values (1 to 6) of the special role is the same as the last time the power supply to slot machine 1 was stopped. It will be maintained.

In this embodiment, in the initial setting process, if the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state, that is, if the slot machine 1 is powered on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state, The configuration is such that the information regarding the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c is initialized by the advantageous section data initialization process, but the power of the slot machine 1 is turned on while the reset/setting switch 38 is pressed and kept in the ON state. In this case, among the information stored in the RAM 41c, the information related to the internal winning situation and the information related to the setting value are maintained without being initialized, while at least the information related to the advantageous section is initialized. Any information other than the information regarding the internal winning situation and the information regarding the set value may be initialized together with the information regarding the advantageous section.

If it is determined in step Sa22 that the reset/setting switch 38 is not in the ON state, and after executing the advantageous section data initialization process in step Sa23, a return command is issued to indicate that the control state has returned to the state before the power cut. After sending the command to the sub-control unit 91 (Sa24), in the command sending process of the timer interrupt process (main), a door command sending flag indicating that a door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is to be sent is set to a predetermined location in the RAM 41c. The area is set (Sa25). In the command transmission process, a door command is normally transmitted when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes, but if the door command transmission flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the door open detection switch 25 A door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is transmitted regardless of whether the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed.

After setting the door command transmission flag in step Sa25, all registers are restored to the state before the power cut stored in the RAM 41c (Sa26), and timer interrupts are set to be enabled (Sa27). After finishing the initial setting process and moving to the timer interrupt process (main), the process returns to the main process that was being executed before the power supply to the slot machine 1 was stopped.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sa15 that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, game RAM initialization processing is performed (Sa28), and the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is Initialize the area up to the end of . After that, in the same way as the processing from steps Sa9 to Sa11, after saving the value of the flag register in which the flag is set among the registers to the gaming stack area of the gaming RAM area (Sa29), the non-gaming program included in the non-gaming program is After calling the gaming RAM area initialization process (Sa30) and initializing all non-gaming RAM areas of the RAM 41c, the process returns to the calling source and restores the register saved in step Sa29 (Sa31).

After restoring the register in step Sa31, set the door command transmission flag (Sa32), enable timer interrupt (Sa33), and send a RAM abnormality error code (E8) indicating that there is an abnormality in RAM41c. The information is prepared in a predetermined register (Sa34), the initial setting process is ended, and the process moves to error processing.

In addition, in the error processing, the game is controlled to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. Additionally, an error command that can specify the error code (E8) prepared in a predetermined register is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E8) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for other processing (for example, This flag is set as an error flag that can also be referenced in sensor monitoring processing (described later). Further, the error code (E8) is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E8) prepared in a predetermined register is satisfied. When the RAM abnormality error code (E8) is prepared in a predetermined register and the state is shifted to the error state, the state is shifted to the setting change state by turning on the power switch 39 with the setting key switch 37 turned on. By initializing all the gaming RAM areas, it is possible to reliably eliminate the abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c and release the error state. On the other hand, if the power switch 39 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 37, an abnormality in the RAM 41c is detected again, and the error state occurs again.

In this way, the main control unit 41 is configured to first perform the initial setting process after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and in the initial setting process, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. Depending on the state of the main control unit 41 when the process is started, the process is shifted to one of timer interrupt processing (main), setting change processing, and error processing. When transitioning to these processes, a command that can specify the type of process to be transitioned to is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and when transitioning to timer interrupt processing (main), that is, the slot machine When returning to the control state before the power supply to 1 was stopped, a return command is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and when setting change processing is started and the state is changed to the setting change state, A setting command (start) is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and when error processing is started due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c and the transition to an error state occurs, an error command is sent to the sub-control unit 91.

In addition, after the main control unit 41 moves from the initial setting process to the setting change process, the main control unit 41 returns to the state in which the game can be played through the setting change state, so that the game can be played. When returning to the state, a setting command (end) that can specify that the setting change state is ended is sent to the sub-control unit 91, but a return command is not sent. In addition, after transitioning to error processing due to an abnormality in the RAM 41c, the system transitions to setting change processing as described above and the error state is canceled, returning the game to a state where it is possible to proceed. Even when the error processing is completed and the game returns to a state where the game can proceed, no return command is sent to the sub-control unit 91.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is activated when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, performs the startup setting process included in the gaming program, and performs all startup settings through the startup setting process. Output ports 0 to 9 are initialized.

Further, after performing the startup setting process, the main control unit 41 performs the initial setting process included in the game program. In the initial setting process, when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 41c, a non-gaming RAM area initialization process included in the non-gaming program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. In addition, in the initial setting process, a RAM initialization process included in the gaming program is called to initialize a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c, and the gaming RAM area is initialized by the gaming program and is used for non-gaming. The RAM area is configured to be initialized by a non-gaming program.

Further, in the initial setting process, when the reset/setting switch 38 is in the ON state, an advantageous section data initialization process is executed to initialize the information regarding the advantageous section stored in the RAM 41c. . As a result, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 set in the RAM 41c is initialized as information regarding the advantageous section, and the slot machine 1 can be started with the section display LED 19 turned off. There is. In addition, in the initial setting process, by executing the advantageous section data initialization process, the output buffer of the advantageous section signal and the advantageous section flag are also initialized as information regarding the advantageous section. The gaming state is controlled to be in the normal section and the section display LED 19 is maintained in the off state until the conditions for transition to the advantageous section are satisfied.

In addition, in the RAM initialization process that is performed after the end of the setting change process, information regarding advantageous sections will be initialized, but information regarding the carryover status of special winnings will not be initialized, and the setting value will be Even if the setting value is changed, the carryover status of the special winning combination before the setting value is changed will be maintained.

[About main processing]
The control details of the main processing performed by the main control unit 41 will be explained based on FIGS. 52 to 54. Note that the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game. One period of the main processing corresponds to one unit of the game. Further, the main process is included in the game program and includes a plurality of processes. Hereinafter, processes that are not specifically indicated as being included in non-gaming programs are included in gaming programs. Note that some gaming programs called by gaming programs call non-gaming programs.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main control unit 41 first disables timer interrupts (Sb1), and then sets the final address value of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the HL register (Sb2). , the address one address before the final address value of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is set in the DE register (Sb3). Then, write 0 to the area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register value to initialize it (Sb4), and set from a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the HL register, DE register, etc. by Sb58 or Sb87 described later. 0 is written to each storage area corresponding to the RAM initialization target size to sequentially initialize it (Sb5).

After that, referring to the current gaming state set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the value corresponding to the gaming state is read into the A register (Sb6), and a game end command that can specify that one game has been ended is issued. The value is set in the DE register (Sb7). Then, communication data storage processing is performed (Sb8). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register, and is set in the command queue. For example, if the gaming state is set in the A register and the value of the gaming end command is set in the D register, a gaming ending command containing information that can identify the current gaming state is generated and set in the command queue. do. The commands set in the command queue will be sequentially transmitted through command transmission processing included in the subsequent timer interrupt processing.

After performing the communication data storage process in step Sb8, the values of the flag registers in which the operation results are stored among the registers are stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order using the second save instruction described above. After saving the information by storing it (Sb9), the RT information output process included in the non-gaming program is called and executed using the CALL command described above (Sb10).

In the RT information output process, first, the above-mentioned LD instruction is used to read the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP from the gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling gaming program. It is stored and evacuated in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. Then, using the LD command, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. In this way, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-gaming program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are are saved by being stored in a predetermined order in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, similar to the case where the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing described above is called, when the RT information output processing included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the stack pointer SP is changed from the one for the gaming program to the non-gaming RAM area. When changing for a program, the second zero flag of the flag register is changed by using the LD instruction, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, when the RT information output process is called from a gaming program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the RT information output process is The state of the registers may be different from the state when the function is called.

After that, the information regarding the gaming state of the slot machine 1 set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area is referred to, and the information regarding the gaming state (for example, the RT state) is sent to the test device connected to the slot machine 1. It is set to be output from output port 7 as a test signal to be output. Then, the values of the registers that were stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area when the RT information output process was started are sequentially read out from the non-gaming stack area in the reverse order of the saving, and the values correspond to the order. By setting in the registers, all registers are returned to the state they were in when RT information output processing was started. Thereafter, by using the above-mentioned LD command to read the value of the stack pointer SP that was saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the RT information output process was started, and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the RT information output process was started, and the RT information output process is ended. Incidentally, in the same way as when the non-gaming RAM area initialization processing described above is ended, in order to end the RT information output processing included in the non-gaming program and return to the gaming program, the RT information output processing is started. After restoring the values of all the registers that were previously saved, the LD instruction is used when changing the stack pointer SP from a non-gaming program to a gaming program, so that the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is The state of the flag register may change before and after the LD instruction is executed. That is, the state of the register when the RT information output process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the RT information output process is started.

After performing the RT information output process in step Sb10, the values of the flag registers saved in step Sb9 are sequentially saved from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving using the second return instruction described above. It is restored by reading it and setting it in the flag register (Sb11). The RT information output process is performed by performing the save process and restore process for all registers within the RT information output process in step Sb10, and the save process and restore process for the flag register in steps Sb9 and Sb11. After that, the states of all registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the processing was performed.

After restoring the flag register in step Sb11, set a value corresponding to a predetermined test signal waiting time in the BC register (Sb12), and wait until the timer interrupt is performed the number of times equal to the value of the BC register. Interrupt BC time waiting processing is performed (Sb13). In the interrupt BC wait processing, the timer interrupt is enabled, the timer interrupt is set to wait until the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the value of the BC register is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is performed. Repeat until it reaches 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC wait processing ends. In step Sb12, a value (29) corresponding to 16.24 msec is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the test signal waiting time, and interrupt BC wait processing is performed in step Sb13. In this way, at least a test signal standby time (16.24 msec) is ensured after the RT information output process of Sb10 and before the next process is started.

Furthermore, by performing the interrupt BC wait processing, the processing to be performed after the interrupt BC wait processing can be performed while maximizing the time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed. This prevents a timer interrupt from being unintentionally performed during a series of processes performed after the interrupt BC wait process. By performing interrupt BC wait processing in step Sb13, a timer interrupt is unintentionally performed during the processing from step Se1 to step Se10 of the game start waiting processing that is performed after the interrupt BC wait processing. This is prevented, and the processing from step Se1 to step Se10 can be performed as a series of processing.

In addition, by performing interrupt BC wait processing, it is possible to ensure that timer interrupt processing is performed at least once, so that after each process included in the timer interrupt processing is performed, after the interrupt BC wait processing is performed, A series of processes can be performed. For example, by performing interrupt BC wait processing in step Sb13, the port input processing described below that is included in the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the input data of various switches and sensors are updated, and the game starts. Processing from step Se1 to step Se10 of the waiting process can be performed.

After the timer interrupt process is performed, a game start waiting process is performed (Sb14), and the process from the end of the control of the previous game to the start of the next game is performed. In the game start waiting process, the number of bets is set according to the insertion of medals, etc., and when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected with the specified number of bets set, the next game is started. Perform the process to start.

Then, an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to allow the winning to occur (internal lottery) (Sb15). In the internal lottery process, winnings are allowed to occur based on preset values (1 to 6) in the slot machine 1 and random numerical values for the internal lottery acquired at the same time as the start of the game by detection of the start switch 7. An internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not to do so (that is, whether or not to allow the derivation of the display result). Then, the winning combination numbers (including winning numbers and losing numbers) corresponding to the winning combinations are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c so that the winning results in the internal lottery can be specified. In addition, the group information setting process (general win) described later is performed to set group information (general win) that can identify the type of general win that has been won based on the win number (winning number) in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. do. In addition, if a special prize has been won in an internal lottery (including cases in which the prize has been won in the internal lottery of the game in question, and cases in which it has been carried over from winning in the internal lottery of a previous game), An internal winning flag indicating that the special winning combination (BB1, BB2) has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, if the special winning combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery, it is determined whether BB1 has been won or not, and if it is determined that BB1 has been won, the RAM 41c is It is set in a predetermined area, and a predetermined value (ON state value: 1) for controlling the lighting state is set in the output buffer (output buffer of the status display LED 17) for controlling the lighting state of the status display LED 17. do.

By setting the ON state value in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, the status display LED 17 is controlled to be in a lighting state by the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process that is performed thereafter. After performing the internal lottery process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment starts the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by performing the reel rotation start process (Sb45), which will be described later, so that all the reels are at a constant speed. The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled on the condition that the state is reached, and the interrupt BC wait processing ( Perform Sb28). As a result, the timer interrupt processing is performed at least once during the period, and when the ON state value is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, that is, when BB1 is won, the stop switch 8L , 8C, and 8R are activated, the status display LED 17 is controlled to be lit, and the status notification is reliably started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is activated. It is now possible to do so. Also, when the special winning combination (BB1) is won in the internal lottery, a predetermined value (ON state value: 1) is set in the output buffer of the status display LED 17, and the status display LED 17 is turned on by the subsequent timer interrupt processing. Since the status display starts immediately after the special winning combination (BB1) is won, the operation of stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective for checking whether the status display is being performed or not. We are now able to secure sufficient amounts before the end of the year.

After performing the internal lottery process, a ball payout control process is performed to perform a process related to the game section and a process related to the navigation notification, as will be described later (Sb16). In the ball payout control process, there is a process to determine whether or not it is an advantageous period based on the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period, and when it is determined that it is not an advantageous period, the number of bets is set to 3. Advantageous section transfer related processing (for example, processing to determine whether or not an advantageous section transfer combination has been won in an internal lottery, or an advantageous section transfer-related process performed in an internal lottery, provided that the gaming state is not a special state (BB1, BB2) When it is determined that the section transition role has been won, a process is performed to shift to the advantageous section by setting an advantageous section flag indicating that the control is in the advantageous section by continuous data processing, and a process related to the transition to the advantageous section. (processing to perform various settings, etc.), if it is determined to be an advantageous period, the game will be played after the advantageous period starts, regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2. Process for updating an advantageous section game counter that counts the number of games in an advantageous section by adding one game, and navigation notification performed on the condition that the number of bets is 2 or a gaming state other than RT1. Processing (for example, processing to update an ED transition game number counter to specify a game to be transitioned to an ED state where navigation notification is controlled for a period until the advantageous section ends, or control to a predetermined ball output state) Processing of setting ON data (predetermined value: 1) to control the lighting state in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, on the condition that A process of identifying a corresponding navigation number and setting it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, a process of performing various processes according to the currently controlled ball release state, etc.) are performed. The navigation number set in the ball payout control process will be referred to in the game start command transmission process (Sb22) described later, and a command that can specify the navigation number will be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The navigation number is also referred to in the reel stop control process (Sb48), and before the reel stop control process enables the acceptance of operations on the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the navigation number corresponding to the navigation number is Display data for displaying the navigation display is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation display is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. In addition, the number of advantageous section games counter updated during the advantageous section by the ball output control process indicates that the number of advantageous section games has reached the specified number of games (first specified number) in the AT state management process (Sb60) described later. It will be referred to when determining whether or not.

Thereafter, similarly to step Sb11, the values of the flag registers in which the operation results are stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 are stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order using the second save instruction described above. After setting the timer interrupt to be prohibited (Sb18), the operation information signal included in the non-gaming program is outputted using the CALL command (Sb19), which will be described later. Processing is performed to output an operation information signal from an output port to the test device, which specifies the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R according to the winning result of the internal lottery.

In the operation information signal output process, first, in the same way as the RT information output process described above, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read using the previously described LD command, and the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is read out, and evacuation to a predetermined area. After that, using the LD command, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read out, and set as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, thereby changing the stack pointer SP. Set for non-gaming programs. Then, by using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41, including the above-mentioned flag register, are saved by being stored in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area in a predetermined order. let In addition, when the operation information signal output process included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the LD command is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the gaming program to the non-gaming program. The second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the operation information signal output process is called from the game program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-game program is set by the operation information signal output process is that the game program The state of the register may be different from the state when the signal output processing is called.

After that, a process is performed to refer to the lottery results of the internal lottery set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area and output an operation information signal specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R according to the winning results of the internal lottery. conduct.

Then, in the same way as the RT information output process described above, the values of the registers that were saved when the operation information signal output process was started are sequentially read from the non-gaming stack area using the first return instruction described above. All registers are restored to the state they were in when the operation information signal output process was started. After that, by reading the value of the stack pointer SP that was saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the operation information signal output process was started using the above-mentioned LD command, and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the operation information signal output process was started, and the operation information signal output process is ended. In addition, in order to terminate the operation information signal output process included in the non-gaming program and return to the game program, after restoring the values of all registers that were saved at the start of the operation information signal output process, When changing the stack pointer SP from a non-gaming program to a gaming program, by using the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register will be changed, and the flag will be changed before and after the execution of the LD instruction. The state of a register may change. That is, the state of the register when the operation information signal output process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the operation information signal output process is started.

The operation information signal output process is performed after the ball output control process that controls the section display LED 19 to turn on when a predetermined condition is met to display the section and sets the navigation number, so the operation information In the signal output process, an operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started.

After performing the operation information signal output process in step Sb19, timer interrupts are set to be permitted (Sb20). Then, similarly to step Sb11, the values of the flag registers saved in the game stack area in step Sb17 are sequentially read out from the game stack area in the reverse order of the saving by using the above-mentioned second return instruction. By setting the flag register in the flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before the operation information signal output process was performed (Sb21). The operation information signal output process is performed by saving and restoring all registers in the operation information signal output process in step Sb19 and saving and restoring the flag register in steps Sb17 and Sb21. After the process is performed, the states of all registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the process was performed.

After restoring the register in step Sb21, a game start command transmission process is performed (Sb22), making it possible to identify that one game has started, and various control states at the start of one game. A control state command group including a plurality of commands is set in a command queue and sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

After processing the game start command in step Sb22, read the number of the external output signal to be output at the start of the game into the A register (Sb25), and output the external output signal to external equipment such as a call lamp or hall computer. External output signal processing is performed (Sb26). In the external output signal processing, an external output signal corresponding to the value set in the A register at the start of the external output signal processing is outputted from a predetermined output port.

After performing external output signal processing in step Sb26, set a value corresponding to a predetermined game start waiting time in the BC register (Sb27), and wait until the timer interrupt is performed the number of times equal to the value of the BC register. Interrupt BC wait processing is performed (Sb28). In the interrupt BC wait processing, the timer interrupt is enabled, the timer interrupt is set to wait until the timer interrupt processing is performed, and the value of the BC register is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is performed. Repeat until it reaches 0. Then, when the value of the BC register becomes 0, the interrupt BC wait processing ends. In step Sb27, a value (238) corresponding to 133.28 msec is set in the BC register as a value corresponding to the game start waiting time, and interrupt BC wait processing is performed in step Sb28. Then, at least a game start waiting time (133.28 msec) is ensured after the external output signal processing of Sb26 and before moving to the next processing.

After performing the interrupt BC times waiting process in step Sb28, a waiting time performance determining process is performed to control a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (Sb29). In the waiting time performance determination process, it is determined whether or not it has been determined that the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, based on the freeze flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If it is determined that the control is to be controlled to a freeze state, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, interrupt BC wait processing is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set to be able to specify that the freeze state is to be controlled, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball release control process. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect determination process, if it is determined based on the freeze flag that it has not been determined that the freeze state is to be controlled, the waiting time is The time performance determination process is ended.

After performing the waiting time performance determination process in step Sb29, external output signal processing is performed to output an external output signal from a predetermined output port to an external device such as a call lamp or a hall computer (Sb30). Then, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and it is determined whether or not a short freeze (a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined short period of time, hereinafter sometimes referred to as SF) is determined to occur. A specifiable SF flag value is read into the A register (Sb31), and it is determined whether or not it has been decided to generate an SF based on the SF flag value (Sb32). The SF flag is generated in the SF, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball release control process (in this embodiment, when the ED freeze state is controlled in the game following the game in which the ED transition condition is satisfied). It is set so that it can be specified.

In step Sb32, if it is determined that the SF is to be generated, the start address of the SF time setting table in which the period to be controlled by the SF is registered in advance is set in the HL register (Sb33). , executes addition processing (Sb34). In addition processing, the addition value (A) set in the A register at the start of the addition processing is added to the address value (HL) set in the HL register, thereby changing the address value (HL) to the addition value ( Perform processing to advance by A). In addition, in the addition process, data stored in the storage area of the ROM 41b specified by the address value (HL) after adding the addition value (A) is acquired and set in the A register. . By setting the SF flag value in the A register, setting the address of the SF time setting table in the HL register, and performing addition processing, the period for controlling the SF based on the SF flag value and the SF time setting table can be set. The setting value for setting is acquired in the A register.

After performing the addition process in step Sb34, the set value of the period for controlling the SF acquired in the A register is set in the B register (Sb35). Then, a reel performance number that can specify the type of reel performance is set in the A register (Sb36), and a reel rotation start process is executed (Sb37). In the reel rotation start process, rotation control of the reels is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value. Thereafter, the B register value is reset to the A register and wait time execution processing is performed (Sb37). The wait time execution process waits until the timer interrupt process has been performed a predetermined number of times specified based on the A register value, and ends the wait time execution process when the timer interrupt process has been performed the predetermined number of times.

In step Sb32, it is determined that it has been decided to generate an SF, and after performing the waiting time execution process and performing the SF, the RAM 41c is used to measure the elapsed time from the start of reel rotation in the previous game. The address of the timer for managing one gaming time set in the predetermined area of is set in the HL register (Sb39), and the timer for managing one gaming time is referenced based on the HL register value. is in operation (Sb40). After the timer for one game time management is set to an initial value (a value corresponding to the specified time (4.1 seconds) for one game), it is decremented by a predetermined value every time a timer interrupt process is performed, and the initial value is The value is 1 or more until the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the initial value was set, while the specified time for one game (4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the initial value was set. Thereafter, it becomes 0.

In step Sb40, if the timer value for one game time management is not 0, it is determined that the timer for one game time management is operating, and if the timer value for one game time management is 0, the timer for one game time management is determined to be in operation. Determine that the timer is not operating. If it is determined that the specified time has not elapsed since the last game started based on the timer for managing one game time, the specified time for one game will elapse based on the timer for managing one game time. (Sb40).

As shown in FIG. 53, after the specified time for one game has elapsed based on the timer for managing one game time, timer interrupts are set to be prohibited (Sb41), and then the preset index data at the start of the game is set. is set in the A register (Sb42), and continuous data processing is performed (Sb43). In continuous data processing, as described later, predetermined data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the value (A) set in the A register at the start of the continuous data processing and the continuous data processing table described later. This is a process that performs processing such as By performing continuous data processing with the index data set at the start of the game set in the A register, the timer for managing one game time is set to the initial value (a value equivalent to the specified time (4.1 seconds) for one game). ), processing to set an initial value (in this example, 3) to a stop switch operation counter that counts the number of times stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are effectively operated during one game, and each stop switch. A process of setting initial values to stop switch operation state flags that can specify the operation states of 8L, 8C, and 8R is performed.

The initial value set in the one gaming time management timer by performing the continuous data processing in step Sb43 is referred to in the timer interrupt processing that is performed thereafter, and the initial value is set in the one gaming time management timer. Based on this fact, the test signal output timer for managing the output time of the test signal starts anew to measure a predetermined time. In addition, the timer for one game time management is decremented every time the counter update process (Sv20) performed by the timer interrupt process is performed so that the value becomes 0 after the time corresponding to the initial value has elapsed. will be updated. Based on the fact that the timer for one game time management is 0, when the initial value is set for the timer for one game time management, that is, from the time when the reel rotation start process was started in the previous game, the timer for one game is set to 0. It is now possible to specify that a specified time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.

After performing continuous data processing in step Sb43, reel performance no data indicating that no performance using reels will be performed is set in the A register (Sb44), and reel rotation start processing is performed (Sb45). In the reel rotation start process, reel rotation control is started in a rotation mode specified based on the A register value, that is, in a normal game rotation mode. After that, after setting the timer interrupt to permission (Sb46), a reel rotation start command that sends to the sub-control unit 91 a reel rotation start command that can specify that rotation control of reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is to be started. Transmission processing is performed (Sb47). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb40 that the prescribed time for one game has elapsed based on the one-gaming time management timer, steps Sb41 to Sb47 are immediately executed.

After the reel rotation start command transmission process is performed in step Sb47, a reel stop control process is performed to control the reel stop (Sb48). In the reel stop control process, first, the navigation number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the display data for displaying the navigation according to the navigation number (when the navigation number is 0, the hidden If the navigation number is 1 or more, the navigation display data corresponding to the navigation number) is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. As a result, the game auxiliary display 12 will be controlled in a display mode according to the display data by the subsequent timer interrupt process. After display data is set in the output buffer of the gaming auxiliary display 12, it is determined whether the reels under rotation control are being rotated at a predetermined constant speed, and if there are reels that are not being rotated at a constant speed, To do this, a reel error is detected and an excitation pattern is set to accelerate the corresponding reel to constant speed rotation, so that all the reels under rotation control are controlled to rotate at constant speed. On the other hand, if all the reels under rotation control are rotating at a constant speed, acceptance of stop operations for the reels under rotation control will be enabled until the player stops the reels using the stop switch. stand by. By enabling acceptance of a stop operation, the stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R of the corresponding stop switch are controlled to be lit by a timer interrupt process performed thereafter. Then, when a valid stop operation is detected for a reel for which a stop operation is enabled (ON edge data is detected for a stop switch for which a stop operation is enabled), the reel on which a valid stop operation was performed is detected. Reel stop control is performed to stop the reel at a predetermined stop position based on information set in the reel stop initial setting process. Such reel stop control is repeatedly performed on the reels whose rotation is being controlled to stop the rotation of all the reels, thereby ending the reel stop processing.

After finishing the reel stop process, a winning determination process (Sb49) is performed. In the winning determination process, it is determined whether or not an illegal winning has occurred based on the internal lottery results and the symbol combinations stopped on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R.

After performing the winning determination process in step Sa49, a one-time interrupt wait process is performed (Sb50), and the process waits until the timer interrupt process is performed. Then, on the condition that the timer interrupt processing has been performed once, the processing for waiting for one interrupt is ended.

After the one-interrupt wait process is performed in step Sb50, the operation result is stored in the register provided in the main control unit 41 using the second save instruction described above, as in step Sb9 and step Sb17. After saving the values of the flag registers by storing them in the gaming stack area of the gaming RAM area in a predetermined order (Sb51) and disabling timer interrupts (Sb52), use the above-mentioned CALL instruction to The role ratio monitor data included in the program is processed (Sb53).

In this way, by performing role ratio monitor data processing (Sb53) after performing one interrupt wait processing in step Sb50, the time until the next timer interrupt processing is performed is maximized. The data processing for the role ratio monitor can be performed in the state where the player is in the position, and it is possible to prevent a timer interrupt from being unintentionally performed during the data processing for the role ratio monitor. In addition, by setting timer interrupts to be prohibited in step Sb52, performing data processing for role ratio monitoring with timer interrupts being prohibited, and canceling the timer interrupt prohibition setting in the subsequent step Sb54, the relevant To reliably prevent a timer interrupt from being unintentionally performed during role ratio monitoring data processing. Furthermore, in step Sb50, before setting the timer interrupt to a disabled state in order to perform role ratio monitoring data processing, the timer interrupt is disabled by waiting for one interrupt and performing the timer interrupt processing. It is possible to prevent the timer interrupt from occurring when the timer interrupt is prohibited (Sb52 to Sb54), and the timer interrupt becomes the timing when the timer interrupt is prohibited (Sb52 to Sb54). This prevents the timer interrupt from being performed when the prohibition of the timer interrupt is lifted, thereby preventing the timer interrupt processing from being performed at an unintended timing.

In addition, by disabling timer interrupts in step Sb52, similar to the case of disabling timer interrupts in step Sb18 described above, from the time the flag register is saved in step Sb51, the role ratio monitor During the period between when data processing starts and when the values of all registers are saved, the state of the register may change from the state when the flag register was saved due to timer interrupt processing. It is designed so that it will never be stored away.

In the winning ratio monitor data processing, first, in the same way as the RT information output processing described above, the value of the stack pointer SP used by the calling gaming program is read using the aforementioned LD command, and the non-gaming It is saved to a predetermined area in the RAM area. After that, by using the LD command to read the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is set to the non-gaming program. Configure for program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are saved by being stored in the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area in a predetermined order. In addition, as the winning ratio monitor data processing included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the LD command is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the gaming program to the non-gaming program. , the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the winning ratio monitor data processing is called from the gaming program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the winning ratio monitoring data processing is the state of the register that is saved by the gaming program. The state of the register may be different from the state when the role ratio monitor data processing is called.

After that, each state count process included in the non-gaming program is performed, and the player's Data regarding the number of medals to be paid out in a section controlled to be advantageous (advantageous section, etc.) is updated.

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers that were saved and stored in the non-gaming stack area when the role ratio monitor data processing was started are transferred to the non-gaming stack area in the reverse order of the saving. By sequentially reading data from the stack area and setting in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are returned to the state they were in when the hand ratio monitor data processing was started. Then, using the above-mentioned LD command, read the value of the stack pointer SP that was saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when starting the data processing for role ratio monitor, and set it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. Then, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the winning ratio monitor data processing was started, and the winning ratio monitoring data processing is ended. In addition, in order to terminate the winning ratio monitor data processing included in the non-gaming program and return to the gaming program, the values of all registers that had been saved at the start of the winning ratio monitoring data processing were restored. Later, when changing the stack pointer SP from a non-gaming program to a gaming program, the LD instruction is used, and the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the LD instruction is changed before and after the execution of the LD instruction. The state of the flag register may change. That is, the state of the register when the winning ratio monitor data processing is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the winning ratio monitoring data processing is started.

After performing role ratio monitoring data processing in step Sb53, timer interrupts are set to be permitted (Sb54). Then, similarly to steps Sb11 and Sb21, the values of the flag registers saved in step Sb51 are sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving them using the second return instruction described above. By setting it in the flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before the role ratio monitor data processing was performed (Sb55). By performing the saving and restoring processing of all registers in the winning ratio monitor data processing in step Sb53 and the flag register saving and restoring processing in steps Sb51 and Sb55, the winning ratio monitoring data After the process is performed, the states of all registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the process was performed.

After restoring the flag register in step Sb55, a door command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is set in the command queue (Sb56), and the door command is subtracted in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main). The information is transmitted to the control unit 91.

Thereafter, an unauthorized winning check process is performed (Sb57). In the fraudulent winning check process, it is determined whether or not fraudulent winnings have occurred based on the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN of the reels and the winning results of the internal lottery, and if fraudulent winnings have occurred. In this case, an error code is set in the A register and the fraudulent winning check process is terminated, while if no fraudulent winning has occurred, the fraudulent winning checking process is performed without setting the error code.

After performing the fraudulent winning check process in Sb57, the end of award series check process is performed (Sb58). In the yakuren end check process, it is determined whether or not the game is in a special state (BB1, BB2), and if it is in a special state, it is determined whether the special state end conditions are satisfied in the game. . If it is determined that the special state termination condition is satisfied, a process such as setting a BB end flag indicating the end of the special state in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

After performing the winning combination end check process in Sb58, a game state setting process is performed (Sb59). In the game state setting process, it is determined whether or not BB1 or BB2, which has been won in the internal lottery, has won, and if it is determined that BB1 or BB2 has won, the game state is set to the winning BB. Processing to transition to the corresponding special state is performed.

After performing the game state setting process in Sb59, AT state management process is performed to perform a process related to the game section and a process related to navigation notification as described later (Sb60). The AT state management process includes a process of determining whether or not the game is in an advantageous period based on whether or not the advantageous period game number counter has a value other than the initial value (0), and a process of determining whether the game is in an advantageous period or not. If it is determined, the net increase number counter that counts the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section is updated regardless of whether the bet number of 3 medals or 2 medals is set in the game. processing, a process of setting an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is to be ended when it is determined that the net increase in the number of medals exceeds a second specified number based on the updated net increase number counter; processing for setting an advantageous section end flag when it is determined that the number of advantageous section games specified based on the number has reached a first specified number; Processing related to navigation notification performed on conditions (for example, processing to determine whether the ED transition condition is satisfied, processing to set an ED transition flag indicating that the ED state will be controlled when the ED transition condition is satisfied, ball dispensing) Perform various processing, etc. depending on the situation.

The advantageous section end flag set by the AT state management process is referred to in the later-described process (Sb70) in the main process, and if the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the advantageous section end flag is set in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Among them, information related to advantageous sections (for example, advantageous section game number counter, net increase number of coins counter, ED transition game number counter, ball output status information, output buffer of section display LED 19, output buffer of advantageous section signal, etc.) is stored. By performing the advantageous section data initialization process (Sb71 to Sb79) that initializes the predetermined region in which the vehicle is located, the series of advantageous sections is completed. An advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the advantageous section end flag being set, and the output buffer of the section display LED 19 is initialized, so that the section display LED 19 is controlled to be turned off, and the section display is terminated. Further, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed to initialize the output buffer of the advantageous section signal, so that the advantageous section signal is controlled to be in the OFF state.

After performing AT state management processing in Sb60, batch transmission data storage processing is performed (Sb61) to collectively set multiple commands to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 at the end of one game in a command queue. . The plurality of commands set by the batch transmission data storage process will be sequentially transmitted by the subsequent timer interrupt process.

After performing batch transmission data storage processing in step Sb61, freeze processing during stoppage is performed (Sb62). In the freeze processing during stop, it is determined based on the freeze flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c whether or not it has been decided to control the freeze state when the final stop operation is performed, and the freeze state is set. If it is determined that control is to be performed, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, interrupt BC wait processing is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period. The freeze flag is set to be able to specify that the freeze state is to be controlled, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball release control process. On the other hand, in the freeze processing during stoppage, if it is determined based on the freeze flag that control to be in the freeze state has not been determined, the freeze processing is performed during the stoppage without setting the BC register or performing interrupt BC wait processing. Terminate the freeze process.

After performing the freeze during stop processing in step Sb62, a medal payout process is performed to pay out the number of medals corresponding to the winnings generated as a result of the game (Sb63). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals predetermined for each winning combination is awarded to the player according to the winnings that have occurred, and the number of medals to be awarded is added to credits, until the credits reach the upper limit ( In this embodiment, when the number reaches 50), the hopper motor 34b is driven to pay out the medals that have not been added to the credits from the medal payout port 9.

After performing the medal payout process in step Sb63, transmit data indicating that the medal payout process has ended is set in the A register (Sb64), the value of the payout end command is set in the D register (Sb65), Communication data storage processing is performed (Sb66). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and D register and set in the command queue, and the transmission data indicating that the dull payout process has been completed is stored in the A register. is set and the value of the payout end command is set in the D register, a payout end command indicating that the medal payout process has ended is generated and set in the command queue.

After performing the communication data storage process in step Sb66, the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game is set in the HL register (Sb67), and the wait time production process is performed (Sb68). In the waiting time production process, based on the data set in the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not it has been decided to control the freeze state at the end of the game, and control the freeze state. If it is determined that the game is to be played, a predetermined value is set in the BC register, interrupt BC wait processing is performed, and the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined period of time. In the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, data that can specify that a freeze state is to be controlled is set, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the ball payout control process. On the other hand, in the waiting time effect processing, if it is determined that data that can specify that the freeze state is to be controlled is not set in the address for setting the freeze at the end of the game in the RAM 41c, the setting of the BC register or the interrupt BC To end waiting time performance processing without performing waiting processing or the like.

After performing the waiting time production process in step Sb68, a setting process at the end of the game is performed (Sb69). In the setting process at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of the replaying combination has stopped on reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. If the symbol combination of the replaying combination has stopped, it is determined whether the symbol combination of the replaying combination has stopped in the next game. A process of setting the number of bets for replaying (in this embodiment, setting the same number of bets as the prescribed number of the game as replay medals in the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c) ), processing to set the replaying flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, processing to control the replaying LED 20 to an ON state (lit state), etc.

After performing the setting process at the end of the game in step Sb69, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section is to be ended is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb70). If it is determined that the section end flag is set, a predetermined area in the storage area of the RAM 41c in which data related to control during the advantageous section is stored is initialized to end the advantageous section. oxidation processing (Sb71 to Sb79) is performed.

In the advantageous section data initialization process, first, the number of partitions (in this embodiment, 2) of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized in the process is set in a predetermined register (D) as the number of initialization area partitions (Sb71). . Then, the RAM initialization data table (the value of the start address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized and the number of storage areas (capacity, number of included addresses) to be initialized corresponds to the value indicated by the number of partitions. The address of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which the table set as above is stored is set in a predetermined register (HL) (Sb72). After that, the number of storage areas corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions of the predetermined register (D) is obtained from the storage area of the ROM 41b specified based on the address of the RAM initialization data table set in the predetermined register (HL). Then, set it in a predetermined register (B) as the number of addresses of the area to be initialized, and obtain the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D), and set it as the RAM address to be initialized. Set in a predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74).

After setting the initialization data (for example, 0) in the predetermined register (A), the predetermined register (A ), the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data (Sb75). Thereafter, by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C), the RAM address to be initialized is advanced by one (Sb76).

Then, by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (B), the number of remaining addresses is subtracted by 1, and then it is determined whether the remaining address number is greater than 0, thereby determining whether the initialization target range has ended. is determined (Sb77). If it is determined in step Sd77 that the number of remaining initial addresses is greater than 0 and that the range to be initialized has not ended, the process returns to step Sb75, and each process of Sb75 to Sb77 is performed until the number of remaining addresses becomes 0. This process is repeated until the initialization target determination is completed. As a result, a storage area (initialization target range) corresponding to the number of storage areas (number of addresses) to be initialized from the first address of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized that is predefined in the RAM initialization data table. , is initialized with initialization data.

If it is determined in step Sb77 that the number of remaining addresses is not greater than 0 and the initialization target range has ended, that is, if all the predetermined areas of the RAM 41c specified based on the RAM initialization data table have been initialized, , by subtracting 1 from the value of the predetermined register (D), the value indicated by the number of partitions of the storage area of the RAM 41c to be initialized is subtracted by 1 (Sb78), and it is determined whether the value indicated by the number of partitions after subtraction is 0 or not. (Sb79), and if the value indicated by the number of sections is not 0, the process returns to step Sb73, and based on the value indicated by the number of sections, the number of storage areas to be initialized is set in the RAM initialization table. , and set it in a predetermined register (B) as the number of addresses of the area to be initialized, and also obtain the value of the start address corresponding to the value indicated by the number of divisions in the predetermined register (D) from the RAM initialization table. , After setting the RAM address to be initialized in the predetermined register (C) (Sb73, Sb74), initialization data (for example, 0) is set in the predetermined register (A), and the address is set in the predetermined register (C). By setting the initialization data set in the predetermined register (A) in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the initialization target RAM address, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is initialized with the initialization data. (Sb75), by adding 1 to the value of the predetermined register (C), the process of incrementing the initialization target RAM address by one (Sb76) is repeated until it is determined that the number of addresses has become 0 in step Sb79. Then, the storage area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the value indicated by the number of partitions of the storage area of the predetermined register (D) is initialized. By repeating each process in steps Sb73 to Sb78 until the number of partitions in the storage area becomes 0, a predetermined storage area of the RAM 41c specified by the number of partitions is initialized. Then, when the value indicated by the number of storage area divisions in the predetermined register (D) becomes 0, the AT state management process is ended and the process returns to the main process. The data related to the control during the advantageous section includes data related to the control of the AT state, and the data related to the control during the advantageous section is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 41c by the advantageous section data initialization process. By initializing , data related to control during the advantageous section and data related to control of the AT state are initialized, and the advantageous section is ended and the AT state is ended.

In this embodiment, in the advantageous section data initialization process, the initial value of the number of sections is set to 2, and the storage area in two predetermined sections in the RAM 41c is initialized. The configuration may be such that one predetermined storage area or three or more storage areas in the RAM 41c are initialized.

As shown in FIG. 54, after it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set in step Sb70 and the advantageous section data initialization process (Sb71 to Sb79) is performed, and in step Sb70, the advantageous section ends. After determining that the flag is not set, the game section currently being controlled is determined based on whether or not the advantageous section flag indicating that the control is in the advantageous section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether the vehicle is in an advantageous section (Sb80). The advantageous period flag indicates that a predetermined advantageous period transition combination is set in an internal lottery in a game in which the specified number of bets is set to 3 by the ball output control process in step Sb16 and is not controlled by the BB. The condition is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c on the condition that the game section is shifted to an advantageous section upon winning.

If it is determined in step Sb80 that the advantageous section flag is set, data (1) indicating an ON state is set in the advantageous section signal output buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb81 ), proceed to step Sb82. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb80 that the advantageous section flag is not set, the process proceeds to step Sb82 without setting data indicating the ON state in the advantageous section signal output buffer. When the data indicating the ON state is not set in the output buffer of the advantageous section signal, the value of the output buffer of the advantageous section signal will be the 0 value (OFF state) when initialized by the advantageous section data initialization process described above. (data indicating this) will be maintained as is.

Thereafter, in step Sb82, the output buffer of the advantageous interval signal is referred to to determine whether the value of data set in the output buffer of the advantageous interval signal is the initial value (0: data indicating an OFF state). Determine whether or not. Then, in step Sb82, if it is determined that the value of the output buffer of the advantageous period signal is the initial value (0), that is, if it is determined that the game period is not controlled to be an advantageous period, the period display LED is turned off. After setting the current data number in the A register (Sb83) and performing continuous data processing (Sb84), the process advances to step Sb85. In the continuous data processing at Sb84, processing is performed to set the output state of the advantageous section signal to the OFF state based on the data number when the section display LED is turned off and a continuous data processing table to be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sb82 that the value of the output buffer for the advantageous period signal is not the initial value (0), that is, the predetermined value (1) is set, and the gaming period is controlled to be the advantageous period. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step Sb85 without performing steps Sb83 and Sb84.

In step Sb85, after setting the capacity of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (RAM initialization target size) to be initialized every time one game ends in the BC register (Sb85), a BB end flag is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Based on whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) has ended in the game, it is determined whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) has ended (Sb86). The BB end flag is a flag that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when it is determined that the special states (BB1, BB2) have ended in the game by the above-mentioned combination end check process.

If it is determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the capacity of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (RAM initialization target size) to be initialized every time the special state ends is set in the BC register. (Sb87), the process returns to step Sb1. On the other hand, if it is not determined in step Sb86 that the special state has ended in the game, the process returns to step Sb1 without performing the process in step Sb87.

Thereafter, steps Sb1 to Sb87 are repeated. When the main process completes one round, the process related to the control of one unit of game ends, and the main process is repeatedly executed for each unit of game.

In this way, the initial setting process and main process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment range from the process included in the gaming program to the process included in the non-gaming program, such as non-gaming RAM area initialization processing, RT information output Processing, medal sensor processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc. are called. When calling a process included in a non-gaming program, each time the process of the corresponding non-gaming program is called, the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 is set on the gaming program side that is the calling source. The value of the stack pointer SP used in the gaming program is stored and saved in the non-gaming RAM area on the called non-gaming program side, and all the information provided in the main control unit 41 is stored in the stack area and saved. Processing is performed to store and save the value of the register in the non-gaming stack area. Then, processing corresponding to the called non-gaming program (for example, processing to initialize the non-gaming RAM area in the non-gaming RAM area initialization process, medal sensor check processing in the medal sensor process described later, and role ratio monitoring process described later) Each state count processing etc. in data processing) is performed.

Furthermore, after processing the non-gaming program, the main control unit 41 saves the values of all the registers saved in the non-gaming stack area at the start of the non-gaming program to the corresponding registers on the non-gaming program side. At the same time, the value of the stack pointer SP stored in the non-gaming RAM area at the start of the non-gaming program is set to the stack pointer SP, and the register is returned to the state at the start of the non-gaming program. The stack pointer SP is restored to the state at the start of the game program, and the value of the flag register stored in the game stack area before calling the non-game program is stored in the corresponding flag register on the calling game program side. A process is performed to read the register and restore the register to the state before the non-gaming program was called.

In addition, when performing various processes according to the non-gaming program, the main control unit 41 performs various processes according to the non-gaming program by calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program using the above-mentioned CALL command etc. When each process corresponding to the non-game program is completed, the game program returns to the calling source game program.

The main control unit 41 (main CPU 41a) of the present embodiment can call RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc. included in the non-gaming program from the main processing included in the gaming program. This is possible, and the processing included in the non-gaming program called by the main processing (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, hand ratio monitor data processing, etc.) is , First, using the LD instruction, the main processing of the calling game program reads the value of the stack pointer SP and saves it to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By reading the value of the stack pointer SP saved at the end of the non-gaming program and setting it as the value indicated by the current stack pointer SP, processing for setting the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is performed.

In addition, the non-gaming program called by the main processing uses the LD instruction to set the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program, and then uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to move all registers to the RAM 41c. A process of saving the data to a predetermined area is performed. At this time, in order to set the stack pointer SP for a non-gaming program, the LD instruction is used, so the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the flag register is changed before and after the execution of the LD instruction. When the state of the flag register changes and the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set, the state of the flag register may be different from the state when the main process calls the non-gaming program. In other words, on the non-gaming program side, among all the registers saved using the first saving instruction, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main processing calls the non-gaming program. , the flag registers may be in a different state than when the main process calls a non-gaming program.

In addition, the non-gaming program called by the main processing uses the first return command (POP ALL) to end the non-gaming program and return to the main processing included in the gaming program. After restoring the values of all the registers saved at the start of the process, the LD instruction is used to set the stack pointer SP for the game program, and the process returns to the main process. At this time, by using the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register will be changed, and the state of the flag register will change before and after the execution of the LD instruction, and the game program will change to the main processing. The state of the flag register when returning may be different from the state when the main processing called the non-gaming program. In other words, when the non-gaming program returns to the main processing, all registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main processing called the non-gaming program, but the flag register is , the main processing may be in a different state than when the non-gaming program is called.

In this way, on the non-gaming program side, the state of the flag register saved and restored using the first save instruction and the first return instruction is the state when the main process called the non-gaming program, that is, the main process The state may be different from the state of the flag register used by the non-gaming program, so on the non-gaming program side, the state of all registers including the flag register provided in the main control unit 41 is protected when the main processing calls the non-gaming program. difficult to do.

On the other hand, in the main processing of this embodiment, when calling the processing included in a non-gaming program (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, data processing for role ratio monitor, etc.), the corresponding non-gaming program Each time the process is called, the main processing side that is the caller uses the second save instruction (PUSH AF) to store and save the state of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the game stack area. When returning to the main processing from the processing included in the non-gaming program, the main processing side uses the second return instruction (POP AF) to save the state of the flag register to the gaming stack area. Bring it back. As a result, when the main processing returns from the process included in the called non-gaming program, it is possible to restore the state of the flag register to the state saved when calling the non-gaming program on the main processing side. , among the registers restored by the non-gaming program side, the registers other than the flag register are in the same state as when the main processing calls the non-gaming program, while for the flag register, the main processing is Even if the state is different from the state when calling the non-gaming program, when the main processing returns from the non-gaming program, the state of all registers can be restored to the state when the main processing called the non-gaming program. It looks like this.

In addition, the process included in the non-gaming program called from the main process included in the gaming program uses the first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to transfer the states of all registers included in the main control unit 41 to the non-gaming stack area. The state of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 is restored to the state saved in the non-gaming stack area using the first return instruction (POP ALL), while the main process uses the second save instruction (POP ALL). PUSH AF) is used to save the state of only the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the game stack area, and the second return instruction (POP AF) is used to save the state of the flag register to the game stack area. It is designed to return to the evacuated state. As a result, in the game program, the state of the flag register is saved and restored using the 1-byte second save instruction and the second return instruction, so the 2-byte first save instruction and the first return instruction used in the non-gaming program are used. Compared to the case where the register state is saved and restored using instructions, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. In addition, in the game program, the second save instruction is used to save the state of only the flag register among the multiple registers to the game stack area, so the first save instruction used in the non-gaming program is used to save the state of all registers. The capacity of the game stack area can be reduced compared to the case where the game stack area is evacuated.

In the processing included in the game program such as the main processing of this embodiment, the value of the second zero flag in the flag register is not used for determination for proceeding with various processing based on the program.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when calling the processing included in the non-gaming program (RT information output processing, operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.), timer interrupts are set to be prohibited and the processing is called. By setting timer interrupts to permission when returning from processing to main processing, timer interrupts are disabled during the period in which the processing included in the non-gaming program is being executed.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when calling the processing included in the non-gaming program (operation information signal output processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc.), after saving the flag register, timer interrupts are set to be prohibited. When the called process returns to the main process, timer interrupts are enabled and the flag register is restored.

The main processing included in the gaming program of this embodiment can call the operation information signal output processing, medal sensor processing, role ratio monitor data processing, etc. included in the non-gaming program, and these non-gaming programs If the processing included in is executed by the main control unit 41 in a state where sufficient time is secured until the next timer interrupt processing is performed, the processing included in All the processes included in the process are completed, but if the main control unit 41 executes the process without enough time secured until the next timer interrupt process is performed, the next timer interrupt process is completed. It consists of a program whose capacity is such that all the processes included in the process may not be completed within the time until the interrupt process is performed, and the next timer interrupt process may be performed while the process is being executed. has been done.

In the gaming program (main processing, game start waiting processing, etc.) of this embodiment, when calling a non-gaming program, after the interrupt waiting processing is performed once and the timer interrupt processing is performed, the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program. A series of processes including the process of calling a program are performed to call a non-gaming program. In other words, by calling and executing a non-gaming program using the wait processing for one interrupt as an opportunity, the non-gaming program can be executed with sufficient time secured until the next timer interrupt processing is performed. ing.

In this way, in the main processing of this embodiment, the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when the advantageous section is to be ended, the advantageous section signal output stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set. After performing advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) that initializes information regarding the advantageous section including the buffer, and controlling the advantageous section signal to the OFF state by initializing the advantageous section signal output buffer, Based on the fact that the signal output buffer is at the initial value (0) during the relevant advantageous section, continuous data processing is performed (Sb82 to Sb84), data in the OFF state is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and the section is displayed. It is designed to terminate. As a result, the section display is ended after the signal during the advantageous section turns OFF, so it is possible to prevent the section display from ending before the advantageous section related information has been initialized, and Since the intermediate signal output buffer is not initialized, it is possible to prevent the section display from ending even though the advantageous section signal is being output to the test device.

In the main processing of this embodiment, advantageous section data initialization processing (Sb71 to Sb79) is performed to initialize information regarding advantageous sections, and the OFF state is indicated in the output buffer of the advantageous section signal by the timer interrupt processing that is performed thereafter. When the initial value (0) is set, the signal is controlled to be in the OFF state during the advantageous section. Thereby, by initializing the advantageous section signal when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section signal can be turned off without individually setting the output buffer of the advantageous section signal to the OFF state.

In the main processing of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section is in progress based on the advantageous section flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80), and when it is determined that the advantageous section is in progress, an advantageous section signal is output. A predetermined value (1) indicating an ON state is set in the buffer (Sb81), and if the predetermined value is set in the advantageous interval signal buffer by the timer interrupt processing performed thereafter, the advantageous interval signal is set in the ON state. It is designed to be controlled by With this, it is determined whether the game is in an advantageous period or not every time the game ends, and if it is determined that the game is in an advantageous period, the ON state is set in the output buffer of the advantageous period signal. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the signal from being turned off during the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of executing a main process that is repeatedly executed for each game, and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at regular time intervals. It is possible to perform specific processing (processing by a gaming program) and special processing (processing by a non-gaming program) in the main processing, and one gaming time management for measuring the minimum time of one game in the timer interrupt processing. It is possible to perform counter update processing (Sv20) to update the timer value. While a specific process (gaming program) is being executed, a timer interrupt process may be executed, and the timer value for one game time management is updated. Interrupt processing is not executed, and the timer value for one game time management is not updated. As a result, by updating the timer value for one-gaming time management as much as possible, the game can proceed smoothly, but during the period when special processing is being performed, the timer value for one-gaming time management is not updated. This prevents the process of updating the timer value for one gaming time management and the special process from being mixed together.

In the main process of this embodiment, before the reel rotation of one game starts, it is determined whether the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) (Sb40), and the timer value for one game time management is determined to be a specific value (0). If it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is not the specific value (0), the game waits without proceeding until it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is the specific value (0), and the timer value for one game time management is If it is determined that the value is a specific value (0), the game is allowed to proceed. As a result, the game does not progress until it is determined that the minimum time has elapsed based on the timer value for one game time management, and the game progresses when the minimum time has elapsed. can be ensured.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) (Sb40), execution of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited (Sb41), and then continuous data processing is performed. By doing this (Sb43), an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set in the timer for managing one game time. As a result, timer interrupt processing is prohibited when setting the initial value to the timer for managing one gaming time, so if the timer for managing one gaming time is being set to the initial value, This can prevent the value from being updated.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to execute a medal sensor process (Sg9) for monitoring the passing status of medals flowing down the medal receiving channel 29b as a special process (non-gaming program). As a result, by not updating the timer value for one game time management during the period when the medal sensor process to be monitored is being performed, the timer value for one game time management is not updated. Medal sensor processing is not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs special processing (non-gaming program) such as the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out, the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out, and the total cumulative number of coins, which are data for calculating the accessory payout ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Data processing for monitoring the winning ratio is executed to update the number of consecutive winning coins paid out. As a result, the timer value for one game time management is not updated during the period when the data processing for the role ratio monitor that updates the data for calculating the accessory payout ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is performed. Processing for updating a timer value for managing playing time and data processing for monitoring win ratios related to performance display of a gaming machine are not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to perform, as a special process (non-gaming program), an operation information signal output process (Sb19) that outputs a stop execution position signal to a test device that tests the slot machine 1. It has become. As a result, the timer value for one game time management is not updated during the period when the operation information signal output process for outputting the test signal to the test device that tests the slot machine 1 is performed. Processing for updating the timer value for gaming time management and processing for outputting operation information signals related to the test of the slot machine 1 are not mixed.

In the main processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) (Sb40), the set index data at the start of the game is set in the A register (Sb42), and the continuous data By performing the process (Sb43), the continuous data processing starts counting the minimum time by setting the initial value to the timer value for one game time management, and also sets the initial value to the timer value for one game time management. A test signal is output when the setting is made. As a result, the test signal is output when the initial value is set in the timer value for one game time management, so by specifying the time interval at which the test signal is output, the test device can You can determine whether time is secured.

[About group information setting processing, etc. in internal lottery processing]
The group information setting process performed by the main control unit 41 in the internal lottery process will be described based on FIG. 55.

The main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery in the internal lottery process of the main process, and sets a winning number (winning number) that allows identification of winning combinations (including losers) in the internal lottery in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, in the internal lottery process, group information setting processing (general role) is performed, and group information (general role) that can identify the type of general role won in the internal lottery based on the winning number (winning number) is specified. , sets the group information in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The group information is then referenced by the game start command transmission process performed in the main process, and an internal winning command that includes the group information and can identify the type of general winning combination (including losers) won in the internal lottery. is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the group information setting process (general role), first, a role number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the internal lottery process and is used to identify the internal lottery target role won in the internal lottery in the game. (Winning number) is read into the A register (Sc1). Thereafter, the start address value of the RAM 41c in which the group information setting table is set is set in the HL register (Sc2), and group information conversion processing is performed (Sc3). In the group information conversion process, group information (0, 16, 17) corresponding to the winning number (winning number, 0 to 40, 43, 44) is specified based on the group information setting table and the A register value, and Set in register. When the winning number (winning number) is between 0 and 15, 43, and 44, 0 is set as the group information, and when the winning number (winning number) is 16, 16 is set as the group information. If the winning number (winning number) is within the range of 17 to 40, 17 is set as the group information, and if the winning number (winning number) is within the range of 41 to 64, 41 is set as the group information. is set.

After performing the group information conversion process in step Sc3, it is determined whether the group information set in the A register is 0 (Sc4), and if it is determined that the group information is 0, Read the winning number into the A register (Sc5), correct the value of the A register to the value of the winning number, and store the corrected value of the A register in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (general winning) (Sc6) . On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sc4 that the group information is not 0, the value of the A register set by the group information conversion process is stored as it is in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (general role) (Sc6). After performing the process of step Sc6, the group information setting process (general role) is ended.

In this way, by performing the group information setting process (general role), the main control unit 41 selects internal lottery target roles (loss, replay 1A) whose role numbers (winning numbers) are within the range of 0 to 16 in the internal lottery , Replay 1B, Replay 1C, Replay 1D, Replay 1E, Replay 1F, Replay 2, Cherry 1, Cherry 2, Cherry 3, Chance Replay 1, Chance Replay 2, Watermelon, Common 1-card role, Common 3-card role, Common multi-card role If the win is won, the winning number (winning number, 0-16) of the winning internal lottery target role is set as the group information (general role), and the winning number (winning number) is set in the internal lottery. If the internal lottery target role (multi-card winning role) in the range of 17 to 40 is won, a common 17 will be set as the group information (general role), and the role number (winning number) will be determined in the internal lottery. If the internal lottery target roles of 43 and 44 (A in BB, B in BB) are won, the role number (winning number, 43, 44) of the internal lottery target role that has been won as group information (general role). ).

Then, by transmitting an internal winning command including the group information (general role) as a winning result of the internal lottery to the sub-control unit 91, Although it is not possible to specify the target role, it is possible to specify the type of the winning internal lottery target role.

Although not particularly shown, the main control unit 41 performs an internal lottery in the internal lottery process of the main process, and stores winning numbers (winning numbers) that can identify the winning combinations (including losers) in the internal lottery in the RAM 41c. After setting it in a predetermined area of If it is determined, the value corresponding to the winning special prize (1 for BB1, 2 for BB2) is stored as group information (special prize) in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the special prize (BB1 , BB2), 0 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as group information (special winning combination).

In addition, after performing an internal lottery in the internal lottery process, if the winning number (winning number) indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is 0 to 40, 43, or 44, the main control unit 41 performs the internal lottery. The value of the winning number) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the general winning number, and when the winning number (winning number) is 41 or 42, that is, if the special winning number (BB1, BB2) has been won, the general winning number is set as the general winning number. A value (0) indicating a loss is set as the winning combination number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

In addition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is common regardless of whether the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) or the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set. If the group information setting process (general role) is performed and a multi-card winning winning combination is won in the internal lottery, it is possible to identify that the multi-card winning winning combination was won in the internal lottery, but the winning combination is In order to make it impossible to identify the type of winning combination, an internal winning command that can identify the winning combination group is sent. As a result, even if the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is set, or the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set, the multi-card winning combination will be selected in the internal lottery. is selected as a lottery target, and if any type of multi-card winning combination is won, the operation mode that is advantageous for the player will change depending on the type of the winning multi-card winning combination. Even if the bet number of 3 cards (first bet number) is set or the number of bets of 2 cards (second bet number) is set, a multi-card winning combination is won in the internal lottery. However, since we send an internal winning command that can specify the group of winning multi-card winning winning combinations so that it is impossible to identify the type of winning multi-card winning winning winnings, the number of bets of 3 (1st bet number) is set, even if 2 bets (2nd bet number) is set, an operation mode advantageous to the player may be identified from the internal winning command. can be prevented.

Also, whether the number of bets of 3 coins (first bet number) is set or the number of bets of 2 coins (second bet number) is set, an internal lottery will be performed in order of the number of cards pressed. When a winning combination is won, an internal winning command is created by a common group information setting process, so the program capacity associated with command creation can be reduced.

[About continuous data processing]
The control details of continuous data processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 56 to 58. Incidentally, the continuous data processing is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the main processing etc. included in the game program. Continuous data processing is called from main processing or the like with a data number set in the A register. The data number is data indicating the type of processing to be performed in continuous data processing.

As shown in FIG. 56, in continuous data processing, it is first determined whether the data number set in the A register when starting the continuous data processing is a number indicating that data setting processing is to be performed. (Sd1). If it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that processing other than data setting processing is to be performed, the process proceeds to step Sd18, where 1-byte data lottery processing is performed. The 1-byte data lottery process is a process of performing a predetermined lottery specified based on the data number of the A register. After performing the 1-byte data lottery process in step Sd18, the continuous data process is ended and the process returns to the calling source process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd1 that the data number set in the A register is a number indicating that data setting processing is to be performed, the reference address of the index data of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register. (Sd2), and performs addition processing (Sd3). In the addition process, the A register value is added to the HL register, and the data stored at the address specified by the added HL register value is acquired in the A register. In the index data table, the relative distance from the reference address to the top address of the setting data table corresponding to the data number is stored in the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number (see FIG. 58). By performing addition processing in step Sd3, the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number is set in the HL register, and the address area of the index data table corresponding to the data number is set in the A register. A relative distance will be set. For example, by setting data number 1 in the A register and performing addition processing, address m2+1 (reference address m2 + data number 1) of index data of the continuous data processing table is set in the HL register, as shown in FIG. Then, the relative distance data α(m6-(m2+1)) stored at the address m2+1 is set in the A register.

After performing the addition process in step Sd3, the value of the A register is added to the HL register (Sd4), and the address specified by the HL register value is advanced by the A register value. As a result, for example, if the data number is 1, the start address m6 of the setting data table corresponding to data number 1 will be set in the HL register.

Thereafter, the total number of settings stored in the area of the setting data table at the address specified by the HL register value is read into the B register, and the initialization number is read into the C register (Sd5). After the HL register value is updated by adding 1 (Sd6), the HL register value is updated by adding 1 (Sd7). Thereafter, the setting destination address value stored at the address of the HL register value is read into the E register (Sd8).

Then, it is determined whether the number of initializations of the C register is 0 (Sd9), and if it is determined that the number of initializations of the C register is 0, the HL register value is updated by adding 1 ( Sd10), the setting data value stored at the address of the updated HL register value is read into the A register (Sd11), and it is determined whether the value of the A register is 0 (Sd12). If it is determined in step Sd12 that the A register value is not 0, the setting data set in the A register is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the C register value is not 0 in step Sd9, after subtracting 1 from the number of initializations of the C register (Sd16), by calculating the exclusive OR of the A register values, A Initialization data (0) is set in the register (Sd17). Then, data for initialization in the A register is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value (Sd13).As a result, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value is initialized. The Rukoto.

After setting the A register value in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c at the address specified by the E register value in step Sd13, the total number of settings is subtracted by 1 and updated by subtracting 1 from the B register (Sd14). Thereafter, it is determined whether the remaining total set number of times is 0 based on the B register value (Sd15).

If it is determined in step Sd15 that the B register value is 0 and the remaining total set number of times is 0, the continuous data processing is ended and the process returns to the calling source process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sd15 that the B register value is not 0 and the remaining total number of settings is not 0, the process returns to step Sd7 and the processing of each step from Sd7 to Sd15 is specified based on the B register value. This process is repeated until the total set number of times is zero.

Further, as shown in FIG. 57, if it is determined that the value of the A register is 0 in step Sd12, after subtracting 1 from the total number of settings of the B register (Sd19), the BC register value is set to a predetermined value in the RAM 41c. Evacuate to the area (Sd20). Thereafter, the setting destination address value specified based on the HL register value is read into the DE register (Sd21). Then, it is determined whether the E register value is a predetermined waiting time setting code value (Sd22). If it is determined that the E register value is not a predetermined waiting time setting code value, port output processing is performed (Sd29). In port output processing, the output signal from the output port specified by the HL register is set to the state (ON state or OFF state) specified by the A register.

Further, if it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is a predetermined waiting time setting code value, the determination code set in the predetermined bit of the E register value is deleted (Sd23), and the DE After setting the register value as the waiting time in the BC register (Sd24), interrupt BC times waiting processing is performed (Sd25). As a result, the timer interrupt process is waited for the number of times set in the BC register until the timer interrupt process is performed.

After performing the interrupt BC count wait process in step Sd25, the total number of times set in the BC register saved in step Sd20 is restored (Sd26). Furthermore, if it is determined in step Sd22 that the E register value is not a waiting time code and port output processing is performed in step Sd29, the process proceeds to step Sd26 without performing each process in steps Sd23 to Sd25. , the total number of times set in the BC register saved in steps Sd20 is restored.

After restoring the total set number of times in the BC register in step Sd26, the B register is subtracted by 1 and the total set number of times is subtracted by 1 (Sd27). Then, it is determined whether the remaining total number of settings specified based on the B register value is 0 (Sd28), and if it is determined that the remaining total number of settings is not 0, the process returns to step Sd20; Each process of steps Sd20 to Sd28 is performed until it is determined that the total remaining set number of times is 0. Then, in step Sd28, it is determined that the total remaining set number of times is 0, so that the continuous data processing is ended and the process returns to the calling source process.

In this way, continuous data processing involves a process of initializing a predetermined area specified based on a data number and a continuous data processing table, and a process of initializing a predetermined area specified based on a data number and a continuous data processing table. A process of setting predetermined data specified based on a data processing table, and setting an output signal from a predetermined output port specified based on a data number and a continuous data processing table to an output state (ON state or OFF state) Perform processing, etc.

For example, as shown in FIG. 58, when the data number is 1 (setting data when operating the start switch), the maintenance permission flag and the payout number display displayed on the gaming auxiliary display 12 are displayed based on the setting data table. (upper digit) and initializes the payout number display (lower digit). In addition, if the data number is 4 (setting data when the section display LED is turned off), output port processing is performed based on the port output code being set, and external output signals 1 and 2 are turned off. and set the signal to the OFF state during the advantageous section. In addition, if the data number is 27 (setting data when moving to an advantageous section), an advantageous section (01) is set in the section status information that allows you to specify the controlled gaming section, and A high certainty state (1) is set in the high certainty state flag indicating the state.

[About the game start waiting process]
The control contents of the game start waiting process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 59. Note that the game start waiting process is included in the game program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the game start waiting process, first, a process for displaying the number of inserted medals is performed (Se1), and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are turned on (lit state) according to the number of medals inserted into the slot machine 1. to control. Thereafter, an error number corresponding to the error code (E1) that can identify that the hopper tank 34a is full is prepared in a predetermined register (A) (Se2), and with reference to a predetermined port input buffer, It is determined whether the hopper tank 34a is in a full state based on the confirmed data from the full tank sensor 35a (Se3).

If it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is full, error processing to be described later is performed (Se4). In the error processing, control is made to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. In addition, an error command that can specify the error code (E1) prepared in a predetermined register is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E1) can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for reference in other processes. Set as an error flag. Further, the error code (E1) is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E1) prepared in a predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E1) is set in the register and the state is shifted to an error state, the system waits until the confirmed data of the full tank sensor 35a becomes OFF, and then the system waits until the confirmed data of the full tank sensor 35a becomes OFF. , sends an error command (cancellation) to the sub-control unit 91 to cancel the error state, terminates the error processing, and proceeds to step Se5.

If it is determined in step Se3 that the hopper tank 34a is not full, and if the error handling in step Se4 is completed, the value of the replay medal counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to a predetermined value. Read into the register (Se5). In addition, the replay medal counter is set to a value according to the result of the previous game by the game end setting process in the previous main process, and a replay is awarded when a replay combination is won in the previous game. If a replay is not given in the previous game, a value corresponding to the specified number of bets required to play the game (for example, 3) is set. is set.

Thereafter, the replay medal counter in the RAM 41c is cleared (Se6), and it is determined whether the value of the replay medal counter read in step Se5 is greater than 0, that is, whether or not a replay is granted. (Se7), and if a replay is granted, a medal insertion execution process is performed (Se8). In the medal insertion execution process, the value of the replay medal counter is set to the number of bets, and the 1 to 3 BETLEDs 14 to 16 are set to the ON state (lit state) to set the specified number of bets (in this example, 3). is set. In addition, an input number command that can specify the number of medals used to set the number of bets is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91.

If the value of the replay medal counter is 0 in step Se7, that is, it is determined that replay is not granted, and after the medal insertion execution process is performed because replay is granted in step Se8. performs medal maintenance permission setting processing (Se9). In the medal maintenance permission setting process, the value of credits set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and if the value of credits has not reached the maximum value (50 in this embodiment), the value of credits is set from the medal insertion unit 4. A medal maintenance permission flag indicating permission to insert medals is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After performing the medal care permission setting process in step Se9, a one-time interrupt wait process is performed (Se10). By performing the one-time interrupt wait processing, the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed and the detection status of various switches, lighting status of LEDs, various timers, etc. are updated, and the detection status of these various switches is updated. In the updated state, subsequent processing (for example, medal insertion and payout error check processing, medal insertion signal processing, and operation input reception processing, which will be described later) can be performed.

After one interrupt wait process is performed in step Se10 and one timer interrupt is performed, an input/payout error check process similar to step Sb32 of the above-mentioned main process is performed (Se11). Then, based on whether or not an error execution flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether error processing has been executed in the error check processing (Se12).

If it is determined in step Se12 that error processing has been executed in the error check process, the process returns to step Se10 and each process in steps Se10 to Se12 is performed again. After that, each process of steps Se10 to Se12 is performed while no abnormality is detected in the transition of the medal payout signal or the transition of the medal input signal, so that the process of step Se12 is performed while the error execution flag is not set. Processing will be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Se12 that the error execution flag is not set, medal input signal processing is performed (Se13). In the medal insertion signal processing, the medal insertion status is determined based on the transition of the medal insertion signal. If normal insertion of medals is detected, the medals are accepted for setting the number of bets and credits, and the medal insertion signal processing is ended. On the other hand, if an abnormal medal insertion is detected, an error code (E5) is prepared and error handling is performed. Thereafter, the error state is canceled and the error processing is ended, thereby ending the medal insertion signal processing.

After the medal insertion signal processing is performed in step Se13, the operations of various switches are enabled, and when a switch whose operation is enabled is operated, an operation input reception process that accepts an operation by the switch is performed. Do it (Se14).

In the operation input reception process, when no medals are passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the total value of the credit set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the number of bets already set (the number of bets already set) is calculated. It is determined whether or not is greater than or equal to the value (3) required to set the bet number of three coins. If it is determined that the total value of credits and the set bet number is greater than or equal to the value (3) required to set the bet number of 3 coins, the edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is referred to, and the ON edge is Determine whether data is set. When it is determined that ON edge data is set, the operation by the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted, the number of medals is set as the number of bets so that the number of bets becomes three, and the number of medals set as the number of bets is Performs processing to subtract the number of medals from credits. When it is determined that ON edge data is not set, processing is performed to control the BET switch valid LED 21 to an ON state (lit state) by setting ON state data in the output buffer of the BET switch valid LED 21. On the other hand, the total value of the credits set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c and the number of bets that have already been set (the number of bets that have been set) is not greater than the value (3) required to set the number of bets for three cards. If it is determined, neither the process of determining whether the ON edge data of the MAXBET switch 6 is set nor the process of controlling the BET switch valid LED 21 to be in the ON state are performed. If it is determined that the total value of credits and the already set bet number (set bet number) is not greater than the value (3) required to set the bet number of 3 cards, the BET switch valid LED 21 remains off. As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set a bet of 3, the bet of 3 (first bet) is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6 by the player, etc. On the other hand, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is insufficient to set the bet number of 3 cards, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted and only the number of bets of 2 cards (second bet number) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, the bet number of two bets is not set, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being played with the second bet number as much as possible.

In addition, in the operation input reception process, if the number of bets set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is the specified number (2 or 3) when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the start is started. Enables acceptance of operation by switch 7. Furthermore, when no medals are passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, acceptance of operations by the payment switch 10 and the setting key switch 37 is enabled.

In addition, in the operation input reception processing, if the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, a start flag indicating that the start switch 7 has been operated is set in a predetermined register. Thereafter, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is turned off to perform a process of switching the flow path of the medals to the medal payout port 9 side. Further, when an operation by the setting key switch 37 is detected while the operation by the setting key switch 37 is in a valid state, a setting value display process is performed to display the setting value on the setting value display 24. Further, when an operation of the settlement switch 10 is detected while the operation of the settlement switch 10 is valid, a settlement process is performed in which the medals stored in the credit are returned to the player. After performing processing according to the switch whose operation was detected, the operation input reception processing is ended.

After performing the operation input acceptance process in step Se14, it is determined whether a valid operation with the start switch 7 has been detected based on the start flag (Se15). If it is determined that the start flag is not set in the predetermined register and a valid operation by the start switch 7 is not detected, the process proceeds to step Se16 and performs LED display processing to control the lighting state of the start valid LED 18. .

In the LED display process, when operation of any switch other than the reset switch 23 is not detected in a state where the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be valid by the operation input acceptance process in step Se14, the start enable LED 18 is turned on. (lit state), and when the operation of any switch other than the reset switch 23 is detected in the state where the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be valid, and the operation by the start switch 7 is set to be valid. If not, the start valid LED 18 is controlled to be in an OFF state (extinguished state), and the lighting state of the start valid LED 18 notifies whether the operation by the start switch 7 is valid or invalid.

In step Se15, if it is determined that the start flag is set in a predetermined register and a valid operation of the start switch 7 has been detected, a random value for internal lottery is obtained from the random number circuit 42 and stored in the RAM 41c. Set in a predetermined area (Se17). After that, medal insertion state data that can identify the set number of bets is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Se18), the start valid LED 18 is set to the OFF state (extinguished state) (Se19), and the medal maintenance permission flag is set. A predetermined area of the RAM 41c is cleared (Se20), the display of the number of coins to be paid out is controlled to be cleared on the game auxiliary display 12 (Se21), the game start waiting process is ended, and the process returns to the main process. After that, in the main process, an internal lottery is performed using the random numbers obtained in step Se17, and rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started in response to the detection of the operation of the start switch 7. Then, one game is started.

In this way, the game start waiting process included in the game program can call the medal input signal process included in the game program, and when calling the medal input signal process, the timer interrupt process (main) is set to 1. After performing the one-time interrupt wait process that waits until the process is executed twice, the medal input signal process is called. As will be described later, in the timer interrupt processing (main), port input processing is performed to update the input data of sensors including the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the game start waiting processing causes one interrupt waiting processing. After performing this, by calling and performing the medal insertion signal processing, the medal sensor processing called by the medal insertion signal processing performs processing based on the latest input data updated by the timer interrupt processing (main). is possible.

In addition, in the operation input acceptance process performed during the game start waiting process, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is now effectively accepted when the number of bets that has already been set and the credit can be combined to set the number of bets of three. ing. As a result, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set a bet of 3, the bet of 3 (first bet) is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6 by the player, etc. On the other hand, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is insufficient to set the bet number of 3 cards, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted and only the number of bets of 2 cards (second bet number) can be set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated, two bet numbers are not set.

In addition, in the operation input reception process performed in the game start waiting process, when the medal is not passing based on the transition of the medal insertion signal, the number of bets set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is a specified number (2 or 3). In some cases, the acceptance of the operation by the start switch 7 is enabled, and the start switch 7 is enabled even when the number of bets is 3 and when the number of bets is 2. The game can be started by operating the switch 7.

[About error handling]
The control details of error processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 60. Note that the error process is a subroutine that is included in the game program and called in the main process included in the game program. Error processing is called with an error number corresponding to an error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred set in a predetermined register (register A in this embodiment).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the error processing, first, the error number set in the A register at the start of the error processing is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf1). Then, the value of the error command indicating that error processing is being performed is set in the D register (Sf2), and communication data storage processing is performed (Sf3). In the communication data storage process, a command is generated based on the values set in the A register and the D register, and is set in the command queue. For example, if an error number corresponding to an error code is set in the A register and an error command value is set in the D register, an error command containing an error number that can identify the type of error that is occurring is Generate and set it in the command queue. The commands set in the command queue will be sequentially transmitted through command transmission processing included in the subsequent timer interrupt processing.

After the communication data storage process is performed in step Sf3, a releasability determination is performed in which a determination value (releasability determination value) for determining whether the error that has occurred is a reversible error is specified. Set the start address of the value table in the HL register (Sf4), and read the cancellation determination value specified in the address obtained by adding the A register value (error number) to the HL register value into the E register (Sf5) ).

Thereafter, the value of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is read into the HL register, and the value of the HL register is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf6).

Thereafter, the address of the output buffer corresponding to the 1's digit (lower) of the game auxiliary display 12 is set in the C register (Sf7), and 7-segment display data storage processing is performed (Sf8). In the 7-segment display data storage process, display data for displaying numbers (0 to 9 and non-display in this embodiment) on the 7-segment display used in the game auxiliary display 12, which is set in advance in the ROM 41b, is stored in the 7-segment display data storage process. The display data is specified based on the specified 7-segment display data table and the value set in the A register at the start of the 7-segment display data storage process, and the corresponding display data is stored in the output buffer at the address set in the C register. Set display data. Thereafter, E display data for displaying a predetermined character (in this embodiment, "E") is set in the output buffer corresponding to the tens digit (upper) of the game auxiliary display 12 (Sf9). Display data is set in the 1's and 10's output buffers of the game auxiliary display 12, and then timer interrupt processing is performed, so that the game auxiliary display 12 changes the display mode according to the display data (for example, , "E1", etc.).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the error that has occurred is a reversible error without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 based on the releasability determination value set in the E register (Sf10). If it is determined in step Sf10 that the error that has occurred is not reversible, the process is stopped and waits. When the processing is stopped, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is temporarily stopped, and then the setting key switch 37 is turned ON to restart the power supply and shift to the setting change state, thereby freeing a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is possible to initialize and release the error state. If the cause of the error has not been removed, the error state will be temporarily cleared by transitioning to the setting change state when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, but the error will occur again after that. This will be detected and error handling will be performed. An example of an error that cannot be canceled without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 is a RAM abnormality error that occurs when a data abnormality in the RAM is detected. On the other hand, an error that can be canceled without initializing the RAM 41c of the slot machine 1 is, for example, an abnormality (error code E5) related to a medal insertion signal detected by medal sensor processing included in a non-gaming program, which will be described later.

If it is determined that the error that has occurred in step Sf10 can be cleared, one-time interrupt wait processing is performed (Sf11), timer interrupt processing is performed once, and the output status of various sensors, etc. Wait until updated.

After the one-time interrupt wait process is performed in step Sf11, one of the input buffers 0 to 2 in which the input state data of various switches (in this embodiment, input data, final data, and edge data) is stored. The input data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 0 is read into the A register (Sf12), and the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is extracted (Sf13). Further, the final data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 1 is read into the A register (Sf14), and the final data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the final data of the full tank sensor are extracted (Sf15). Then, it is determined whether the error has been cleared based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the confirmed data of the full tank sensor (Sf17).

In step Sf17, if it is determined that any of the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the confirmed data of the full tank sensor is not a normal value and the error has not been cleared. Then, the process returns to step Sf11 and each process from Sf11 to Sf17 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the confirmed data of the full tank sensor are all normal values in step Sf17, and the error has been cleared. reads the edge data of various sensors stored in the input buffer 2 into the A register (Sf18), and determines whether a reset operation has been performed using the reset switch 23 or the reset/setting switch 38 (Sf19).

If it is determined in step Sf19 that the reset operation has not been performed, the process returns to step Sf11 and each process from Sf11 to Sf19 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sf19 that a reset operation has been performed, the value of the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is returned to the value saved in step Sf6 (Sf20).

After that, clear data (0) is set in the A register as transmission data (Sf21), and using the value of the A register, the error number stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to 0 and cleared (Sf22). ). Then, communication data setting processing is performed (Sf23).

When the communication data setting process is performed in step Sf23, the value of the error command set in step Sf2 is set in the D register, and in the communication data setting process in step Sf23, 0 is set as the error number. An error command that can specify that the error has been cleared is generated and set in the command queue.

After the communication data setting process is performed in step Sf23, a one-time interrupt wait process is performed (Sf24), and the error command set in the command queue is transmitted by the timer interrupt process. Then, the error processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing that was being performed before the error processing was started.

In this way, in the error processing of this embodiment, it is possible to perform timer interrupt processing during execution of the error processing, and the timer value for one game time management is updated. As a result, the timer value for managing one game time is updated while error processing is being executed, so the elapsed minimum time is measured even during error processing, and the game can be played smoothly after error processing is completed. be able to.

In the error processing of this embodiment, when it is determined that a reset operation using the reset switch 23 has been performed while power supply to the slot machine 1 is continued (Sf19), the error processing is terminated. It is now possible to terminate the process without cutting off the power supply. Thereby, even if error processing is performed, the game can be restarted smoothly.

[About medal input signal processing]
Next, the control contents of the medal insertion signal process which is called from the game start waiting process and executed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 61. Note that the medal insertion signal process is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the game start waiting process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the medal insertion signal process, first, in the medal care permission setting process of the game start waiting process described above, a medal care permission flag is set, which indicates that insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted. (Sg1). If the medal care permission flag is not set, the medal insertion signal process is ended and the process returns to the calling game start waiting process. On the other hand, when the medal maintenance permission flag is set, the medal insertion signal state transition data set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sg2). The medal input signal state transition data is data that can specify the transition of the state of the detection signal of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medal input signal), and is data that can identify the transition of the state of the detection signal of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medal input signal), and is data that can be used as a medal sensor check included in a non-gaming program. Through processing, the medals are updated at a predetermined timing based on the input data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c.

Then, based on the medal insertion signal state transition data referred to in step Sg2, the detection range A (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c in the medal selector 29 is set to It is determined whether the medal is passing (Sg3). If it is determined that no medals are passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the flow path switching solenoid 30 is controlled to be in the ON state (Sg4), and the medals inserted from the medal input unit 4 are transferred to the medal selector. A hopper provided inside the housing 1a connects the flow path of the medals thrown in from the medal input section 4 so that they flow down the medal inflow channel 29a and the medal receiving channel 29b in the medal slot 29 and are guided to the hopper tank 34a. Control is performed to switch to the tank 34a side. Thereafter, the medal input signal ignore timer is cleared (Sg6).

Here, when setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the medal input signal ignoring timer sets at least the output of a control signal that turns the flow path switching solenoid 30 into the OFF state, and then 30 is activated and the passage of the medals inserted from the medal input section 4 is actually switched to the medal payout port 9 side. This is a timer for controlling the input signal to be ignored. When the output of the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set to switch the flow path of medals, the medal input signal ignore timer is set to the timer that is set to output the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 at least after the output of the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 is set. A predetermined time (504 milliseconds in this embodiment) is set until the medal flow path is switched. Thereafter, the medal input signal ignore timer is decremented and updated by the counter update process of the timer interrupt process, and when it becomes 0, it can be specified that the switching time has elapsed.

If it is determined in step Sg3 that the medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and after clearing the medal input signal ignore timer in step Sg6, the second evacuation command is used. After saving the value of the flag register in which the operation result is stored among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 by storing it in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order (Sg7), the timer interrupt is activated. It is set to be prohibited (Sg8), and the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program is called and executed using the above-mentioned CALL command (Sg9).

In the medal sensor process, first, in the same way as the RT information output process described above, the current stack pointer is retrieved from the game stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program using the LD command described above. The value of the address indicated by SP is read and saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area. Then, using the LD command, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. In this way, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-gaming program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are are saved by being stored in a predetermined order in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, as the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, when changing the stack pointer SP from the gaming program to the non-gaming program, the flag register The second zero flag TZ will be changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the medal sensor process is called from the gaming program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the medal sensor process is the same as when the gaming program called the medal sensor process. The state of the register may differ from the current state.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the medal input signal state transition data is normal. If the medal insertion signal state transition data is normal, then the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) indicating that the medal has passed normally through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the inserted medal Medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that it has been detected that it has started passing through the detection range A of the sensors 31a to 31c, and the previous determination of the passing state of the medal in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. The medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that there has been no change since then is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. Thereafter, the medal input signal state transition data is updated based on the input data of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the medal input signal state transition data, the medal-related error data that can specify the error code (E5) indicating that an abnormality related to the medal input signal has been detected is stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area. Perform processing such as setting.

Then, in the same manner as the above-mentioned RT information output processing, using the above-mentioned first return command, the values of the registers that were saved when starting the medal sensor processing are sequentially read from the non-game stack area, and the medal sensor Return all registers to the state they were in when processing started. After that, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the stack pointer SP, which was saved to a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when starting the medal sensor process, is read out and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the sensor processing was started, and the winning information output processing is ended. In addition, in order to end the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program and return to the gaming program, after restoring the values of all registers that were saved at the start of the medal sensor processing, the stack pointer SP is When changing from a non-gaming program to a gaming program, by using the LD instruction, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register will be changed, and the state of the flag register will change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. Subject to change. That is, the state of the register when the medal sensor process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the medal sensor process is started.

After the medal sensor processing is performed in step Sg9, timer interrupts are enabled (Sg10), and the value of the register saved in step Sg7 is saved using the second return instruction described above. By sequentially reading out the winning information from the game stack area in the reverse order and setting it in the flag register, the flag register is returned to the state before the winning information output process was performed (Sg11). After the medal sensor processing is performed, the saving processing and restoring processing of all registers within the medal sensor processing in step Sg9 and the saving processing and restoring processing of the flag register in steps Sg7 and Sg11 are performed. In this step, the states of all registers included in the main control unit 41 are completely restored to the state before the processing was performed.

After that, refer to a predetermined area in the non-gaming RAM area, read medal-related error data into a predetermined register (Sg12), and check whether an error code (E5) is set by medal sensor processing (medal sensor check processing). Determine (Sg13). Then, if the error code (E5) is set, that is, if the medal-related error data is read into a predetermined register and the error code (E5) is prepared in the predetermined register, error handling is performed. (Sg14), the game is controlled to an error state that disables the progress of the game.

In the error processing, control is made to an error state in which the progress of the game is disabled. In addition, an error command that can specify the error code (E5) prepared in a predetermined register is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and the error code (E5) can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for reference in other processes. Set as an error flag. Further, the error code (E5) is controlled to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Thereafter, the error state is controlled until it is specified that the error state release condition corresponding to the error code (E5) prepared in a predetermined register is satisfied. When the error code (E5) is prepared in a predetermined register and the error state is entered, the conditions for canceling the error state are that the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the OFF state, and the reset/setting switch is turned off. 38 or the reset switch 23 is turned on, the game waits without performing any control to advance the game. Then, when the cancellation condition is satisfied, an error command (cancellation) to cancel the error state is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the error processing is ended, and the process returns to the medal input signal processing.

If it is determined in the step Sg13 that the error code (E5) is not set as the medal-related error data, and after the error processing in the step Sg14 is completed, it is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. The content of the medal passing state reference data is determined by referring to the medal passing state reference data (Sg15) (Sg16, Sg17).

In step Sg16, if it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set, the medal insertion signal process is ended and the process returns to the game start waiting process. In the step Sg17, if it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is set, the process advances to step Sg18, and in the step Sg17, the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set. If it is determined that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is not set, the process advances to step Sg21.

If it is determined in step Sg17 that the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is set, an insertion state determination process is performed (Sg18). In the input status determination process, a credit counter that counts the current number of credits set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the credit counter is the maximum value of credits of the slot machine 1 (50 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not the situation is one less than that, that is, the next medal accepted becomes the final medal that can be added to the credit. Then, a final reception flag that can specify whether or not the next medal to be accepted is the final medal that can be added to the credit is set in a predetermined register, and the input status determination process is ended.

After performing the input status determination process in step Sg18, based on the final acceptance flag set in a predetermined register, if it is determined that the next medal to be accepted is the final medal that can be added to the credit, , by performing the medal blocker off process (Sg20) and setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the flow path for the medals inserted from the medal input section 4 is changed from the hopper tank 34a side to the medal payout port 9 side. By switching, the medals inserted into the medal insertion section 4 after the medal detected by the inserted medal sensor 31c are controlled to be returned from the medal payout port 9 via the medal return flow path 29c. In addition, in the medal blocker off process, after setting the flow path switching solenoid 30 to the OFF state, the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is It is determined whether or not a medal is passing through the detection range A, and if a medal is passing through the detection range A, a predetermined value (in this example, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds) is set in the medal input signal ignore timer. ) to start counting a predetermined time by the medal input signal ignore timer. As a result, in the sensor monitoring process described later for a predetermined period of time after the end of the medal blocker off process, an abnormality in the medal input signal is determined and the sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) is set regardless of the status of the medal input signal. This is to ensure that nothing happens to you.

After the medal blocker off process is performed in step Sg20, the medal input signal process is ended and the process returns to the game start waiting process. On the other hand, if it is determined based on the final reception flag that the next medal to be accepted is not the final medal that can be added to the credits, the medal input signal processing is ended without performing the medal blocker off processing, and the game start waiting processing is performed. Return to

If it is determined in step Sg17 that the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is set and the medal passing state reference data (medal detection) is not set, a predetermined area of the port input buffer is referred to. , the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is acquired (Sg21), and it is determined whether the confirmed data is in the ON state (Sg22). If it is determined that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31c is obtained by referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Sg23), and the input data is set to OFF. It is determined whether the state is the same (Sg24).

If it is determined that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is not in the ON state in the step Sg22, and the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is determined in the step Sg24. If it is determined that it is not in the OFF state, that is, if a medal is passing through the medal receiving channel 29b or if there is no medal in the medal receiving channel 29b, the medal input signal processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the step Sg22 that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the ON state, and in the step Sg24 it is determined that the input data of the inserted medal sensor 31b is in the OFF state, that is, the medal receiving channel If the medal has finished passing through the detection position where the inserted medal sensor 31c can detect the medal in step 29b, a medal inserting process is performed (Sg25).

In the medal insertion process, it is determined whether or not a prescribed number of bets has been set by referring to the currently set bet number stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If the specified number of bets has not been set, 1 is added to the current number of bets, and if the specified number of bets has already been set, 1 is added to the credit counter.

After performing the medal insertion process in step Sg25, a medal maintenance permission setting process is performed (Sg26), and if the credit value has not reached the maximum value (50 in this embodiment) based on the credit counter, , a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that the insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

After performing the medal care permission setting process in step Sg26, if the medal care permission flag is not set, the medal insertion signal ignore timer is set to a predetermined value (corresponding to 504 milliseconds in this embodiment). After setting the value) and starting counting a predetermined time by the medal input signal ignoring timer (Sg28), the medal input signal processing is ended. On the other hand, if the medal maintenance permission flag is set, the medal input signal processing is ended without setting the medal input signal ignore timer. Note that the medal input signal ignore timer is set to a predetermined value (in this example, a value corresponding to 504 milliseconds) in step Sg28, and then subtracted at predetermined time intervals, so that the medal input signal ignore timer is subtracted at predetermined time intervals ( In this embodiment, the timer becomes 0 when a period of 504 milliseconds (504 milliseconds) has elapsed, and it is possible to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed based on whether the medal input signal ignore timer is 0 or not. ing.

In this way, the medal input signal processing included in the gaming program can call the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program, and when calling the medal sensor processing, the value of the flag register is stored in the gaming stack of the RAM 41c. When the medal sensor process returns to the medal input signal process, the value of the flag register is returned to the value that was saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

In addition, in the medal input signal processing included in the gaming program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program, timer interrupts are disabled and the medal sensor processing is performed, and then the medal sensor processing starts with the medal sensor processing. When returning to input signal processing, timer interrupts are set to be permitted, thereby prohibiting timer interrupts while medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program is being executed.

In addition, in the medal input signal processing included in the gaming program, when calling the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program, after saving the value of the flag register, timer interrupts are set to disabled, and the medal sensor processing is It is designed to do this.

In addition, in the medal input signal processing included in the gaming program, after performing the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program with timer interrupts disabled, when returning from medal sensor processing to medal input signal processing, the timer interrupt is disabled. After enabling interrupts, the value of the flag register is restored to the value saved in the game stack area of the RAM 41c.

In addition, the medal input signal processing is a process called by the game start wait process, and as mentioned above, the game start wait process calls for the single interrupt wait process, which waits until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed once. After that, the medal insertion signal processing is called. In addition, in the medal input signal processing, after starting the medal input signal processing and performing predetermined processing, timer interrupts are set to be prohibited, and the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program is called. There is. In this way, in the gaming machine start waiting process and the medal insertion signal process, the game start waiting process performs one interrupt waiting process, then calls the medal insertion signal process, and performs the medal sensor process in the medal insertion signal process. , the timer interrupt processing (main) is performed by at least one interrupt wait processing in the game start waiting processing, and the input data of the sensors is updated by the port input processing included in the timer interrupt processing (main), It is designed to perform medal sensor processing.

[About medal sensor processing and medal sensor check processing]
The control contents of the medal sensor process and the medal sensor check process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 62 to 64. Note that the medal sensor process is included in the non-gaming program, and is a subroutine called in the medal insertion signal process included in the gaming program. Further, the medal sensor check process is included in the non-gaming program, and is a subroutine called in the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the medal sensor process, first, the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program is stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area using the above-mentioned LD command. and evacuate (Sh1). After that, by using the above-mentioned LD command to set a predetermined value in the non-gaming stack area (the value stored at the end of the previous non-gaming program) as the value of the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is Set for programming (Sh2). Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are saved by being stored in the non-gaming stack area in a predetermined order (Sh3). Thereafter, a medal sensor check process included in the non-gaming program is performed (Sh4).

After performing the medal sensor check process in step Sh4, the values of the registers saved in step Sh3 are sequentially read out from the non-gaming stack area using the first return instruction described above, and winning information output processing is performed. After restoring all the registers to the state at the start (Sh5), use the LD instruction to save the value of the stack pointer SP, which was stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area in step Sh1. By setting the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the medal sensor process was started (Sh6), the medal sensor process is ended, and the process returns to the calling source medal input signal process.

As shown in FIG. 63, in the medal sensor check process, first, medal passing state reference data and medal-related error reference data set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c are cleared (Si1, Si2). The medal passing state reference data is data that can specify the passing state of medals in the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c as a processing result of the medal sensor check process. 31c, it is determined that the medal has normally passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, or that the medal has started passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It is possible to specify that it has been determined that this has been detected, and that it has been determined that the detection status of the medals by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has not changed since the previous determination. The initial value of the medal passing state reference data is medal passing state reference data (no change) indicating that the detection state of the medal has not changed since the previous determination. In addition, the medal-related error reference data indicates that an abnormality (error code E5) regarding the detection signal of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a medal inserted signal) is detected as a processing result of the medal sensor check process. This is data that can identify the fact. Furthermore, by setting the medal passing state reference data and the medal-related error reference data in the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c, they can be referenced and updated by non-gaming programs, but can only be referenced from gaming programs. be.

After clearing the medal passing state reference data and the medal-related error reference data in steps Si1 and Si2, the current data of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is obtained by referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer (Si3), and the medal is inserted. The correct/incorrect data for determining whether the transition of the signal state is normal or not is obtained by referring to a predetermined area of the ROM 41b (Si4), and the previous medal sensor check process is performed by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The medal insertion signal state transition data stored in is acquired (Si5).

Then, the medal insertion signal state transition data acquired in step Si5 is compared with the correct/incorrect data acquired in step Si4 to determine whether the medal insertion signal state transition data is correct (Si6).

If it is determined that the medal input signal state transition data is correct in step Si6, new information is generated by updating the medal input signal state transition data based on the current data of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in step Si3. Medal insertion signal state transition data is created and stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si7).

Then, referring to the medal passage time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Si8), the input medal sensors 31a to 31c are activated based on the medal input signal state transition data updated in step Si7. It is determined whether the current and previous detection states are OFF states (Si9, Si10). The medal passing time timer is a timer that measures the duration of a period in which it is determined that a medal is passing through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. As will be described later, time measurement is started when the medal input signal is turned ON based on the medal input signal state transition data, and then updated by timer interrupt processing (main).

If it is determined in steps Si9 and Si10 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is the OFF state and the previous detection state is not the OFF state, that is, within the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. If there is a possibility that the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c has changed from the ON state to the OFF state due to the medal exiting the detection range, the medal passing time timer referenced in step Si8 is less than the shortest value (10.08 milliseconds in this embodiment) of the normal passage time range required for the medal to normally pass through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. (Si11). Note that the normal passage time range is based on the actual measurement value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, and the input time in the medal receiving channel 29b. It is predetermined based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, etc. (in this embodiment, it is in the range of 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

If it is determined in step Si11 that the medal passing time timer is not less than the shortest value in the normal passing time range, the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in step Si7 is cleared (Si12), and the medal passing time timer is After clearing (Si13), medal passing state reference data (normal passing) indicating that the medal has passed normally through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. Then, the medal sensor check process ends. On the other hand, if the medal passing time timer is less than the shortest value in the normal passing time range, the process advances to step Si19, which will be described later.

If it is determined in steps Si9 and Si10 that both the current and previous detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are OFF, that is, the medals have not passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, If the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c have not changed since the previous determination, the medal passing state reference data is in the state initialized in step Si1, that is, the medal passing state reference data (no change). The medal sensor check process ends while maintaining the state set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

If it is determined in step Si9 that the current detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not the OFF state, that is, the medal has passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are If it is in the ON state, it is determined whether the medal passing time timer referenced in step Si8 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range (99.68 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Si15).

If it is determined in step Si15 that the medal passing time timer does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passing time range, it is determined whether the medal passing time timer is in operation (Si16). When the medal passage time timer is not operating, that is, when a medal newly enters the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c changes from the OFF state to the ON state. If the medal passing time timer has not yet started counting, the medal passing time timer is set to 0 and started (Si17), and then the medals are detected by the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. The medal passing state reference data (medal detection) indicating that the start of passing through the detection range A has been detected is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming area of the RAM 41c, and the medal sensor check process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Si15 that the medal passing time timer exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range, the process proceeds to step Si19, which will be described later. Further, if it is determined in step Si16 that the medal passing time timer is operating, that is, the medal has passed through the detection range A of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c continues. If the medal passing state reference data is initialized in step Si1, that is, the state in which the medal passing state reference data (no change) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the medal passing state reference data is maintained. End sensor check processing. The medal passing time timer is set to 0 in step Si17 and started, and then incremented every predetermined time by timer interrupt processing. The elapsed time, that is, the elapsed time from the time when it is determined that the medal input signal state transition is correct and the input medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state is measured by the medal passing time timer.

If it is determined in step Si6 that the medal input signal state transition data is incorrect, and if it is determined in step Si11 that the medal passing time timer is less than the minimum value of the normal passing time range, the medal passing time timer is determined to be incorrect in step Si15. If it is determined that the value exceeds the maximum value of the normal passing time range, medal-related error reference data (E5) indicating that an abnormality has occurred regarding the medal input signal is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. (Si19), clears the medal insertion signal state transition data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Si7 (Si20), clears the medal passing time timer and stops time measurement (Si21), and then medal sensor check processing and returns to medal sensor processing. If the medal-related error reference data (E5) is set in step Si19 and the process returns to the medal sensor check process, then the medal-related error reference data is set in the medal insertion signal process of the game start waiting process included in the game program. By referring to the data (E5), it is controlled to be in an error state.

As shown in FIG. 64, in determining whether the state transition of the medal input signal in step Si6 of the medal sensor check process included in the non-gaming program is correct, input medal sensors 1 to 3 (input medal sensors 31a to 31c) are used. When it is detected that a medal has started passing through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 (inserted medal sensor 31a) changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the inserted medal A transition in which the sensor 2 (the inserted medal sensor 31b) changes from the OFF state to the ON state, and then the inserted medal sensor 3 (the inserted medal sensor 31b) changes from the OFF state to the ON state is specified based on the medal inserted signal transition state data. In this case, it is determined that the medal insertion signal state transition is correct.

In addition, when the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 detect that a medal has passed through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, the inserted medal sensor 1 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the inserted medal If the transition in which the sensor 2 changes from the ON state to the OFF state and then the inserted medal sensor 3 changes from the ON state to the OFF state is specified based on the medal inserted signal transition state data, and if the inserted medal sensor 1 changes from the ON state to After entering the OFF state, the input medal sensor 3 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and then the transition from the ON state to the OFF state of the input medal sensor 2 is specified based on the medal input signal transition state data. , the medal insertion signal state transition is determined to be correct.

Then, in the medal sensor check process, it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct and one of the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 is in the ON state, so that the medal passing state reference data ( detection) will be set. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 1 among inserted medal sensors 1 to 3 changes from the OFF state to the ON state first, it is determined that the medal inserted signal transition state data is correct, so the medal inserted signal transition state data is correct. When it is determined that the inserted medal sensor 1 is in the ON state, the medal passing state reference data (detection) is set.

Furthermore, when it is determined that the medal insertion signal transition state data is correct and that all of the input medal sensors 1 to 3 are in the ON state, medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is set. That will happen. That is, when the inserted medal sensor 2 last changes from the ON state to the OFF state among the inserted medal sensors 1 to 3, and when the inserted medal sensor 3 last changes from the ON state to the OFF state, the medal input signal transitions. Since the state data is determined to be correct, when the medal insertion signal transition state data is determined to be correct and the inserted medal sensors 2 and 3 are in the OFF state, the medal passing state reference data (normal passage) is It will be set.

In the medal insertion signal processing included in the game program, after determining that the medal passage state reference data (normal passage) is set in steps Sg16 and Sg17, the input of the input medal sensors 1 to 3 is performed in steps Sg21 to Sg24. When it is determined that the data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the process proceeds to the subsequent medal insertion process and the like. In other words, when the medal passing state reference data (normal passing) is set by the medal sensor check process, a fall of the inserted medal sensor 2 or 3 from the ON state to the OFF state is detected, thereby indicating that the medal is normal. input is now detected.

[About ball output control processing]
The control details of the ball output control process performed by the main control unit 41 will be explained based on FIG. 65. The ball payout control process is included in the game program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the ball output control process, first, the output buffer value of the advantageous period signal is set to the initial value (OFF 0) indicating the state is determined (Sj1). Then, in step Sj1, if it is determined that the output buffer value of the advantageous section signal is the initial value (0) and the advantageous section signal is not output, that is, the state is not controlled in the advantageous section. , acquires the number of bets for the game set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c into the A register (Sj2), and determines whether the number of bets for the game is 3 (Sj3).

If it is determined in step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is 3, a game state determination process is performed to determine the game state (Sj4), and after acquiring the currently controlled game state, the current It is determined whether the gaming state being controlled is a special state (BB1, BB2) (Sj5). If it is determined that the special state is not (BB1, BB2), the general prize winning number that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and that can identify the winning result of the general prize in the internal lottery is acquired in the A register ( Sj6), it is determined whether the general winning combination winning number is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (Sj7), and it is determined whether the advantageous section shift winning number for shifting the game section to the advantageous section has been won in the internal lottery.

Then, in step Sj7, if it is determined that the winning general winning number is equal to or higher than the predetermined value and that the advantageous section transition winning combination has been won, the data number for setting when the advantageous section is won is set in the A register (Sj8). , performs continuous data processing (Sj9). By setting the data number for setting when winning an advantageous section in the A register and performing continuous data processing, a process such as setting an advantageous section flag indicating that control is being performed in an advantageous section in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed. It is becoming more and more popular. By setting the advantageous section flag in step Sj9, the advantageous section flag is referred to in the above-mentioned main processing (Sb80), and a predetermined value (1 indicating an ON state) is set in the advantageous section signal output buffer. After setting, the output of the signal during the advantageous section will be started.

After performing continuous data processing in step Sj9, after performing advantageous section transition related processing that performs various settings related to transition to advantageous section (Sj10), end ball output control processing and proceed to main processing. Return to

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj3 that the number of bets in the game is not 3, and if it is determined in step Sj5 that the currently controlled gaming state is a special state (BB1, BB2), step Sj7 If it is determined in the internal lottery that the general winning number is less than a predetermined value and the advantageous section transition winning combination has not been won, the processing related to the transition to the advantageous section in steps Sj8 to Sj10 is not performed, The ball dispensing control process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

In step Sj1, the output buffer value of the advantageous interval signal is not the initial value (0, which is an OFF state), but a predetermined value (1, which indicates an ON state), and the advantageous interval signal is being output, that is, an advantageous interval. If it is determined that the control is in a state in which the advantageous period is controlled, an advantageous period game number counter is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the number of games in the advantageous period, which is the number of games since the start of the advantageous period. Add 1 (Sj11). The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the advantageous section game counter is set is included in the predetermined area that is initialized when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set in the main process described above. The section game number counter is initialized and set to an initial value (0) at the end of the advantageous section.

After adding 1 to the advantageous section game number counter in step Sj11, the number of bets and gaming state determination processing is performed (Sj12) to obtain the number of bets set in the game and the currently controlled gaming state. . Then, it is determined whether the number of bets set in the game is two or whether the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Sj13).

If it is determined in step Sj13 that the number of bets set for the game is 2 or that the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the ball payout control process is ended and the process returns to the main process. return. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of bets set in the game is 2 or the currently controlled gaming state is not a gaming state other than RT1, that is, the number of bets set in the game is 3, If it is determined that the currently controlled gaming state is RT1, 1 is added to the ED transition game counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj14).

The ED transition game number counter is set in a predetermined state (a state in which the number of bets set in the game is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1) after the advantageous section starts. This is a counter for counting the number of games played. The predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the ED transition game number counter is set is included in the predetermined area that is initialized when it is determined that the advantageous section end flag is set by the above-mentioned main processing, The ED transition game number counter is initialized and set to the initial value (0) at the end of the advantageous period, similarly to the advantageous period game number counter described above. The ED transition game number counter is referred to in the AT state management process described later, and when the ED transition game number counter value reaches a specified value, the navigation notification is controlled for a period until the advantageous section ends. It is now being moved to .

After adding 1 to the ED transition game counter in step Sj14, a freeze setting process is performed (Sj15) to determine whether or not to perform freeze control that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period, and to indicate that freeze control will be performed. If the decision is made, settings for performing freeze control are made.

After performing the freeze setting process in step Sj15, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which the next ball dispensing state information set by the later-described ball dispensing state processing and ball dispensing state related processing in the AT state management process is stored. The address is set in the HL register (Sj16), and the next ball release state information stored in the address is acquired in the A register (Sj17). Then, the current ball dispensing state information indicating the ball dispensing state to be controlled in the game is updated to the next ball dispensing state information acquired in step Sj17 (Sj18), and the ball dispensing state to be controlled based on the current ball dispensing state information is updated (Sj18). It is determined whether or not the ball is in a state where navigation notification may be performed (Sj19).

If it is determined in step Sj19 that the ball release state is such that a navigation notification may be made, the output buffer of the section display LED 19 that indicates by lighting that the game section is controlled to be an advantageous section is set. After setting the ON state data (Sj20), one-time interrupt wait processing is performed (Sj21). By setting ON state data in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 and performing one-time interrupt wait processing, the timer interrupt processing is performed by the one-interrupt wait processing, and the section display LED 19 is set by the LED dynamic display processing of the timer interrupt processing. is controlled to be lit.

After performing the one-time interrupt waiting process in step Sj21, the ball output state information is acquired in the A register (Sj22), and after setting the initial value (1) of the external output signal number in the B register (Sj23), External output signal number correction processing is performed (Sj24). In the external output signal number correction process, the value of the B register is corrected to the external output signal number corresponding to the ball release state information set in the A register.

Thereafter, the corrected external output signal number set in the B register is set in the external output signal output buffer (Sj25). The external output signal number set in the external output signal output buffer is referenced when performing external output signal processing in the main processing described above (Sb25), and is processed according to the external output signal number by external output signal processing (Sb26). An external output signal will be output, and when control of the AT is started, output of an AT signal indicating that the AT is being controlled will be started.

After setting the external output signal number in the external output signal output buffer in step Sj25, the ball output status information is acquired again in the A register (Sj26), and the general winning number is acquired in the B register (Sj27). , performs navigation number identification processing (Sj28). In the navigation number specifying process, a predetermined navigation number is specified according to the general winning number (winning number).

After the navigation number identification process is performed in step Sj28, the navigation number identified by the navigation number identification process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj29). Also, when it is determined in step Sj19 that the ball release state is not a ball release state that may cause navigation notification, the process proceeds to step Sj29, and the value of the ball release state information, that is, 0, is stored as the navigation number. By setting 0 as the navigation number, navigation notification is not performed and the navigation display is hidden. By setting 1 to 6 as the navigation number, a navigation display showing the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the navigation number is performed. The navigation number stored in step Sj29 is referred to in the game start command transmission process (Sb22) in the main process described above, and a press order command that can identify the navigation number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. becomes.

After storing the navigation number in step Sj29, a ball release state process is performed (Sj30). Ball dispensing state processing includes processing according to the current ball dispensing state specified based on the ball dispensing state information, processing to determine whether or not to shift the ball dispensing state based on the winning results of internal lottery, etc. When a decision is made to shift the ball state, processing for setting next ball release state information in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed.

When the ball dispensing state process ends in step Sj30, the ball dispensing control process ends and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to control the ball output control process (first process) which is called from the main process at the start of the game and is performed when the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is the predetermined value (1) and is advantageous. If it is specified that it is a zone (Sj1), regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2, the advantageous zone game number counter is updated by adding one game (Sj11). )do. Then, in the AT management process (second process) that is called from the main process at the end of the game, the value of the advantageous section game number counter updated by the ball output control process in the game becomes the specified number of games (first specified number). It is determined whether the specified number of games has been reached, and if it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, an advantageous section end flag is set. Thereafter, in the main process, an advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, thereby initializing information regarding the advantageous section and ending the advantageous section.

When the main control unit 41 is controlling to the advantageous section, the main control section 41 updates the advantageous section game number counter regardless of whether the number of bets is 3 or 2, and the number of bets is 2. The advantageous section ends when the number of games counter value reaches the specified number of games (first specified number), so whether the bet number of 3 coins or the bet number of 2 coins is selected, the predetermined game is completed. The number of games in the advantageous section is limited so that the number of games in the advantageous section is not controlled for a long period of time exceeding the number of games (1,500 games in this embodiment). Thereby, the gambling nature of the slot machine 1 can be prevented from becoming excessively high.

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is advantageous by determining whether or not the advantageous section signal is being output based on whether the value of the advantageous section signal buffer is the initial value. Determine whether it is within the section. If it is determined that the game is in an advantageous period, processing related to the advantageous period (Sj11 to Sj30) in the ball payout control process includes a process of updating the number of games in the advantageous period counter, and a process in which the number of bets is 3 and Processing related to navigation notification performed on the condition that the game state is RT1 (for example, an ED transition game number counter to specify the game to be transitioned to the ED state where navigation notification is controlled for a period until the end of the advantageous section) , processing to set ON data (predetermined value: 1) to control the lighting state in the output buffer of the section display LED 19 on the condition that the ball is controlled to a predetermined ball output state, and general winning number (processing to specify the navigation number corresponding to the winning combination based on the navigation number and setting it in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, processing to perform various processes according to the currently controlled ball release state, etc.) It is supposed to be done. Thereby, it is possible to ensure that processing related to the advantageous section is performed in a state where the advantageous section signal is being output.

In the ball output control process that is called from the main process at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to perform ( Sj1), as a start condition for an advantageous section, it is determined whether or not it is established that an advantageous section shift combination is won in an internal lottery (Sj6, Sj7), and it is determined that the start condition for an advantageous section is satisfied. In this case, an advantageous section flag indicating that the control is to be performed in an advantageous section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj9). In the subsequent main processing, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sb80), and if it is determined that the advantageous section flag is set and the advantageous section is in progress, A predetermined value (data (1) indicating an ON state) is set in the signal buffer during the advantageous period. Then, by performing LED dynamic display processing in the timer interrupt processing, the advantageous period signal is output. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the processing for shifting to the advantageous section (Sj6 to Sj10) is performed in a state where the value of the advantageous section signal buffer is not the predetermined value (1) and the advantageous section signal is not being output. can.

In the ball payout control process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines whether or not the advantageous period is in progress based on the value of the advantageous period signal buffer. This is a signal output to a test device that performs a performance test of the machine 1. As a result, processing related to the advantageous section is performed in a state where the advantageous section signal used in the performance test is being output, and processing for shifting to the advantageous section is performed in a state where the advantageous section signal is not being output. This can be guaranteed. In addition, in the ball output control process, by determining whether or not it is in an advantageous area based on the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous area, it is possible to determine whether or not it is in an advantageous area in the ball output control process. There is no need to provide a separate flag, and data capacity can be reduced.

In the ball payout control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous period based on the signal buffer during the advantageous period (Sj1) and that the number of bets of three coins is set. (Sj3), while processing to move to an advantageous section (Sj6 to Sj10), it was determined that it was not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1), but the number of bets of 3 coins was not set. If it is determined that (Sj3), the ball output control process is ended without performing the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj6 to Sj10), and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the ball payout control process, if the bet number (first bet number) of 3 coins is not set, the processing to move to the advantageous section is not performed, so the player etc. is not allowed to bet 3 coins. It is possible to prompt the player to play a game with a number (first bet number).

In the ball payout control process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that it is not an advantageous section based on the signal buffer during the advantageous section (Sj1) and that it is not controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2). If (Sj5), the process of moving to an advantageous section (Sj6 to Sj10) is performed, while it is determined that it is not an advantageous section (Sj1), but it is determined that the control is in a special state (BB1, BB2). In this case, the ball payout control process is ended and the process returns to the main process without performing the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj6 to Sj10). As a result, in the ball payout control process, when the gaming state is controlled to be in the special state (BB1, BB2), the process of shifting to the advantageous section is not performed, so the player etc. It is possible to prompt players to play games other than BB2).

In the ball payout control process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the period is not an advantageous period based on the signal buffer during the advantageous period (Sj1), and determines that the number of bets of three coins is set (Sj3). , and if it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is not controlled (Sj5), the process of shifting to an advantageous section (Sj6 to Sj10) is performed, while if it is determined that it is not an advantageous section (Sj1 ), if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 coins is not set, or if it is determined that the special state (BB1, BB2) is controlled, the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj6 to Sj10) is executed. The ball dispensing control process is ended without performing this process and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the ball payout control process, if the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is not set, or if the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2), the advantageous section Since the transition process is not performed, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game in a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2) and with the number of bets of three (first number of bets).

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is a predetermined value (1) and is in the advantageous period (Sj1), and the number of bets of 3 coins is set. If it is determined that it is (Sj13), processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1), and it is determined that it is an advantageous section. However, if it is determined that the bet number of 3 coins is not set (Sj13), the ball payout control process is terminated without performing navigation notification related processes (Sj14 to Sj30), and the main It is now possible to return to processing. As a result, in the ball payout control process, if the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is not set, processing related to navigation notification is not performed, so the player etc. is not allowed to bet 3 coins. It is possible to prompt the player to play a game with a number (first bet number).

In the ball payout control process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) and that it is an advantageous section (Sj1), and that the winning state is BB1. If it is determined that RT1 has been carried over (Sj13), processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous section is a predetermined value (1) However, if it is determined that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Sj13), the ball payout control processing is performed without performing the processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30). It is designed to terminate and return to main processing. As a result, in the ball payout control process, if the gaming state is in a gaming state other than RT1, processing related to navigation notification is not performed, so it is not possible to prompt the player etc. to play the game in RT1. can.

In the ball output control process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is a predetermined value (1) and is in the advantageous period (Sj1), and sets the number of bets of 3 coins. If it is determined that the gaming state is RT1 in which the winning of BB1 has been carried over (Sj13), processing related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is If it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is in an advantageous area (Sj1), but it is determined that the number of bets of 3 coins is not set, or if it is determined that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1. In this case, the ball payout control process is ended without performing the process related to the navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30), and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the ball payout control process, if the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is not set, or if the gaming state is other than RT1, processing related to navigation notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game with the number of bets of three (first number of bets) and RT1.

In the ball output control process of this embodiment, the external output signal number is output as an external output signal in a game after the game in which the process (Sj1 to Sj10) of shifting the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed. Each process of steps Sj11 to Sj30 including the process of setting in the buffer (Sj25) is performed, and when the output of the AT signal is started, the output of the AT signal is started from the game In the previous game, the process of shifting to the advantageous section (Sj1 to Sj10) was performed, so the output of the AT signal was started while the section was being displayed.

In the ball dispensing control process of this embodiment, when the output of the AT signal is started, ON state data (predetermined value 1) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and after one interrupt wait process is performed, , the external signal number is stored in the output buffer (Sj25), so the AT signal is output after starting the section display. This can prevent an external device receiving the AT signal from identifying that the control is being performed in an advantageous section before the section display starts.

In the ball payout control process of this embodiment, when the bet number of three coins (first bet number) is set, the process related to navigation notification (Sj14 to Sj30) is performed, while the bet number of two coins (first bet number) is performed. If the second betting number) is set, the processing related to the navigation notification will not be performed, and if a multi-card winning combination is won in an internal lottery in an advantageous section, three When the number of bets (first number of bets) is set, the operation mode (stop order of correct answers) corresponding to the type of winning multi-card push order combination is notified, while the number of bets of two cards ( If the second bet number) is set, the operation mode (stop order of correct answers) corresponding to the type of winning multi-card push order combination is not notified. As a result, if the number of bets of two coins (second number of bets) is set, the navigation notification will not instruct the player in an advantageous operation mode, so if the number of bets of three coins (second number of bets) is set, It can encourage playing games.

[About operation information signal output processing]
The control details of the operation information signal output process performed by the main control unit 41 will be explained based on FIG. 66. The operation information signal output process is included in the non-gaming program and is a subroutine called in the main process included in the gaming program.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the operation information signal output process, first, the above-mentioned LD command is used to extract the current stack pointer SP from the gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling gaming program. The value of the indicated address is read and saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area (Sz501). Then, using the LD command, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. As a result, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-gaming program (Sz502). Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are are saved by storing them in a predetermined order in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP (Sz503). In addition, when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the LD command is used when changing the stack pointer SP from the one for the gaming program to the one for the non-gaming program. Then, the second zero flag TZ of the flag register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is called from a gaming program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the non-gaming RAM area initialization process is The state of the register may be different from the state when the program calls the non-gaming RAM area initialization process.

After all registers are saved in step Sz503, communication setting processing is performed (Sz504). In the communication setting process, settings regarding the baud rate value of the communication signal and the signal transmission function of the main control unit 41 are performed.

After the communication setting process is performed in step Sz504, the navigation number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the A register (Sz505). Then, it is determined whether the navigation number is 0 and navigation notification is not performed (Sz506). If it is determined that the navigation number is 0, after reading the winning status of the general winning combination specified based on the general winning winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c into the flag register Z (Sz507), A value (0) indicating the operation mode (recommended operation mode) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that minimizes missed winnings is set in the A register (Sz508). Then, based on the winning status of the general winning combination read into the flag register Z in step Sz507, it is determined whether the general winning combination is a loss in which the general winning combination has not been won (Sz509).

If it is determined in step Sz509 that the general prize has not been won and it is a loss, the start address of the symbol stop signal pattern setting table is set in the HL register (Sz510), and the winning situation of the special prize can be specified. The value of the internal winning flag (when not winning: 0, when BB1 winning: 1, when BB2 winning: 2) is read into the A register (Sz11), and data acquisition processing for setting the symbol stop signal pattern is performed (Sz512). In the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process, symbol stop signal pattern setting data is acquired in the A register based on the symbol stop signal pattern setting table and the value of the internal winning flag. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data is data for obtaining a reel number setting value by an addition process (Sz516) to be described later, depending on the winning status of the special winning combination when none of the general winning combinations has been won.

If data acquisition processing for symbol stop signal pattern setting is performed in step Sz512, and if it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 and navigation notification is performed in step Sz506, the general prize is won in step Sz509. If it is determined that the reel number signal data table is present, the process advances to step Sz513, and the start address of the reel number signal data table is set in the HL register. Thereafter, the A register value is corrected by performing a predetermined correction process (Sz514), the values of the A register and flag register are saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz515), and addition processing is performed (Sz516). In the addition process, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the reel number setting value stored at the address of the HL register value after the addition is acquired in the A register. Then, the A register value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a reel number signal (Sz517).

When it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in step Sz506 and the processing of steps after Sz513 is performed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and in step Sz517, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register. A reel number signal indicating the stop order according to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, when it is determined that the general winning combination has been won at step Sz509 and the steps from Sz513 onwards are processed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set. A reel number signal indicating this is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, if the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition processing is performed in step Sz512 and the processing of steps Sz513 and subsequent steps is performed, and if the special winning combination has been won, the A register will contain the data that has not been won. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data is set to set the reel number signal that indicates the stop order in which the special winning combination can be won, and the stop order in which the winning special winning combination can be won. A reel number signal indicating the order is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, if data acquisition processing for symbol stop signal pattern setting is performed at step Sz512, and processing of steps after Sz513 is performed, and if the special combination has not been won, DDT points will be stored in the A register. Symbol stop signal pattern setting data for setting a reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set, and the reel number signal indicating the stop order corresponding to the DDT point is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It has become.

After setting the reel number signal in step Sz517, restore the values of the A register and flag register that were saved in step Sz515 (Sz518), and set the start address of the stop execution symbol number table in the HL register (Sz519). . Then, addition processing is performed. In the addition process, the value of the A register is added to the HL register value, and the stop execution symbol number stored at the address of the HL register value after the addition is acquired in the A register. Then, the A register value is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the stop execution symbol number (Sz521).

After that, a stop execution step calculation process is performed to calculate a stop execution step based on the stop execution symbol number (Sz522), and the stop execution step obtained by the calculation is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as an identifiable stop execution position signal. (Sz523).

When it is determined that the navigation number is not 0 in the step Sz506 and the processing of steps Sz518 and subsequent steps is performed, the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register, and the navigation number (1 to 6) is set in the A register. A stop execution position value signal indicating the stop timing according to the number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, if it is determined that the general winning combination has been won at step Sz509 and the steps from Sz518 onwards are processed, the DDT point value is set in the A register, and the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set. A stop execution position value signal indicating this is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, if the symbol stop signal pattern setting data acquisition process is performed in step Sz512 and the steps from Sz518 onwards are processed, and if the special winning combination has been won, the A register will contain the data that has not been won. The symbol stop signal pattern setting data is set to set the stop execution position value signal that indicates the stop timing at which the winning special winning combination can be won, and it is possible to win the winning special winning combination. A stop execution position value signal indicating a suitable stop timing is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In addition, when performing data acquisition processing for symbol stop signal pattern setting at step Sz512 and processing steps from Sz518 onwards, if the special combination has not been won, DDT points are stored in the A register. Data for setting a symbol stop signal pattern for setting a stop execution position value signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is set, and the stop execution position value signal indicating the stop timing corresponding to the DDT point is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is now set.

After the stop execution position value signal is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Sz523, the value of the reel number signal set in step Sz517 is read into the A register (Sz524), and reel number signal output processing is performed (Sz525). . In the reel number signal output process, a reel number signal that can specify the stop order of each reel specified based on the A register value is output from a predetermined output port to the test device.

After the reel number signal output process is performed in step Sz525, the value of the stop execution position signal set in step Sz523 is read into the A register (Sz526), and the stop execution position signal output process is performed (Sz527). In the stop execution position signal output process, a process is performed in which a stop execution position signal that can specify the stop timing of each reel specified based on the A register value is outputted from a predetermined output port to the testing device.

After performing the stop execution position signal output process in step Sz527, the values of all registers saved in step Sz503 are restored (Sz528), and the values of the stack pointer saved in step Sz501 are restored. Then, the operation information signal output process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

In this way, in the operation information signal output process of this embodiment, the reel number signal and stop execution position value signal are output to the test device as operation information signals that specify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is possible. In the above-mentioned ball dispensing control process, when starting control of the AT, a predetermined value (1 indicating an ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and the section display LED 19 is controlled to be in a lit state by a timer interrupt process. After starting the section display indicating that the control is in an advantageous section, the operation information signal output process is called in the main process. The signal is output to the test equipment. As a result, since the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started, it is possible for the test device to identify the specified operation mode while the section display is being performed.

In the operation information signal output process of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not a navigation notification in which the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is instructed is to be performed based on the navigation number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz506), if it is determined that navigation notification is to be performed, a process is performed to output a stop execution position signal that specifies the operation mode instructed based on the navigation number (Sz523), and if navigation notification is not performed, If it is determined, the winning number indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is referred to (Sz509), and a process (Sz509) is performed to output a stop execution position signal specifying the operation mode corresponding to the winning number. There is. As a result, in the operation information signal output process, if it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted, so that the operation mode is specified. Processing for outputting a stop execution position signal can be simplified.

[About data processing for role ratio monitor]
The control details of the winning ratio monitor data processing performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 67 to 72. Note that the winning ratio monitor data processing is included in the non-gaming program, and is a subroutine called in the main processing included in the gaming program. In addition, the winning ratio monitor data processing calls each state counting process which is a subroutine included in the non-gaming program, and the respective state counting processing is performed by subroutines including the winning ratio updating process and the continuous winning combination. The object ratio update process and the instructed combination ratio update process are further called.

The main control unit 41 displays a credit display 11 consisting of a 2-digit 7-segment display and a game auxiliary display, with the ratio display of the accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts. The controller 12 controls the display. The credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 are display devices that display information according to the progress of the game, and since the ratio display cannot be displayed all the time, the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 are display devices that display information according to the progress of the game. A ratio display is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by a store clerk or the like.

Specifically, when a game is not being played, the front door 1b, which is normally locked, is unlocked using a key owned by a clerk at the game parlor, and then the door 1a is opened inside the housing 1a. When the reset/setting switch 38 is operated, the main control section 41 switches the current display contents on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 and starts displaying the ratio display.

In addition, the ratio display consists of four alphanumeric characters, the upper two digits forming an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display, and the lower two digits indicating the ratio. Display contents are displayed on a credit display 11, display contents of the lower two digits are displayed on a game auxiliary display 12, and the ratio display is switched every predetermined time in a predetermined display order from the start of the ratio display.

With the ratio displayed on the credit display 11 and the auxiliary game display 12, the front door 1b is closed, medals are inserted into the slot machine 1, an error occurs, the setting key switch 37 is operated, and the settlement switch 10 When either the operation or the stoppage of power supply to the slot machine 1 is detected, the ratio display is switched to the original display content that was displayed before the ratio display was displayed, and the ratio display is ended.

In the main process, the main control unit 41 performs a process of determining whether or not a win has occurred according to the display results derived to each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R in the win determination process (step Sb49 in FIG. 53). After performing the interrupt one-time wait processing (Sb50), the flag register value is saved (Sb51), the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited (Sb52), and the winning ratio monitor data processing included in the non-gaming program is executed. Execute.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the winning ratio monitor data processing, first, the above-mentioned LD command is used to set the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling game program to a predetermined location in the non-gaming RAM area. Store it in the area and save it (Sk1), and then use the LD command to set a predetermined value in the non-gaming stack area (the value stored at the end of the previous non-gaming program) as the value of the stack pointer SP. As a result, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-gaming program (Sk2). Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are saved by being stored in the non-gaming stack area in a predetermined order (Sk3). After executing each state count process (Sk4) included in the non-gaming program, the values of the registers saved in step Sk3 are sequentially read from the non-gaming stack area using the first return instruction described above. After returning all the registers to the state they were in when the role ratio monitor data processing was started (Sk5), the LD command is used to store and save it in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area in the step of Sk1. By setting the value of the stack pointer SP in the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the role ratio monitor data processing was started (Sk6), and the role ratio monitor data processing is ended. Returning to the calling source main processing, the process advances to step Sb54. In step Sb54 of the main process, a timer interrupt is permitted, and the flag register value saved before the execution of the subsequent winning ratio monitor data processing is restored (Sb55).

As shown in FIG. 68, in each state counting process, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games can be added (Sp1). The total cumulative number of games is stored in a 3-byte storage area, and can be counted up to an upper limit of 16,777,215 games.

If the total cumulative number of games cannot be added, the process advances to step Sp22. If the total cumulative number of games can be added, 1 is added as a game has been played (Sp2 to Sp4). As mentioned above, since the microcomputer used in the gaming machine can only perform calculations between values of a maximum of 2 bytes, this addition is executed by calling the subroutine of 3-byte data addition and storage processing (Sp4). Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit (Sp5). If the total cumulative number of games has not reached the upper limit value, proceed to step Sp8. If the total cumulative number of games has reached the upper limit value, a value indicating that the total cumulative count stop flag has reached the upper limit value is set (Sp6, Sp7), and the process advances to step Sp8. Note that in step Sp1 described above, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games can be added by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

In the steps from Sp8, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of games is in the range of 0 to 5999 games, 6000 to 174999 games, or 175000 games or more (Sp8 to Sp20). Depending on the result of the determination, a value indicating that it is within each range is set as a lighting identification segment (Sp8, Sp18, Sp19). The set lighting identification segment is stored in the display monitor digestion game determination flag. Then, after sequentially executing the accessory ratio update process (Sp22), the continuous accessory ratio update process (Sp23), and the instructed winning ratio update process (Sp24) included in the non-gaming program, the process returns to the data processing for the role ratio monitor. do.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the accessory ratio update process, first, the number of games for determining the number of games is incremented by 1 (Sq1). Here, 1 is added to a determination game number counter to be described later. Next, the number of winning medals that will be paid out due to the occurrence of a winning in the current game is added (Sq2, Sq3). Here, the number of winning medals is added to the total payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3, respectively.

The cumulative total buffer 1 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter, and when a winning occurs in the game and medals are paid out, each counter counts. When the count reaches 6000 games, the total payout counter and accessory payout counter are updated to the initial value of 0, and the next game starts counting from the initial value.

Similar to the cumulative buffer 1, the cumulative total buffer 2 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter, and when a prize is won in the game and medals are paid out, each counter counts the amount. will be held. When the count reaches 6000 games, the total payout counter and accessory payout counter are updated to the initial value of 0, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the game at which counting starts is 2000 games behind the cumulative buffer 1.

Similar to the cumulative total buffer 1 and the cumulative total buffer 2, the cumulative total buffer 3 is provided with a 3-byte total payout counter and a 3-byte accessory payout counter, and when a prize is won in the game and medals are paid out, each Counting is done using a counter. When the count reaches 6000 games, the total payout counter and accessory payout counter are updated to the initial value of 0, and the next game starts counting from the initial value. However, the game at which counting starts is different from the cumulative buffer 1 by 4000 games and from the cumulative buffer 1 by 2000 games.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out can be added (Sq4). If the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out cannot be added, the process proceeds to step Sq10. If it is possible to add the total cumulative number of paid out medals, the number of winning medals is added to the total cumulative number of paid out medals. Then, as a result of the addition, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit (Sq7). If the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has not reached the upper limit value, the process advances to step Sq10. If the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out has reached the upper limit value, a value indicating that the total cumulative count stop flag has reached the upper limit value is set (Sq8, Sq9), and the process advances to step Sq10. In addition, whether the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out can be added is determined by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag, and when the total cumulative number of games to be played reaches the upper limit, and when the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out reaches the upper limit. The same flag is used when

In steps Sq10 and Sq11, it is determined whether or not the accessory is operating in the game, that is, whether it is in a period under the control of the RB. If the accessory is not operating, proceed to Sq17. When the accessory is operating, the number of winning medals paid out due to the occurrence of winning in the current game is added as the number of medals paid out during the accessory activation period (Sq12, Sq13). Here, the number of winning medals is added to the accessory payout counters of cumulative buffers 1 to 3, respectively.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the total cumulative number of accessory payout coins can be added (Sq14). If it is not possible to add up the total number of paid out accessories, the process advances to step Sq17. If it is possible to add the total cumulative number of paid out accessories, the number of winning medals is added to the total number of paid out accessories (Sb15, 16), and the process advances to step Sq17. It is determined whether the total cumulative number of coins to be paid out can be added by referring to the total cumulative count stop flag.

The accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is calculated from the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative accessory payout number updated as described above (Sq17, Sq18). The calculated value is then stored as the accessory payout ratio to the total number of payouts (Sq19).

Subsequently, with reference to the game number counter for determination, it is determined whether or not the game in question is the number of updated games (Sq20 to Sq23). The judgment game number counter is a counter that counts cyclically between 1 and 6000 games, and is used to judge whether the number of games after starting counting has reached 2000 games, 4000 games, or 6000 games. This is the counter used. The above determination is made based on whether or not there is a remainder after dividing the determination counter by 2000. If there is a remainder, it is determined that the game is not the number of updated games and the process returns to each state counting process.

When the determination counter is divided by 2000 and there is no remainder, it is determined from the quotient of the division result whether the game is an updated game of 2000 games, 4000 games, or 6000 games (Sq24). Then, among the cumulative buffers 1 to 3, the value of the total payout counter is read from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the specified updated game, and stored in the 6000 times calculation buffer as the cumulative number of coins paid out for 6000 games, and the value of the total payout counter from which it is read is read out. is updated to the initial value 0 (Sq25 to Sq27). Similarly, the value of the accessory payout counter is read from the cumulative buffer corresponding to the specified update game and stored in the 6000-time calculation buffer as the cumulative number of accessory payouts for 6000 games, and the value of the accessory payout counter from which it is read is set to the initial value. It is updated to a certain 0 (Sq28 to Sq30).

Further, from the 6000 game cumulative payout number and the 6000 game cumulative accessory payout number stored in the 6000-time calculation buffer, the accessory payout ratio for the 6000 game cumulative payout number is calculated (Sq31, Sq32). The calculated value is then stored as the accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games (Sq33). Thereafter, the process returns to each state counting process.

The accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts and the accessory payout ratio over the past 6000 games are referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and are displayed on the gaming machine information display together with an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display being displayed. 50 will be displayed sequentially.

Referring to FIG. 70, the update status of the cumulative calculation buffers 1 to 3, the 6000 times calculation buffer, and the total cumulative calculation buffer in which the total cumulative payout number and the total cumulative accessory payout number are stored is shown by the data processing for role ratio monitoring. explain. The stored contents of the cumulative total buffers 1 to 3, the 6000-time calculation buffer, and the total cumulative calculation buffer are retained at the time of shipment from the factory or unless initialized due to an abnormality in the data in the RAM 41c for some reason.

Counting in the cumulative total buffer 1 and the total cumulative calculation buffer starts from the state where each buffer value is initialized. After 2000 games have passed, counting in the cumulative total buffer 2 is started. Cumulative total buffer 1 continues counting. Subsequently, when 2000 games have passed, counting in the cumulative total buffer 3 is started. Cumulative total buffer 1 and cumulative total buffer 2 continue counting.

After another 2000 games have elapsed, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 1 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count contents of the cumulative total buffer 1 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times. Then, the count contents of the cumulative total buffer 1 are initialized and counting starts from the initial value (0).

When the next 2000 games pass, the counting period in the cumulative buffer 2 reaches 6000 games. Here, the count contents of the cumulative buffer 2 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times. Then, the count contents of the accumulation buffer 2 are initialized and counting starts from the initial value (0).

In this way, the counting results for the 6000 games counted in the cumulative buffers 1 to 3 are stored in the calculation buffer 6000 times for every 2000 games. During this time, the counting results of the total accumulation calculation buffer are accumulated and counted without being initialized.

Next, the control contents of the continuous accessory ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be explained based on FIG. 71.

As shown in FIG. 71, in the continuous accessory ratio update process, first, when the gaming state is controlled to be in the special state (BB1, BB2), the BB indicating that the game state is in the special state (BB1, BB2) is Based on whether the output buffer of the output port that outputs the medium signal to the outside of the slot machine 1 has an initial value (0), it is determined whether the slot machine is in a special state (Sr1). When it is determined that the special state is in effect, a continuous accessory payout number counter (for addition) that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and counts the number of medals to be paid out during the special state (BB1, BB2). The address of is set in the HL register (Sr2). After setting the number of medals to be paid out in the game in the B register (Sr3), 3-byte data addition processing is performed (Sr4). In the 3-byte data addition process, 1-byte payout number data is added to a 3-byte continuous accessory payout number counter (for addition).

Thereafter, an upper limit reaching limit is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and is used to identify whether or not a payout number counter (total cumulative total) that counts the total number of medals paid out in the slot machine 1 has reached the upper limit. The address of the determination flag is set in the HL register (Sr5), and based on the value of the upper limit reaching determination flag, it is determined whether the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has reached the upper limit value (Sr6) . The upper limit reaching determination flag is set to 0 if the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has not reached the upper limit, and is set to 1 if it has reached the upper limit.

If it is determined in step Sr6 that the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has not reached the upper limit, the number of medals paid out in the game is set in the E register (Sr7), and 0 is set in the D register. (Sr8). Further, the address of the payout number counter (total cumulative total) is set in the HL register (Sr9), and 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed (Sr10). In the 3-byte data addition and storage process, 1-byte payout number data is added to a 3-byte payout number counter (total cumulative total).

If 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed in step Sr10, if it is determined that the special state is not in effect in step Sr1, it is determined that the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has reached the upper limit value in step Sr6. If so, proceed to step Sr11, set the address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (total cumulative total) to the HL register (Sr11), and set the address of the payout number counter (total cumulative total) to the DE register (Sr12). . Thereafter, division processing is performed (Sr13). In the division process, the value of the HL register is divided by the DE register and the quotient value obtained is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a continuous accessory ratio (total cumulative total) (Sr14).

After that, the address of the game counter (for addition) that counts the number of games played in slot machine 1 is set in the HL register (Sr15), 2000 is set in the DE register (Sr16), and the value of the HL register is set to DE. The remainder value obtained by dividing by the value of the register is set in the DE register (Sr17). Then, based on the value of the DE register, it is determined whether the remainder value is 0 (Sr18). If it is determined in Sr18 that the remainder value is not 0, the continuous accessory ratio update process is terminated and the process returns to each state counting process, while if it is determined that the remainder value is 0 in Sr18, step Sr19 is executed. The address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (for addition) is set in the HL register (Sr19), and it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. ) is set in the DE register (Sr20), and the 6000G cumulative data transfer process is performed (Sr21). In the 6000G cumulative data transfer process, the value of the HL register is added to the DE register value.

After that, the address of the continuous accessory payout number counter (6000G total) is set in the HL register (Sr22), and the address of the payout number counter (6000G total) updated by the above-mentioned accessory ratio update process is set in the DE register. (Sr23), and performs division processing (Sr24). In the division process, the value of the HL register is divided by the DE register and the quotient value obtained is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a continuous role object ratio over the past 6000 games (Sr25).

After storing the continuous accessory ratio for the past 6000 games in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Sr25, the continuous accessory ratio update process is ended and the process returns to each state counting process.

The accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games will be referred to in the display monitor data selection process described later, and will be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display being displayed.

In this way, in the continuous accessory ratio update process of this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) is controlled (Sr1), and when it is determined that the special state is controlled, It is determined whether the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached the upper limit (Sr6), and if it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, , If it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached without performing the process (Sr7 to Sr10) of updating the total cumulative number of paid out accessories and the total number of consecutive paid out accessories, the total cumulative number of paid out accessories and the total number of paid out consecutive accessories are Processing (Sr7 to Sr10) for updating the cumulative number of continuous accessory payout coins is performed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the total cumulative number of paid out bonus coins and the total cumulative number of consecutive paid bonus tokens from being updated, regardless of the situation in which the total number of medals awarded to the player cannot be updated.

Next, the control contents of the instructed combination ratio update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be explained based on FIG. 72.

As shown in FIG. 72, in the instructed accessory ratio update process, first, it is determined whether the payout number counter (total cumulative total) that counts the total number of medals paid out in the slot machine 1 has reached the upper limit value. The address of the upper limit reaching determination flag that can be specified is set in the HL register (St1), and based on the value of the upper limit reaching determining flag, whether or not the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has reached the upper limit value. is determined (St2). The upper limit reaching determination flag is set to 0 if the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has not reached the upper limit, and is set to 1 if it has reached the upper limit.

In the step of St2, if it is determined that the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has not reached the upper limit value, when the gaming state is controlled to be in the special state (BB1, BB2), , BB2) The value of the output buffer of the output port that outputs the BB signal to the outside of the slot machine 1 is read into the A register (St3), and the value of the output buffer is checked to see if it is the initial value (0). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special state is in effect (St4).

If it is determined in step St4 that the special state is not in progress, the navigation number for the game that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the above-mentioned ball output control process is read into the A register (St5), and one or more navigation numbers are read into the A register (St5). It is determined whether the number is set and the game in question is a game in which navigation notification is performed (St6).

If it is determined that the game is in a special state in step St4, and if it is determined that the game is a game in which navigation notification is performed in step St6, the number of medals to be paid out in the game is read into the E register (St7 ), the D register is set to 0 (St8), and an instruction-containing combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to count the total number of medals to be paid out in a game where navigation notification is performed and a game in a special state. The address of the item payout number counter (total cumulative total) is set in the HL register (St9), and 3-byte data addition and storage processing is performed (St10). In the 3-byte data addition and storage process, processing is performed to add 1-byte payout number data to a 3-byte instruction-included accessory payout number counter (total cumulative total).

After performing the 3-byte data addition and storage process in step St10, the process advances to step St11. Further, if it is determined in step St2 that the payout number counter (total cumulative total) has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step St11 without performing each process in steps St3 to St10. Further, if it is determined in step St6 that the game is not a game in which navigation notification is performed, the process proceeds to step St11 without performing each process in steps St7 to St10.

In step St11, the address of the instructed accessory payout number counter (total cumulative total) is set in the HL register (St11), and the address of the payout number counter (total cumulative) updated by the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio update process is set. It is set in the DE register (St12), and division processing is performed (St13). In the division process, the value of the HL register is divided by the DE register and the quotient value obtained is set in the A register. Then, the value of the quotient calculated by the division process is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the instruction-included accessory payout ratio to the total number of payouts (St14).

After storing the instruction-included accessory payout ratio to the total number of payouts in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step St14, the instruction-included accessory ratio update process is ended and the process returns to each state counting process.

The instructed accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number will be referenced in the display monitor data selection process described later, and will be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 together with an abbreviation indicating the type of ratio display being displayed. .

In this way, in the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio update process of this embodiment, it is determined whether the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached the upper limit. (St2), if it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process of updating the cumulative number of instruction-included accessories paid out (St3 to St10) is not performed, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, determines whether or not it is controlled in a special state (BB1, BB2) (St4), and if it is determined that it is controlled in a special state, it performs a process of updating the cumulative number of instruction-included accessories paid out (St7). ~St10), and if it is determined that the control is not in a special state, it is determined whether the navigation notification has instructed an operation mode that is advantageous to the player (St6), and the navigation notification is advantageous to the player. If it is determined that a specific operation mode has been instructed, a process (St7 to St10) is performed to update the cumulative number of instructed accessory payout pieces. This makes it possible to prevent the cumulative number of instruction-included accessory payouts from being updated, regardless of the situation in which the total number of paid-out coins counter that counts the total number of coins awarded to the player cannot be updated.

[About AT status management processing]
The control contents of the AT state management process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 73. Note that the AT state management process is a subroutine included in the gaming program.

As shown in FIG. 73, in the AT state management process, first, the value of the advantageous section game number counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and the value of the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0). It is determined whether or not (Su1). In addition, by determining that the game is in an advantageous period based on the value of the output buffer of the advantageous period signal by the above-mentioned ball payout control process, the number of games in the advantageous period is updated by adding 1, so the number of games in the advantageous period is updated by one. Among them, the value of the advantageous section game number counter is set to be 1 or more. In step Su1, if the value of the advantageous period game counter remains at the initial value (0) and it is determined that the advantageous period is not in progress, AT End the state management process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su1 that the value of the advantageous period game counter is not the initial value (0) but is in the advantageous period, the process proceeds to step Su2, and the value of the advantageous period game number counter is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used to set the number of bets in the advantageous section from the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section) is calculated. The net increase number counter is read into the HL register with reference to the net increase number counter for that purpose (Su2). Thereafter, a winning flag that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and can specify the winning status of the general winning combination in the game is referred to (Su3), and it is determined whether or not the replay winning combination has won in the game (Su4). ).

If it is determined in step Su4 that the replay combination has not won, the number of medals paid out in the game is read into the A register (Su5), and the number of medals paid out in the A register is added to the net increase number counter value of the HL register. (Su6). Then, the number of bets set for the game is read into the A register (Su7), and the number of bets in the A register is subtracted from the net increase number counter value of the HL register (Su8).

After that, it is determined whether the value of the HL register is greater than or equal to 0 (Su9), and if the value of the HL register is not greater than or equal to 0, the value of the HL register is corrected to 0 (Su10), and the value of the HL register is The value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a net increase number counter value (Su11). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su9 that the value of the HL register is greater than or equal to 0, the value of the HL register is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the net increase number counter value without performing the correction in step Su10. (Su11), proceed to step Su12.

Further, if it is determined in step Su4 that the replay combination has won in the game, the process proceeds to step Su12 without performing each process in steps Su5 to Su11.

If the net increase number of coins counter value is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and updated in step Su11, and if it is determined that a replay combination has won in the game in step Su4, the net increase number of coins is updated based on the value of the HL register. If it is determined whether the counter value exceeds the second specified number (2395 sheets in this example) which is the end condition of the advantageous section (Su12), and it is determined that the net increase number counter value exceeds the second specified number In step Su15, an advantageous section end flag indicating that the advantageous section end condition has been met is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Su15), the AT state management process is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su12 that the net increase number counter value does not exceed the second specified number, the value of the advantageous section game number counter set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the HL register (Su13). , it is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous section game counter has reached a first specified number (1500 games in this embodiment), which is a condition for ending the advantageous section (Su14). If it is determined that the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached the first specified number, the process proceeds to step Su15, and an advantageous section end flag indicating that the conditions for ending the advantageous section have been met is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Su15), the AT state management process is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su12 that the net increase number counter value does not exceed the second specified number, and in step Su14 that it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter value has not reached the first specified number, , proceeds to step Su16, performs a bet number and gaming state determination process (Su16), and obtains the bet number set in the game and the currently controlled gaming state. Then, it is determined whether the number of bets set in the game is two or whether the gaming state currently being controlled is a gaming state other than RT1 (Su17).

If it is determined in step Su17 that the number of bets set in the game is 2 or that the currently controlled gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the navigation notification in steps Su18 to Su31 described later The AT state management process is ended and the process returns to the main process without performing related processing (processing related to transition to the ED state, processing related to the ball dispensing state, etc.).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su17 that the number of bets set in the game is 2 or the currently controlled gaming state is not a game state other than RT1, that is, the number of bets set in the game is 3. If it is determined that the game state is RT1, the process proceeds to step Su18, and the ED transition flag value set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the A register (Su18). . Then, it is determined whether the current state is the ED state based on the ED transition flag value (Su19).

If the current state is determined to be the ED state in step Su19, the process proceeds to step Su30 without performing the processes related to transition to the ED state in Su20 to Su29, which will be described later. If it is determined in step Su19 that the current state is not the ED state, the process advances to step Su20, and the value of the net increase number counter updated in step Su11 and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is read into the HL register. (Su20). Further, the third specified number (1700 to 2200 in this embodiment) regarding the net increase in number of medals, which is a requirement for the first ED transition condition to be met, is read into the DE register (Su21). Then, the HL register value and the DE register value are compared to determine whether the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the third specified number (Su22).

If it is determined in step Su22 that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the third specified number, the process proceeds to step Su29, and sets an ED transition flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c to indicate that the state will be shifted to the ED state. (Su29). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su22 that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section does not exceed the third specified number, the fourth specified number regarding the net increase in the number of medals (this implementation In the example, 1600 sheets) are read into the DE register (Su23). Then, the HL register value and the DE register value are compared to determine whether the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the fourth specified number (Su24).

If it is determined in step Su24 that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section does not exceed the fourth specified number, the process proceeds to step Su27. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su24 that the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the fourth specified number, the process proceeds to step Su25, and the current number of navigation stocks set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is stored in the A register. (Su25). Then, it is determined whether the current number of navigation stocks is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eight in this embodiment) that is a requirement for the second ED transition condition to be satisfied (Su26).

If it is determined in step Su26 that the current number of navigation stocks is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step Su29, and an ED transition flag indicating that the state will be transitioned to the ED state is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Su29 ). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Su26 that the current number of Navi stocks is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, updated by the above-mentioned ball output control process, and the number of balls stored in the stock is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. , an ED transition game number counter value for counting the number of games played in a predetermined state (a state in which the number of bets set in the game is 3 and the currently controlled gaming state is RT1). is read into the HL register (Su27), and whether or not the ED transition game number counter value is equal to or greater than a fifth specified number (in this embodiment, 1150 to 1400 games) regarding the number of advantageous section games that is a condition for transition to the ED state. (Su28) If it is determined that the ED transition game number counter value has not reached the fifth specified number and is not greater than or equal to the fifth specified number, the process proceeds to step Su30, and the ED transition game number counter value has not reached the fifth specified number. If it is determined that the number has reached the fifth specified number or more, the process proceeds to step Su29, and an ED transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Su29). After setting the ED shift flag in step Su29, the process advances to step Su30.

In step Su30, ball release state information, which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and indicates the ball release state controlled in the game, is acquired in the A register (Su30), and ball release state related processing is performed. (Su31). In the ball dispensing state related processing, processing is performed according to the dispensing state specified based on the ball dispensing state information acquired in the A register, and control is performed to the ED state based on the ED transition flag being set in step Su29. A process for controlling navigation notification over a period until the advantageous section ends, a process for managing the number of AT games for which navigation notification is performed, and an advantageous section end flag is set in the RAM 41c when a predetermined arbitrary condition is satisfied. Processing is performed such as setting the AT signal to a predetermined area and terminating the advantageous section, and processing stopping the output of the AT signal when terminating AT control.

After the ball release state related processing is completed, the AT state management processing is ended and the process returns to the main processing.

In this way, in the AT state management process, when the control is in the advantageous section, the end conditions of the advantageous section (the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number, the number of games played in the advantageous section exceeds the first specified number), When the advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the advantageous section is controlled to end. The advantageous section end flag is then referenced in the main process, and advantageous section data initialization processing is executed based on the advantageous section end flag being set, and data related to control during the advantageous section is initialized. As a result, control of the advantageous section is ended.

In the AT state management process, when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (in this example, the first specified number (1500 games)) when the control is in the advantageous section. It is determined based on the value of the advantageous period game number counter, and when the number of games controlled in the advantageous period reaches the upper limit number of games, an advantageous period end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. , the control is performed to end the control in the advantageous section. Note that the end condition of the advantageous section is replaced by the termination condition that is satisfied when the number of games controlled in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (1500 games in this example). The termination condition may be satisfied when the number exceeds the number of games (1499 in this embodiment) obtained by subtracting 1 from the upper limit number of games.

In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number and when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number, an advantageous section end flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. do. Then, the advantageous section end flag is referenced in the subsequent main processing, and the advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the advantageous section end flag being set, thereby ending the advantageous section. ing.

In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in an advantageous section exceeds a second specified number, the advantageous section is terminated. The slot machine 1 can be designed so that the payout rate of medals in advantageous sections over the number of games is within a predetermined percentage. For example, set the second specified number to 2395 (subtract the maximum number of coins paid out in slot machine 1 (8) from 2400 coins as the upper limit number, and add the maximum number of coins (3 coins) used for setting the number of bets. By setting the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section to 2400 or less, it is possible to keep the medal payout rate for 1600 games within 150%. This can prevent the slot machine 1 from paying out an excessive number of medals in a predetermined period. In addition, instead of the end condition that is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined second specified number (2395 in this example), the medals paid out in the advantageous section The same is true when the end condition is that the net increase in the number of sheets reaches the predetermined number of sheets plus 1 (in this embodiment, 2396). Note that the end condition for the advantageous section is replaced by the end condition that is satisfied when the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined second specified number (2395 in this example). The end condition may be that the net increase in the number of medals paid out in the section reaches a predetermined number plus 1 (2396 in this embodiment).

In the AT state management process, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number (upper limit number of games (1500 games)), or when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number (2395) If so, end the advantageous section. By ending the advantageous section when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a first specified number, which is the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section is prevented from continuing for a long time, and the medals in the advantageous section are If the net increase in the number of coins exceeds the second specified number, by ending the AT state and advantageous section, the payout rate will suddenly increase even if the number of games in the advantageous section does not reach the first specified number, which is the upper limit number of games. This is designed to prevent the advantageous section from continuing if the situation increases.

In the AT state management process, when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number and when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the first specified number, a common advantageous section end flag is set, and then In the main processing, advantageous section data initialization processing is performed to control the advantageous section to end. As a result, even when the net increase in the number of medals in an advantageous section exceeds the second specified number, or when the number of games played in an advantageous section reaches the first specified number, a common advantageous section data initialization process is performed. It is designed to end the section.

In the AT state management process, in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, the value of the net increase number counter is acquired as a net increase number value in a predetermined register (HL register), and the payout value is added to the net increase number value, If the value obtained by subtracting the bet value is smaller than 0, by correcting the value of the net increase number counter to 0, the number of medals increased or decreased tends to decrease, as shown in FIGS. 74(a) and 74(b). and is smaller than the reference value (the value of the net increase number of medals at the start of the advantageous section (initial value 0)), the value of the net increase number counter becomes 0, and when the number of medals increased or decreased is on the increase, The increase/decrease in the number of sheets since the increase trend becomes the value of the net increase number counter.

For example, as shown in FIG. 74(a), after the transition to the advantageous section, the navigation notification is not performed and the increase/decrease number of medals tends to decrease, and by adding the increase/decrease number to the net increase counter, the net increase When the value of the counter is less than the initial value (in this embodiment, 0), the value of the net increase/decrease number counter becomes 0 for the period in which the number of medals increased/decreased is less than the initial value. After that, when the AT state is controlled and the stop operation is performed in accordance with the navigation notification, the number of medals increased or decreased tends to increase, the value of the net increase number counter will change to the value of the net increase number of medals ( The value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout value is sequentially added and updated. As a result, the value of the net increase/decrease number counter is determined based on the number of increase/decrease medals when the increase/decrease number of medals changes from a decreasing trend to an increasing trend, that is, when the increase/decrease number of medals reaches its lowest value. The value indicates the increase in the number of sheets from the value.

For example, as shown in FIG. 74(b), after the number of medals increased or decreased once exceeds the initial value of the net increase number counter, it tends to decrease and falls below the initial value (in this example, 0) again. In this case, the value becomes 0 during the period in which the number of medals increased or decreased is less than the initial value. Thereafter, as the number of medals increases or decreases, the value of the net increase number counter is updated by sequentially adding the value of the net increase of medals (the value obtained by subtracting the bet value from the payout value). As a result, the value of the net increase/decrease number counter becomes a value indicating the increase/decrease from the reference value, which is the number of medals increased/decreased when the number of medals increased/decreased to the lowest value. .

In the AT state management process, during an advantageous period, after adding the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter value, the calculated value obtained by subtracting the bet value in the game from the net increase number counter value is 0. If the calculated value is smaller than 0, the value obtained by adding the payout value and subtracting the bet value from the net increase number counter value is set and updated in the net increase number counter, while if the calculated value is smaller than 0, By setting the net increase number counter to 0 and updating it every game, if the net increase number becomes a negative value during an advantageous period, the net increase number counter is corrected to 0 and the net increase number counter is counted from 0 again. Since the net increase number counter is updated so as to start, it is possible to directly specify the amount of increase in medals (net increase number) at the transition of the actual increase/decrease number of medals in the advantageous section as the net increase number counter value (Figure 74 (a) )reference).

In addition, in this embodiment, by performing the process of updating the net increase number counter during the advantageous section, counting of the net increase in medals is started from the time the transition to the advantageous section is started, and the net increase in medals during the advantageous section is calculated. Although the configuration is to count the number of tickets, it is also possible to perform the process of updating the net increase number counter when the AT state is not in the advantageous section, but not to update the net increase number counter when the AT state is in the advantageous section. good. Even with this configuration, when the AT state is not in effect and navigation notification is not performed, the net increase in the number of medals does not increase, but when the AT state is in the AT state and navigation notification is performed, the net increase in the number of medals increases. Similar to the configuration in which the net increase number counter is updated during the advantageous period, it is possible to count the net increase in the number of medals during the advantageous section.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 74(a), for example, during a period in which navigation notification is not performed after moving to an advantageous section, no winnings with a payout rate exceeding 1 occur, and the number of medals increased or decreased does not exceed the standard value. If the number of medals increases or decreases, the number of medals increased or decreased from the game in which the navigation notification was started after the transition to the AT state after the shift to the advantageous section, and the net increase in the number of medals during the advantageous section in the game. is the least. Incidentally, even during a period in which the navigation notification is not performed after the shift to the advantageous section, a winning prize with a payout rate exceeding 1 may occur. If there is a win with a payout rate of more than 1 during the period so that the number of medals increases or decreases during the period, the net increase in the number of medals during the period will increase. will be the least. In addition, after the number of increase/decrease in medals during the period once falls below the standard value, if a winning occurs with a payout rate exceeding 1 during the period, so that the number of increase/decrease in medals tends to increase, during the period. In the game, the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous period is the smallest. In this way, the point in time during the advantageous period when the net increase in the number of sheets becomes the smallest may change depending on the situation. On the other hand, in the process of updating the net increase number counter of medals, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment acquires the value of the net increase number counter as a net increase number value in a predetermined register, and pays out medals according to the net increase number value. If the value obtained by adding the numbers and subtracting the bet value is less than 0, the value of the net increase/decrease counter is corrected to 0. , the net increase number counter is reset and the net increase number is counted again from 0, and the net increase number is counted from the point where the net increase number is the lowest in the advantageous section to calculate the accurate net increase number. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, by performing processing to update the net increase number counter when the advantageous section is in progress, counting of the net increase in the number of medals is started from the moment the transition to the advantageous section is made, and the net increase in the number of medals during the advantageous section is started. Although the configuration is for counting the number of sheets, it may be configured to update the net increase number counter regardless of whether it is an advantageous section or not. In such a configuration, if the net increase in the number of medals in the section before shifting to the advantageous section is on an increasing trend, the net increase in the number of medals in the section is taken over and the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted. can be done.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to make the payout rate of medals 1 or more by performing a stop operation in the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification. , If the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R notified by the navigation notification, the medal payout rate becomes less than 1, and in the AT state, While the number of medals increases or decreases by following the navigation notification, the number of medals increases or decreases in a state other than the AT state, so the section display LED 19 is controlled to be lit in the AT state. This will notify you that this is a period in which the number of medals increases or decreases within the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, when the advantageous section end flag is set because the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds the second specified number, the number of games in the advantageous section is the first specified number (upper limit game In either case, when the advantageous section end flag is set due to reaching the number), or when the advantageous section end flag is set due to ball output related processing, the common advantageous section data is initialized by the subsequent main processing. In a configuration that terminates an advantageous section by performing processing and initializing data related to the advantageous section (including data related to the AT state), that is, AT state management processing, regardless of the end conditions of the established advantageous section, the common By performing the advantageous section data initialization process, the data related to the advantageous section is uniformly initialized and the advantageous section is terminated.However, at the end of the advantageous section, the advantageous section data is A configuration may also be adopted in which the data regarding the section is initialized and the advantageous section is terminated.

In this embodiment, the number of medals actually paid out as a result of the game during the advantageous section is added to the net increase number counter, thereby counting the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section. If a specified small role that involves the payout of a medal is won, the specified small role will be won and the medal will be awarded, regardless of whether or not the specified small role is won and the medal is actually paid out as a result of the game. It may be configured to count the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section by assuming that the tokens have been paid out and adding the amount of medals to be paid out to the net increase number counter. In such a configuration, when a predetermined small winning combination is won in an internal lottery in an advantageous section, it is assumed that the predetermined small winning combination has won and medals have been paid out, and the amount of medals that have been paid out is counted in the net increase number counter. Since the net increase number counter does not exceed the specified number by intentionally missing the predetermined small winning combination, it is possible to prevent the number of games in the advantageous section from being extended intentionally.

In addition, if a specified small role is won in an internal lottery, regardless of whether or not the specified small role is won and medals are actually paid out as a result of the game, the specified small role is won and medals are awarded. In a configuration in which the net increase in the number of medals in an advantageous section is counted by assuming that the number of medals has been paid out and adding the amount of medals paid out to the net increase number counter, this includes small roles that involve the payout of medals in an internal lottery. In the event that a lottery target role is won, regardless of whether or not it is possible for the player to securely win the minor role, if the minor role wins, the winning of the minor role To add the paid-out medals to a net increase number counter and, when a lottery target role including a minor role that involves the payout of medals is won in an internal lottery, to ensure that the player wins the minor role. If it is not possible to win a prize even though it is possible, for example, the navigation target role is won as a lottery target role in an internal lottery, and the stop switch 8L is advantageous to the player due to the navigation notification. , 8C, and 8R are notified, and it is possible to win a predetermined small winning combination included in the navigation target winning combination. If you are unable to win a specified small role by doing so, or if you win a specific small role and operate in a certain manner (operation at the operation timing that falls within the pull-in range of the specific role, etc.), you will definitely win the specified small role. Even though it is possible to win a small prize, if the player is unable to win a specific minor prize because the player operates in an operation mode other than the specified operation mode, the player may not be able to win a prize. It is assumed that the possible small winning combination has been won and medals have been paid out, and by adding the paid out medals to the net increase number counter, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section is counted, while the internal lottery In the event that a lottery target role including a minor role that involves the payout of medals is won in a situation where it is impossible for the player to reliably win the minor role and the player is unable to win the prize, for example, In a situation where a navigation target winning combination is won as a lottery target winning combination in an internal lottery, and the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that is advantageous to the player is not notified by the navigation notification, a predetermined small number included in the navigation target winning combination is selected. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the medals are not added to the net increase number counter when the winning combination cannot be won, and by adopting such a configuration, even if the player cannot reliably increase the number of medals, For example, the net increase number counter is incremented only when the number of medals actually increases, which can prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this embodiment, when updating the net increase number counter in the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and increases the number of bets. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value for the medals used in the setting is smaller than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and the net increase number counter shows that the number of medals increased or decreased is 0. , the main control unit 41 initializes the net increase number counter to 0 by the start of the advantageous section, and then counts only the numbers above 0 without counting the numbers below 0. , during the advantageous period, when medals are paid out, the value for the number of medals paid out is added to the net increase number counter, and when the medals are used to set the number of bets, the value for the number of medals is added to the net increase number counter. By repeating the process of subtracting the value of from the net increase number counter, the net increase in medals during the advantageous section is counted, and even in a configuration that counts both when the increase and decrease in the number of medals is less than 0 and when it exceeds 0. good. In such a configuration, when the number of medals increased or decreased is less than 0, the net increase number counter is not corrected to 0, so the process of counting the net increase number by the net increase number counter can be simplified.

In this embodiment, when updating the net increase number counter, the main control unit 41 adds a value corresponding to the number of medals paid out in the game to the net increase number counter, and adds the value to the net increase number counter, which is used to set the number of bets. If the calculated value obtained by subtracting the value of medals is less than 0, the value of the net increase number counter is corrected to 0, and if the calculated value is 0 or more, the calculated value is used as the net increase number. By controlling the value of the net increase number counter to be updated as the value of the counter, the net increase number of medals is counted starting from the time when the net increase of medals decreases the most after the start of the advantageous section. . Since the timing at which the net increase in medals decreases the most after the start of the advantageous section may change depending on the situation, the starting point of the net increase in medals specified based on the net increase counter in this embodiment may vary depending on the situation. However, the main control unit 41 causes the net increase number counter to start counting the net increase in the number of medals from a uniformly set trigger after the start of the advantageous section, and The advantageous section may be configured to count the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting point, and end the advantageous section when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds a specified number.

For example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set opportunity after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds a specified number, As a configuration for terminating the process, counting by the net increase number counter is started from the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from the time of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has exceeded the specified number. The advantageous section may be terminated if the limit is exceeded. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of an advantageous section is uniformly set, and the net increase in medals is started from a point other than when transitioning from a normal section to an advantageous section. Since it is not necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter, the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter can be simplified.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set trigger after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number, As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, after transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section, when the section display LED 19 lights up to indicate that the AT state has been entered, and the navigation notification notifies the operation mode to increase the number of medals, If the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting point exceeds a specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the mode may be shifted to the normal section. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display LED 19 is turned on to indicate the advantageous section. Since there is no need to judge the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in medals starting from a point other than when the operation mode to increase the medals is indicated by the navigation notification, the net increase Control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the sheet number counter can be simplified.

Further, for example, the main control unit 41 counts the net increase in the number of medals up to the present starting from a uniformly set trigger after the start of the advantageous section, and when the net increase in the number of medals exceeds the specified number, As a configuration for ending the advantageous section, after the normal section has transitioned to the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not the operation mode for increasing medals has been notified by the navigation system, the fact that the AT state has been entered is indicated by the lighting of the section display LED 19. When it is suggested, if the net increase in the number of medals up to the present time starting from , exceeds a specified number, the advantageous section may be terminated and the shift may be made to the normal section. According to this configuration, the starting point for counting the net increase in medals for determining the end condition of the advantageous section is uniformly set, and after the normal section has transitioned to the advantageous section, the operation to increase the number of medals by the navigation notification is performed. Regardless of whether the mode has been notified or not, it is necessary to determine the end condition of the advantageous section based on the net increase in the number of medals starting from a time other than when the lighting of the section display LED 19 indicates that the transition to the advantageous section has occurred. Therefore, the control for determining the end condition of the advantageous section based on the value of the net increase number counter can be simplified.

In this embodiment, in the AT state management process, the advantageous section is controlled to end when the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section exceeds a second specified number. Instead of counting the number of medals used to set the number of bets, only the number of medals paid out in each game is counted, and when the total number of medals paid out in the advantageous section exceeds a predetermined specified number, the advantageous section ends. A configuration may also be used in which control is performed so as to For example, set the specified number of total payout medals to 2865 (1600 games), the net increase number (2400) that makes the medal payout rate of 150%, and the shortest number of games for which the net increase number of medals will be awarded (160 games = 2400/1). The payout for one game in slot machine 1 is calculated from the total value of the number of medals used to set the number of bets (480 medals = 160 games x regulation number of 3 per game) in the maximum payout number per game (15)). By configuring the advantageous section to end when the total number of medals paid out in the game during the advantageous section exceeds the specified number (as the value obtained by subtracting the maximum value (15) of the number of medals), the advantageous section will end. The maximum net increase in the number of medals paid out in a section can be set to 2,400 or less, and the medal payout rate for 1,600 games can be set to within 150%. It should be noted that a configuration in which the advantageous section ends when the total number of medals paid out in the game during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (prescribed number + 1) can also produce the same effect.

As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to control the ball output control process (first process) which is called from the main process at the start of the game and is performed when the value of the signal buffer during the advantageous period is the predetermined value (1) and is advantageous. If it is determined that it is in the section (Sj1), it is determined that the number of bets of three coins (the first number of bets) is set, and it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to RT1, (Sj13) , updates the ED transition game number counter that counts the number of ED transition games (Sj14). Then, in the AT management process (second process) that is called from the main process at the end of the game, it is determined that the number of bets (first number of bets) of three coins is set, and the gaming state is controlled to RT1. If it is determined that the number of games to which the ED transition has occurred is reached (Su17), it is determined whether the value of the ED transition game number counter updated by the ball output control process in the game has reached the prescribed number of games (fifth prescribed number) (Su28). ), if it is determined that the specified number of games has been reached, a process (Su29) is performed to shift to the ED state where navigation notification is controlled for a period until the end of the advantageous section, while the number of bets of 3 ( If it is determined that the first bet number) has not been set, or if it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled by RT1, the AT state management is performed without performing the process to transition to the ED state (Su29). The process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the AT state management process, if the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is not set, or if the gaming state is in a gaming state other than RT1, the process of shifting to the ED state is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game with the number of bets of three (first number of bets) and RT1.

In the AT state management process that is called from the main process at the end of the game, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the advantageous period is in progress if the advantageous period game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0). (Su1), and updates the net increase number counter based on the number of medals paid out and the number of bets in the game, regardless of whether the number of bets is 3 or 2. (Su3 to Su11), after updating the net increase number counter, it is determined whether the value of the net increase number counter exceeds the second specified number (Su12), and if it is determined that it exceeds the second specified number, , the advantageous section end flag is set (Su15). Thereafter, in the main process, an advantageous section data initialization process is performed based on the fact that the advantageous section end flag is set, thereby initializing information regarding the advantageous section and ending the advantageous section.

When the main control unit 41 is controlling in an advantageous section, it updates the net increase number counter and displays the net increase number regardless of whether the number of bets is 3 or 2. The advantageous section ends when the counter value exceeds the specified number of coins (second specified number), so whether the bet number of 3 coins or 2 coins is selected, the upper limit number of coins (in this example, The number of medals to be paid out in the advantageous section is limited so that the number of medals to be paid out does not become excessively large so that the number of medals (2,400 pieces) is not paid out. Thereby, the gambling nature of the slot machine 1 can be prevented from becoming excessively high.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but is in the advantageous section (Su1), and the number of bets of 3 is set. If it is determined that it is (Su17), processing related to navigation notification (Su18 to Su30) is performed, and it is determined that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but is an advantageous section. However, if it is determined that the bet amount of 3 coins is not set (Su17), the AT state management process is ended without performing the process related to navigation notification (Su18 to Su30). It will now return to main processing. As a result, in the AT state management process, if the bet number (first bet number) of 3 coins is not set, processing related to navigation notification is not performed, so the player etc. is not required to bet 3 coins. It is possible to prompt the player to play a game with a number (first bet number).

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous section game counter is not the initial value (0) but is in the advantageous section (Su1), and the gaming state is RT1. If it is determined (Su17), processing related to navigation notification (Su18 to Su30) is performed. ), if it is determined that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1 (Su17), the AT state management processing is ended without performing navigation notification related processing (Su18 to Su30), and the process returns to the main processing. It looks like this. As a result, in the AT state management process, if the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is not set, processing related to navigation notification is not performed, so players etc. are not allowed to play the game at RT1. You can encourage them to do so.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the value of the advantageous section game number counter is not the initial value (0) but is in an advantageous section (Su1), and the number of bets of 3 is set. If it is determined that the gaming state is RT1 (Su17), processing related to navigation notification (Su18 to Su30) is performed, while the value of the advantageous section game counter is set to the initial value (0). ), but it is determined that it is an advantageous section (Su1), but it is determined that the number of bets of 3 coins is not set, or the gaming state is determined to be a gaming state other than RT1. (Su17), the AT state management process is ended without performing the processes related to navigation notification (Su18 to Su30), and the process returns to the main process. As a result, in the AT state management processing, if the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is not set and the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, processing related to navigation notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player or the like to play the game with the number of bets of three (first number of bets) and RT1.

In the AT state management process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is set and that the gaming state is controlled to RT1. (Su17), it is determined whether the ED transition condition is satisfied (Su22 to Su28), and if the ED transition condition is satisfied, the navigation notification is controlled for a period until the advantageous section ends. While performing the process (Su29) to transition to the ED state where If this is the case (Su17), the process of determining whether the ED transition condition is satisfied (Su22 to Su28) and the process of transitioning to the ED state (Su29) are not performed. As a result, in the AT state management process, if the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is not set, or if the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT1, the ED transition condition is determined to be satisfied. Since no determination is made as to whether or not the game is played, and no processing is performed to transition to the ED state, it is possible to encourage the player, etc., to play the game with the number of bets of three (first number of bets) and RT1. can.

[About timer interrupt processing]
The control details of the timer interrupt processing (main) performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 75. Note that the timer interrupt process (main) is a subroutine included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the timer interrupt processing (main), first, after exchanging all the front registers and back registers (Sv1), the timer interrupt is set to be disabled (Sv2), and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The value of the current voltage drop state counter is acquired (Sv3). Then, referring to the input port to which the voltage drop signal is input from the power interruption detection circuit 48 (Sv4), it is determined whether the voltage drop signal is input (Sv5). When a voltage drop signal is input, it is determined whether the voltage drop state counter has reached a predetermined upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (Sv6), and the voltage drop state counter reaches the upper limit. If the value has been reached, power-off processing (main) is performed (Sv7).

In the power outage process, all the front registers and back registers are replaced, the values of all the registers included in the main control unit 41 are saved by being stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order, and the stack pointer The current address of the game stack area indicated by SP is saved by being stored in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. Note that the predetermined areas of the gaming RAM area, including the gaming stack area of the gaming RAM area where the main control unit 41 stores the values of the registers and the predetermined area of the gaming RAM area where the value of the address indicated by the stack pointer SP is stored, are backed up. It is backed up by a power supply, so that even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the storage contents of the gaming RAM area are preserved as long as power is supplied from the backup power supply.

Then, among the parallel output ports included in the main control unit 41, the output port 3 to which the drive signal for the hopper motor 34b is output is initialized, and its output state is turned OFF. As a result, when the hopper unit 35 is dispensing medals, the dispensing of medals is first stopped preferentially. After that, among the parallel output ports, output ports 0 and 1 to which drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are output are initialized, and when the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are under rotation control, the reels 2L, Stop the rotation of 2C and 2R.

After that, among the parallel output ports, the control signals of the left, middle, and right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R and the control signal of the flow path switching solenoid 30 are output, the output port 2, the credit display 11, and the control signal of the game auxiliary display 12 are output. The output ports 4 and 5 that are output, the output ports 6 and 7 that output test signals, and the output ports 8 and 9 that send commands to the sub-control unit 91 are initialized in sequence to send control signals to various switches. Stop the output of etc.

After initializing the output ports 0 to 9, the destruction diagnosis data (in this embodiment, 5A(H)) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the parity adjustment data set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set. clear. Then, new parity adjustment data for the RAM 41c is calculated so that the exclusive OR of all the storage areas of the RAM 41c becomes 0, the parity adjustment data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and access to the RAM 41c is performed. is set to prohibited and enters loop processing.

In the loop processing, the output status of the voltage drop signal is monitored and waited. In this state, if the voltage drop signal is no longer input, it is determined whether the voltage has recovered and the program is started from startup processing (main). On the other hand, if the voltage drops while the voltage drop signal is being input, the operation will be stopped internally.

If the power supply of AC100V is stopped by the above process, the power cutoff process (main) is executed, the value of the register before the power cut is saved to the game stack area of the game RAM area, and the relevant game Since the contents of a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c including the stack area are also retained by supplying backup power, the startup process (main) executed when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed. , it becomes possible to return to the control state before the power cut. Furthermore, it is also possible to specify whether or not the stop operation was effective in the control state before the power was cut off.

If it is determined that the voltage drop signal is not input in step Sv5 of the timer interrupt processing, and if it is determined that the voltage drop state counter has not reached the upper limit value in step Sv6, the process proceeds to step Sv8 and the voltage Update the degraded counter. When proceeding from step Sv5 to step Sv8, the current value is maintained by adding 0 to the voltage drop state counter, while when proceeding from step Sv5 to step Sv8, the voltage Update to add 1 to the low state counter.

Then, the detection states of various switches are input from the input port, and port input processing is performed to generate input data, final data, and edge data (ON edge data and OFF edge data) (Sv9). Thereafter, using the second save instruction described above, the values of the flag registers in which the operation results are stored among the registers included in the main control unit 41 are saved by being stored in the game stack area of the game RAM area in a predetermined order. After that (Sv10), time monitoring update processing included in the non-gaming program is performed (Sv11). Thereafter, using the above-mentioned second return instruction, the values of the flag registers saved in the game stack area in step Sv10 are sequentially read from the game stack area in the reverse order of saving and set in the flag registers. Then, the flag register is returned to the state before the time monitoring update process was performed (Sv12).

In the time monitoring update process, first, the above-mentioned LD instruction is used to read the value of the address indicated by the current stack pointer SP from the gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling gaming program. It is stored and evacuated in a predetermined area of the game RAM area. Then, using the LD command, the value stored as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program is read from a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area, and set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. In this way, the stack pointer SP is set for a non-gaming program. Then, using the first save instruction described above, the values of all registers (accumulator register, flag register, general-purpose register, index register, interrupt register, refresh register, program counter, etc.) included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are are saved by being stored in a predetermined order in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP. In addition, when the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, the flag is The second zero flag TZ of the register is changed, and the state of the flag register may change before and after the execution of the LD instruction. That is, when the time monitoring update process is called from the gaming program, the state of the register that is saved after the stack pointer SP for the non-gaming program is set by the time monitoring update process is different from the state of the register that is saved when the gaming program calls the time monitoring update process. The state of the registers may be different from the state when the function is called.

Thereafter, sensor monitoring processing that detects abnormalities regarding the input medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, test signal output processing that outputs test signals generated in relation to game results, and various timers used by non-gaming programs are updated. A timer update process and a win ratio monitor output data selection process for selecting output data to be displayed on the win ratio monitor are performed sequentially. In addition, in the sensor monitoring process, when an abnormality regarding the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c or the payout sensor 34c is detected, sensor error reference data that can identify the type of detected abnormality is stored in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is now set.

Then, using the above-mentioned first return instruction, the values of the registers that were stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area when the time monitoring update process was started are transferred to the non-gaming stack area in the reverse order of the saving. By sequentially reading the registers from and setting them in the registers corresponding to the order, all the registers are restored to the state they were in when the time monitoring update process was started. Thereafter, by using the above-mentioned LD command to read the value of the stack pointer SP that was saved to a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the time monitoring update process was started, and setting it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the time monitoring update process was started, and the time monitoring update process is ended. In addition, in order to terminate the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program and return to the gaming program, after restoring the values of all registers that were saved at the start of the time monitoring update process, the stack pointer When changing the SP from a non-gaming program to a gaming program, the LD instruction is used to change the second zero flag TZ of the flag register, and the value of the flag register is changed before and after the LD instruction is executed. Conditions may change. That is, the state of the register when the time monitoring update process is ended may be different from the state of the register saved when the time monitoring update process is started.

After restoring the flag register in step Sv12, refer to the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in step Sv11 (Sv13), and check the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in the current timer interrupt. The logical OR of the error reference data and the sensor error reference data set by the time monitoring update process in the previous timer interrupt is calculated (Sv14). Then, in step Sv14, a sensor error flag that is set in a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c and can identify whether or not an abnormality related to the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c is detected is calculated. It is updated based on the logical sum (Sv15). If it is determined that an abnormality has been detected based on the sensor error reference data by performing steps Sv13 to Sv15, it is determined whether the sensor error flag is in a state indicating that an abnormality has been detected. Regardless of the situation, the sensor error flag is updated to indicate that the abnormality has been detected. On the other hand, if it is determined based on the sensor error reference data that no abnormality has been detected, the state of the sensor error flag is maintained. In other words, when it is determined that an abnormality has been detected based on the sensor error reference data, the contents of the sensor error reference data are reflected in the sensor error flag, while the abnormality is detected based on the sensor error reference data. If it is determined that the error has not occurred or that the abnormality has been resolved, the contents of the sensor error reference data are not reflected in the sensor error flag.

After updating the sensor error flag in step Sv15, a random value update process is performed to update the random number value in the random number circuit provided inside the main control unit 41 (Sv16). Clear the watchdog timer (WDT) register (Sv17). After that, the value of a branch counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c for branching the processing included in the timer interrupt is read into a predetermined register, and updated by adding a predetermined value (1 in this embodiment), The updated value is set as the value of the branch counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sv18). In the process of updating this branch counter, if the branch counter is between 0 and 2, it is incremented by 1, and when the branch counter is 3, it is initialized back to 0. Update. That is, the value of the branch counter loops in the order of 0 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 0, etc. every time the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The value of the branch counter is referenced in each process executed in the timer interrupt process (main). For example, when the branch counter reaches a predetermined value, a predetermined control is executed, etc. Control will be branched.

After updating the branching counter in step Sv18, it is determined whether the branching counter is 4 (Sv19), and if the branching counter is 3, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Counter update processing (Sv20) that updates various predetermined timers, indicators such as various LEDs connected to the output port (credit display 11, gaming auxiliary display 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, status display LED 17, start valid) LED dynamic display processing (LED dynamic display processing (LED 18, section display LED 19, replay LED 20, etc.) that controls the lighting state to set and transmit a lighting signal for dynamically lighting the lighting state according to the settings by each process such as the main processing. Perform Sv21).

If it is determined that the branching counter is not 4 in step Sv19, and after the LED dynamic display processing is performed in step Sv21, a medal insertion signal indicating that a medal has been inserted or a medal payout signal among the external output signals The medal input/payout signal transmission process (Sv22) updates the output setting of the medal payout signal indicating that the medal is to be performed and sends it to the outside of the slot machine 1, and the security signal (door open signal, setting change signal) , input error signal, payout error signal), security signal transmission processing (Sv23) to send to the outside of the slot machine 1, and various commands such as door commands and operation end commands set in the command queue. Command transmission processing (Sv24) for transmitting commands, etc. is performed sequentially.

Then, referring to the branching counter, it is determined whether or not the branching counter is 2 (Sv25), and if the branching counter is 2, there is an abnormality regarding the reel (reel error). It is determined whether or not a reel error is occurring based on whether or not the reel error flag set in (middle) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sv26). If there is no reel error, reel control processing is performed to control the rotation and stop of the reels by setting the excitation pattern of each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R according to the progress of the game, etc. (Sv27) .

Then, if it is determined that the branch timer is not 2 in step Sv25, if it is determined that a reel error is occurring in step Sv26, and if the reel control process in step Sv27 is finished, the setting is made by the reel control process. Reel motor drive signal output processing (which rotates and stops each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R in a predetermined control manner by outputting a drive signal according to the excitation pattern to each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R) Sv29), the process of transmitting a control signal to the solenoid drive circuit 46, the process of updating the lighting status of the left, middle, and right stop enable LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the process of setting the advantageous section signal to the OFF state, etc. After sequentially performing the port output update processing (Sv30), the output buffer for the advantageous period signal set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and a predetermined value indicating the ON state (in this embodiment, 1) is set (Sv31). Furthermore, by setting the advantageous period flag in the ball output control process of the main process, a predetermined value indicating the ON state (this embodiment In this case, 1) is set.

In step Sv31, if it is determined that a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1) indicating an ON state is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section signal, the advantageous section signal is controlled to be in the ON state; After starting the output of the advantageous period signal to the test device (Sv32), the process advances to step Sv33. On the other hand, in step Sv31, an initial value (in this embodiment, 0) indicating an OFF state is set in the output buffer of the advantageous period signal, and a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1) indicating an ON state is set. If it is determined that it has not been set, the process proceeds to step Sv33 without performing the process in step Sv32.

In step Sv33, all front registers and back registers are exchanged (Sv33), timer interrupts are enabled (Sv34), timer interrupt processing (main) is ended, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is completed. ) returns to the main processing when it was started.

In this way, the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment includes the counter update processing (Sv20) that updates a plurality of timer values used in a specific processing (gaming program) including one gaming time management timer value, and the special processing (Sv20). A time monitoring update process (Sv11) for updating a timer value used in a non-gaming program (non-gaming program) is performed separately. This prevents the time monitoring update process that updates the timer value used by the special process from being mixed with the counter update process that updates the timer value used by the specific process.

In the timer interrupt process of this embodiment, the time monitoring update process including the process of outputting the test signal is performed before the counter update process that updates the timer value for one game time management. As a result, updating of the timer value for managing one game time is started after the output of the test signal is started, so it is possible to ensure that the time interval at which the test signal is output is equal to or longer than the minimum time for one game. .

[About time monitoring update processing]
The control details of the time monitoring update process performed by the main control unit 41 of this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 76 to 82. The time monitoring update process is included in the non-gaming program and is a subroutine called by the timer interrupt process (main) included in the gaming program. In addition, the time monitoring update process sequentially calls the sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer update process, and display monitor output data selection process (winning ratio monitor display data selection process) included in the non-gaming program. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 76, in the time monitoring update process, first, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the current address of the gaming stack area indicated by the stack pointer SP used by the calling gaming program is It is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area (Sv201). Thereafter, using the LD command, a predetermined value in the non-gaming stack area is set as the value of the stack pointer SP (stored in a predetermined area in the non-gaming RAM area as the address indicated by the stack pointer SP at the end of the previous non-gaming program). The stack pointer SP is set for a non-gaming program by setting the value (value that exists) (Sv202). Then, using the above-mentioned first save instruction, the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41 including the flag register are transferred to the non-game stack area of the non-game RAM area specified by the stack pointer SP in a predetermined order. It is saved by storing it (Sv203). Thereafter, a sensor monitoring process (Sv204), which is included in the non-gaming program and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection signals of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c and the payout sensor 34c, is connected to the slot machine 1. A test signal output process (Sv205) that outputs a test signal to the test device, a medal passing time timer update process (Sv206) that updates a timer that measures the passing time of medals in the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, and a role ratio. A winning ratio monitor display data selection process (Sv207) for selecting winning ratio data to be displayed on the monitor is sequentially performed.

After performing the winning ratio monitor display data selection processing in step Sv207, the value of the register that was saved and stored in the non-gaming stack area in step Sv203 is returned using the first return instruction described above. All the registers are restored to the state they were in when the time monitoring update process was started by sequentially reading out from the non-gaming stack area in the reverse order of saving and setting in the registers corresponding to the order (Sv208). After that, using the above-mentioned LD command, the value of the stack pointer SP for the gaming program saved in the predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area in step Sv201 is read out, and is set as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP. The stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the monitoring update process was started (Sv209), the time monitoring update process is ended, and the process returns to the calling timer interrupt process (main).

In this way, the main control unit 41 performs various processes (sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer update process, role ratio monitor display data selection process) according to the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program. In this case, by calling the time monitoring update process from the timer interrupt process (main) (Sv11) included in the gaming program, various processes of the time monitoring update process are performed, and when each process ends, the caller The process returns to the timer interrupt processing (main).

In addition, in the time monitoring update process, after being called from the timer interrupt process (main) that is the game program, the stack pointer SP and registers are first saved, and then the sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, A plurality of processes such as medal passing time timer update process and role ratio monitor display data selection process are performed. After all of these processes are completed, the stack pointer SP and registers saved when called from the game program are restored, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (main) of the calling source. In such a configuration, in a non-game program called by a single call process from a game program, multiple processes (for example, sensor monitoring process, test signal output process, medal passing time timer update process, role ratio monitor display data selection) In the configuration that performs multiple processes in a non-gaming program, the process of saving the stack pointer SP and registers and the process of restoring them are not performed, and the process can be performed all at once.

Furthermore, when calling a non-gaming program (for example, time monitoring update processing) from a gaming program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the calculation results are stored in the registers included in the main control unit 41 on the gaming program side. After saving the value of the flag register by storing it in the gaming stack area of the gaming RAM area, calling a non-gaming program, and after the non-gaming program is terminated, the value of the flag register is saved before calling the non-gaming program. By sequentially reading out the values of the flag registers from the gaming stack area and setting them in the corresponding flag registers, the flag registers are returned to the state before the non-gaming program was called. As a result, even if the non-gaming program uses the flag register to perform calculations by calling a non-gaming program and changes the value of the flag register, when the gaming program returns to the gaming program, Then, the value of the flag register can be restored to the state before the non-gaming program was called, and subsequent processing can be performed.

In addition, in a non-gaming program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by a gaming program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the stack pointer SP used by the calling gaming program is first used. The current address value of the indicated gaming stack area is stored and saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area. After performing a predetermined process according to the non-gaming program, when the non-gaming program is terminated, the value of the stack pointer SP that was saved in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area when the non-gaming program was started. By setting the stack pointer SP to the stack pointer SP, the stack pointer SP is returned to the state when the non-gaming program was started. As a result, even if the non-gaming program uses the stack pointer SP and changes the stack pointer SP, when the non-gaming program is ended, the non-gaming program will be the same as when the non-gaming program was started. With the stack pointer SP restored to the current state, it is possible to return to the calling game program.

In addition, in a non-gaming program (for example, time monitoring update processing), when called by a gaming program (for example, timer interrupt processing (main)), the values of all registers provided in the main control unit 41 are stored in the non-gaming RAM. It is saved by storing it in the non-game stack area of the area. After performing predetermined processing according to the non-gaming program, when the non-gaming program is terminated, the value of the register that was stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area when the non-gaming program was started. are sequentially read from the non-gaming stack area and set in the corresponding registers, thereby restoring all the registers to the state they were in when the non-gaming program was started. As a result, even if the non-gaming program uses registers to perform various processes and changes the value of the register, when the non-gaming program ends, the non-gaming program It is possible to return to the calling game program with the values of all registers restored to the state they were in when the program was started.

In addition, when a non-gaming program is called by a gaming program, the values of all registers included in the main control unit 41 are saved by being stored in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area, and the non-gaming program When terminating the non-gaming program, by setting the value of the register that was saved in the non-gaming stack area to the corresponding register, all registers will be returned to the state they were in when the non-gaming program was started. It has become. The values of the registers used by the gaming program are stored and saved in the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area, and then restored to the registers from the non-gaming stack area, so all register values are stored in the gaming stack area. There is no need to provide an area for saving, and only an area for saving the value of the flag register needs to be provided in the game stack area, so the capacity of the game stack area can be reduced.

Furthermore, while the main control unit 41 requires a 1-byte program capacity for an instruction to save the values of the flag register, the main control unit 41 requires a 2-byte program capacity for an instruction to save the values of all registers. do. When calling a non-gaming program from a gaming program, the gaming program side saves the value of the flag register among the registers provided in the main control unit 41 to the gaming stack area of the gaming RAM area, and then calls the non-gaming program. On the calling and non-gaming program side, the values of all registers are saved to the non-gaming stack area of the non-gaming RAM area. Capacity can be reduced.

[About sensor monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 77, in the sensor monitoring process, the payout sensor is updated with reference to the branch counter of the timer interrupt process (main) that is updated in the timer interrupt process (main) and set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c. It is determined whether it is the timing (timing when the branching timer is 0) to perform processing regarding the dispensing sensor that monitors whether an abnormality has occurred in the detection states of 34c and 34d (Sz101). Then, if it is the timing to perform processing regarding the dispensing sensor, the process advances to step Sz102. On the other hand, if it is not the timing to perform the process related to the payout sensor, the process proceeds to step Sz117, and the process related to the input sensor for monitoring whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the detection state of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c is performed.

If it is determined in step Sz101 that it is time to perform processing related to the payout sensor, a sensor error set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c is detected in order to transmit the monitoring result of the sensor monitoring process to the gaming program. Clear the reference data (Sz102). Then, by referring to the error flag that is set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c and can specify whether or not an abnormality of error codes E1 to E5 has occurred (Sz103), error codes E2, E3, It is determined whether an abnormality in E4 has occurred (Sz104).

If it is determined in step Sz104 that an abnormality with error codes E2, E3, or E4 has occurred, proceed to step Sz117, whereas if it is determined that an abnormality with error codes E2, E3, or E4 has not occurred, proceed to step Sz117. , after referring to a predetermined area of the port input buffer where the final data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is stored (Sz105), referring to a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c, the hopper unit 35 pays out medals. It is determined whether or not a payout flag indicating that control is being performed is set (Sz106).

If it is determined that the payout flag is set in step Sz106, it is determined whether one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state based on the confirmed data of the payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in step Sz105. (Sz107), and if one of the dispensing sensors 34c, 34d is in the ON state, reference is made to a predetermined area of the port input buffer in which edge data of the dispensing sensors 34c, 34d is stored (Sz108); It is determined whether data (ON edge data or OFF edge data) is set (Sz109).

If it is determined in step Sz107 that one of the payout sensors 34c, 34d is in the ON state and that the edge data is set in step Sz109, that is, one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 is When a medal starts passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or when one medal paid out from the hopper unit 35 has finished passing through the detection range of the payout sensor, the non-gaming RAM of the RAM 41c The sensor check timer 1 set in a predetermined area of the area is initialized and set to 0 (Sz110), and the measurement of the passing time of a new medal is started. If it is determined in step Sz109 that the edge data is not set, and after initializing the sensor check timer 1 in step Sz110, the sensor check timer 1 is updated by adding 1 to it (Sz111).

The sensor check timer 1 measures the time from when the medals start passing through the detection ranges of the payout sensors 34c and 34d to when they finish passing through, and the time from when the medals finish passing through the detection ranges of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. This is a timer for measuring the time until the next medal starts passing. By being updated by step Sz111 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 1 determines whether the information regarding the payout sensor is displayed during the period when the payout flag is set, that is, during the period when the hopper unit 35 is controlling the payout of medals. It is updated every processing timing (one timing every four timer interrupt processing (main), 2.24 milliseconds).

If it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is in the ON state in step Sz107, and that edge data is not set in step Sz109, that is, the medal payout control When the medals are passing through the detection range of the payout sensors 34c and 34d, or during the period between when one medal is paid out and when the next medal is paid out during payout control, the sensor Check timer 1 is updated by adding one unit time (2.24 milliseconds in this embodiment) (Sz111).

After updating the sensor check timer 1 in step Sz111, it is determined whether the value of the sensor check timer 1 exceeds a predetermined maximum value of the monitoring time (11.20 milliseconds in this example). Determine (Sz112).

Here, the maximum value of the monitoring time of the sensor check timer 1 is at least the maximum value of the time required for the medals dispensed by the hopper unit 35 to pass through the detection range of the dispensing sensors 34c and 34d. After the medals dispensed by the hopper unit 35 finish passing through the detection range of the dispensing sensors 34c and 34d, the next medal is dispensed by the hopper unit 35 and passes through the detection range of the dispensing sensors 34c and 34d. The time is set to be greater than or equal to the longer of the times required for the process to start. As a result, during the period in which the payout control for paying out medals is performed, based on the sensor check timer 1, at least the time during which the detection state of the payout sensors 34c, 34d can continue in the ON state, and the time when the detection state of the payout sensors 34c, 34d It is determined whether or not a period longer than the time that the detection state can continue in the OFF state has elapsed.

If it is determined in step Sz112 that the value of sensor check timer 1 exceeds the maximum monitoring time, sensor error reference data (dispensing sensor ) is set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz113), the sensor check timer 1 is initialized and set to 0 (Sz114), and the measurement of the passing time of a new medal is started. The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in step is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to step Sz117. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz112 that the value of sensor check timer 1 does not exceed the maximum value of the monitoring time, the value of sensor check timer 1 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 41c (Sz115), and Sz117 Proceed to step.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the dispensing flag is set in step Sz106, and if it is determined that one of the dispensing sensors 34c, 34d is not in the ON state in step Sz107, the processing in steps Sz108 to Sz113 is performed. By proceeding to step Sz114 without doing this, the sensor error reference data is maintained in the state cleared in step Sz102, and after proceeding to step Sz114 and initializing sensor check timer 1 and setting it to 0, the relevant The value (0) of the sensor check timer 1 set in step Sz114 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz115), and the process proceeds to step Sz117.

Further, if it is determined that the payout flag is not set in step Sz106, both payout sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state based on the confirmed data of payout sensors 34c and 34d referred to in step Sz105. It is determined whether or not (Sz116), and if both the dispensing sensors 34c and 34d are in the OFF state, the process advances to step Sz107. Then, in step Sz107, it is determined that one of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is not in the ON state, so the process proceeds to step Sz117 without setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz106 that the dispensing flag is not set, and if it is determined in step Sz116 that both the dispensing sensors 34c and 34d are not in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step Sz113, After setting the sensor error reference data (payout sensor) in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c, the sensor check timer 1 is initialized (Sz114), and the value of the sensor check timer 1 is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. (Sz115), proceed to step Sz117.

By performing the processing of steps Sz11 to Sz116 above, processing related to the payout sensor that determines whether or not an abnormality regarding the payout of medals has occurred based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d is performed. After this process is performed, by performing the process after step Sz117, the process related to the input sensor is performed subsequent to the process related to the payout sensor.

As shown in FIG. 78, in the processing related to the input sensor in the sensor monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a medal maintenance permission flag indicating that insertion of medals from the medal insertion unit 4 is permitted is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. is determined (Sz117), and if the medal care permission flag is not set, the sensor monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the time monitoring update process of the calling source.

If it is determined that the medal care permission flag is set in step Sz117, a predetermined area of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c is referred to (Sz118), and an abnormality (hereinafter referred to as medal Based on whether or not a sensor error flag that can specify whether a sensor error (sometimes called a sensor error) has been detected is set, it is determined whether a medal sensor error is occurring (Sz119). If a medal sensor error is occurring, the sensor monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the time monitoring update process of the calling source.

If it is determined in step Sz119 that there is no medal sensor error, the current state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c (injected medal sensors 1, 2, and 3 in FIG. 78) set in the port input buffer in the game RAM area Referring to the data (Sz120), it is determined whether or not the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state (Sz121).

If it is determined that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are in the ON state in step Sz121, the ON state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is evacuated to a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz122), and the non-playing state of the RAM 41c is Referring to the sensor check timer 2 set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area, it is determined whether or not the sensor check timer 2 is 0 (Sz123).

The sensor check timer 2 is a timer for measuring the time from when a medal starts passing through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c to when it finishes passing through. By being updated by step Sz127 in the sensor monitoring process, the sensor check timer 2 determines the timing at which the sensor monitoring process is performed (every timer interrupt process (main)) during the period when the inserted medal sensor 31a is in the ON state. It is updated every 0.56 milliseconds).

If it is determined in step Sz123 that the sensor check timer 2 is 0, it is determined whether the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c (injected medal sensors 2 and 3 in FIG. 31) referred to in step Sz120 are in the ON state. (Sz124), and if the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are not in the ON state, medals are inserted without referring to the medal inserted signal based on a medal inserted signal ignore timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by medal inserted signal processing. It is determined whether or not it is within the signal ignoring time (in this embodiment, within 504 milliseconds after starting the switching control of the medal flow path by the flow path switching solenoid 30) (Sz125), and the medal input signal is ignored. If it is not within the time, one unit time (in this example, 0.56 milliseconds) is added to the sensor check timer 2 and updated (Sz126), and the value of the sensor check timer 2 after the addition is the input medal sensor. It is determined whether the maximum value (99.68 m in this embodiment) of the normal passage time range required for the medal to normally pass through the detection range of 31a has been exceeded (Sz127). Note that the normal passage time range is based on the actual measurement value of the time required for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, the shape of the medal receiving channel 29b of the medal selector 29, and the input time in the medal receiving channel 29b. It is predetermined based on the arrangement of the medal sensors 31a to 31c, the characteristics of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, etc. (in this embodiment, it is in the range of 10.08 milliseconds to 99.68 milliseconds).

If it is determined in the step Sz127 that the value of the sensor check timer 2 exceeds the maximum value of the normal passage time range, and if it is determined that the inserted medal sensors 31b and 31c are in the ON state in the step Sz124, the inserted medals are After setting sensor error reference data (inserted medal sensor) indicating that an abnormality has been detected based on the detection states of the sensors 31a to 31c in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz128), the sensor check timer 2 is set. It is initialized and set to 0 (Sz129) to start measuring the passing time of a new medal. Then, the sensor monitoring process is ended and the process returns to the time monitoring update process of the calling source.

Further, if it is determined in step Sz121 that the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are not in the ON state, and if it is determined in step Sz125 that the medal input signal ignore time is within based on the medal input signal ignore timer, then in step Sz127 If it is determined that the value of the sensor check timer 2 does not exceed the maximum value of the normal passage time range, the value of the sensor check timer 2 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sz130), and the sensor monitoring process is terminated. and returns to the calling source's time monitoring update processing.

As described above, in the sensor monitoring process, by performing the processing of steps Sz101 to Sz116, processing regarding the payout sensor is performed, and an abnormality regarding medal payout occurs based on the detection state of the payout sensors 34c and 34d. By performing the processing of steps Sz117 to Sz130, it is determined whether or not an abnormality regarding medal insertion has occurred based on the detection state of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c. It looks like this.

In addition, in the sensor monitoring process, by performing processing related to the payout sensor, it is determined whether or not an abnormality related to medal dispensing has occurred, and then regardless of the determination result, processing related to the input sensor is continuously performed, and the medal A determination is made as to whether or not an abnormality has occurred regarding the injection of the liquid.

[About test signal output processing]
The test signal output processing performed by the main control section 41 will be explained based on FIG. 79. After performing the above-described sensor monitoring process, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs test signal processing.

As shown in FIG. 79, in the test signal output process, first, the main process refers to the one game time management timer set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c (Sz201), and the one game time management timer is It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, it is the value when timing is started by the timer for one game time management, and corresponds to 4.1 seconds) (Sz202). In addition, if step Sb43 of the main process is performed before the timer interrupt process (main) which is the calling source of the time monitoring update process that called the test signal output process, one game time management The value of the timer is set to a predetermined value.

If it is determined in step Sz202 that the one game time management timer is at a predetermined value, refer to the branching counter set in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c by the timer interrupt processing (main) (Sz203); When the branching counter is a predetermined value (3 in this embodiment), the test signal output timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set to a predetermined value (output to be output to the test device). This value corresponds to the number of data, and in this example, the time ((22.4 milliseconds) x number of output data (4)) for which the output of the test signal that can identify one output data is continued is set. and starts timing (Sz204). On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz202 that the one game time management timer is not the predetermined value, and if it is determined that the branch timer is not 3 in step Sz203, after setting the test signal output timer in step Sz204, An initial address of an output data address for specifying a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in which output data to be output as a test signal is stored is acquired (Sz205). The output data is data that can specify the winning status of the special winning combination and the winning status of the general winning combination in the internal lottery.

Thereafter, referring to the value of the test signal output timer (Sz206), it is determined whether or not the test signal output timer has finished counting the predetermined time (Sz207). Then, if the test signal output timer is not 0 and the measurement of the predetermined time by the test signal output timer has not finished, it is determined whether the output data fixed mode is set (Sz208). The output data fixed mode is set when output data set by the RT information output process performed in step Sb2 of the main process described above is output as a test signal.

If the output data fixed mode is not set, the test signal output timer is updated by subtracting one unit time (in this example, 0.56 milliseconds) (Sz209), and then in step Sz206. When the value of the referenced test signal output timer is divided by a predetermined value (in this example, a value corresponding to the time (22.4 milliseconds) for which one output data continues to output an identifiable test signal). It is determined whether the remainder value is 0 (Sz210). If the remainder value is 0, the process returns to step Sz205 and processes steps Sz205 to Sz210 based on the value of the test signal output timer updated in step Sz209. On the other hand, if the remainder value is not 0, the value of the test signal output timer referenced in step Sz206 is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, the time period during which output of a test signal that can identify one output data is continued (22. 4 milliseconds)), and adds the quotient value to the output data address of the initial address obtained in step Sz205 (Sz211), and proceeds to step Sz212. Then, the output data address is further advanced by one address to obtain the output data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address (Sz213).

If it is determined in step Sz208 that the output data fixed mode is set, the process proceeds to step Sz212, advances the output data address of the initial address set in step Sz206 by one address (Sz212), and The output data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c specified based on the output data address is acquired (Sz213).

Thereafter, the output data acquired in step Sz213 is set as the test signal output (Sz214), and the test signal output is set to the output port 6 and output (Sz215). In addition, in step Sz207, if it is determined that the value of the test signal output timer referenced in step Sz206 is 0, the test signal output is set to the OFF state (Sz216), and the test signal output is output to output port 6. Set and output (Sz215). After setting the output of the test signal in step Sz215, the test signal output process is ended and the process returns to the time monitoring update process of the calling source.

Through such control, the main control unit 41 performs a predetermined operation from the time when the one game time management timer is set to the initial value and started, that is, from the time when the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started as a game. The test signal is output from the output port 6 over a period (89.6 milliseconds (22.4 milliseconds×4) in this embodiment).

In addition, the main control unit 41 sequentially sends four pieces of output data as test signals at predetermined time intervals (in this embodiment, 22.4 milliseconds) that can identify the winning status of the general prize and special prize in the internal lottery. It is switched so that it is output from output port 6.

Next, the medal passing time timer update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described based on FIG. 80. After performing the test signal output process described above, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs a medal passing time timer update process.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the medal passing time timer update process, first, the medal passing time timer set in a predetermined area of the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c is referenced by the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program, It is determined whether the value of the medal passing time timer is 0 (Sz301).

If the value of the medal passing time timer is 0, that is, if the time for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c is not measured by the medal sensor process, the medal passing time timer update process is ended. , returns to the time monitoring update process of the caller.

On the other hand, if the value of the medal passing time timer is not 0, that is, if the medal sensor processing measures the time for the medal to pass through the detection range of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c, a predetermined value is added to the medal passing time timer. After updating by doing so (Sz302), the medal passage time timer update process is ended and the process returns to the time monitoring update process of the calling source.

[About display monitor output data selection process]
The display monitor output data selection process performed by the main control unit 41 will be explained based on FIGS. 81 and 82. After performing the aforementioned medal passing time timer update process, the main control unit 41 subsequently performs a display monitor output data selection process.

The display monitor output data selection process is started after the port input process in the timer interrupt process (main) performed every 0.56 milliseconds by the main control unit 41, and is used in the LED dynamic display process of the timer interrupt process (main). This is a process of setting lighting data for the LEDs.

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, in the display monitor output data selection process, first, the address of the display monitor selection timer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set in the HL register (Sz401), and the address is displayed. Add 1 to the monitor selection timer value and update it (Sz402). After that, it is determined whether the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928) (Sz403), and if it is determined that the display monitor selection timer value has reached the upper limit value (8928), The timer value for display monitor selection is initialized and set to 0 (Sz403), and 1 is added to the display monitor display content vector to update it (Sz405). The display monitor display content vector is updated within the range of 0 to 4 by correcting it to 0 if the value exceeds 4 by adding 1.

If the display monitor display content vector is updated in step Sz405, and if it is determined that the display monitor selection timer value has not reached the upper limit in step Sz403, proceed to step Sz406 and refer to the gaming state. (Sz406), and determines whether or not the setting confirmation state is in progress (Sz407). If it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting confirmation state is in progress, steps Sz447 to Sz463, which will be described later, are performed to display a display test pattern on the 7-segment display of the gaming machine information display 50.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting confirmation state is not in progress, the address of the display monitor identifier output data table is set in the HL register (Sz408), and the value of the display monitor display content vector is written in the A register and B register. Load (Sz409). Then, based on the A register value and the HL register value, the address where the identifier output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector is stored is calculated (Sz410), and the identifier output data stored at the address is calculated. Read into DE register (Sz411).

Thereafter, after adding 1 to the value of the display monitor display content vector read into the B register in step Sz409 and updating it (Sz412), the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The number of played games determination flag that can specify whether the number of played games has been exceeded is read into the A register (Sz413), and the determination value included in the number of played games determined flag is extracted into the C register (Sz414).

Then, based on the determination value extracted to the C register, it is determined whether the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the specified number of games (Sz415).

If it is determined in step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 does not exceed the specified number of games, the address of the display monitor selection timer is set in the HL register (Sz416), and The calculation constant 1 registered in advance is read into the BC register (Sz417). Then, the display monitor selection timer value of the HL register is divided by the calculation constant 1 of the BC register (Sz418), and it is determined whether the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is 0 (Sz419). If it is determined in step Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0, clear the DE register and set it to 0 to output data that makes the display on the 7-segment display blank (non-display). Set it in the DE register (Sz420) and proceed to step Sz421.

Further, if it is determined in step Sz415 that the number of games played in the slot machine 1 exceeds the specified number of games, the process proceeds to step Sz421 without performing each process in steps Sz416 to Sz420. In addition, if it is determined in step Sz419 that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value by the calculation constant 1 is 0, the process in step Sz420 is not performed. , proceed to step Sz421.

In step Sz421, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as identifier display data (Sz421).

Thereafter, display data for displaying "--" on the gaming machine information display 50 is set in the DE register (Sz422). Then, the start address of the display monitor threshold data table is set in the HL register (Sz423), the value of the display monitor display content vector is read into the A register (Sz424), and the display monitor display content is set based on the A register value and the HL register value. The address where the threshold data corresponding to the vector value is stored is calculated (Sz425). Then, by referring to the winning ratio monitor display valid data that is stored in a predetermined area corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector and can specify whether or not the winning ratio display is valid, it is determined whether the winning ratio display is valid or not. It is determined whether or not (Sz426).

If it is determined in step Sz426 that the winning ratio display is not valid, the process proceeds to Sz446, which will be described later, and after setting the DE register value as the winning ratio display in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 (Sz446), the display monitor The output data selection process is ended and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the win ratio display is valid in step Sz426, the data stored at the address specified by the HL register value is read into the B register as a threshold (Sz427), and the display monitor win ratio is output. The start address of the data table is set in the HL register (Sz428), and the address where the output data corresponding to the value of the display monitor display content vector is stored is calculated based on the A register value and the HL register value (Sz429). Then, the output data stored at the address is read into the A register (Sz430). Thereafter, the output data of the A register and the threshold value of the B register are compared, and a value indicating the comparison result is set in the C register (Sz431).

Thereafter, data that sets the display mode to non-blinking is temporarily set in the B register (Sz432), and it is determined whether the output data is less than the threshold value based on the C register value (Sz433). If it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is not less than the threshold value, data indicating that the display mode is blinking is temporarily set in the B register (Sz434), and the process proceeds to step Sz435. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sz433 that the output data is less than the threshold, the process proceeds to step Sz435 without performing the process in step Sz434. In step Sz435, the quotient obtained by dividing the output data of the A register by 10 is set in the A register, and the remainder is set in the E register (Sz435).

After dividing the output data of the A register by 10 and setting the quotient and remainder in the specified registers in step Sz435, set the start address of the display data table in the HL register (Sz436), and set the HL register value. The display data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value is read into the D register, and the display of the tens digit of the hand ratio display is set (Sz437).

After that, read the E register value into the A register (Sz438), read the display data stored at the address of the value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value into the E register, and display 1 in the hand ratio display. Set the display of the digit (Sz439).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not blinking is set based on the value of the B register (Sz440), and if it is determined that blinking is set, the display monitor selection timer value is read into the HL register (Sz441). Then, a predetermined timer reference value (in this example, a value corresponding to 0.3 seconds) is read into the BC register (Sz442), and the quotient obtained by dividing the HL register value by the BC register value is set in the HL register. and sets the remainder in the DE register (Sz443). After that, it is determined whether the least significant bit of the quotient set in the HL register is 0 (Sz444), and if it is determined that the least significant bit of the quotient is not 0, the display data (value of the DE register) is determined. is set to 0 (Sz445) and proceeds to step Sz446.

Further, if it is determined in step Sz440 that there is no blinking setting based on the value of the B register, the process proceeds to step Sz446 without performing each process in steps Sz441 to Sz445. If it is determined in step Sz444 that the least significant bit of the quotient is 0, the process proceeds to step Sz446 without performing the process in step Sz445.

In step Sz446, the DE register value is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as a hand ratio display (Sz446). Thereafter, the display monitor output data selection process is ended and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

If it is determined in step Sz407 that the setting is being confirmed, the process proceeds to step Sz447, and after setting 0 as the display data (DE register value) (Sz447), the DE register value is displayed as an identifier, It is set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 as a win ratio display (Sz448, Sz449).

After that, after reading the display monitor selection timer value into the HL register (Sz450), correcting the HL register value (Sz451), and reading the calculation constant 2 registered in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM41b into the BC register (Sz452). ). Then, the quotient obtained by dividing the display monitor selection timer value in the HL register by the calculation constant 2 in the BC register is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz453). After that, the calculation constant 3 registered in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b is read into the BC register (Sz454), and the HL register value (the quotient value set in step Sz453) is divided by the calculation constant 3 in the BC register. The resulting quotient is set in the HL register, and the remainder is set in the BC register (Sz455).

Then, the value of the L register is read into the A register (Sz456), the address of the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 that displays the win ratio is read into the HL register (Sz457), and the A register value is added to the HL register. Correct (Sz458). After that, the C register value is read into the A register (Sz459), the address of the display test pattern data of the gaming machine information display 50 is read into the DE register (Sz460), and the A register value is added to the DE register for correction (Sz461). ).

After that, the output data of the display test pattern stored at the address specified by the DE register value is read into the A register (Sz462), and the output data of the gaming machine information display 50 that displays the winning ratio specified by the HL register value is read. Store the A register value in the buffer (Sz463). Thereafter, the display monitor output data selection process is ended and the process returns to the time monitoring update process.

[About counter update processing]
The counter update process performed by the main control unit 41 will be explained based on FIG. 83. Note that the counter update process is included in the game program, and is a subroutine called in the timer interrupt process included in the game program.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the counter update process, first, a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is set, in which a medal input signal ignore timer is set, which measures the medal input signal ignoring time without referring to the medal input signal by the aforementioned medal input signal process. Set the address in the HL register (Sv301). Then, by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, it is determined whether the medal input signal ignore timer value is 0, that is, whether the medal input signal ignore time is being counted. (Sv302), and if it is determined that the medal input signal ignore timer value is not 0 and the medal input signal ignore time is being counted, the medal input signal ignore timer value is updated by subtracting 1 ( Sv303).

Thereafter, as described above, the address of a predetermined area of the RAM 41c where the timer for managing one game time for measuring the minimum time of one game is set is set in the HL register (Sv304). Then, by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c corresponding to the address set in the HL register, it is determined whether the timer value for one game time management is 0, that is, whether the minimum time for one game is being counted. (Sv305), and if it is determined that the one game time management timer is not 0 and is measuring the minimum time for one game, the one game time management timer value is subtracted by 1 and updated. (Sv306). Thereafter, the counter update process is ended and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

In this way, the counter update process ignores the medal input signal, which is a counter that counts the time (medal input signal ignored time, minimum time for one game, etc.) managed by the gaming program (main process, medal input signal processing, etc.). The timer is designed to update the game time management timer. On the other hand, a medal passing time timer that measures time (medal sensor monitoring time, test signal output time, medal passing time, etc.) managed by a non-gaming program (medal sensor check processing, sensor monitoring processing, test signal output processing, etc.); Sensor check timer 1, sensor check timer 2, and test signal output timer are not updated in the corresponding counter update processing included in the gaming program, but are updated in the various processing included in the non-gaming program (sensor monitoring processing, test signal output processing). , timer update processing).

[About the display mode of the gaming machine information display]
As shown in FIG. 84, when the game control board 40 is attached to a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, there is a 7-segment display at the lower part of the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. A gaming machine information display 50 is arranged. The game machine information display device 50 is such that when the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a, the display contents can be viewed from outside the board case 120a, and the main control unit 41 tallies and displays the display contents. Information such as the advantageous section ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the machine information display 50 can be recognized by a clerk or the like.

Therefore, when the front door 1b is open, the display contents of the gaming machine information display 50 can be viewed through the board case 120a. Further, inside the housing 1a, the visibility of the display contents of the gaming machine information display 50 is not obstructed. Specifically, general parts such as reels provided in the slot machine 1, other boards, etc. are not provided on the display side of the gaming machine information display 50, and the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 is Wiring connecting electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 is prevented from passing through the position. In addition, in the board case 120a that houses the game control board 40 equipped with the game machine information display 50, there is also a seal, an entry section for writing in the name of the person who opened the seal, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40. The game machine information display 50 includes a label on which information such as the following information is displayed, an adhesive part on which the label is attached, a display part on which the information is printed or engraved, heat radiation holes, heat radiation fans, and other parts. It is placed away from the display side.

Further, the board case 120a is sealed after housing the game control board 40, and in the sealed state, it is impossible to unseal and open it without leaving any traces. It has become. Examples of sealing methods include sealing a sealing piece with a one-way screw, welding a part of the case, and pasting a seal that leaves traces of peeling. As a result, the connection wire connecting the game machine information display 50 and the game control board 40 is disconnected, and the game machine information display 50 mounted on the game control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a displays correctly. It is possible to prevent fraud such as making it impossible to display the contents or pasting a sticker or the like on the display surface of the game machine information display 50 to obstruct visibility.

As shown in FIG. 85, the main control unit 41 controls the ratio of advantageous sections for the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous sections for the total cumulative number of games, the consecutive payout ratio for the past 6000 games, and the accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games. The gaming machine information display shows the payout ratio of accessory items with instructions during the past 6000 games, the ratio of consecutive combination payouts to the total cumulative number of payouts, the ratio of accessory payouts with instructions to the total cumulative number of payouts, and the ratio of accessory payouts with instructions to the total cumulative number of payouts. 50 is displayed.

The ratio of advantageous sections during the past 6000 games is the ratio of the number of games controlled to advantageous sections related to AT during the past 6000 games. The advantageous period related to AT is the period from when the AT is won in a non-AT winning state until all control of the AT associated with the winning AT is completed and the AT shifts to a non-AT. The advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games is the cumulative number of games since the time of factory shipment or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason. It is a proportion of numbers. The consecutive payout ratio during the past 6000 games is the number of medals paid out during the controlled BB during the past 6000 games, which is the cumulative total of the number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. This is the ratio of the cumulative number of consecutive payouts. The payout ratio for accessory items during the past 6,000 games is the ratio of the number of tokens paid out for accessory items, which is the cumulative number of medals paid out during controlled RB during the past 6,000 games, to the total number of tokens paid out for the past 6,000 games. be. The payout ratio of accessory items with instructions during the past 6,000 games is the number of accessory items paid out during the past 6,000 games, which accounts for the total number of coins paid out during the past 6,000 games, and the number of coins paid out in games for which navigation notifications were made during the past 6,000 games. This is the ratio of the number of medals to be paid out including the total number of medals. The consecutive combination payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is the cumulative number of medals paid out since the time of factory shipment or after the data in the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason. This is the ratio of the number of consecutive payouts from the time the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present. The accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is the ratio of the accessory payout number to the total cumulative payout number from the time of factory shipment or after the data in the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason to the present. The instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number is the ratio of the instruction-included payout number to the total cumulative payout number from the time of factory shipment or after the data in the RAM 41c was initialized for some reason to the present.

In addition, in this embodiment, only RB and BB in which RB operates continuously are installed as bonuses, but all types of small winnings are allowed, but some reels may be withdrawn. The configuration may include a CT in which the amount of time is limited, or a CB in which the CT operates continuously.If a CT is installed, the number of medals paid out during the CT is calculated based on the accessory payout ratio and instructions. It will be reflected in the number of medals paid out, and if a CB is installed, the number of medals paid out during the CB will be reflected in the consecutive payout ratio.

The main control unit 41 calculates the advantageous section ratio for the past 6,000 games, the advantageous section ratio for the total cumulative number of games, the consecutive payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, and the past 6,000 games during the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. Accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games, instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games, consecutive combination payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, instruction-included accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 in the display order shown in FIG.

At this time, on the gaming machine information display 50, an abbreviation indicating the currently displayed display content is displayed in the top two digits (for example, if the advantageous section ratio among the past 6000 games in display order 1 is displayed, " 1A”) is displayed. The abbreviation that indicates the display content currently displayed is such that the display content of the lowest digit of the two displayed digits is a character other than a number (in this example, the alphabetic characters "A", "C", and "F"). When the abbreviations, percentages, and ratios are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, the numerical portions of the abbreviations are not adjacent to the percentages and ratios. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displayed contents of the proportion and ratio from being misunderstood due to the abbreviated numerical part and the proportion or ratio being adjacent to each other.

In addition, at this time, the gaming machine information display 50 displays the current ratio and ratio (hereinafter sometimes referred to as data to be displayed) that correspond to the abbreviations mentioned above in the last two digits. Data is also displayed as a percentage. The data displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is 0 to 99%, but in this embodiment, the data is displayed using both the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. For example, if the data to be displayed is one digit, "0" is displayed in the upper digit of the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. , displays the value of the data to be displayed in the lower digits (for example, when displaying 5%, "05" is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50). Furthermore, when the data to be displayed is two digits, the data to be displayed is displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, when displaying 15%, the gaming machine information display 50 ``15'' will be displayed in the last two digits of ``15''). In this way, regardless of whether the data to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 is one digit or two digits, the data to be displayed can be displayed using both of the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50. By displaying the information, it is possible to prevent the display contents of the ratio and ratio from being misunderstood. In addition, by displaying the data to be displayed using both of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, regardless of whether it is one digit or two digits, the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 are always displayed. Any data will be displayed in the digits, and for example, if data is not displayed on one of the lower two digit displays, it is possible to recognize that there is an abnormality in the display.

In addition, the abbreviation indicating the display content currently being displayed should be changed so that the display content of the highest digit of the two displayed digits is a character other than a number (for example, "A1") on the gaming machine information display. Even if the abbreviation is displayed in the last two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, and the data to be currently displayed (for example, advantageous section ratio for the past 6000 games) is displayed in the first two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, the abbreviated number It is possible to prevent the display contents of the proportions and ratios from being misunderstood when parts, proportions, and ratios are adjacent to each other.

In addition, regardless of whether the abbreviation and the data to be currently displayed are displayed in the lower two digits or the upper two digits on the gaming machine information display 50, the two digits that display the abbreviation and the data that should be currently displayed are displayed. Even with a configuration in which the two digits are displayed in different colors, it is possible to prevent the abbreviated numerical part and the percentage or ratio from being placed next to each other and the displayed content of the percentage or ratio being misunderstood.

In addition, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls the advantageous section ratio, the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio, the consecutive combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio. , when switching and displaying the display in the display order shown in FIG. 85 every predetermined period, the game progresses and these values are updated to new values within one period until the display completes one cycle. Even if it can be updated, updating to a new value is restricted and the display is cycled using the original value. Specifically, if the game is progressing and these values can be updated to new values within one period until the completion of one cycle of these displays, the new values are calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 can be changed. You can use the original value to display one cycle, set the new value in the output buffer after one cycle of display, and then display the new value. If these values can be updated to new values within one period until the completion of one cycle, the display on the gaming machine information display 50 is restricted from performing calculations to obtain the new values. It is also possible to perform a calculation to obtain a new value when one round of display is completed, and then display on the gaming machine information display 50 using the new value. By doing so, it is possible to prevent display contents such as advantageous section ratios calculated at different times from being mixed together during the period until the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50 complete one cycle.

In addition, if the advantageous section ratio among the past 6000 games and the advantageous section ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of games exceed a specified percentage (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from normal (for example, normal If it is lit all the time, it will blink (if it is lit all the time, etc.) to display the advantageous section ratio. In addition, if the consecutive combination payout ratio over the past 6000 games or the consecutive combination payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts exceeds a specified ratio (for example, 60%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from normal (for example, If it is normally lit all the time, the consecutive payout ratio will be displayed with blinking lights, etc.). In addition, when the accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games and the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts exceeds a specified ratio (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from normal (for example, If it is normally lit all the time, it will be blinking, etc.) to display the payout ratio of accessories. In addition, the main control unit 41 displays a different display than normal if the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio over the past 6000 games or the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts exceeds a specified ratio (for example, 80%). The instruction-included accessory payout ratio is displayed in a manner (for example, if it is normally lit all the time, it is lit blinking).

In this way, when the advantageous section ratio, consecutive combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio exceed the specified ratio, it is displayed in a different display format than usual, making it highly gambling. It is now possible to warn that there is a possibility that the device is being controlled by the state.

The main control unit 41 also controls the advantageous section ratio for the past 6,000 games, the consecutive payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, the accessory payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, and the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio for the past 6,000 games. When displaying on the machine information display 50, if the number of games played in the past has not reached 6000 games, for example, the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 may be displayed blinking. By controlling the display format in different ways, it is now possible to recognize that the total has not reached 6,000 games, and it is now possible to recognize that there may be a bias in the displayed ratio. There is.

In addition, when displaying the advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games on the gaming machine information display 50, the main control unit 41 controls the number of games in the past for which the advantageous section ratio generally converges to the design value of the slot machine. (for example, 175,000 games), by controlling the display mode to be different from normal, such as blinking the display of the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, the advantageous section ratio It has become possible to recognize that the number of games has not reached the specified number of games that generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, and it has become possible to recognize that there may be a bias in the displayed ratio. There is.

In addition, when displaying the consecutive combination payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative number of payouts on the gaming machine information display 50, the main control unit 41 determines that the number of past games allows the consecutive combination payout ratio to approximately converge to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 17,500 games) has not been reached, the game machine information display 50 may be controlled in a different display mode than usual, such as by blinking the upper two digits. It is now possible to recognize that the winning combination ratio has not reached the specified number of games in which it converges to the slot machine's design value, and it is now possible to recognize that the displayed ratio and ratio may be biased. It has become.

In addition, when displaying the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total number of payouts on the gaming machine information display 50, the main control unit 41 determines that the number of past games allows the accessory payout ratio to approximately converge to the design value of the slot machine. When the number of games (for example, 175,000 games) has not been reached, the game machine information display 50 may be controlled in a different display mode, such as by blinking the upper two digits. It is now possible to recognize that the payout ratio has not reached the specified number of games that converges to the slot machine's design value, and it is now possible to recognize that the displayed ratio and ratio may be biased. It has become.

In addition, in the case where the main control unit 41 causes the gaming machine information display 50 to display the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio with respect to the total number of payouts, the main control unit 41 determines that if the number of past games is such that the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio is approximately the design value of the slot machine. When the predetermined number of games (for example, 175,000 games) has not been reached, the game machine information display 50 is controlled to have a different display mode than usual, such as by blinking the upper two digits. This makes it possible to recognize that the specified number of games has not been reached in which the payout ratio of accessories including instruction generally converges to the design value of the slot machine, and the displayed ratio is biased. Possibilities can now be recognized.

The main control unit 41 displays "00" in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 when the number of games has not reached 6000, and displays "00" in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 when the number of games has reached 6000. In other words, in the state after reaching 6000 games, the display mode of the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 is changed to the display mode after 6000 games. It is preferable to have a configuration in which the display modes are different. With such a configuration, when the number of games has not reached 6000, the upper two digits of the gaming machine information display 50 (for example, "1A" ), it can be recognized that the total of the advantageous section ratios, etc., specified by , has not reached 6000 games, and it can be recognized that there is a possibility that the displayed ratios and ratios are biased. In addition, when the number of games has not reached 6,000, "00" is displayed in the lower two digits of the gaming machine information display 50, so that when the number of games has not reached 6,000, the gaming machine information is always displayed. Data is displayed on the lower two digits of the display 50, and for example, if data is not displayed on one of the lower two digit displays, it is possible to recognize an abnormality in the display.

The main control unit 41 also controls the advantageous section ratio for the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio for the total cumulative number of games, the consecutive combination payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games, and the advantageous period ratio for the past 6000 games. Whether the data used to calculate the instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio, the consecutive combination payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, and the instruction-included accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts is normal. If it is determined to be abnormal (if the number of paid out bonus coins, the number of consecutive paid coins, or the number of paid out pieces in advantageous areas is greater than the total number of paid out coins, the stored value is in a certain data format (such as 01 repeat). In some cases, etc.), the data determined to be abnormal and data related to the data are initialized, and the gaming machine information display 50 displays a message indicating that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF"). It is designed to notify you of this fact, so that you can recognize that these data calculations are not being performed normally.

In addition, when initializing the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, for example, the advantageous section ratio, consecutive combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and instruction-included accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games. If at least one of them is determined to be abnormal, data related to all of them may be initialized, or only some of the data may be initialized. If at least one of the advantageous section ratio, consecutive combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and instructed accessory payout ratio to the total number of games is determined to be abnormal, the data regarding all of these will be initialized. Alternatively, only some data may be initialized. In addition, when an abnormality is determined in part of the data for the past 6,000 games, all the data for the past 6,000 games and the total number of games can be initialized, or conversely, some of the data for the total number of games can be initialized. When an abnormality is determined, all data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games may be initialized.

In addition, it determines whether the data used to calculate the advantageous section ratio, consecutive combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and instructed accessory payout ratio for the past 6,000 games and the total cumulative number of games is normal. If it is determined, it will be notified and then a predetermined operation (for example, switches such as the start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, setting key switch 37, etc. will be operated in a predetermined procedure). ), the data may be initialized.

Furthermore, in order to notify that an abnormality has been determined, as described above, the gaming machine information display 50 may display a message indicating that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF") to notify the user that an abnormality has been detected. When an abnormality is determined, a command that can identify the fact is sent to the sub-control unit 91, and the sub-control unit 91 side displays the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to notify that an abnormality has been determined. You can do it like this.

The main control unit 41 also controls the period from the start of data collection until reaching 6,000 games, that is, the ratio of advantageous sections for the past 6,000 games, the ratio of advantageous sections to the total cumulative number of games, and the continuous period for the past 6,000 games. Role payout ratio, role item payout ratio for the past 6000 games, instruction-inclusive role item payout ratio for the past 6000 games, consecutive role payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, role item payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, total cumulative number of payouts During a period when there is insufficient data for calculating the payout ratio of accessories including instruction for It is now displayed as , allowing users to recognize that there is insufficient data to calculate the displayed content.

In addition, in this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio for the past 6,000 games, the advantageous section ratio for the total cumulative number of games, the consecutive payout ratio for the past 6,000 games, and the consecutive payout ratio for the past 6,000 games in the period from when the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. Accessory payout ratio between games, instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio over the past 6000 games, consecutive combination payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, instruction-included accessory payout to the total cumulative number of payouts The ratio is switched and displayed every predetermined period, but it may be displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or when a predetermined operation switch (for example, the reset/setting switch 38 ) operation is detected, display it when the game is not in progress, display it while changing settings or checking settings, or display it for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. It may also be possible to display only the . Furthermore, instead of automatically switching at every predetermined period, the displayed content may be switched every time a predetermined operation is performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the gaming machine information display unit 50 indicates that an abnormality has been determined in the data used to calculate the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 or that there is insufficient data for calculating the display content. Although the configuration is such that notification is made using the display 50, it is also possible to send a command that can specify this to the sub-control unit 91 and make it possible to confirm it on the display or presentation device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. good.

In addition, in this example, the advantageous section ratio for the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio for the total cumulative number of games, the consecutive payout ratio for the past 6000 games, the accessory payout ratio for the past 6000 games, and the advantageous section ratio for the past 6000 games. The instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio, the consecutive combination payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts, and the instruction-included accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative number of payouts are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. In addition to these displays, a message to that effect will be displayed when the RAM 41c has been initialized by changing the settings, or when a disconnection in the wiring installed in the slot machine 1 (backup power supply wiring, etc.) is detected. Recognizable content may be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

In particular, if the settings are changed during a bonus, advantageous period, or carryover of the bonus and the bonus or advantageous period is forcibly ended, or if the bonus that is being carried over is cleared, the game will continue to be regulated while the bonus is being carried over. more than 3 times, or an operation that intentionally ends the advantageous section (for example, intentionally replaying to RT1 or winning SB in RT2 or RT3 during AT, or stopping a specific symbol. If an operation to shift to RT1 is performed (i.e., a player intentionally shifts from a relatively advantageous gaming state to a disadvantageous gaming state, etc.), and if the gaming machine information display 50 is disconnected. If it is detected that there is a possibility that the connection is not normal due to the occurrence of such problems, this fact will be notified in a specifiable manner. By doing this, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that the correct information such as advantageous section ratio, accessory payout ratio, consecutive combination payout ratio, instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. may have been fraudulently manipulated. Can be done.

In addition, in the process of avoiding overflow of the total cumulative data, as described later, when the total cumulative data, etc. are initialized, it can be specified that the advantageous section ratio, accessory payout ratio, etc. It is preferable to notify in a manner different from the case where there is a possibility of unauthorized manipulation so that correct information is not displayed as the consecutive combination payout ratio, instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio, etc.; by doing this, it is possible to prevent overflow. The fact that the total cumulative data has been initialized can be recognized separately from the initialization caused by an unauthorized operation to prevent correct information, such as advantageous section ratio, from being displayed.

In addition, as mentioned above, if there is a possibility that the correct information such as advantageous section ratio, accessory payout ratio, consecutive combination payout ratio, instruction-included accessory payout ratio, etc. has been fraudulently manipulated, please notify us. is detected and the history of the detection is recorded on the main control unit 41 side, and after that, without notification at the time of the detection, a predetermined operation (for example, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, setting key switch 37 (such as operating switches such as This can be confirmed using a display provided (for example, gaming machine information display 50, etc.), a display provided on the sub-control unit 91 side (for example, liquid crystal display 51, etc.), a display external to the slot machine 1, etc. You can do it like this.

In addition, information such as settings changes, disconnection detection, connection failure of the gaming machine information display 50, advantageous section ratio, accessory payout ratio, consecutive combination payout ratio, instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio, etc. As mentioned above, the correct information may not be displayed as the advantageous section ratio, accessory payout ratio, consecutive combination payout ratio, instructed accessory payout ratio, etc. may have been fraudulently manipulated to prevent correct information from being displayed. The fact that there is a possibility may be confirmed on a display or presentation device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. In addition, settings may be changed during a bonus, advantageous section, or bonus carryover, resulting in the bonus or advantageous section being forcibly terminated, the carryover bonus being cleared, advantageous section ratio, bonus payout ratio, etc. The sub-control unit 91 records the history of detecting that there is a possibility of unauthorized operation so that correct information is not displayed as the consecutive combination payout ratio, instruction-inclusive accessory payout ratio, etc., and performs the predetermined operation. You may also be able to check these histories with .

[About the display test pattern of the gaming machine information display]
In the display monitor output data selection process, each process of Sz447 to Sz463 is performed, so that the gaming machine information display 50 sequentially displays the display based on the display test pattern, as shown in FIG. Each segment from the 1st segment to the 8th segment of the 7-segment display 50a constituting the gaming machine information display 50 is arranged in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, 1st segment → 2nd segment → 3rd segment → 4th segment) → 5th segment → 6th segment → 7th segment → 8th segment → 1st segment, and so on). By sequentially controlling each segment to turn on, it is possible to visually check whether the game machine information display 50 is malfunctioning, for example, whether there are any segments that are not lit.

[About notification when section display LED is lit]
The section display LED lighting notification performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described based on FIGS. 87 and 88.

As described above, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 19 to be lit when starting control of the AT after controlling to the advantageous section to display a section indicating that the control is being carried out to the advantageous section. Is possible. Then, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed, and the power supply is restarted in the normal procedure, the main control section 41 displays the section. It is now back to the state it was in.

In addition, the main control unit 41 sends a command to the sub-control unit 91 that can specify that the section is to be displayed when starting the section display in conjunction with starting control of the AT after controlling to the advantageous section. and send. Furthermore, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the state before the power supply is stopped, when restarting the section display, the sub-control unit 91 sends a command that can specify that the section display is to be performed. Send to.

On the other hand, when the sub-control unit 91 detects that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, the sub-control unit 91 transmits the time specified based on the RTC (real-time clock) included in the sub-control unit 91. The information is stored in the storage means included in the computer 91. Further, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed and it is specified that the section display is to be performed on the main control section 41 side based on a command from the main control section 41, the RTC is referred to. The current time is specified, the current time is compared with the time stored in the storage means when the power supply was stopped, and the operation to the slot machine 1 is performed across a specific time (4:00 a.m. in this embodiment). Determine whether power supply has been resumed. If it is determined that the power supply to the slot machine 1 has been resumed across a specific time (4:00 a.m. in this embodiment), the main control unit 41 displays a section display. Notification is made using the liquid crystal display 51 and the performance LED 57 when the section display LED is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the section display LED lighting notification, a notification image that indicates that the section display LED 19 is controlled to be lit by the main control unit 41 (suggesting that the section display LED 19 is in the lit state) is displayed. An image A of characters (“section display LED lit”), an image B indicating the position of the section display LED 19 in the slot machine 1, and an image C of a predetermined character are displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the front of the slot machine 1 is displayed. By controlling the performance LED 57 installed on the player's side of the door 1b to light up in a lighting mode different from that during normal gaming, it is notified that the lighting state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section, starts displaying the section when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and controls the section display LED 19 to turn on. to notify that the vehicle is being controlled in an advantageous section. At this time, the sub-control unit 91 does not notify that the section display LED is on. In this state, if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and then the power supply to the slot machine 1 is resumed in a normal procedure in which the section display LED extinguishing operation described below is not performed, the main control unit 41 controls the section display LED 19 to be lit. In contrast, the sub-control unit 91 performs control to notify that the section display LED is on. Then, after starting the section display LED lighting notification, when a predetermined specific period elapses, or when a game start operation is performed before the specified period elapses, the section display LED lighting notification is started. Control to terminate.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88(b), when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the main control unit 41 is displaying the section, and then the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. Then, by performing an operation to turn off the section display LED, the main control section 41 initializes the information regarding the advantageous section and returns to a state in which the game can be played. As a result, the process is restored without displaying the section and without controlling the section display LED 19 to be lit. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not display the section, it does not transmit to the sub-control section 91 a command that can specify that the section is to be displayed. In contrast, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 does not receive a command that can specify that the section display is to be performed from the main control section 41, so that the section display LED is turned on. Control is performed so that control of the performance is restarted without performing an intermediate notification.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88(c), even when the main control section 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section, if a predetermined starting condition is not satisfied, the main control section 41 does not display the section. In this state, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and then the power supply is restarted, the section display will not be performed until a predetermined start condition is satisfied. At this time, since the main control unit 41 does not display the section, it does not transmit to the sub-control section 91 a command that can specify that the section is to be displayed. In contrast, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the sub-control unit 91 does not receive a command that can specify that the section display is to be performed from the main control section 41, so that the section display LED is turned on. Control is performed so that control of the performance is restarted without performing an intermediate notification.

Note that although the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment has a configuration that includes an RTC (real-time clock) and is capable of specifying time, the sub-control unit 91 may have a configuration that does not include an RTC. In a configuration in which the sub-control unit 91 does not include an RTC, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and it is specified that the main control unit 41 side displays the section, the section display is always performed. A configuration may also be used in which notification is made while the LED is on.

In this way, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment notifies that the section display LED is on for a certain period of time after power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and after the certain period of time has elapsed, the sub-control section 91 controls the section display LED to turn on. It is designed to end the medium notification. As a result, if the state returns to the state in which the section display is being performed when power supply starts, a notification will be sent to indicate that the section display LED is lit, so when the game store opens, etc. This allows the user to recognize that the section display is being performed. On the other hand, since the section display LED lighting notification ends after a certain period of time, it is possible that the section display LED lighting notification continues after the gaming parlor is opened, giving players a sense of discomfort. It can be prevented.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment operates at a specific time outside the game parlor business hours (this embodiment In the example, if the power supply starts after 4:00 a.m. and the state returns to the state where the section display is being performed, the section display LED is lit to indicate that the state has returned to the state where the section display is being performed. While the notification is made using the liquid crystal display 51, if the power supply is started before a specific time has passed and the state where the section display is performed is restored, the notification is not made while the section display LED is lit. It has become. Thereby, even if a power outage occurs temporarily during business hours, it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to terminate the section display LED lighting notification without waiting for a certain period of time to elapse when the game is started while the section display LED lighting notification is being performed. There is. Thereby, even if a certain period of time has not elapsed after starting the notification that the section display LED is on, it is possible to end the section display LED lighting notification by starting the game.

In the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment, after the power supply is stopped in the interval before the start of AT in which the interval display is not performed on the main control unit 41 side, the power supply is started and the interval display is not performed. When the state is restored, notification is not performed while the section display LED is lit. As a result, only when the control returns to the advantageous section and the section display is performed, the clerk at the game store can be made aware that the store will open with the section display being displayed. can.

[Effect 1]
In a conventional gaming machine, a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored are respectively allocated to the ROM separately. There is a composition. In such a configuration, if the gaming program calls the non-gaming program every time a process included in the non-gaming program is executed, the gaming program and the non-gaming program will be switched back and forth many times. , the problem arises that processing becomes complicated.

In contrast, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of this embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area in which a program is stored, and a main control section 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage areas of the ROM 41b include a game program area where game programs related to the progress of the game are stored, and a non-game program area where programs called by the game program and non-game programs not related to the progress of the game are stored. By one call from the timer interrupt processing, which is a gaming program, to the time monitoring update processing, which is a non-gaming program, multiple types of abnormality determinations can be made in the non-gaming program (determination of abnormalities related to medal payout and abnormality related to medal insertion). This is a configuration that performs abnormality determination. In such a configuration, the game program area of the ROM 41b stores game programs related to the progress of the game, and the non-gaming area of the ROM 41b stores a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In a configuration in which the program area and the non-gaming program are allocated separately, multiple types of abnormality determinations are made in the non-gaming program by one call of the non-gaming program from the gaming program. It can be reduced as much as possible.

In this embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, two types of abnormalities are determined: abnormality determination regarding medal payout and abnormality determination regarding medal insertion. However, in a non-gaming program that is called by a single call from a gaming program, a configuration may be adopted in which three or more types of abnormalities are determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program, and the timer interrupt processing included in the non-gaming program is changed to the time monitoring update processing that is included in the non-gaming program and determines multiple types of abnormalities. Although this is a calling configuration, processing included in the gaming program other than the timer interrupt processing may be applied as a gaming program that calls a non-gaming program that determines a plurality of types of abnormalities.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, the first subroutine, ie, the sensor monitoring process, is performed to determine an abnormality regarding the payout of medals. In other words, one subroutine determines multiple types of abnormalities, but the non-gaming program called by the gaming program is composed of multiple subroutines, and one type of abnormality is determined for each subroutine. For example, in the time monitoring update process, a first subroutine that determines an abnormality regarding the payout of medals and a second subroutine that determines an abnormality regarding the insertion of medals are performed. A configuration may also be used in which abnormality is determined. In such a configuration, program management is facilitated by setting processes for performing multiple types of abnormality determination as subroutines for each type of abnormality determination.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a gaming program area where gaming programs are stored and a non-gaming program area where non-gaming programs are stored, and a main controller that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. When calling time monitoring update processing, which is a non-gaming program, from timer interrupt processing, which is a gaming program, it saves the register and stack pointer SP used in the gaming program, and also saves the register and stack pointer SP used in the gaming program. The configuration is such that the saved registers and stack pointer SP are restored when returning from the gaming program to the gaming program. With such a configuration, when calling a non-gaming program from a gaming program, it is possible to prevent data in the register and stack pointer SP used in the gaming program from being damaged.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a gaming program area where gaming programs are stored and a non-gaming program area where non-gaming programs are stored, and a main controller that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. 41, and a RAM 41c having a storage area that can temporarily store data, and the RAM 41c includes a gaming RAM area in which gaming data used by gaming programs is stored in a readable and writable manner, and a gaming RAM area used by non-gaming programs. A non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data is readably stored, and the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program is called once from the timer interrupt process included in the gaming program. In the process, as a plurality of types of abnormality determinations, abnormality determination regarding medal payout and abnormality determination regarding medal insertion are performed, and sensor error reference data that can identify the result of the abnormality determination is stored in a non-gaming RAM area; When returning from time monitoring update processing to timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing that is the gaming program is configured to refer to sensor error reference data stored in the non-gaming RAM storage area without performing any other processing. be. In such a configuration, since the result of abnormality determination by the non-gaming program is referred to before performing other processing, the result of abnormality determination can be quickly reflected in the processing performed by the gaming program. In addition, after returning to the gaming program from a non-gaming program that performs abnormality determination, the sensor error reference data is referenced before any other processing is performed, so the error flag that reflects the latest sensor error reference data is used to processing can be performed.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a gaming program area where gaming programs are stored and a non-gaming program area where non-gaming programs are stored, and a main controller that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. By calling the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program once from the timer interrupt process included in the gaming program, medals are paid out as a plurality of types of abnormality determination in the time monitoring update process. In the time monitoring update process, even if an abnormality is determined regarding the payout of medals, the determination of an abnormality regarding the payout of medals is performed. The configuration is such that a determination of abnormality regarding the insertion of medals is subsequently performed. In such a configuration, in the time monitoring update process which is a non-game program called from the timer interrupt process which is a game program, regardless of whether an abnormality is determined regarding medal payout or not, other It is also possible to determine the type of abnormality related to the insertion of medals.

In this embodiment, in the time monitoring update process included in the non-game program called from the timer interrupt process included in the game program, two types of abnormalities are determined: abnormality determination regarding medal payout and abnormality determination regarding medal insertion. However, in a non-gaming program that is called by a single call from a gaming program, it may be configured to determine two or more types of abnormalities, and in such a configuration, the non-gaming program Even if one type of abnormality is determined among the multiple types of abnormality determinations performed in the process, the other types of abnormality determinations are continued, so that it is possible to determine whether any of the types of abnormality has been determined. Regardless, abnormality determination can be made for other types of abnormalities as well.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by calling the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program once from the timer interrupt process included in the gaming program, multiple types of abnormality determinations are made in the time monitoring update process. This configuration is configured to determine an abnormality regarding the payout of medals as a medium and an abnormality regarding the insertion of medals. With such a configuration, abnormality determination regarding the payout of medals as game media and abnormality determination regarding the insertion of medals can be performed by calling the non-gaming program once.

The slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of this embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area in which programs are stored, and a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The area includes a game program area where a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a non-game program area where a non-game program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game is stored. By calling a non-gaming program (time monitoring update processing) once from a gaming program (timer interrupt processing), abnormality determination (determination of an abnormality regarding the payout of medals in sensor monitoring processing, abnormality regarding the insertion of medals) in the non-gaming program is performed. judgment), output control of the test signal output to the test device connected to the slot machine 1 (test signal output processing), and a predetermined display (gaming machine information display 50) to display the winning ratio, which is the state based on the gaming history. It is configured to perform a plurality of controls including display control (rotation ratio monitor display data selection process) to display on the screen. In such a configuration, the game program area of the ROM 41b stores game programs related to the progress of the game, and the non-gaming area of the ROM 41b stores a non-game program that is called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In a configuration in which a program area and a program area are separately allocated, one call of a non-gaming program from a gaming program allows the non-gaming program to determine abnormality, control the output of test signals, and determine the winning ratio, which is a state based on the gaming history. Since a plurality of controls including display control for displaying on a predetermined display device are performed, the back and forth between gaming programs and non-gaming programs can be reduced as much as possible.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs abnormality determination ( (determination of abnormalities related to the payout of medals in sensor monitoring processing, determination of abnormalities related to insertion of medals), output control of test signals output to the test device (test signal output processing), and determination of the winning ratio that is the state based on the gaming history. The structure is configured to perform display control to display on a predetermined display (rot ratio monitor display data selection process) and control to update the timer (medal passing time timer update process), but at least two types can be displayed by calling a non-gaming program once. A configuration that performs the above control may also be used, such as a configuration that performs abnormality determination and test signal output control by one call of a non-gaming program from a gaming program, and a display that displays abnormality determination and winning ratio on a predetermined display. A configuration that performs control, a configuration that performs output control of a test signal, a display control that displays the winning ratio on a predetermined display, a configuration that performs abnormality determination and control that updates a timer, etc. may be used. Even with these configurations, it is possible to reduce the back and forth between gaming programs and non-gaming programs as much as possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines an abnormality in the non-gaming program (time monitoring update processing) by calling the non-gaming program (time monitoring update processing) once from the gaming program (timer interrupt processing), and outputs it to the testing device. It is configured to perform multiple controls, including output control of test signals and display control to display the winning ratio, which is a state based on the gaming history, on a predetermined display. This is a configuration that performs abnormality determination regarding abnormality determination and determination of abnormality regarding medal insertion), but it may be configured to perform one type of abnormality determination in abnormality determination, or it may be configured to perform multiple types of abnormality determination of three or more types. . Even with such a configuration, the back and forth between gaming programs and non-gaming programs can be reduced as much as possible.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a gaming program area where gaming programs are stored and a non-gaming program area where non-gaming programs are stored, and a main controller that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The unit 41 is configured to include an abnormality judgment (an abnormality regarding medal payout) in the time monitoring update process by one call from the timer interrupt process included in the gaming program to the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program. It is configured to perform a sensor monitoring process, which is a process for performing judgment (determination of abnormality regarding medal insertion), and a test signal output process, which is a process to control the output of the test signal output to the test device, and the time monitoring update process. In this configuration, sensor monitoring processing and test signal output processing are each called as subroutines. In such a configuration, since the process of determining an abnormality and the process of controlling the output of an external output signal to be output to an external device are each set as subroutines, program management becomes easy.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment determines an abnormality in the non-gaming program (e.g., determines an abnormality regarding medal payout, determines an abnormality regarding medal payout, It is configured to perform sensor monitoring processing, which is processing for determining abnormalities related to the input of data, and test signal output processing, which is processing for controlling output of test signals. In this case, the output state of the test signal is set using an output port (in this embodiment, output port 6) in which ON data and OFF data are not set, that is, an output port that is not used in the processing of the game program. . In such a configuration, the test signal output processing in the non-gaming program can prevent a signal whose output state is controlled by the processing of the gaming program from being unintentionally controlled to the output state.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a gaming program area where gaming programs are stored and a non-gaming program area where non-gaming programs are stored, and a main controller that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The unit 41 is configured to include an abnormality judgment (an abnormality regarding medal payout) in the time monitoring update process by one call from the timer interrupt process included in the gaming program to the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program. A display monitor that performs display control to display on a predetermined display (gaming machine information display 50) a sensor monitoring process that is a process that performs determination (determination of abnormality regarding insertion of medals), and a winning ratio that is a state based on the gaming history. The sensor monitoring process and the display monitor data selection process are each called as a subroutine in the time monitoring update process. In such a configuration, the process for determining abnormality and the process for controlling the display of win ratios are each set as subroutines, making it easy to manage the program.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a ROM 41b having a gaming program area where gaming programs are stored and a non-gaming program area where non-gaming programs are stored, and a main controller that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. 41, and is connected to the slot machine 1 in the time monitoring update process by one call from the timer interrupt process included in the gaming program to the time monitoring update process included in the non-gaming program. A display monitor that performs test signal output processing, which is a process that controls the output of test signals output to the computer, and display control that displays the win ratio, which is a state based on the gaming history, on a predetermined display (gaming machine information display 50). In the time monitoring update process, test signal output processing and display monitor data selection processing are each called as subroutines. In such a configuration, the process of controlling the output of the test signal and the process of controlling the display of the win ratio are each set as subroutines, so that program management becomes easy.

In conventional gaming machines, a gaming program area in which gaming programs related to the progress of the game are stored and a non-gaming program area in which non-gaming programs not related to the progressing of the game are stored are separately allocated to the ROM. There is a composition. In such a configuration, the storage area for gaming data used in the gaming program and the storage area for non-gaming data used in the non-gaming program are also allocated to separate areas, but the non-gaming data is referenced in the gaming program. If the gaming program were to refer to data in the non-gaming data area every time a process is executed, the gaming program would have to access both the gaming data area and the non-gaming data area many times, making the process complicated. The problem arises that

In contrast, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of this embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing programs, a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, and a data The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a program called by the game program. The storage area of the RAM 41c includes a gaming RAM area where gaming data used by gaming programs is stored in a readable and writable manner, and a non-gaming program area where non-gaming programs that are not related to progress are stored. It includes a non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data to be used is stored in a readable manner, and in sensor monitoring processing of time monitoring update processing which is a non-gaming program, abnormality determination regarding medal payout and medal insertion is performed as an abnormality determination. A timer which is a gaming program that judges abnormalities, updates sensor error reference data as first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area based on the results of these abnormality judgments, and calls time monitoring update processing. In the interrupt processing (main), when returning to the gaming program from the time monitoring update processing, the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area is referred to, and the processing is executed in the gaming RAM area based on the first abnormal data. The sensor error flag can be updated as the second abnormality data stored, and in the main processing of the game program to be performed after that, the second abnormality data stored in the game RAM area is referred to to control the progress of the game. This configuration determines whether or not to transition to an error state where it is disabled.

In such a configuration, there is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-gaming program that is a program called by the game program and not related to the progress of the game is stored, are separately allocated, and a gaming RAM area in which gaming data used by gaming programs is stored in a readable and writable manner and a non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data used by non-gaming programs are stored in a readable manner are separate. In the gaming program, when returning from the non-gaming program to the gaming program, the gaming program refers to the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming data area and executes the game based on the first abnormal data. The second abnormal data stored in the data area is updated, and the gaming program further refers to the second abnormal data stored in the gaming data area to transition to an error state that disables the progress of the game. Therefore, by referring to the first abnormal data in the non-gaming data area and updating the second abnormal data in the gaming data area, abnormality determination can be made in the game program such as the main processing that will be performed thereafter. Since it is possible to refer to the abnormality determination result by the non-gaming program without accessing the first abnormal data in the non-gaming data area many times each time related processing is performed, the non-gaming data area can be accessed from the gaming program. The frequency of referencing can be reduced as much as possible.

When the slot machine 1 of this embodiment returns from the time monitoring update process, which is a non-gaming program, to the timer interrupt process, which is a gaming program, the medal-related error is referenced as the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area. The sensor error flag can be updated as second abnormal data stored in the gaming RAM area based on the first abnormal data by referring to the data, and when returning from a non-gaming program to a gaming program, Referring to the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area, the OR of the first abnormal data and the sensor error flag stored in the gaming RAM area is calculated, and the sensor is activated according to the calculation result. By updating the error flag, when the occurrence of an abnormality is identified from the first abnormal data, the second abnormal data is updated, and when the occurrence of an abnormality is not identified from the first abnormal data, the second abnormal data is updated. This is a configuration that does not update data. In such a configuration, when the occurrence of an abnormality is identified from the first abnormal data, the second abnormal data is updated, and when the occurrence of an abnormality is not identified from the first abnormal data, the second abnormal data is not updated. Therefore, even if the abnormality is resolved and the first abnormal data is updated in the non-gaming program after an abnormality occurs, the occurrence of the abnormality will not be detected from the second abnormal data until the occurrence of the abnormality is confirmed on the gaming program side. can be identified.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment performs an abnormality determination in the time monitoring update process, which is a non-gaming program called by the timer interrupt process (main), which is a gaming program, and detects a first abnormality in which the result of the abnormality determination can be identified. The configuration is such that medal-related error reference data is stored in the non-gaming RAM area as data, and the timer interrupt processing (main), which is a gaming program, is used when returning to the gaming program from the time monitoring update processing, which is a non-gaming program. The medal-related error reference data is referred to as the first abnormal data stored in the non-gaming RAM area without performing the above processing, and the second abnormal data stored in the gaming RAM area is generated based on the first abnormal data. This configuration allows the sensor error flag to be updated as follows. In such a configuration, since the result of abnormality determination by the non-gaming program is referred to before performing other processing, the result of abnormality determination can be quickly reflected in the processing performed by the gaming program. In addition, in such a configuration, after the time monitoring update process is performed, it is possible that another process will perform a process using the second abnormal data that has not been updated based on the first abnormal data. It can be prevented.

In conventional gaming machines, a gaming program area in which gaming programs related to the progress of the game are stored and a non-gaming program area in which non-gaming programs not related to the progressing of the game are stored are separately allocated to the ROM. There is a composition. In such a configuration, when a common output port is used for signal output by a gaming program and signal output by a non-gaming program, the output data of the signal set by the non-gaming program may remain. Therefore, there is a possibility that the signal may be output as an output signal by the game program.

In contrast, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of this embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing programs, a main control unit 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b, and a The storage area of the ROM 41b is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, and a program called by the game program. The output ports 0 to 9 contain output data in the gaming program, such as control signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R and control signals for the flow path switching solenoid 30. Control signals, control signals for the credit display 11, commands to the sub-control unit 91, etc. are set, and output data is not set at the first output port (output ports 0 to 5, 7 to 7) in non-gaming programs. 9), and a second output port (output port 6) to which output data, such as a test signal, etc. is set in a non-gaming program, but no output data is set in a gaming program; Initialization of the port and the second output port is performed from the start-up setting process and power-off process (main) of the gaming program. In such a configuration, there is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program that is a program called by the game program and not related to the progress of the game is stored, In a configuration in which the output data is set separately in the gaming program and the output data is not set in the non-gaming program, there is a first output port in which the output data is set in the non-gaming program and the gaming program Since the system is equipped with a second output port and a second output port to which no output data is set, the output data of the signal set by the non-gaming program may remain, and the output data may not be output as the output signal by the gaming program. In addition, the independence of the control by the gaming program and the control by the non-gaming program can be ensured, and the initialization of the first output port and the second output port can be performed from the gaming program. Control when initializing the output port can be simplified.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has first output ports (output ports 0 to 5, 7 to 9) to which output data is set in a gaming program but not set in a non-gaming program; The configuration includes a second output port (output port 6) in which output data is set in the gaming program, and output data is not set in the gaming program, and the gaming program is configured as an initialization condition for the slot machine. The configuration is such that the first output port and the second output port are initialized when it is established that power supply to the first output port 1 has started and that a power outage has been detected. With such a configuration, control when the initialization condition is satisfied can be simplified.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment has first output ports (output ports 0 to 5, 7 to 9) to which output data is set in a gaming program but not set in a non-gaming program; A configuration that includes a second output port (output port 6) in which output data is set in the game program and no output data is set in the game program, and a configuration that outputs a test signal from the second output port. It is. In such a configuration, the capacity of the gaming program can be reduced by performing control in the non-gaming program to output test signals that are not essential for proceeding with the game.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area that can temporarily store data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a gaming RAM area in which gaming data used by gaming programs is stored in a readable and writable manner. and a non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data used by the non-gaming program is stored in a readable manner. The non-gaming RAM area is a non-gaming program, and is configured to be initialized by a non-gaming RAM area initialization process called from the initial setting process. In such a configuration, it is possible for the gaming program and the non-gaming program to mutually refer to gaming data and non-gaming data, but by making it impossible to rewrite each other including initialization, the gaming program It is possible to ensure the independence of control by the non-gaming program and control by the non-gaming program.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area that can temporarily store data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a gaming RAM area in which gaming data used by gaming programs is stored in a readable and writable manner. and a non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data used by non-gaming programs are readably stored. When a setting change process is performed, the gaming RAM area is This is a configuration in which the non-gaming RAM area is not initialized while the non-gaming RAM area is initialized. In such a configuration, even if a setting change process that involves initialization of the gaming RAM area is performed, the non-gaming RAM area is not initialized, so the storage contents stored in the non-gaming RAM area, e.g. It is possible to prevent the data and the like for displaying the winning ratio, which is a state based on the gaming history, on a predetermined display from being initialized.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a RAM 41c having a storage area that can temporarily store data, and the storage area of the RAM 41c is a gaming RAM area in which gaming data used by gaming programs is stored in a readable and writable manner. and a non-gaming RAM area in which non-gaming data used by the non-gaming program is stored in a readable manner. It is configured to initialize all areas of the RAM 41c by determining an abnormality and performing gaming RAM area initialization processing and non-gaming RAM area initialization processing when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the storage contents of the RAM 41c. . With such a configuration, the non-gaming RAM area of the RAM 41c can be initialized when there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM 41c and there is a risk that the gaming control will not be performed normally. In addition, if there is an abnormality in the content stored in the RAM 41c, the non-gaming RAM area is initialized, so the content stored in the non-gaming RAM area that is not initialized even if settings are changed, such as gaming It is possible to normalize the data for displaying the win ratio, which is a state based on the history of the game, on a predetermined display, and to ensure the normal operation of processing based on the memory contents stored in the non-gaming RAM area. .

In conventional gaming machines, a gaming program area in which gaming programs related to the progress of the game are stored and a non-gaming program area in which non-gaming programs not related to the progressing of the game are stored are separately allocated to the ROM. There is a composition. In such a configuration, the non-gaming program detects irregularities in the passing of medals, but the gaming program only determines the passage of inserted medals, so the non-gaming program does not operate normally. In such cases, there is a risk that the medal may be determined to have passed even if fraud has been committed.

In contrast, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of this embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing programs, and a main control section 41 that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage areas of the ROM 41b include a game program area where game programs related to the progress of the game are stored, and a non-game program area where programs called by the game program and non-game programs not related to the progress of the game are stored. The first condition in the game program is that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, that is, the input data has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. When this is established, a first detection process (medal insertion signal processing) is performed to detect the passage of a medal, which is a game medium, and a second condition is set in the non-gaming program based on the detection state of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c. The passage of a medal, which is a game medium, is detected when it is established that the medal input signal state transition data specified by is normal and the confirmed data of the input medal sensor 31b or 31c has changed from an ON state to an OFF state. A second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed, and in the game program, when the passage of the game medium is detected in both the first detection process and the second detection process, the game medium to be added to the bet number and credits passes. This is a configuration that determines what has been done.

In such a configuration, there is a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game program area in which a non-game program that is a program called by the game program and not related to the progress of the game is stored, In a configuration in which a first detection process detects passage of a gaming medium when a first condition is satisfied in a gaming program, and a second detection process that detects passage of a gaming medium when a second condition is satisfied in a non-gaming program. Since the passage of the game medium is determined when the passage of the game medium is detected in both of the second detection processes, the passage of the game medium can be appropriately determined without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first condition is that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, so that the medals, which are the game media, are A first detection process (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting passage is performed, and a second condition is that the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection state of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and This is a configuration in which a second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed to detect passage of a medal, which is a game medium, when the confirmed data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c changes from an ON state to an OFF state. The second condition is a configuration that is established based on the state transition of the medal insertion signal that includes more information than the first condition. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate fraud related to the passage of game media without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, in the medal sensor check process which is a non-gaming program, the second condition is that the medal input signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal. , and when the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c changes from the ON state to the OFF state, a second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed to detect the passage of the medal, which is the game medium. This configuration is such that when passage of the game medium is not normally detected in the second detection process, it is determined to be abnormal and medal-related error reference data (E5) is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to detect fraud related to passage of game media without increasing the capacity of the game program.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first condition is that the confirmed data of the inserted medal sensor 31b or 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, so that the medals, which are the game media, are A first detection process (medal insertion signal processing) for detecting passage is performed, and a second condition is that the medal insertion signal state transition data specified based on the detection state of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and This is a configuration in which a second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed to detect passage of a medal, which is a game medium, when the confirmed data of the medal sensor 31b or 31c changes from an ON state to an OFF state. In the first detection process and the second detection process, the common inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c are used to detect passage of game media. In such a configuration, since the passage of gaming media is detected by both the gaming program and the non-gaming program using a common sensor, it is possible to appropriately determine the passing of gaming media without increasing the capacity of the gaming program. can.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment can acquire the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c by a timer interrupt process (main) that executes regular processing at regular intervals, and as a first condition, the inserted medal sensors 31b Alternatively, when the confirmed data of 31c is in the ON state and the input data is in the OFF state, a first detection process (medal input signal process) is performed to detect passage of a medal as a game medium, and Two conditions are that the medal input signal state transition data specified based on the detection states of the input medal sensors 31a to 31c is normal, and that the confirmed data of the input medal sensor 31b or 31c changes from an ON state to an OFF state. The configuration is such that a second detection process (medal sensor check process) is performed to detect the passing of a medal, which is a game medium, when The configuration is such that the passage of the game medium is detected using the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired by the input medal sensors 31a to 31c. In such a configuration, the detection states of the inserted medal sensors 31a to 31c acquired in the same timer interrupt processing (main) are used to detect the passage of gaming media in both the gaming program and the non-gaming program. The passage of game media can be appropriately determined without increasing the capacity.

The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment awards a predetermined number of medals when a small prize is won, controls advantageously for the player when a special prize is won, and controls for a predetermined specific period, for example, the past 6000 games. , counting the total cumulative number of medals awarded during the period from when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason up to the present, or by counting the total cumulative number of medals awarded during the period from when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized for some reason It is possible to count the number of paid-out tokens, which is the total number of medals awarded during the period (RB), and the number of paid-out tokens calculated by the number of tokens paid out is calculated as a percentage of the total number of tokens paid out. The configuration is capable of calculating a certain accessory payout ratio and displaying the calculated accessory payout ratio in a specifiable manner on the gaming machine information display 50, and when a specific period (in this example, 6000 games) is reached. It has multiple cumulative total buffers 1 to 3 with different timings, and each time a specific period is reached, the accessory payout ratio is calculated using the count value of the corresponding counter, and from the start of counting using cumulative buffers 1 to 3. The display of the accessory payout ratio is configured to blink during the period until the specific period is reached for the first time. With such a configuration, it can be recognized that the accessory payout ratios displayed on the credit display 11 and the game auxiliary display 12 are not normal values. In addition, since there are multiple cumulative buffers 1 to 3 that reach the specific period at different times, once the first cumulative buffer reaches the specific period, the cumulative buffer will not reach the next specific period. The accessory payout ratio can be updated to the latest information every time another cumulative buffer reaches a specific period without waiting.

[Effect 2]
In a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming program area where gaming programs related to the progress of the game are stored, and a non-gaming program area where non-gaming programs that are programs called by the gaming program and are not related to the progress of the game are stored. It has been proposed that a non-gaming program is assigned separately, and when a non-gaming program is executed, the corresponding non-gaming program is called from the gaming program. In such a configuration, when a non-gaming program is called from a gaming program, register values are saved in the stack area in the non-gaming program to protect them, and are saved when all processing based on the non-gaming program is completed. After restoring the value to the register, it is returned to the gaming program, but since the value of the register after the value has been updated by the instruction executed in connection with the call of the non-gaming program is saved, the gaming program When the non-gaming program is restored, there is a risk that the register may be restored to a different state from when the non-gaming program was called.

In contrast, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of this embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing programs, and a main CPU 41a that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage areas of the ROM 41b include a gaming program area in which gaming programs related to the progress of the game are stored, a non-gaming program area in which non-gaming programs that are programs called by the gaming program and not related to the progress of the game are stored; The main CPU 41a executes processing based on values stored in a plurality of registers, and the values of the plurality of registers are updated by a read instruction LD executed in connection with calling a non-gaming program. It includes a flag register, and processes from the processing included in the gaming program (main processing, medal input signal processing, etc.) to the processing included in the non-gaming program (non-gaming RAM area initialization processing, RT information output processing, winning information output processing, role ratio (monitor data processing, medal sensor processing, etc.), the calling game program saves the value of the flag register to the game stack area of the RAM 41c used by the game program, and the called non-gaming program issues a read command LD. After setting the stack pointer SP used by the non-gaming program using , the non-gaming program saves the values of all the plurality of registers to the non-gaming stack area. In such a configuration, the RAM 41c has a gaming program area in which gaming programs related to the progress of the game are stored, and a non-gaming program area in which non-gaming programs that are called by the gaming program and are not related to the progress of the game are stored. In a configuration in which the areas and are separately allocated, when calling a non-gaming program from the gaming program, the value of the flag register whose value is updated by executing the read instruction LD is saved to the gaming stack area of the RAM 41c used by the gaming program. After the non-gaming program uses the read command LD to set the stack pointer SP used by the non-gaming program, the values of all registers are saved to the non-gaming stack area of the RAM 41c, so the value of the flag register is saved to the gaming stack area. Non-gaming programs can be executed while being evacuated and protected.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a is configured to save the value of the flag register to the game stack area using the second save instruction (PUSH) by the game program when calling a non-game program from the game program. When a non-gaming program is called from a gaming program, the value of the flag register may be saved in a predetermined area other than the gaming stack area (for example, a gaming RAM area other than the gaming stack area, a back flag register, etc.). Furthermore, when calling a non-gaming program from a gaming program, the gaming program may be configured to save the values of a plurality of registers including at least a flag register.

The main CPU 41a of this embodiment issues a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to save the values of all the registers to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP, and a first save instruction (PUSH ALL) to save the values of all the registers to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by the stack pointer SP. It is possible to execute multiple instructions including a second save instruction (PUSH AF) that saves the value to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c indicated by This configuration has a smaller program capacity than the first save instruction that saves the value of . In such a configuration, the gaming program uses the second save instruction to save the value of the flag register, and the non-gaming program uses the first save instruction to save the values of all the registers, thereby saving the gaming program. Capacity can be reduced.

The main CPU 41a of this embodiment is capable of executing a read instruction LD to read data stored in a specified area to another specified area, and uses the read instruction LD to set the stack pointer SP. It is possible to read out and store the indicated value in a specified area of the RAM 41c, read out the value stored in the specified area of the RAM 41c, and set it as the value indicated by the stack pointer SP, and the read instruction LD The main CPU 41a updates the value of the second zero flag of the flag register by executing , and when calling a non-gaming program from the gaming program, the main CPU 41a updates the value of the flag register including the second zero flag by the gaming program into the RAM 41c. Among the values stored in the flag register, the value of the second zero flag that is updated by executing the read instruction LD is a value that is not used in the game program to determine whether the program should proceed. This is the configuration. In such a configuration, the value of the second zero flag updated by executing the read instruction LD is a value that is not used for determination by the gaming program, but the second zero flag is included when calling the non-gaming program. By saving and protecting the value of the flag register, it is possible to reliably prevent unintended operations from being performed when the gaming program returns from the non-gaming program.

The main CPU 41a of this embodiment is included in the game program, and includes a main process that performs basic processing, and a timer interrupt process (main) that can interrupt and perform processing during the execution of the main process. The value of the flag register can be executed when the main process included in the game program calls the process included in the non-gaming program (winning information output process, data process for monitoring role ratio, medal sensor process, etc.). After saving to the game stack area of the RAM 41c, the configuration is such that interrupts of the timer interrupt processing (main) are prohibited. With such a configuration, the period during which interrupts are prohibited when calling a non-gaming program can be made as short as possible. Further, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed due to the timer interrupt processing (main) being performed after the value of the flag register is saved.

In this embodiment, when calling the process included in the non-game program from the main process included in the game program, the main CPU 41a saves the value of the flag register to the game stack area, and then executes the timer interrupt process (main). However, when the main CPU 41a calls the processing included in the non-gaming program from the main processing included in the gaming program, before saving the value of the flag register to the gaming stack area of the RAM 41c. , a configuration may be adopted in which interrupts of the timer interrupt processing (main) are prohibited. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the value of the flag register from being changed due to the timer interrupt processing (main) being performed after the value of the flag register is saved in the game stack area.

In a conventional gaming machine, there is a gaming program area where gaming programs related to the progress of the game are stored, and a non-gaming program area where non-gaming programs that are programs called by the gaming program and are not related to the progress of the game are stored. It has been proposed that a non-gaming program is assigned separately, and when a non-gaming program is executed, the corresponding non-gaming program is called from the gaming program. In such a configuration, when calling a non-gaming program from a gaming program, timer interrupts are prohibited in advance, and when all processing based on the non-gaming program is completed and the game program is returned to, the prohibition of timer interrupts is canceled. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a timer interrupt from occurring during the execution of a non-gaming program, but there is a risk that the execution of the timer interrupt may be delayed due to the timer interrupt being prohibited as the non-gaming program is being executed. .

In contrast, the slot machine 1, which is the gaming machine of this embodiment, includes a ROM 41b having a storage area capable of storing programs, and a main CPU 41a that performs control based on the program stored in the ROM 41b. The storage areas of the ROM 41b include a gaming program area in which gaming programs related to the progress of the game are stored, a non-gaming program area in which non-gaming programs that are programs called by the gaming program and not related to the progress of the game are stored; The main CPU 41a performs basic processing (main processing, game start waiting processing included in the main processing, medal insertion signal processing, etc.) and when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during the execution of the basic processing is satisfied. A timer interrupt process (main) that can be executed by interrupting the basic process, and a timer interrupt process (main) that can be executed by interrupting the basic process. When calling the processes included in the program (winning information output processing, medal sensor processing, data processing for monitoring role ratio), timer interrupts are prohibited while non-gaming programs are being executed, and non-gaming programs are called from gaming programs. Before performing a series of processes including processing, execute the interrupt one-time wait process that waits until the interrupt condition is met and the timer interrupt process (main) is executed, and then the timer interrupt process (main) is executed. The configuration is such that the non-gaming program is later called by performing a series of processes including the process of calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program. In such a configuration, in the RAM 41c included in the main control unit 41, there is a gaming program area in which gaming programs related to the progress of the game are stored, and a non-gaming program that is called by the gaming program and is not related to the progress of the game. In a configuration where a non-gaming program area to be stored is allocated separately, timer interrupt processing (main) is prohibited when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, and before calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, Since the non-gaming program is called after the one-interrupt wait processing and the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, the non-gaming program is called from the gaming program when there is sufficient time until the next interrupt condition is met. A series of processes including the process of calling a program are performed, and a non-gaming program is called and executed.As the non-gaming program is executed, interrupts are prohibited, and the execution of the timer interrupt process (main) is disabled. This can prevent delays.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a calls the medal sensor process included in a non-gaming program from the medal input signal process that is a part of the main process included in the game program, or when calling the RT information output process from the main process. When calling a non-gaming program from a gaming program, it performs one-time interrupt waiting processing, and after the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, the non-gaming program is called, and the one-interrupt waiting processing is performed. The non-gaming program is called after multiple processes included in the gaming program are performed, but when calling the non-gaming program from the gaming program, one interrupt wait process is performed immediately before calling the non-gaming program. With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the interrupt condition from being satisfied in a state where interrupts are prohibited due to execution of a non-gaming program.

The main CPU 41a of this embodiment has a main process that executes basic processing, and a timer interrupt that interrupts the main process and executes the process when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during the execution of the main process is satisfied. When calling a non-gaming program from the main processing, the non-gaming program is called after executing the interrupt waiting process once, and the main processing included in the gaming program The role ratio monitoring data processing included in the non-gaming program called from the process is a process that requires a predetermined time to execute (a time that may exceed the timing at which the interrupt that triggers the next timer interrupt process (main) occurs). be. With such a configuration, even if the period during which timer interrupts are prohibited due to the execution of a non-gaming program becomes longer, it is possible to prevent the execution of the timer interrupt processing (main) from being delayed.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a main process included in a game program and a timer that can interrupt the main process and execute the process when an interrupt condition that occurs periodically during the execution of the main process are satisfied. Interrupt processing (main), It is possible to call the medal sensor processing included in the non-gaming program, and in the game start waiting processing before calling the medal sensor processing from the medal input signal processing, the one-interrupt waiting processing is executed, and the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed. It is configured to call the medal sensor process after this is performed, and in the timer interrupt process (main), inputs of various switches (for example, start switch 7, etc.) and sensors (for example, input medal sensors 31a to 31c, etc.) The configuration is such that a port input process for updating data is executed, and the medal input status is determined by referring to the input data in the medal sensor process. In such a configuration, the medal sensor process included in the non-gaming program can be executed by referring to the latest input data updated in the timer interrupt process (main).

[Effect 3]
In conventional slot machines, the player is controlled to an advantageous period that can be controlled by AT, etc., which informs the player of the operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and when the number of games controlled in the advantageous period reaches the limit value of 1500 games. There is a system configured to terminate the advantageous section and also initialize information related to the control of the advantageous section, such as the number of remaining AT games.

In a slot machine having such a configuration, no consideration is given to a configuration in which the number of bets can be selected from a plurality of numbers of bets when limiting the advantageous section.

In contrast, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either 3 (first number of bets) or 2 (second number of bets) depending on the player's selection. , the game is configured to be able to be executed both when the number of bets is 3 and when the number of bets is 2, and the main control unit 41 controls the game period to be advantageous for the player. It is possible to control to an advantageous period, and in the ball release control process (first process) performed at the start of the game, when it is specified as an advantageous period based on the value of the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period, Regardless of whether the number of bets is set to 3 or 2, add one game to the advantageous section games counter that counts the number of games in the advantageous section, which is the number of games since the start of the advantageous section. After updating the advantageous section game number counter, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous section game number counter has reached the specified number of games (first specified number), and it is determined whether the specified number of games has been reached. If it is determined that this is the case, the advantageous section data initialization process is performed and the advantageous section is terminated. According to this configuration, the game is executed even when the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is set or the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set according to the player's selection. In a possible configuration, when the main control unit 41 is controlled to be in an advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section is set, regardless of whether the number of bets is 3 or 2. The advantageous period ends when the counter is updated and the number of games in the advantageous period counter value reaches the specified number of games (first specified number), so even if the number of bets of three is selected, the number of bets of two is Even if the slot machine 1 is selected, the advantageous section is limited so that it is not controlled to be an advantageous section for a long period of time exceeding the specified number of games (1500 games), so that the gambling nature of the slot machine 1 can be prevented from increasing excessively.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to perform ball payout control processing at the start of the game, and to update the advantageous section game number counter when it is specified that the game is in the advantageous section. The main control unit 41 may be configured to perform a process of updating the advantageous section game number counter in the process at the end of the game, for example, in the AT state management process after the reel stop control process. Even in a configuration that updates the advantageous section game number counter at the end of the game, the advantageous section game number counter is updated regardless of whether the number of bets is 3 or 2. By ending the advantageous section when the number of games counter value in the advantageous section reaches the specified number of games, the advantageous section is limited so that it will not be controlled by the advantageous section for a long period of time exceeding the predetermined number of games. , it is possible to prevent the gambling nature of the slot machine 1 from increasing excessively.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of outputting an advantageous section signal indicating that the slot machine is in the advantageous section to the outside of the slot machine 1 when controlling the slot machine 41 to be in the advantageous section. The main control unit 41 outputs the advantageous section signal by setting a predetermined value (1) different from the initial value (0) to the output buffer for the advantageous section signal. Based on whether the output buffer value of the medium signal is the initial value or not, it is determined whether the signal is being output during the advantageous period, thereby determining whether or not the signal is being output. In this case, the configuration is such that processing related to advantageous sections is performed in ball payout control processing and the like. According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the advantageous section is in progress based on whether or not the advantageous section signal is being output, so that the processing related to the advantageous section can be performed in a state where the advantageous section signal is being output. We can guarantee that this will be done.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the advantageous section signal is being output based on whether the value of the output buffer for the advantageous section signal is the initial value in the main process or ball payout control process. However, the determination of whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous section is not limited to the determination based on whether or not the advantageous section signal is being output, for example, The determination may be made based on an advantageous section flag indicating that the game is in an advantageous section, an advantageous section game counter that counts the number of games in the advantageous section, or the like.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of setting an advantageous section flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when performing control in an advantageous section, and outputs an advantageous section signal in the ball output control process of the main process. If it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress because the signal is not being output during the advantageous section based on the value of the buffer, are the conditions for starting the advantageous section (that the advantageous section transfer combination is won in the internal lottery) satisfied? If it is determined that the start condition for the advantageous section is satisfied, an advantageous section flag indicating that control is to be performed in the advantageous section is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. In the subsequent main processing, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if it is determined that the advantageous section flag is set and the advantageous section is in progress, the advantageous section flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By setting a predetermined value (1) in the signal output buffer, the signal is output during the advantageous period by the subsequent timer interrupt processing. According to this configuration, when the advantageous section signal is not being output, it is determined whether the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, and when the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, the advantageous section flag is stored in the RAM 41c. Since the predetermined region is set to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to ensure that the process of shifting to the advantageous section is performed in a state where no signal is output during the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to output a predetermined signal to a test device that performs a performance test of the slot machine 1. The advantageous period signal is output to the test device, and the slot machine 1 This signal is used for performance testing. According to this configuration, the main control unit 41 performs processing related to the advantageous section while the advantageous section signal is being output to the test device that performs the performance test, and It is possible to ensure that the main control unit 41 performs the process of shifting to the advantageous section in a state where no signal is output during the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines the value of the advantageous period signal as a test signal in the main process or the ball payout control process based on whether the value of the output buffer of the advantageous period signal is the initial value or not. It is configured to determine whether or not it is in an advantageous section by determining whether it is outputting, but the determination of whether it is in an advantageous section is not based on the advantageous section signal as a test signal, but by using the call lamp or hall computer. It may be determined whether or not the vehicle is in an advantageous period based on a signal outputted to an external device such as a vehicle.

In the ball output control process performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs an advantageous section shift related process related to the transition of the advantageous section, and sets the number of bets of three (first bet number). It is possible to perform a process to determine whether or not the bet is in the advantageous period, and the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period, and it is determined that it is outside the advantageous period, and the number of bets is 3. If it is determined that this has been set, processing related to transition to an advantageous section is performed, while the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer for the advantageous section signal, and it is determined that the signal is outside the advantageous section. If it is determined that the number of bets has not been set, the advantageous section shift related process is not performed. According to this configuration, if the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is not set, the process related to shifting to an advantageous section is not performed, so that the player etc. It is possible to prompt the player to play the game with the first number of bets).

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling a plurality of game states including special states (BB1, BB2), and in the ball payout control process performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 can perform control in a plurality of game states including special states (BB1, BB2). It is possible to perform processing related to transition to advantageous sections and processing to determine whether the gaming state is controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2), and the initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during advantageous sections. If it is determined that the setting is outside the advantageous section and that it is not controlled by the special state (BB1, BB2), processing related to transition to the advantageous section is performed, and the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section is If the initial value (0) is set and it is determined that the vehicle is outside the advantageous section, but it is determined that it is controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2), the process related to transition to the advantageous section is not performed. . According to this configuration, when the gaming state is controlled to be in the special state (BB1, BB2), advantageous section transition related processing is not performed. It is possible to encourage players to play games outside the home.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling a plurality of game states including special states (BB1, BB2), and in the ball payout control process performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 can perform control in a plurality of game states including special states (BB1, BB2). Advantageous section transition related processing, processing for determining whether the gaming state is controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2), and determining whether the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is set. If it is determined that the process can be performed and the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period is set to the initial value (0) and it is outside the advantageous period, it is determined that the number of bets is 3. However, if it is determined that the control is not in the special state (BB1, BB2), processing related to transition to an advantageous section is performed, and an initial value (0) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section. If it is determined that the area is outside the area, but it is determined that it is controlled by a special state (BB1, BB2), or if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 coins is not set, the process related to moving to an advantageous area will be performed. This is a configuration that does not perform According to this configuration, when the gaming state is controlled to the special state (BB1, BB2) or when the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is not set, the advantageous section transition related process is performed. Since the game is never played, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a game state other than the special state (BB1, BB2) and with a bet number of three (first bet number).

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and the operation modes (order of stopping) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is possible to perform a navigation notification that notifies the player, and in the ball output control process performed at the start of the game, processing related to navigation notification (processing that performs navigation notification according to the currently controlled ball output state, ED transition It is possible to update the number of games counter, process the ball output status to perform processing according to the ball output status, etc.), and perform processing to determine whether the number of bets of 3 coins (first number of bets) is set. , and if it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the advantageous period signal and that it is in the advantageous period, and that the number of bets of 3 coins is set, the navigation notification is While performing processing related to the above, it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period and that the game is in the advantageous period, but it is determined that the number of bets of 3 coins is not set. In this configuration, processing related to navigation notification is not performed. According to this configuration, if the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set, the process related to navigation notification is not performed, so the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is not set. ) can encourage you to play the game.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to carry over the winning of the special winning combination to the next game or later when a special winning combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special winning combination does not win. is possible, and the winning of the special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. It is configured to control the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by the player, and includes stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and notifies the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is possible to perform navigation notification, and in the ball output control process performed at the start of the game, processing related to navigation notification (processing to perform navigation notification according to the currently controlled ball output state, ED transition game number counter) It is possible to perform processing to determine whether or not the gaming state is controlled by RT1 (such as update of the ball output status, processing according to the ball output status), and processing to determine whether the gaming status is controlled by RT1. is set to a predetermined value (1) and it is determined that the game is in an advantageous period, and if it is determined that the gaming state is controlled to RT1, processing related to navigation notification is performed, while the game is in an advantageous period. If it is determined that the predetermined value (1) is set in the signal output buffer and the game is in an advantageous period, but it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled by RT1, processing related to navigation notification is not performed. It is the composition. According to this configuration, a specific game state in which the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to an internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two coins (second number of bets) is set. If it is not controlled by RT1, processing related to navigation notification will not be performed, so players etc. can be encouraged to play the game at RT1.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to carry over the winning of the special winning combination to the next game or later when a special winning combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special winning combination does not win. is possible, and the winning of the special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. It is configured to control the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R by the player, and includes stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and notifies the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is possible to perform navigation notification, and in the ball output control process performed at the start of the game, processing related to navigation notification (processing to perform navigation notification according to the currently controlled ball output state, ED transition game number counter) update, ball output status processing, etc. that performs processing according to the ball output status), processing to determine whether the gaming status is controlled by RT1, and the number of bets of 3 coins (first number of bets) is set. It is possible to perform processing to determine whether or not the game is in an advantageous period, and if it is determined that a predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during an advantageous period and the game is in an advantageous period, the gaming state changes to RT1. If it is determined that the control is being carried out and it is determined that the number of bets of 3 coins has been set, processing related to navigation notification is performed, and a predetermined value (1) is set in the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous period. If it is determined that the game status is not controlled by RT1, or if it is determined that the bet number of 3 coins is not set, the navigation notification will be sent. This configuration does not perform any related processing. According to this configuration, if the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is not set, it becomes a target of the internal lottery on the condition that the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set. If it is not controlled by RT1, which is a specific gaming state in which the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) is carried over, processing related to navigation notification will not be performed, so players, etc. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game with the number of bets of three (first number of bets) and RT1.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes an ED transition game number counter for counting the number of ED transition games in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and increments the ED transition game number counter by 1 each time a game is played in an advantageous section. When the number of ED transition games specified based on the number of ED transition games counter reaches a predetermined number of games (fifth specified number), the navigation notification is controlled for a period until the advantageous section ends. In a game where it is determined that the number of bets (first number of bets) of three coins is set and the gaming state is controlled to RT1, the ED state is While performing the process of updating the transition game number counter, in a game in which it is determined that the number of bets of three coins (the first number of bets) is not set, or in a game in which it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled by RT1. , the configuration does not perform the process of updating the number of ED transition games. According to this configuration, games are eligible for internal lottery on the condition that the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is not set or the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set. In games that are not controlled by RT1, which is a specific gaming state in which the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) is carried over, the game is shifted to the ED state when a predetermined number of games (fifth specified number) is reached. Since the process of updating the different number of ED transition games is not performed, it is possible to encourage the player or the like to play the game with the number of bets of three (first number of bets) and RT1.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either 3 (first number of bets) or 2 (second number of bets) depending on the player's selection. The configuration allows the game to be executed both when the number of bets is set and when the number of bets of two coins is set, and the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section that is advantageous for the player. It is possible to store an advantageous period game number counter that counts the number of games controlled in an advantageous period in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and a net increase in the number of medals paid out since the start of the advantageous period (the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period). Equipped with a net increase counter that counts the increased number of medals (obtained by subtracting the total number of medals used to set the number of bets from the total number of medals issued), it increases the number of medals each time a game is played in an advantageous section. It is possible to update the section game number counter by incrementing it by 1, and in the AT state management process performed after the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0). ), regardless of whether the bet number of 3 coins or 2 coins is set, the net increase number counter is updated, and after updating the net increase number counter, the corresponding The configuration is such that it is determined whether the value of the net increase number counter exceeds a second specified number, and when it is determined that the value exceeds the second specified number, control is performed to terminate the advantageous section. According to this configuration, the game is executed even when the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is set or the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set according to the player's selection. In a possible configuration, in an advantageous section, the medal number counter is updated regardless of whether the first bet number is set or the second bet number is set, and the medal number counter value exceeds the second specified number. Since the advantageous section ends when the bet is exceeded, the net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section will be the same whether the bet number of 3 medals (first bet number) is selected or the bet number of 2 medals (second bet number) is selected. Since the number of slots is limited so as not to increase excessively, it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the slot machine 1 from increasing.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either 3 (first number of bets) or 2 (second number of bets) depending on the player's selection. The configuration allows the game to be executed both when the number of bets is set and when the number of bets of two coins is set, and the main control unit 41 controls the game section to be an advantageous section that is advantageous for the player. The system is equipped with stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated by the player to stop the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and how the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated during the advantageous section (order of stopping). It is possible to perform navigation notification to notify the user, and in the AT state management processing performed after the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, processing related to navigation notification (processing to transition to ED state, output It is possible to perform processing related to ball status (processing related to ball status, etc.) that performs processing related to ball status, and processing to determine whether the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) is set, and it is possible to perform processing for determining whether or not the number of bets of three (first number of bets) is set. If it is determined that the number counter is a value other than the initial value (0) and it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is set, processing related to navigation notification is performed, while the advantageous section game number counter is is determined to be a value other than the initial value (0), but if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 coins is not set, the process related to the navigation notification is not performed. According to this configuration, in a game in which the number of bets of 3 coins (first number of bets) is not set, processing related to navigation notification is not performed, so the number of bets of 3 coins is not set for players etc. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game with (the first number of bets).

In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to determine whether or not the advantageous period is in progress based on whether or not the advantageous period game number counter is at the initial value (0) in the AT state management process. However, the determination of whether or not it is in an advantageous section is not limited to the determination based on whether the advantageous section game number counter is at the initial value (0). The configuration may be such that the determination is made based on a flag, an output buffer of a signal during an advantageous period, or the like.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to carry over the winning of the special winning combination to the next game or later when a special winning combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special winning combination does not win. is possible, and the winning of the special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. It is possible to control the game section to an advantageous section that is advantageous for the player, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that the player operates to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. In preparation, it is possible to perform navigation notification to notify the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R during the advantageous section, and AT to be performed after the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. In the state management process, it is determined whether or not the processing related to navigation notification (processing to shift to ED state, processing related to ball release state that performs processing related to ball release state, etc.) and the gaming state is controlled to RT1. If it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0) and the gaming state is controlled to RT1, the navigation notification will be While performing related processing, if it is determined that the advantageous section game number counter is a value other than the initial value (0), but it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled by RT1, processing related to navigation notification is performed. This is a configuration that does not perform According to this configuration, a specific game state in which the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to an internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two coins (second number of bets) is set. If it is not controlled by RT1, processing related to navigation notification will not be performed, so players etc. can be encouraged to play the game at RT1.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to carry over the winning of the special winning combination to the next game or later when a special winning combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special winning combination does not win. is possible, and the winning of the special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, the gaming state is changed to RT1. It is possible to control the game section to an advantageous section that is advantageous for the player, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R that the player operates to stop the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. In preparation, it is possible to perform navigation notification to notify the operation mode (stop order) of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R during the advantageous section, and AT to be performed after the rotation of all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped. In the state management process, it is determined whether or not the processing related to navigation notification (processing to shift to ED state, processing related to ball release state that performs processing related to ball release state, etc.) and the gaming state is controlled to RT1. It is possible to perform processing to determine whether the number of bets of 3 coins is set, and if it is determined that the number of advantageous section games counter is a value other than the initial value (0), the game If it is determined that the state is controlled to RT1 and it is determined that the number of bets of 3 is set, processing related to navigation notification is performed, and the advantageous section game number counter is set to the initial value (0). ), if it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled by RT1, or if it is determined that the number of bets of 3 coins is not set, processing related to navigation notification will be performed. This is a configuration that does not perform According to this configuration, if the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is not set, or if the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set, the internal lottery will be performed. If it is not controlled by RT1, which is a specific gaming state in which the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) is carried over, processing related to navigation notification will not be performed, so players etc. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game with the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) and RT1.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment stores in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c the net increase in the number of medals paid out after the start of the advantageous period (the total number of medals paid out during the advantageous period is used to set the number of bets). The system is equipped with a net increase number counter that counts the increase in the number of medals obtained by subtracting the total number of medals obtained, and updates the net increase number counter every time a game is played in an advantageous section, and specifies based on the net increase number counter. When the net increase in the number of medals to be bet exceeds the third specified number, it is possible to shift to the ED state in which the navigation notification is controlled for a period until the end of the advantageous section, and In a game in which it is determined that the number of bets (1 bet) is set and the gaming state is determined to be controlled to RT1, it is determined whether the value of the net increase number counter exceeds the third specified number, In a game in which it is determined that the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is not set, or in a game in which it is determined that the gaming state is not controlled by RT1, the value of the net increase number counter is equal to the third specified number. This configuration does not determine whether or not the limit has been exceeded. According to this configuration, if the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is not set, it becomes a target of the internal lottery on the condition that the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set. If it is not controlled by RT1, which is a specific gaming state in which the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) is carried over, the net increase number counter will shift to the ED state when it exceeds the third specified number. Since it is not determined whether the value exceeds the third specified number, the player or the like can be encouraged to play the game with the number of bets of three (first number of bets) and RT1.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either three (first number of bets) or two (second number of bets) depending on the player's selection, and the main control unit 41 In the game, if a special prize (BB1, BB2) is won in an internal lottery and the special prize does not win, it is possible to carry over the winning of the special prize to the next game or later. includes a specific special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to an internal lottery on the condition that a bet number of 2 pieces (second bet number) is set, and a bet number of 3 pieces (first bet number) is set. In the set game, the configuration is such that the symbol combination that will win a specific special winning combination (BB1) cannot be derived to the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R regardless of the winning result of the internal lottery. According to this configuration, in RT1, which is the gaming state in which the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) is carried over, the internal lottery is carried out by selecting 3 bets (first bet) and playing the game. Even if none of the winning combinations is won, the specific special winning combination (BB1) will not be won, and the gaming state can be maintained at RT1.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either 3 (first number of bets) or 2 (second number of bets) depending on the player's selection, and the main control unit 41 It is possible to store credits in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and is equipped with a MAXBET switch 6 that the player operates when setting the number of bets using the credits. The configuration is such that the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is effectively accepted when the number of bets for three bets can be set by adding up the credits. According to this configuration, in a situation where the remaining number of credits is sufficient to set a bet number of three, the player etc. operates the MAXBET switch 6 to increase the bet number of three (first bet). is set, but in a situation where the remaining number of credits is insufficient to set the bet number of 3 coins, the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is not effectively accepted and only the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set. Even if the MAXBET switch 6 is operated in a situation where the MAXBET switch 6 is not possible, the bet number of two bets will not be set, so it is possible to prevent the game from being played with the second bet number as much as possible.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of bets can be set to either three (first number of bets) or two (second number of bets) depending on the player's selection, and the main control unit 41 is a setting change state in which one of the setting values (1 to 6) can be selected from among multiple types of setting values (1 to 6) with different degrees of advantage for the player, and the currently set setting. It is possible to control the setting confirmation state where the value can be checked, and if a special prize (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery in the game and the special prize is not won, the special prize It is structured so that the winnings can be carried over to the next game, and the special winnings are subject to an internal lottery on the condition that the number of bets (first bet) of three cards is set for the special winnings. (BB2) and a specific special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to an internal lottery on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set. Provided that the number of bets (second number of bets) is set, if the winning of the special winning combination (BB1), which is subject to an internal lottery, is carried over, this indicates that the winning of the special winning role is being carried over. While displaying the status, if the winning of the special winning combination (BB2) that is subject to the internal lottery has been carried over on the condition that the number of bets of 3 (first number of bets) is set, the status will be displayed. After the status display is started, the configuration continues to display the status both when controlling to the setting change state and when controlling to the setting confirmation state. According to this configuration, by displaying the status, it is possible to win a specific special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to an internal lottery on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set. You will be notified that the carryover has been carried over, and once the status display has started, it will continue even if you are controlled to change settings or confirm settings. Even so, it can be confirmed that the winning of a specific special winning combination (BB1) has been carried over.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment operates when the winning of the special winning combination (BB1) that is subject to the internal lottery is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set. It is possible to display a status indicating that the winning of the special prize has been carried forward, and the special prize is subject to an internal lottery on the condition that the number of bets of two cards (secondary number of bets) is set. In a game where the winning combination (BB1) is won, the status display starts before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, and when the special winning combination (BB1) is won in the game, the status display ends. In this game, if the special winning combination (BB1) is not won, the system is configured to continue displaying the status. According to this configuration, the status display starts before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective, so the presence or absence of the status display is confirmed before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R. It becomes possible to do this. Further, when the special winning combination (BB2) is won, the status display ends in that game, so it can be immediately confirmed that the winning state of the special winning combination (BB2) has ended.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of executing a main process that is repeatedly executed for each game, and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at fixed time intervals. The internal lottery process executed in the internal lottery determines whether the special prize (BB1, BB2) has been won in the internal lottery, and if it is determined that the special prize has been won, the special prize (BB1, BB2) An internal winning flag indicating that has been won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and a specific special prize ( It is determined whether or not the special winning combination (BB1) has been won, and when it is determined that the special winning combination (BB1) has been won, a control signal that turns on the status display LED 17 is output from a predetermined output port to change the status. The configuration is such that the status display is started by controlling the display LED 17 to turn on. According to this configuration, when the special winning combination (BB1) is won in the internal lottery, the status display starts immediately, so the time to check whether the status display is being performed is reduced to the stop switches 8L and 8C. , 8R can be sufficiently secured before the operation becomes effective.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the special winning combination (BB1, BB2) has been won when it is determined that the special winning combination (BB1, BB2) has been won in the internal lottery process executed in the main process. After setting an internal winning flag indicating this in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, interrupt BC wait processing is performed to wait until the timer interrupt processing is performed a predetermined number of times, and then reel rotation start processing and reel rotation start processing are performed to start the reel rotation. It is configured to execute a reel stop control process that performs stop control, and to enable the operation of the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the condition that the reel whose rotation is being controlled in the reel stop control process is in a constant speed state. Yes, after the internal winning flag is set in the internal lottery process and the timer interrupt process is performed one or more times, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is enabled. According to this configuration, the status notification can be reliably started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes effective.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of controlling AT to be advantageous for the player in an advantageous section, and when controlling to AT, sends an AT signal indicating that it is being controlled by AT to the slot. It is possible to output the signal to the outside of the machine 1, and when the machine 1 is being controlled in an advantageous section, by controlling the section display LED 19 to a lit state, it is possible to display a section indicating that the control is in an advantageous section. This is a possible configuration, and after the game section is shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the section display is started when AT control is started, and the section display is started when AT control is started, and then after the section display is started, This configuration controls the AT signal to be output to the outside. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent an external device receiving the AT signal from identifying that the control is being performed in an advantageous section before the section display starts.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to be able to output an operation information signal specifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R to the test device, and when starting control of the AT. , In the ball output control process, a predetermined value (1 indicating an ON state) is set in the output buffer of the section display LED 19, and by the timer interrupt processing, the section display LED 19 is controlled to be lit to indicate that control is being performed in an advantageous section. After starting the section display, an operation information signal output process is performed in the main processing, so that the operation information signal is output to the test device after the section display is started. According to this configuration, since the operation information signal is output to the test device after starting the section display, it is possible for the test device to identify the specified operation mode while the section display is being performed. becomes.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of controlling the AT to be advantageous for the player in the advantageous section, and when controlling the player in the advantageous section, by controlling the section display LED 19 to turn on, it is possible to control the AT to be advantageous for the player. It is possible to display a section display indicating that the section is being controlled, and to output an advantageous section signal to the test equipment indicating that the section is being controlled in an advantageous section, and when ending the advantageous section. The configuration is configured to perform advantageous section data initialization processing to initialize information regarding advantageous sections, and when the advantageous section ends, advantageous section related information including the output buffer of the signal during the advantageous section is initialized by the advantageous section data initialization processing. After controlling the advantageous section signal to the OFF state, the section display is ended. According to this configuration, the section display is ended after the advantageous section related information is initialized and the signal during the advantageous section is turned off, so the section display is completed without the advantageous section related information being initialized. In addition, since the output buffer for the advantageous section signal has not been initialized, it is possible to prevent the section display from ending even though the advantageous section signal is being output to the test equipment. You can prevent it from being put away.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to perform advantageous section data initialization processing to initialize information regarding the advantageous section when ending the advantageous section, and the advantageous section related information includes the output state of the signal during the advantageous section. In the processing at the end of the game in the main process (Sb83 to Sb85), after initializing the advantageous section related information, the output buffer for the advantageous section signal is set to the OFF state. In this configuration, it is determined whether the initial value (0) shown in FIG. According to this configuration, by initializing the advantageous section related information when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous section signal can be turned off without individually setting the output buffer of the advantageous section signal to the OFF state. Can be done.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets a predetermined value (1) indicating an ON state in the output buffer of the advantageous period signal, so that the test device outputs the advantageous period signal indicating that the test device is controlled to the advantageous period. In the main processing, it is determined whether the game is in an advantageous period or not based on the advantageous period flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When it is determined, a predetermined value (1) indicating an ON state is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section signal, and when the predetermined value is set in the output buffer of the advantageous section signal, the advantageous section signal is output. It is the composition. According to this configuration, it is determined whether the game is in an advantageous period or not every time the game ends, and when it is determined that the game is in an advantageous period, the ON state is set in the output buffer of the advantageous period signal. Despite this, it is possible to prevent the signal from being turned off during the advantageous section.

When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is controlling the vehicle in an advantageous zone, it is possible to display a zone indicating that the vehicle is being controlled in an advantageous zone by controlling the zone display LED 19 to turn on. , it is possible to restart the section display when the power supply is started after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed. If the section display is restarted on the main control unit 41 side when the power supply is started after the power supply to the main control unit 41 has been stopped, this indicates that the state where the section display is being resumed is returned. The configuration is such that it is possible to notify when the section display LED is on using the liquid crystal display 51, and the sub-control unit 91 can notify when the section display LED is on for a certain period of time after power supply to the slot machine 1 is started. The configuration is such that a notification is made, and after a certain period of time has elapsed, the notification is terminated while the section display LED is on. According to this configuration, if the state returns to the state in which the section display is being performed when power supply starts, a notification indicating that the section display LED is lit will be issued, so when the game parlor opens, etc. It is possible to make the store clerk aware that the section display is being performed. On the other hand, since the notification that the section display LED is on is terminated after a certain period of time, it is possible that the section display LED lighting notification will continue after the game parlor is opened, giving players a sense of discomfort. It can be prevented.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling the AT to be advantageous for the player in the advantageous section, and when controlling in the advantageous section, by controlling the section display LED 19 to turn on, it is possible to control the AT to be advantageous for the player. It is possible to display a section display indicating that the slot machine 1 is being controlled, and the sub-control unit 91 can stop power supply to the slot machine 1 while the section display is being performed on the main control section 41 side. After that, if the power supply starts over a specific time outside the game parlor's business hours (in this example, 4:00 a.m.) and the state returns to the state where the section display is being performed, the section display will not be displayed. The liquid crystal display 51 is used to notify that the section display LED has been turned on to indicate that the section display has returned to the state in which the section was displayed. In this case, the configuration is such that no notification is given while the section display LED is lit. According to this configuration, even if a power outage occurs temporarily during business hours, it is possible to prevent players and the like from feeling uncomfortable.

In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is equipped with an RTC and can specify the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the time when the power supply is started. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the section display is being performed on the 41 side, the power supply is continued at a specific time (4:00 a.m. in this embodiment) outside the game parlor's business hours. When the main control unit 41 side returns to the state where the interval display is performed, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to notify that the interval display LED is lit. When the state returns to the state in which section display is being performed, power to slot machine 1 is changed based on the time when power supply to slot machine 1 was stopped and the time when power supply was started. If the elapsed time from the time the supply was stopped is within a certain amount of time, no notification will be made that the section display LED is on, and if the elapsed time exceeds the certain period of time, a notification will be given that the section display LED is on. A configuration that performs the following may also be used. Even with this configuration, even if a power outage occurs temporarily during business hours, it is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment operates at a specific time (this embodiment In the example, if the power supply starts after 4:00 a.m. and the state returns to the state where the section display is being performed, the section display LED is lit to indicate that the state has returned to the state where the section display is being performed. It has a configuration in which notification is performed using a liquid crystal display 51, and when a game is started while notification is being performed while the section display LED is on, the section display LED is turned on notification is terminated without waiting for a certain period of time to elapse. It is the composition. According to this configuration, by starting the game even if a certain period of time has not elapsed, the notification that the section display LED is on can be ended.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment displays a section indicating that the control is in an advantageous section by controlling the section display LED 19 to a lit state only in the section after the start of AT among the advantageous sections, and displays the section display. After the power supply is stopped in the section before the start of AT in which the AT is not performed, the power supply is started and the state can be returned to the state where the section display is not performed. After the power supply stops in the section before the start of AT where no section display is performed on the side, when the power supply starts and the state returns to the state where no section display is performed, the section display LED lighting notification will be sent. This is a configuration in which this is not done. According to this configuration, only when the control returns to the advantageous section and the section display is performed, the clerk of the game store is recognized that the store will open with the section display being displayed. can be done.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of carrying over the winning of the special winning combination to the next game or later when a special winning combination (BB1, BB2) is won in the internal lottery and the winning special winning combination does not win. possible, and when power supply to the slot machine 1 starts, it is possible to set one of the setting values (1 to 6) from among a plurality of types of setting values (1 to 6) that have different degrees of advantage for the player. It is possible to perform advantageous section data initialization processing that initializes information regarding advantageous sections when a setting operation using the setting key switch or an initialization operation using the reset/setting switch is performed. This is a configuration in which the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate by playing the game in the gaming state RT1 in which the winning of (BB1) is carried over, and in the advantageous section data initialization process, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is Advantageous section related information is generated both when the setting key switch is turned on and when the reset/setting switch is turned on when starting. is initialized and ends the advantageous section and section display, while the information regarding the gaming state is maintained at RT1 without being initialized. According to this configuration, even when power supply is started while a setting operation is being performed or when power supply is started while an initialization operation is being performed, the advantageous section is ended and the section display is displayed. However, since the gaming state RT1 is maintained, it is not necessary to perform work to set the gaming state to RT1 every time the advantageous section and section display are ended.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a main control section 41 that controls games, a sub-control section 91 that controls effects based on commands transmitted from the main control section 41, and a player who can control the reels 2L, The main control unit 41 includes stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R that are operated to stop 2C and 2R, and the main control unit 41 is capable of transmitting an internal winning command that can specify the winning result of the internal lottery It is configured to be able to perform navigation notifications that instruct the operation mode of the switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and even when the internal lottery target hand is set to the number of bets of three (first number of bets), Even when the bet number of 2 cards (second bet number) is set, the number of bets of 3 cards is set, or the number of bets of 2 cards includes multiple types of hands, including a multi-card push order combination, or the number of bets of 2 cards is set. Regardless of whether it is set, if a multi-card pushing winning combination is won in the internal lottery and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in the stop order corresponding to the winning multi-card pushing winning combination, The reels are controlled to stop so as to be more advantageous to the player than if the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R were operated in a stop order other than the corresponding stop order, and a multi-push winning combination was won in an internal lottery. In this case, it is possible to perform a navigation notification to notify the stopping order corresponding to the winning multi-card push order, and the number of bets of 3 cards (first number of bets) is set, or the number of bets of 2 cards is set. Regardless of whether the (second bet number) is set or not, it is possible to identify that the multi-card winning winning combination has been won in the internal lottery if the winning winning combination has been won in the internal lottery. , it is configured to transmit an internal winning command that can specify the group of winning combinations so that the type of the winning multi-card winning combination cannot be specified. According to this configuration, even if the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is set or the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set, a large number of coins will be drawn in the internal lottery. If the winning winning combination is selected as a lottery target and any type of winning combination is won, the operation mode that is advantageous to the player will change depending on the type of the winning multi-card winning winning combination. Even if the bet number of 1 card (first bet number) is set or the number of bets of 2 cards (second bet number) is set, a multi-card winning winning combination has been won in the internal lottery. can be identified, but an internal winning command that can identify the group of winning hands is sent so that it is impossible to identify the type of winning multi-card winning combination. ) is set, and even when the number of bets of two (second number of bets) is set, it is possible to prevent an operation mode advantageous for the player from being specified from the internal winning command.

In the case where the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that a multi-card winning combination has been won in an internal lottery in an advantageous section and the number of bets (first number of bets) of three cards is set, It is possible to notify the navigation system of the operation mode (stopping order of correct answers) corresponding to the type of winning multi-card push order combination, and if the number of bets of two cards (second number of bets) is set, the player will not win. This configuration does not notify the operation mode (correct stop order) corresponding to the type of multi-card push order combination. According to this configuration, when the bet number of two coins (second bet number) is set, the navigation notification does not instruct an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, so the bet number of three coins (second bet number) is set. You can encourage them to play games with numbers).

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls whether the number of bets of three coins (first number of bets) is set or the number of bets of two coins (second number of bets) is set. If a multi-card winning winning combination is won in the internal lottery, it is possible to identify that the winning multi-card winning winning combination has been won in the internal lottery, but it is possible to identify the winning winning combination so that it is impossible to identify the type of winning combination. It is configured to send an internal winning command that can identify the group of winning winning combinations, and an internal winning command that makes it impossible to identify the type of winning winning winning combination is created and sent using a common group information setting process. It is the composition. According to this configuration, whether the bet number of 3 coins (first bet number) is set or the bet number of 2 coins (second bet number) is set, the internal lottery When a multi-card winning winning combination is won, an internal winning command is created by a common group information setting process, so the program capacity associated with command creation can be reduced.

[Effect 4]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of executing a main process that is repeatedly executed for each game, and a timer interrupt process that interrupts the main process at fixed time intervals. It is possible to perform specific processing (processing by a gaming program) and special processing (processing by a non-gaming program) in It is configured to perform updating processing, and while a specific processing (gaming program) is being executed, timer interrupt processing may be executed, and while the timer value for one game time management is updated, special processing (non-game program) is executed. During the execution of the game program (gaming program), the timer interrupt process is not executed and the timer value for one game time management is not updated. According to this configuration, by updating the timer value for one game time management as much as possible, the game can proceed smoothly. By not updating the management timer value, the processing for updating the one gaming time management timer value and the special processing do not coexist.

In the main process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines whether or not the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) before the start of reel rotation in one game, and manages one game time. If it is determined that the timer value for one game time management is not the specific value (0), the game waits without proceeding until it is determined that the one game time management timer value is the specific value (0), and one game time management The game is configured to proceed when the timer value is determined to be a specific value (0). According to this configuration, the game is not allowed to progress until it is determined that the minimum time has elapsed based on the timer value for one game time management, and the game is allowed to progress when the minimum time has elapsed. The minimum amount of time can be ensured.

When the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0) in the main process, it prohibits execution of the timer interrupt process, and The configuration is such that an initial value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) is set in the timer. According to this configuration, when setting the initial value to the timer for managing one game time, timer interrupt processing is prohibited, so that while setting the initial value to the timer for managing one game time, It is possible to prevent the management timer value from being updated.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment includes a medal selector 29 having a medal receiving flow path 29b through which medals inserted from the outside of the slot machine 1 flow down and guide the flown down medals to the hopper tank 34a on the inner side. , as a special process (non-gaming program), a medal sensor process is executed to monitor the passing status of medals flowing down the medal receiving channel 29b. According to this configuration, the timer value for one game time management is not updated during the period in which the medal sensor process for monitoring the passing status of medals flowing down the medal receiving flow path 29b is performed, so that one game Processing for updating time management timer values and medal sensor processing related to fraud detection are not mixed.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment sets an error code when an abnormality is detected in the medal sensor processing, determines whether or not the error code is set in the specific processing (gaming program), and determines whether or not the error code is set. If it is determined that is set, error processing is executed, and while the error processing is being executed, timer interrupt processing can be performed and the timer value for one game time management is updated. According to this configuration, the timer value for managing one gaming time is updated while the error process is being executed, so the elapsed minimum time is counted even during the error process, and after the error process is finished, the timer value for managing one game time is updated. You can play games.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to perform error processing when an error is detected, and the error processing is performed by performing a reset operation using the reset switch 23 while continuing power supply to the slot machine 1. With this configuration, it is possible to terminate the process without cutting off the power supply. According to this configuration, even if error processing is performed, the game can be restarted smoothly.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling special states (BB1, BB2) that are advantageous for the player, and is capable of controlling the special states (BB1, BB2) that are advantageous to the player, and provides medals in the special state to the total cumulative number of medals awarded to the player. The accessory payout ratio, which is the ratio of the total cumulative number of paid out tokens given to the player, is the ratio of the total number of consecutive paid out medals given in the special state to the total cumulative number of paid out medals given to the player. It is equipped with a gaming machine information display 50 that displays the continuous accessory ratio, which is a ratio, and as a special process (non-gaming program), the total cumulative payout number, which is data for calculating the accessory payout ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, It is configured to be able to execute data processing for monitoring winning ratio to update the total cumulative number of paid out bonus coins and the total cumulative number of consecutive paid bonus coins. According to this configuration, the timer value for one game time management is not updated during the period when the data processing for monitoring the role ratio is performed to update the data for calculating the role item payout ratio and the continuous role item ratio. Therefore, the process of updating the timer value for one game time management and the data process for monitoring the win ratio related to the performance display of the gaming machine are not mixed together.

In the data processing for monitoring role ratio, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines whether or not the special state (BB1, BB2) is being controlled, and when it is determined that the special state is being controlled, the game It is determined whether the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the person has reached the upper limit, and if it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the total cumulative payout counter is If the process of updating the number of paid out objects and the total cumulative number of consecutive accessory object payouts is not performed, and it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the total cumulative number of accessory object payouts and the total cumulative number of consecutive accessory object payouts are updated. This is a configuration that performs processing. According to this configuration, regardless of the situation in which the total number of medals awarded to the player cannot be updated, it is possible to prevent the total cumulative number of paid out bonus coins and the total cumulative number of consecutive paid bonus tokens from being updated.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of performing navigation notification to instruct the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the gaming machine information display 50 displays the accessory payout ratio, the continuous accessory payout In addition to the ratio, the total cumulative number of paid out bonus coins, the total cumulative number of consecutive bonus paid tokens, and the navigation notification will indicate the operation mode that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to display the instruction-inclusive accessory ratio, which is the ratio of the cumulative number of instruction-inclusive accessory payouts, which is the sum of the number of medals paid out when there is a navigation notification, which is the number of medals paid out when there is a navigation notification. In the data processing, it is determined whether the total cumulative payout number counter that counts the total number of medals awarded to the player has reached the upper limit, and if it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, does not perform the process of updating the cumulative number of instructed accessories paid out, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, it determines whether or not it is controlled to a special state (BB1, BB2), and the special If it is determined that the state is controlled by the special state, a process is performed to update the cumulative number of instruction-included accessories paid out, and if it is determined that the special state is not controlled, the navigation notification provides an operation that is advantageous to the player. It is configured to determine whether or not a mode has been instructed, and if it is determined by the navigation notification that an operation mode advantageous to the player has been instructed, a process is performed to update the cumulative number of instruction-included accessories paid out. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the cumulative number of instruction-included accessories paid out from being updated, regardless of the situation in which the total number of paid out coins counter that counts the total number of coins given to the player cannot be updated.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute, as a special process (non-gaming program), an operation information signal output process that outputs a stop execution position signal to a test device that tests the slot machine 1. . According to this configuration, the one-gaming time management timer value is not updated during the period when the operation information signal output process for outputting the test signal to the test device that tests the slot machine 1 is performed. Therefore, the process of updating one gaming time management timer value and the operation information signal output process related to the test of the slot machine 1 are not mixed together.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of performing navigation notification that instructs the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and in the operation information signal output process, the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is controlled. If it is determined that the navigation notification will be performed, a process is performed to output a stop execution position signal that specifies the operation mode to be instructed, and the navigation notification is performed. If it is determined that it will not be performed, the winning number indicating the winning result of the internal lottery is referred to, and a process is performed to output a stop execution position signal specifying the operation mode corresponding to the winning number. According to this configuration, when it is determined that the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is instructed, the process of specifying the winning result of the internal lottery can be omitted, so that the stop execution position signal specifying the operation mode can be omitted. The process for outputting can be simplified.

In the timer interrupt process, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs a counter update process that updates a plurality of timer values used in a specific process (gaming program) including a timer value for one game time management, and a special process (non-game program). This configuration separately performs a time monitoring update process for updating a timer value used in a game program (gaming program). According to this configuration, the time monitoring update process that updates the timer value used by the special process does not coexist with the counter update process that updates the timer value used by the specific process.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of outputting a test signal that can identify the winning result of the internal lottery to the test device, and determines that the timer value for one game time management is a specific value (0). In this case, by setting the initial value to the timer value for one game time management, the minimum time measurement is started, and a test signal is output when the initial value is set to the timer value for one game time management. The configuration is as follows. According to this configuration, the test signal is output when the initial value is set to the timer value for one game time management, so by specifying the time interval at which the test signal is output, the test signal can be It is possible to specify whether a minimum game time is secured.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to perform a process of outputting a test signal in the timer interrupt process before updating the timer value for one game time management. According to this configuration, since the updating of the timer value for managing one game time is started after the output of the test signal is started, the time interval at which the test signal is output is ensured to be equal to or longer than the minimum time of one game. be able to.

[Effect 5]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can set any number of bets from a plurality of types of bet numbers including 3 or 2 coins according to the player's selection, and the number of bets of 3 coins is In RT2 (inside BB2), where the winning of BB2, which is subject to determination, is carried over, the payout rate of medals is not appropriate, and the number of bets is set to 2. Under this condition, the payout rate of medals is appropriate in RT1 (inside BB1) where the winning of BB1 to be determined is carried over.

In addition, the appropriate medal payout rate in RT1 means that in RT1 (internal to BB1), the medal payout rate is higher than in RT0 (non-internal) or RT2 (internal to BB2) where the winnings of BB1 are not carried over. A configuration in which the payout rate is high, RT1 (while inside BB1) can be given benefits such as advantageous sections and transition to AT status, whereas RT0 (while not inside) and RT2 (while inside BB2) This includes a configuration in which a benefit is not granted, and a configuration in which a benefit is granted in RT1 (internal to BB1) under more preferential conditions than in RT0 (inside non-internal) and RT2 (internal to BB2).

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can display the status by lighting the status display LED 17, and the sub-control unit 91 can display a specific effect of displaying a white navigation image on the liquid crystal display 51. can be executed, and when BB1 is won at RT0 (non-internal), the main control unit 41 displays the status, the sub-control unit 91 executes a specific effect, and BB2 is won at RT0 (non-internal). The main control unit 41 does not display the status and the sub-control unit 91 does not execute the specific performance when the winning result is won. With this configuration, when BB1 is won at RT0 (non-internal), a status display is performed and a specific effect is executed to suggest that BB1 has won, thereby increasing the medal value. While it is possible to encourage the player to move to RT1 (inside BB1) where the payout rate is appropriate, if BB2 is won at RT0 (not inside), the status will not be displayed and a specific effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that BB1 has won even though BB2 has won.

In this embodiment, the specific performance is a performance that can be executed even when the determined result of the internal lottery at RT1 (inside BB1) is a loss. With this configuration, the specific effect not only suggests that BB1 won at RT0 (non-internal), but also indicates that the internal lottery decision result was a loss at RT1 (internal to BB1). Since it is also used as a direction that suggests something, it can eliminate waste in the direction.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is an effect that can be executed even when the internal lottery result is a loss in RT1 (inside BB1), but the specific effect and RT1 (inside BB1) If the configuration is common to the effects that can be performed in good.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when BB1 wins at RT0 (non-internal), the sub-control unit 91 starts a specific effect at the timing when the game start operation is performed, and when BB1 does not win, , the specific effect continues even after the last reel stop operation (final stop operation) is performed, while if BB1 wins, the specific effect ends at the timing based on the final stop operation. This is a configuration that allows With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm whether or not it has reached RT1 (inside BB1) based on whether or not the specific effect continues even after the final stop operation is performed. Furthermore, the timing based on the final stop operation is the timing when the final stop operation is performed, the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the corresponding reel is stopped, and the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the relevant operation is canceled. including.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment executes a special effect different from the normal effect in RT0 (inside BB1) on the liquid crystal display 51 in BB2, which is transferred due to winning of BB2, and BB1, which is transferred due to winning of BB1. It is the composition. With this configuration, in the special state after winning BB1 or BB2, the liquid crystal display 51 performs a special effect that is different from the normal effect in RT0 (non-internal). Since it is suggested that RT0 (non-internal medium) is not the prerequisite for transitioning to It is possible to encourage the transition to (internal).

In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51 is configured to execute a special effect different from the normal effect at RT0 (non-interior), but the lighting mode of the effect device other than the liquid crystal display 51, for example, the LED, can be changed. The configuration may be such that the control is performed in a special mode different from the normal production, or the sound effect output mode is controlled in a special mode different from the normal production, and even in such a configuration, the transition to RT1 (inside BB1) is possible. Since it is suggested that it is not RT0 (non-internal), which is the prerequisite for making ).

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment may be configured to execute a special effect different from the normal effect in RT0 (not inside) using the liquid crystal display 51 even in RT2 (inside the BB2). With this configuration, a special effect different from the normal effect in RT0 (not inside BB1) is performed on the liquid crystal display 51 even in RT2, which is the prerequisite for transitioning to RT1 (inside BB1). It is suggested that it is not (non-internal), so it is recommended to move to RT0 (non-internal) and then to RT1 (inside BB1), where the medal payout rate is appropriate. can.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment has a timing based on when a reel stop operation (final stop operation) is performed for the last reel to stop in the game in which the BB2 win occurs when BB2 wins and shifts to BB2. It is configured to perform special effects. With this configuration, the special effect is executed at the timing based on the final stop operation that triggers the winning of BB2, so it is possible that BB2 wins and shifts to BB2. can be clearly recognized. Furthermore, the timing based on the final stop operation is the timing when the final stop operation is performed, the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the corresponding reel is stopped, and the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the relevant operation is canceled. including.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to perform a special operation at a timing based on a stop operation (final stop operation) of the last reel to be stopped in the game in which BB1 wins when BB1 wins and shifts to BB1. This is a configuration that executes a performance. With this configuration, the special effect is executed at the timing based on the final stop operation that triggers BB1 to win, so it is clear that BB1 has won and has transitioned to BB1. can be recognized. Furthermore, the timing based on the final stop operation is the timing when the final stop operation is performed, the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the corresponding reel is stopped, and the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the relevant operation is canceled. including.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured such that when a setting value is set in RT2 (internal to BB2), BB2 that transfers due to a winning of BB2, and BB1 that transfers due to a winning of BB1, the winning of BB1 or BB2 is carried over. When the setting value is set in RT1 (internal to BB1), RT1 (internal to BB1) is maintained. With this configuration, even if the transition has been made to RT2 (internal to BB2), BB2, or BB1, the transition can be made to RT1 (internal to BB1) by resetting the setting values. Since it is possible to shift to RT0 (non-internal), which is a prerequisite for this, it becomes easy to shift to RT1 (inside BB1), where the medal payout rate is appropriate. Also, in RT1 (inside BB1), even if you set the setting value, RT1 (inside BB1) is maintained, so after moving to RT1 (inside BB1), set the setting value. There is no need to perform any additional work to migrate to RT1 (inside BB1).

[Effect 6]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs control in an advantageous section where the AT state can be controlled to be advantageous for the player, and after controlling to the AT state in the advantageous section, the ED transition condition is satisfied. A first ED transition condition that is established when the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds a third specified number (1700 to 2200 in this embodiment) as an ED transition condition; In a situation where the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled by the AT state is below the third specified number, it can be established based on the predicted net increase in medals (predicted net increase in number based on the number of navigation stocks), which is the predicted increase in medals. This configuration includes a second ED transition condition. With such a configuration, not only will the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceed the third specified number, but also the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state will be increased. Even if the net increase in the number of medals is less than the third specified number, the condition based on the predicted net increase in medals may be satisfied and the state is controlled to the ED state. Therefore, the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state It is possible to expect that the state will be controlled to the ED state even in a situation where the number is less than or equal to the third specified number.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to execute an ED start effect that suggests transition to the ED state, and even when the first ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is performed to the ED state, the second ED transition condition It is configured to perform a common ED start effect even when the condition is established and the ED state is controlled. With such a configuration, a common ED start effect can be created both when the first ED transition condition is met and the ED state is controlled, and when the second ED transition condition is met and the ED state is controlled. is executed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the ED state has been controlled.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to execute an ED start effect that suggests transition to the ED state, and the second ED transition condition is a condition based on the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and This is a condition that can be established by satisfying both of the conditions based on the predicted net increase in medals (the predicted net increase in medals based on the number of Navi stocks), and the sub-control unit 91 satisfies the condition based on the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state. Even in the case where the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the condition based on the predicted net increase number is satisfied and the condition is controlled to the ED state after satisfying the condition based on the predicted net increase number, after the condition based on the predicted net increase number is satisfied, the condition is controlled to the AT state. Even when the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled by satisfying the condition based on the net increase in the number of medals, the common ED start effect is executed. With such a configuration, after the condition based on the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is satisfied, the second ED transition condition is satisfied by satisfying the condition based on the predicted net increase in medals, and the ED state is entered. Even when controlled, after satisfying the condition based on the predicted net increase in medals, the second ED transition condition is satisfied by satisfying the condition based on the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state, and the condition is controlled to the ED state. Even when the vehicle is in the ED state, a common ED start effect is executed, making it easy to recognize that the vehicle is in the ED state.

In this embodiment, the total value of the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net increase in medals (predicted net increase in medals based on the number of navigation stocks) is the third specified number (in this embodiment, 1700 to 2200) This is a configuration in which the second ED transition condition can be satisfied by exceeding the above. With such a configuration, in a situation where the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number, the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state are Since the ED state is controlled when the total value exceeds the third specified number, the AT state is controlled to the ED state in a situation where the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number. It can be recognized that the net increase in the number of medals after the state is controlled exceeds the third specified number.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured such that the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is a second specified number (in this embodiment, 1700 to 2200) that is greater than a third specified number (1700 to 2200 in this embodiment). 2395), the advantageous section ends, and the sum of the net increase in the number of medals after the AT state is controlled and the predicted net increase in medals (predicted net increase in medals based on the number of navigation stocks) is the second regulation. This is a configuration in which the second ED transition condition can be satisfied by exceeding the number. With such a configuration, in a situation where the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number, the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state are Since the ED state is controlled when the total value exceeds the second specified number, the AT state is controlled to the ED state in a situation where the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is equal to or less than the third specified number. It can be recognized that the net increase in the number of medals after the state is controlled exceeds the second specified number, which is the condition for ending the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, the total value of the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net increase in medals (predicted net increase in medals based on the number of navigation stocks) is the third specified number (in this embodiment, 1700 to 2200) , and the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state exceeds a fourth specified number (1600 in this embodiment) which is smaller than the third specified number, so that the second ED transition condition can be satisfied. It is. With such a configuration, even if the sum of the net increase in the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state and the predicted net increase in the number of medals exceeds the third specified number, the number of medals after being controlled to the AT state is Since it is not controlled to the ED state until the net number of sheets added exceeds the fourth specified number that is less than the third specified number, it is prevented from being controlled to the ED state at an early stage after being controlled to the AT state. can.

In the case where the first ED transition condition (first specific condition) is satisfied and the control is performed to the ED state after controlling to the AT state, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines whether the second ED transition condition is satisfied or not. In this configuration, if the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the control is performed to the ED state after controlling to the AT state without making a determination, it is not determined whether the first ED transition condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, after one of the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled, it is determined whether the other of the first ED transition condition or the second ED transition condition is satisfied. Since no determination is made, the control after the ED state is controlled can be simplified.

After controlling to the AT state, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls to the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state. This configuration determines whether the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game. With this configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, until being controlled to the ED state, it is determined whether the ED transition condition is satisfied for each game, regardless of which state is being controlled. Since the determination is made, the control for transitioning to the ED state can be simplified.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to use the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51 to execute an ED start effect that suggests transition to the ED state. With this configuration, the transition to the ED state is suggested using the entire display area of the liquid crystal display 51, so it is clearly recognized that the ED transition conditions are satisfied and the control is to be in the ED state. be able to.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to execute an ED start effect indicating a transition to an ED state when a start operation for the game is performed in a game subsequent to the game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied. It is. With this configuration, since the ED start effect is executed at the start of the game, it is possible to draw attention to the effect at the start of the game, and it is not affected by the effect after the game starts, so the ED start effect is executed. The number of patterns can be reduced.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment is configured to perform a performance corresponding to the game without executing a performance indicating that the ED notification condition is satisfied in a game in which the ED notification condition is satisfied. With this configuration, even in a game where the ED notification condition is met, the performance corresponding to the game is executed instead of the performance that suggests that the ED notification condition is satisfied, so the ED of the next game and onwards It is possible to increase the surprise of the start effect.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is capable of executing a navigation effect that suggests the determined result of the internal lottery and a specific role winning suggestion effect (A). This is a configuration in which the performance is executed with priority over the specific role winning suggestion performance (A). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the surprise caused by the ED start performance from being weakened by the navigation performance or the specific role winning suggestion performance (A).

[Effect 7]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs control in an advantageous section in which the AT state can be controlled to be advantageous for the player, and after controlling to the AT state in the advantageous section, the ED transition condition is satisfied. After controlling to the AT state, it is possible to control to the ED state, and after controlling to the AT state, it is possible to control to multiple types of states until the ED transition condition is satisfied. After controlling to the AT state, the ED transition condition is satisfied. After that, the configuration is controlled only to the ED state. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, it is possible to control to multiple types of states until the ED transition condition is satisfied, so that the gameplay changes before the ED transition condition is satisfied. On the other hand, after the ED transition condition is satisfied, the game is controlled only to the ED state, so after the ED transition condition is satisfied, stable gaming performance can be achieved.

In this embodiment, as multiple types of states other than the ED state, there is an AT1 state in which navigation notification is performed at a rate of 100% to notify the operation mode for winning an increased combination when a multi-push sequential combination is won, and a navigation This configuration includes an AT2 state in which notification is performed at a rate of 50% and an additional state. With this configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the AT1 state is where navigation notification is performed at a rate of 100%, and the navigation notification is performed at a rate of 50%. By being controllable to a plurality of states including the AT2 state, the amount of medals awarded can be varied before the ED transition condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, as multiple types of states other than the ED state, there is a first state (notification state) in which navigation notification is performed to notify the operation mode for winning an increased combination when a multi-push sequential combination is won; The configuration may include a second state in which navigation notification is not performed, and with such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, the first state in which navigation notification is performed until the ED transition condition is satisfied. By being able to control the state and a second state in which navigation notification is not performed, it is possible to change the amount of medals awarded before the ED transition condition is established, and The amount of medals awarded between the first state and the second state can be significantly changed.

In this embodiment, after controlling to the AT state, it is possible to execute a navigation stock lottery for extending the period of controlling to the AT state, and it is possible to perform the navigation stock lottery with a low probability as multiple types of states other than the ED state. This configuration includes a possible AT1 state and an AT2 state, and an additional state in which the navigation stock lottery can be executed with high probability. With this configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the Navi stock lottery can be executed in the AT1 and AT2 states with a low probability, and the Navi stock lottery can be executed with a high probability. By being able to control a plurality of states including an executable additional state, it is possible to vary the period during which the AT state is controlled before the ED transition condition is satisfied.

In this embodiment, after controlling to the AT state, it is possible to execute a Navi stock lottery for extending the period of controlling to the AT state, and as a plurality of types of states other than the ED state, the Navi stock lottery can be executed. It is also possible to have a configuration including a first state and a second state in which the navigation stock lottery cannot be executed. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, until the ED transition condition is satisfied, the navigation By being controllable to multiple states including a first state in which the stock lottery can be executed and a second state in which the Navi stock lottery cannot be executed, it is controlled to the AT state before the ED transition condition is satisfied. It is possible to vary the period of time.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to control to the AT state and then control to the ED state when the ED transition condition is satisfied, regardless of which state is controlled to any of a plurality of states other than the ED state. It is. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, even if the state is controlled to any state other than the ED state, if the ED transition condition is satisfied, the state is controlled to the ED state. Processing related to transition to the state can be simplified.

In this example, the average net increase in medals per game in the ED state is the highest in the AT1 state, where the average net increase in medals per game is the highest among multiple states other than the ED state. The configuration is smaller than the average net increase in number of sheets. With this configuration, after being controlled to the AT state and then being controlled to the ED state when the ED transition condition is satisfied, the average net increase in the number of medals per game is the highest among the previous states. Since this is smaller than the average net increase in medals per game in the AT1 state where there is a large number of medals, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high even if the ED transition condition is met.

In this embodiment, the net increase in the number of medals that can be expected in the ED state is greater than the minimum net increase in the number of medals that can be expected in multiple types of states other than the ED state and in a state where the number of medals increases. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of being controlled to the ED state.

In this embodiment, the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is different from the average net increase in the number of medals per game in any of the plurality of states other than the ED state. With such a configuration, the amount of increase in medals in the ED state can be made appropriate.

In this embodiment, the average net increase in the number of medals per game in the ED state is the same as the average net increase in the number of medals per game in any of multiple states other than the ED state. By adopting such a configuration, the control of the ED state and the control of any previous state can be made common.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment executes an ED start effect that suggests transition to the ED state, and after being controlled to the AT state, in any state among multiple types of states other than the ED state. The configuration is such that a common ED start effect is executed even when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled. With this configuration, after being controlled to the AT state, a common ED start effect is executed regardless of which state the ED transition condition is satisfied, so that the ED state is not controlled. You can make things easier to understand.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment executes a result notification effect to notify the result of the AT state at the end of the ED state, and after being controlled to the AT state, one of the multiple types of states other than the ED state is executed. The configuration is such that a common result notification performance is executed even when the ED transition condition is satisfied in any state and the state is controlled to the ED state. With this configuration, a common result notification effect will be executed at the end of the ED state, regardless of which state the ED transition condition is in after being controlled to the AT state. , it is possible to clearly recognize that the ED state has ended.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment executes the navigation effect that suggests the determined result of the internal lottery and the specific role winning suggestion effect (A) and (B), while in the ED state (after notification), the sub-control unit 91 performs the The ED performance is executed, and in the ED state (after notification), the rate at which the navigation performance and specific role winning suggestion performance (A) and (B) are executed is lower than in multiple types of states other than the ED state. . With this configuration, in the ED state (after notification), the rate at which the navigation performance and specific role winning suggestion performance (A) and (B) are executed is lower than in states other than the ED state (after notification). Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the ED effect.

In the ED state (after notification), the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment limits the execution of the specific winning suggestion effect (B) that changes the display on the liquid crystal display 51 among the effects suggesting the result of the internal lottery. It is the composition. With this configuration, in the ED state (after notification), execution of the specific winning combination suggestion effect (B) that changes the display on the liquid crystal display 51 is restricted, so that attention can be drawn to the ED effect. .

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to be able to suggest the currently set setting value based on the ED effect pattern in the ED state (after notification). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of being controlled to the ED state.

[Effect 8]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of AT-related display sections that are controlled to either a lighting mode or a lighting-off mode by turning on or turning off the AT-related LEDs 58a to 58e by the sub-control section 91, and are in an ED state. In the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state other than the above, all the AT-related display parts are not turned on at the same time, and in the ED state, all the AT-related display parts are turned on. With this configuration, in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state other than the ED state, all the AT-related display parts do not turn on at the same time, and in the ED state, all the AT-related display parts are turned on. Since it is in a lighting mode, it becomes easy to understand that the ED state has been controlled.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the AT-related display section includes an AT1 state display section 63 corresponding to the AT1 state among multiple types of states other than the ED state, and an AT2 state display section 62 corresponding to the AT2 state. , a configuration in which the AT1 state display section 63 is in a lighting mode in the AT1 state, the AT2 state display section 62 is not in a lighting mode, and the AT1 state display section 63 is not in a lighting mode in the AT2 state, and the AT2 state display section 62 is in a lighting mode. It is. With this configuration, until the transition to the ED state, the AT1 status display section 63 can be used as a light emitting section for notifying the AT1 state, and the AT2 state display section 62 can be used as a light emitting section for notifying the AT2 state. After transitioning to the ED state, the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 can be used as a light emitting section to notify the ED state. In particular, the ED state is a state that transitions less frequently than the AT1 state and AT2 state, and it is possible to notify that the ED state has been controlled without providing a dedicated display section for such a state. becomes possible.

When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT1 state and the transition is made to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment sets the AT2 state display section 62 to the lighting mode while leaving the AT1 state display section 63 in the lighting mode. When the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT2 state and the transition is made to the ED state, the AT1 state display section 63 is turned on while the AT2 state display section 62 remains lit. With this configuration, when controlling to the ED state, only the light emitting parts that are not in the lighting mode (for the AT1 state, the AT2 state display section 62, the CZ display section 64, and the additional state display section 65) are set to the lighting mode. This makes control easier.

When the ED transition condition is established in the AT1 state and the transition is made to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment sets the AT1 status display unit 63 to a light-off state, and then displays the AT1 status display unit 63 and the AT2 status display unit. When the AT2 state display section 62 is turned on and the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT2 state to shift to the ED state, the AT2 state display section 62 is turned off, and then the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are turned off. A configuration may be adopted in which the lighting mode is set. With such a configuration, when controlling to the ED state, the light emitting section that has been in the lighting mode depending on the state is temporarily turned off, and then the AT1 status display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are in a lighting mode, so that it is easy to understand that the state has shifted to the ED state.

When the ED transition condition is established in the AT1 state and the transition is made to the ED state, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment sets the AT1 status display unit 63 to a light-off state, and then displays the AT1 status display unit 63 and the AT2 status display unit. When the AT2 state display section 62 is turned on and the ED transition condition is satisfied in the AT2 state to shift to the ED state, the AT2 state display section 62 is turned off, and then the AT1 state display section 63 and the AT2 state display section 62 are turned off. In the configuration in which the AT1 status display section 63 and the AT2 status display section 62 are set to the lighting mode, the AT1 status display section 63 and the AT2 status display section 62 may be configured to go through a blinking mode and then to the lighting mode. When controlling, the light emitting section that was in a lighting mode depending on the state is once turned off, and then the AT1 status display section 63 and the AT2 status display section 62 are turned on, after passing through a blinking mode and then turned on. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the state has shifted to the ED state.

The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to include an AT display section 61 in which the AT-related display section is lit in both the AT1 state and the AT2 state. With such a configuration, in the ED state, the AT display section 61 is also lit regardless of whether it is in the AT1 state or the AT2 state, so that it is controlled in the ED state. It becomes easier to understand.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, an AT display section 61, an AT2 state display section 62, and an AT1 state display section 63 are arranged on the left side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a CZ display section 64 and an additional state display section 65 are arranged as follows. It is arranged on the right side of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. With this configuration, the AT display section 61, AT2 state display section 62, AT1 state display section 63, CZ display section 64, and additional state display section 65 are easily visible during play on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Since they are arranged on the left and right sides, it becomes easy to understand that the ED state has been controlled.

[Effect 9]
The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to be able to execute continuous effects over a plurality of games in the AT state, and to restrict control according to the ED state while the continuous effects are being executed. With such a configuration, control related to the ED state is restricted during execution of continuous performance over a plurality of games, so it is possible to prevent the interest of the continuous performance from being lost due to control related to the ED state.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to start controlling the ED state after the continuous performance ends when the ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance. With this configuration, if the ED transition condition is satisfied during the execution of a continuous performance, the control of the ED state will start after the end of the continuous performance, so the start of the ED state will stop the continuous performance. This can prevent loss of interest.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment may be configured not to determine whether the ED transition condition is satisfied in the performance execution state in which continuous performance is performed, and by having such a configuration, There is no need to make unnecessary determinations during the period in which the start of the ED state is restricted.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes an ED start effect that suggests transition to the ED state, and when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled during the execution of the continuous effect, The ED start effect may be executed after the end of the continuous effect. With such a structure, when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled during the execution of the continuous effect, the ED start effect may be executed after the continuous effect ends. Since the ED start performance is performed after the end of the continuous performance, the continuous performance is not interrupted even if the ED state starts, and the interest of the continuous performance can be prevented from being lost.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment may be configured to change the content of the continuous performance when the ED transition condition is satisfied and the ED state is controlled during the execution of the continuous performance, and such a configuration may be adopted. In this way, the transition to the ED state can also be suggested by the continuous performance being performed.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment may have a configuration in which the continuous performance is not executed if the ED transition condition can be satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance; By doing so, if the ED transition condition can be satisfied during the execution of the continuous performance, the continuous performance will not be executed, thereby preventing the interest of the continuous performance from being lost due to the start of the ED state. can.

[Effect 10]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls the increasing state in which the payout rate of medals per game is higher than in the non-AT state, and after the end of the increasing state, the payout rate of medals per game is higher than in the increasing state. It is possible to control the state to a low decreasing state, and in the decreasing state to shift to the increasing state again. It is possible to control to the AT state in which the increasing state and the decreasing state are repeatedly looped alternately, and to shift to the increasing state again in the decreasing state. In this configuration, when it has been decided to increase the power consumption, the period until the transition to the increase state is made again is controlled to be one of 1G to 11G. With such a configuration, in a configuration that can be controlled to an AT state in which an increasing state and a decreasing state where the medal payout rate is lower than the increasing state are alternately and repeatedly looped, after the decreasing state starts, the increasing state Since the period until the state is changed again is any one of 1G to 11G, it is possible to expect the state to be changed again to the increasing state until the longest number of games among 1G to 11G has elapsed.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, during the period of time until the decreasing state after the first increasing state ends, the transition is made again to the increasing state. This configuration has a high proportion of periods that are shorter than the period up to. With such a configuration, after the first increasing state ends, the period in which the decreasing state is controlled before shifting to the next increasing state is likely to be shorter than after the second increasing state ends, To make it easier to shift to the second increase state without reducing the medals increased in the first increase state, so that a large amount of medals can be acquired in the initial stage of the AT state that loops between the increase state and the decrease state. Can be done.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, the rate of 1G is highest during the period from the end of the first increase state to the decrease state to the increase state again. With this configuration, after the first increase state ends, it is easy to transition to the next increase state with 1G, and the medals can move to the second increase state without reducing the medals increased in the first increase state as much as possible. It becomes easier to do.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, the period until the transition to the increasing state again in the decreasing state after the end of the second to fourth increasing states is the same in the decreasing state after the end of the first, fifth and subsequent increasing states. If there is a high probability that the period will be longer than the period before transitioning to the increasing state again, and it is not decided to transition to the increasing state again in the decreasing state after the end of the second to fourth increasing state, the first , in the decreasing state after the end of the fifth increasing state, the winning probability of the Navi stock is more preferential than in the case where it is not decided to shift to the increasing state again. With this configuration, in the decreasing state after the end of the second to fourth increasing states, the period until the transition to the increasing state again is longer than in the decreasing state after the end of the first, fifth and subsequent increasing states. is likely to be long, and if it has not been decided to transition to the increasing state again, the winning probability of Navi Stock will be more favorable than the decreasing state after the end of the first, fifth and subsequent increasing states. Even if the period of the decreasing state after the end of the second to fourth increasing states becomes longer, it is possible to expect both the transition to the increasing state and the provision of Navi stock.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, before being controlled to the decreasing state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the increasing state again in the decreasing state, and in the decreasing state after the second to fourth increasing states If it is not decided to transition to the increasing state again, the Navi stock will be won more than in the case where it is not decided to transition to the increasing state again in the decreasing state after the end of the first or fifth increasing state. This is a configuration with high probability. With this configuration, even if the period of the decreasing state after the end of the second to fourth increasing states becomes longer, it is possible to expect the state to shift to the increasing state again.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, in the fifth increasing state, the control is more advantageous for the player than in the fourth increasing state, and in the decreasing state before shifting to the fifth increasing state, the increasing state is changed again. The configuration is such that the period until the transition is made is longer than the period until the transition is made again to the increasing state in the decreasing state before shifting to the increasing state for the fourth time. With such a configuration, the specific state before shifting to the fifth increasing state, which is controlled more advantageously for the player than the previous increasing state, is the decreasing state before shifting to the fourth increasing state. Since the period tends to be longer than the state, it can be expected that the state will shift to the relatively advantageous fifth increase state over a long period of time.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, in the fifth increasing state, the control is more advantageous for the player than in the fourth increasing state, and in the decreasing state after the end of the fifth increasing state, the player shifts to the increasing state again. The configuration has a high probability that the period until the change is made is shorter than the period until the change is made to the increase state again in the decrease state before the change to the increase state for the fifth time. With this configuration, the decreasing state after the fifth increasing state, which is controlled more favorably for the player than the previous increasing state, is lower than the decreasing state before shifting to the fifth increasing state. Since the period also tends to be short, a large amount of medals can be acquired starting from the fifth increase state, which is particularly advantageous in the AT state that loops between an increase state and a decrease state.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, in the fifth increase state, it is easier to win the additional state in which Navi stock is given than in the fourth increase state. With such a configuration, in the AT state that loops between the increasing state and the decreasing state, by being controlled to the increasing state five times, it is possible to expect that the AT state will continue after that.

In this embodiment, the decreasing state is a state in which the navigation notification probability of being notified of the operation mode for generating a small winning combination that involves awarding medals is lower than that in the increasing state. With such a configuration, it is possible to vary the payout rate of medals in an increasing state and a decreasing state depending on the navigation notification probability for generating a small winning combination.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can select and set any one of a plurality of types of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and causes the state to shift from a decreasing state to an increasing state again. This is a configuration in which the possibility of a specific setting value (6) is suggested by the number of consecutive games in a decreasing state up to. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the period from the decreasing period until the transition to the increasing state again.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, before the start of the decreasing state, it is determined whether or not to transition the decreasing state to the increasing state again, and when it is determined to transition the decreasing state to the increasing state again. In addition, the period for changing the decreasing state to the increasing state again is selected from 1G to 11G depending on the number of times the AT state is controlled to the increasing state. With such a configuration, before the start of the decreasing state, in addition to determining whether to transition to the increasing state again, when transitioning to the increasing state again, the period until transition is determined from 1G to 11G. Therefore, the control after being controlled to the reduced state can be simplified.

In this embodiment, the period until the transition to the increasing state again in the decreasing state is shorter than the number of games with the highest selection rate according to the number of times the increasing state is controlled in the AT state. Also, in the AT state, the ratio of long periods being selected is higher than the number of games being selected with the highest ratio according to the number of times the AT state is controlled to be in the increasing state. With this configuration, after the start of the decreasing state, the number of games that are most likely to be selected according to the number of times the increasing state is controlled in the AT state, which loops between the increasing state and the decreasing state, has elapsed. It is also possible to expect that the amount will also shift to an increasing state.

In this embodiment, in the AT state, in the fifth increase state, the winning probability of the additional state is higher than the four increasing states, and the winning probability of the relatively advantageous additional state (2) is higher. In the decreasing state after the end of the first increasing state, the period before the transition to the increasing state is controlled by There is a high proportion of cases where the period is shorter than the period, and the period until the transition to the increasing state again in the decreasing state after the end of the 5th increasing state increases in the decreasing state after the end of the 2nd to 4th increasing state. There is a high probability that the period will be shorter than the period until the state is changed again, and before the state is controlled to decrease, it is determined whether or not to transition to the increase state again in the decreased state, and the second to fourth If it is not decided to transition to the increasing state again in the decreasing state after the end of the increasing state, it is decided to transition to the increasing state again in the decreasing state after the end of the first and fifth increasing state. This is a configuration in which the rate at which it is decided to transition to the increased state again is higher than when it is not. With this configuration, after the first increasing state ends, the period in which the decreasing state is controlled until the next increasing state shifts is shorter than after the second to fourth increasing states end. This makes it easier to move to the second increase state without reducing the medals increased in the first increase state, so it is easier to accumulate a large amount of medals in the early stage of the AT state that loops between the increase state and the decrease state. In the fifth and subsequent increasing states, the winning probability of the additional state is higher than the previous increasing states, and the winning probability of the relatively advantageous additional state (2) is controlled to be high. The decreasing state after the end tends to have a shorter period than the decreasing state after the end of the second to fourth increasing states, so the fifth increasing state is particularly advantageous in the AT state that loops between the increasing state and the decreasing state. You can earn a large amount of medals using this as a starting point. Furthermore, in the decreasing state after the end of the second to fourth increasing states, the period until the transition to the increasing state again is longer than the decreasing state after the end of the first increasing state or the end of the fifth and subsequent increasing states. is likely to be long, and in the decreasing state after the second to fourth increasing states, the ratio at which it is decided to transition to the increasing state again if it has not been decided to transition to the increasing state again. is relatively high, so even if the period of decreasing state after the end of the second to fourth increasing states becomes longer, it is possible to expect the transition to the increasing state again, and the fifth increase is particularly advantageous. It is possible to expect that the AT state will continue until the end of the AT state.

[Effect 11]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can set any number of bets from a plurality of types of bet numbers including 3 or 2 coins according to the player's selection, and determines whether or not to allow the occurrence of winnings. When it is decided to allow the occurrence of a winning of BB1 or BB2 with a transition to BB1 or BB2 by the internal lottery, and the winning of BB1 or BB2 does not occur, the winning of BB1 or BB2 The decision to allow the occurrence of winnings can be carried over to the next game or later, and the decision to allow the occurrence of winnings for BB2, which is subject to determination, can be carried over to the next game or later, and the decision to allow the occurrence of winnings for BB2, which is subject to determination, is made on the condition that the number of bets is 3. The payout rate of medals within BB2 that has been carried over is not appropriate, and the decision has been made to allow the occurrence of winnings in BB1, which is subject to determination, on the condition that the number of bets of 2 coins is set. This is a configuration in which the payout rate of medals is appropriate within BB1 where the coins are carried over.

Furthermore, the appropriate medal payout rate within BB1 means that the decision to allow the occurrence of winnings in BB1 or BB2 has not been carried over within BB1, or within BB2. A configuration in which the payout rate of medals is higher than inside BB1, a configuration in which benefits can be given inside BB1, but no benefits are granted inside BB1, and a configuration in which benefits are not granted inside BB1. This includes a structure in which benefits are granted under more preferential conditions than those in the inside or inside the BB2.

In this embodiment, inside BB1, even if the bet amount is set to 3 or 2, the winning of BB1 does not occur. With this configuration, medals will not be paid out within BB2, where the decision to allow the occurrence of winnings in BB2, which is subject to determination, has been carried over on the condition that the number of bets of 3 medals is set. If the odds are not appropriate and the decision to allow the winning of BB1, which is the subject of the decision, has been carried over, on the condition that the number of bets is 2 coins, the medals will be distributed within BB1. In a configuration where the payout rate is appropriate, after moving to the inside of BB1, even if the bet number of 3 coins is set or the bet number of 2 coins is set, the winning of BB1 The state does not shift to BB1 due to the occurrence of the error, and the BB1 state in which the medal payout rate becomes appropriate can be maintained.

In this embodiment, the A in BB and the B in BB that are determined by internal lottery are common between BB2, which is transferred when BB2 wins, and BB1, which is transferred when BB1 is won. This is a configuration in which the probability that at least some of the winnings among BB A and BB B, which are determined by internal lottery, are allowed to occur is different. With this configuration, within BB2, the decision to allow the winning of BB2, which is subject to determination, on the condition that the number of bets of 3 coins is set, has been carried over. Medals within BB1, where the payout rate is not appropriate and the decision to allow the occurrence of winnings of BB1, which is subject to determination, is carried over on the condition that the number of bets of 2 coins is set. In a configuration where the payout rate is appropriate, when a winning of BB2 occurs, it will be controlled by BB2, and when a winning of BB1 occurs, it will be controlled by BB1, but if BB2 and BB1 BB middle A and BB middle B, which are determined by an internal lottery, are common, and at least some of the prizes among BB middle A and BB middle B, which are determined by an internal lottery, are allowed to occur in BB2 and BB1. By setting the probabilities of being different, the medal payout rate in BB2 and the medal payout rate in BB1 can be changed without changing BB middle A and BB middle B, which are determined by internal lottery between BB2 and BB1. and can be adjusted.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of selecting and setting any one of a plurality of types of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and is capable of selecting and setting one of the setting values in at least one of BB2 and BB1. The configuration is such that the probability that at least some of the target A in BB and B in BB will be allowed to win varies depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to adjust the payout rate of medals for each set value in BB2 or BB1 without changing A in BB and B in BB, which are determined by internal lottery between BB2 and BB1. Can be done.

[Effect 12]
The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is capable of controlling the AT state in an advantageous section that is advantageous for the player, and can update the number of ED transition games and the net increase number counter value in the advantageous section. When controlling, one of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, 2200 is determined as the third specified number, and one of 1150, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, 1400 is determined. The value is determined as the fifth specified number, and the ED state is controlled when the updated number of ED transition games reaches the third specified number or the updated net increase number counter value exceeds the fifth specified number. be. With such a configuration, after being controlled to the advantageous section, the third regulation number and the fifth regulation will be controlled to the ED state when the number of ED transition games reaches or the net increase number counter value exceeds. Since the number varies, the interest associated with controlling to the advantageous section can be increased by changing the period until the ED state is controlled each time the control is performed to the advantageous section.

In this embodiment, the ED state has a configuration in which the navigation notification probability of being notified of the operation mode for generating a small winning combination accompanied by the awarding of medals is different from the navigation notification probability in the AT1 state, AT2 state, and additional state. With such a configuration, the period until the ED state is controlled changes, making the timing of transition to the ED state ambiguous, but by being controlled to the ED state, the AT1 state, AT2 state, Since the added state and the navigation notification probability are different, it is possible to infer the possibility that the vehicle is being controlled to the ED state from the navigation notification probability.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is capable of executing an ED start effect or an ED effect that suggests that the ED state is being controlled in the ED state, and can execute an ED start effect or an ED effect even after being controlled to the ED state. This is a configuration that may not be executed. With such a configuration, even after being controlled to the ED state, the ED start effect or ED effect may not be executed, so even if the ED start effect or ED effect is not executed, the ED state may not be controlled. You can expect that.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to determine whether or not to execute the ED start performance when a specific combination is won by internal lottery in the ED state. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the ED start effect will be executed when it is decided to allow the occurrence of the winning of the specific combination, that is, that the ED state will be controlled.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment has a third specified number of 1700, 1800, 1900, 2000, 2100, and 2200, which is less than or equal to 1900, which is relatively easy to reach, and a fifth specified number of 1150, 1200, and 1250. , 1300, 1350, and 1400, the configuration is capable of executing navigation performance B that suggests the possibility of reaching 1250 or less, which is relatively easy to reach. With such a configuration, by executing the navigation effect B, it is possible to make the user expect to be controlled to the ED state at an earlier stage.

[Effect 13]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of controlling an AT state that is advantageous to the player in an advantageous period, and has an advantageous period game number counter that counts the number of games in the advantageous period, and a game number counter for counting the number of games in the advantageous period. and an ED transition game number counter that counts the number of games, and the number of advantageous section games by the advantageous section game number counter is determined regardless of whether or not the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1. The number of ED transition games determined by the ED transition game number counter is updated and used when determining the end condition 1 of the advantageous section, and it is established that the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1. It is updated when the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1, but it is not updated when the bet number is 3 and the gaming state is RT1, and is used when determining whether the ED transition condition is satisfied in the advantageous section. It is the composition. With this configuration, the number of games in an advantageous period that is updated regardless of the conditions that occur during the advantageous period is used as the number of games to determine the end condition 1 of the advantageous period, so that the number of games in the advantageous period is does not become too long, while the number of games used to determine whether the ED transition condition is satisfied is a second count value that is not updated unless the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1. By using this, it is possible to encourage players to play games under the recommended conditions.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured such that both the number of advantageous section games and the number of ED transition games are initialized at the end of the advantageous section. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent events in a completed advantageous section from affecting the next advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to control the ED state to continue until the end conditions 1 and 2 of the advantageous section are satisfied when the number of ED transition games reaches the fifth specified number. With this configuration, when the number of games in which the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1 in the advantageous section reaches the fifth specified number, the advantageous section ends. The ED state can be controlled to continue until conditions 1 and 2 are satisfied.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to be able to suggest the number of remaining games until the end of the advantageous section in the ED state, and to suggest the number of remaining games based on the number of games in the advantageous section. With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately indicate the number of remaining games in the ED state.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment controls the AT state when the number of ED transition games reaches a ceiling value (for example, 1000) that is smaller than the fifth specified number (1150 to 1400 in this embodiment). With such a configuration, the number of ED transition games can be shared between determining whether the transition condition to the AT state is satisfied and determining whether the third ED transition condition is satisfied.

In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of medals becomes appropriate when the game is played with a bet of 3 coins, and the number of ED transition games is updated when the game is played with a bet of 3 coins. The configuration is as follows. With this configuration, the number of ED transition games will not be updated unless the game is played with a bet of 3 coins, so it is encouraged to play the game with a bet of 3 coins so that the medal payout rate is appropriate. be able to.

In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout rate of medals is made appropriate by being controlled by RT1 among RT0, RT1, RT2, BB1, and BB2, and the number of ED transition games is controlled by RT1. This is the configuration that will be updated. With such a configuration, the number of ED transition games is not updated when it is not controlled by RT1, so it is possible to encourage playing the game at RT1, where the medal payout rate is appropriate.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment counts the net increase in the number of medals after transitioning to the AT state, and calculates the net increase number counter value used when determining the end condition 2 of the advantageous section when the number of bets is 3 and the game state is The configuration is such that the update is performed regardless of whether or not it is established that is RT1. With this configuration, even if the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is not RT1, the net increase number counter value is updated, so even if the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is not RT1, the net increase number counter value is updated. The end condition 2 of the advantageous section can be determined by taking into consideration the amount of increase in medals in games where the state is not RT1. In other words, even if the game is played without establishing that the number of bets is 3 and the gaming state is RT1, the establishment of the condition 2 for ending the advantageous section cannot be delayed.

[Effect 14]
The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is capable of controlling the advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section, and can also control the normal state and the CZ state in the advantageous section, and the normal state upon the start of the advantageous section. control to enter the CZ state when transition conditions for the CZ state are satisfied in the normal state, and after the end of the CZ state, end the advantageous section and start the advantageous section again to control the control to the normal state; After the end of the CZ state or the AT state, it is possible to perform control to return to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section. With this configuration, after the end of the CZ state, it is possible not only to end the advantageous section and change to the advantageous section again to control the normal state, but also to control the control to the normal state by continuing the advantageous section after the end of the CZ state. Since it may be controlled to the normal state, the flow of the game can be varied.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that control is performed to the CZ state when the transition condition for the CZ state is satisfied in the normal state, but the configuration is configured that the control is performed to the AT state when the transition condition for the AT state is satisfied in the normal state. It is also possible to control the normal state by ending the advantageous section after the end of the AT state and start the advantageous section again, and control to return to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the end of the AT state. By creating a configuration that allows control to perform the following, it is possible to vary the flow of the game.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs the continuation lottery 1 when the advantageous section starts and controls to the normal state, and determines whether to continue the advantageous section after the CZ state controlled from the normal state ends. This is a configuration that makes it possible to determine. With such a configuration, after the end of the CZ state, the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is entered again to be controlled to the normal state, or the advantageous section is continued and the control is returned to the normal state. , is determined when the advantageous section starts, so the control after the end of the CZ state, such as the effect that suggests the possibility that the advantageous section will continue after the end of the CZ state, is performed before being controlled by the CZ state. It becomes possible to perform control according to the

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines whether to control the advantageous section depending on the winning combination in the internal lottery, and whether to continue the advantageous section in accordance with the winning combination in the internal lottery in the continuous lottery 1. This is a configuration that determines whether or not. With this configuration, it is determined whether or not to control to the advantageous section according to the winning combination in the internal lottery, and also the CZ After the state ends, it is decided by an internal lottery whether to end the advantageous section and move to the advantageous section again and be controlled to the normal state, or continue the advantageous section and be controlled to the normal state. It is possible to draw attention to the winning role.

The sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment executes the normal state performance in the normal state controlled with the start of the advantageous section, and depending on the frequency with which the stage of the normal state performance is changed, after the end of the CZ state, This configuration suggests the possibility of being controlled to the normal state while continuing. With such a configuration, in the normal state before being controlled to the CZ state, after the end of the CZ state, the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is changed again to be controlled to the normal state, or the advantageous section is It is possible to suggest whether or not the situation will be controlled to a normal state while the situation continues.

In this example, the ratio of the CZ state ending without transitioning to the AT state and being controlled to the normal state while the advantageous section continues, and the ratio of the advantageous section continuing after being controlled to the AT state after the CZ state. This configuration differs in the rate at which the normal state is maintained while the state is maintained. With this configuration, depending on whether the CZ state ends without being controlled to the AT state, or whether the CZ state is controlled to the AT state, the control returns to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section. Since the rate at which the game is played is different, the subsequent flow of the game can be varied depending on whether or not the AT state is controlled after the CZ state.

In this embodiment, the configuration is such that it is more advantageous for the player to be controlled to the AT state after the CZ state than to end without being controlled to the AT state after the CZ state. With such a configuration, the subsequent flow of the game can be varied depending on the degree of advantage associated with being controlled to the CZ state.

In this embodiment, when the AT state is controlled after the CZ state, the advantageous section may not be continued after that. With such a structure, after the CZ state is controlled to the AT state, , since the advantageous section does not continue, it is possible to draw attention to the subsequent flow of the game when the CZ state ends without transitioning to the AT state.

In this embodiment, the normal state in which control is performed while the advantageous section continues after the CZ state is better than the normal state in which the control is performed by ending the advantageous section and starting the advantageous section again after the CZ state. The configuration is such that a mode in which transition to the CZ state can be expected with a small number of games is likely to be selected. With this configuration, in the normal state where the control is performed while the advantageous section continues after the CZ state, the control is performed as the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section starts again. Since it is easy to be controlled to the CZ state with a small number of games, the interest can be increased by controlling to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the CZ state.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs an end lottery for each game in the normal state, and by winning the end lottery, the normal state ends and is controlled to the CZ state, and after the CZ state, the advantageous section In the normal state where the CZ state is continued and controlled, a mode with a higher probability of winning the ending lottery is selected than in the normal state where the advantageous section is ended after the CZ state and the advantageous section starts again. It has an easy configuration. With such a configuration, since the ending lottery is performed for each game in the normal state, it is possible to expect that the CZ state will be controlled for each game.

In this embodiment, the ending lottery is held for each game, but the ending lottery is held every time the lottery conditions are met, such as when a specific combination is won or when a prize is won, and the ending lottery is won. By doing so, the normal state may be terminated and the control may be changed to the CZ state. With such a structure, it is possible to make the player expect to be controlled to the CZ state every time the lottery condition is satisfied in the normal state. can.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment ends the normal state and controls the CZ state when the number of games controlled in the normal state reaches the number of ending games selected according to the mode of the normal state. In addition, in the normal state where control is performed while the advantageous section continues after the CZ state, the control is performed by ending the advantageous section and starting the advantageous section again after the CZ state. The configuration is such that a mode with a high selection rate for the number of completed games is likely to be selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform control according to the number of games required until the normal state ends, such as performing effects toward the end of the normal state, for example.

In this embodiment, after the CZ state, the CZ state is controlled from the normal state where the control is continued while the advantageous section is continued.After the CZ state, the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is started again. This configuration is more advantageous than the CZ state, which is controlled from the normal state. With this configuration, the CZ state controlled from the normal state where the advantageous section is continued after the CZ state ends the advantageous section and starts the advantageous section again. This is more advantageous than the CZ state, which is controlled from the controlled normal state, so that it is possible to increase the interest of being controlled to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the CZ state.

In this embodiment, after the CZ state, the CZ state is controlled from the normal state where the control is continued while the advantageous section is continued.After the CZ state, the advantageous section is ended and the advantageous section is started again. This configuration has a higher rate of being controlled from the CZ state to the AT state than from the CZ state, which is controlled from the normal state. With this configuration, the CZ state controlled from the normal state where the advantageous section is continued after the CZ state ends the advantageous section and starts the advantageous section again. Since it is easier to control the AT state from the CZ state to the AT state that is advantageous for the player than from the CZ state which is controlled from the normal state controlled by You can increase your interest by doing things.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment terminates the advantageous section when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches a first prescribed number (1500 games in this embodiment), and changes the CZ state according to the number of games in the advantageous section. After , the advantageous section continues at a different rate. With such a configuration, even when controlling to the normal state while continuing the advantageous section after the CZ state, it is possible to control to the normal state within the range of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment does not continue the advantageous section after the CZ state when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is less than 400 games, and does not continue the advantageous section after the CZ state. Even if the game is controlled to the AT state after passing through the normal state and the CZ state, at least 77 games will be secured by the end of the advantageous period. This is a configuration that allows you to win medals. With such a configuration, even if the advantageous section continues after the CZ state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which less than a predetermined amount of medals can be acquired in the subsequent AT state.

Furthermore, when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is less than 400 games, the rate at which the advantageous section continues after the CZ state is lower than when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 400 or more. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to avoid as much as possible a situation in which less than a predetermined amount of medals can be obtained when the advantageous section continues after the CZ state.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured such that when the advantageous section is continued and the control is returned to the normal state after the CZ state, the selection rate of the mode is different depending on the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. This is a configuration that changes the average number of games played in the normal state. With such a configuration, even when controlling to the normal state after the CZ state while the advantageous section continues, it is possible to control to the normal state within the range of the remaining number of games in the advantageous section.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment can control multiple types of modes (normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, high probability mode, heaven preparation mode, heaven mode) with different advantages in the normal state, and can control the mode in the CZ state. After that, the normal state is controlled in the case where the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section starts again and the control is returned to the normal state, and in the case where the control is returned to the normal state with the advantageous section continuing after the CZ state. This configuration has different mode selection rates. With this configuration, after the CZ state, the advantageous section continues and the control is returned to the normal state, and after the CZ state, the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section starts again, so that the normal state The degree of advantage in the normal state can be changed depending on whether it is controlled by the state or not.

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured such that even when the advantageous section ends after the CZ state and the advantageous section starts again to be controlled to the normal state, the advantageous section continues after the CZ state. Even when the game is controlled in the normal state, the type of mode is selected according to the winning combination in the internal lottery. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage in the normal state can be changed depending on the winning combination in the internal lottery.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to be able to suggest the type of mode based on the difference in the stay rate for each stage of the normal state performance executed in the normal state. With such a configuration, the degree of advantage in the normal state can be recognized from the difference in the stay rate for each stage of the normal state performance.

In this embodiment, in multiple types of modes (normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, high probability mode, heaven preparation mode, heaven mode), after the CZ state, the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section starts again. This configuration includes a heaven preparation mode that is selected only when controlled to the normal state. With such a configuration, after the CZ state, the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section starts again, and the control is returned to the normal state, thereby increasing the interest.

In this embodiment, the heaven preparation mode is configured such that the advantageous section continues at a higher rate after the CZ state ends than the other modes (normal 1 mode, normal 2 mode, high probability mode, heaven mode). With this configuration, after the CZ state ends, the advantageous section ends, and only when the advantageous section starts again and is controlled to the normal state, after the CZ state ends, the advantageous section continues. It is possible to increase the rate of control to the normal state.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to provide an advantage after the CZ state ends, depending on the result of the game in the CZ state, such as the number of point-up games in the CZ state and the number of games until the condition judgment game ends. This configuration allows it to be determined whether or not to continue the section. With this configuration, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section after the end of the CZ state according to the result of the game in the CZ state, so it is possible to draw attention to the result of the game in the CZ state. .

The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured such that when the result of the game in the CZ state is relatively unfavorable, the main control unit 41 is configured to This configuration has a high rate of continuation of advantageous sections. With such a configuration, even if the result of the game in the CZ state is unfavorable, it is possible to expect that the advantageous section will continue thereafter.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment determines that when the number of point-up games in the CZ state is 10, the number of point-up games is more advantageous than when the number of point-up games is 10. This configuration has a higher rate of continuing advantageous sections when there are 20 games, that is, when the period of CZ state control is shorter than when the period of CZ state control is longer. With such a configuration, even if the period of being controlled to the CZ state is relatively short, it is possible to expect that the advantageous section will continue after that, and if the period of being controlled to the CZ state is short, That is, when there is a high possibility that the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is secured, control suitable for the period controlled in the CZ state can be determined, such as increasing the rate at which the advantageous section continues.

In addition, when the number of medals paid out in the CZ state and the number of medals increased in the CZ state are below a predetermined number, the ratio of continuing the advantageous section may be higher than when the number exceeds the predetermined number. With this configuration, even if the number of medals earned in the CZ state is relatively small, it is possible to expect that the advantageous section will continue after that, and the number of medals paid out in the CZ state and increase. When the number of medals paid out in the CZ state is small, that is, when there is a high possibility that the number of medals that can be obtained in the advantageous section is secured, the number of medals paid out in the CZ state and the increase Control suitable for the number of medals can be determined.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment is configured to execute a normal state start effect at the start of the normal state. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that control in the normal state has started.

The sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment can control the normal state again while continuing the advantageous section after the next CZ state ends, depending on which of the start effects A to C the type of the normal state start effect is. This configuration suggests the possibility that the With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the type of normal state start effect.

Note that the mode of the normal state may be suggested depending on which of the start effects A to C the type of the normal state start effect is, and even in such a configuration, the mode of the normal state may be It can draw attention.

The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to notify that the vehicle is in an advantageous section by lighting the section display LED 19. With such a configuration, it can be recognized that the vehicle is in an advantageous section.

In the case where the advantageous section ends at the end of the CZ state, the main control unit 41 of this embodiment turns off the section display LED 19 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the final stop operation in the last game of the CZ state. , the notification that the vehicle is in an advantageous section is terminated. With this configuration, in the last game in the CZ state, even if the final stop operation is performed, the notification that the game is in an advantageous period continues for a while, so that it is recognized that the game is in an advantageous period. be able to.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say.

In the above embodiment, an example was explained in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as the gaming value. The present invention may be applied to a fully credit-type slot machine in which the number of bets is set using only credits as a gaming value. When using game balls as a gaming value, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls, and when setting 3 as the number of bets in the above example, 15 game balls can be used. This corresponds to the one used to set the number of bets.

Furthermore, the invention is not limited to those that use only one type of gaming value such as medals and game balls; for example, those that can use multiple types of gaming value such as medals and game balls in combination. It may be. In other words, it is possible to play a game by setting the number of bets using any of multiple types of game values such as medals and game balls, and it is possible to play games by setting the number of bets using any of multiple types of game values such as medals and game balls, and it is possible to play games by setting the number of bets using any of multiple types of game values such as medals and game balls. A slot machine that can pay out any value may be used.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 51 Liquid crystal display 41 Main control section 91 Sub control section

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display section that can variably display multiple types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
A slot machine in which a display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section, and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
A section control means capable of controlling a normal section and an advantageous section;
state control means capable of controlling a plurality of states including a normal state and a specific state more advantageous than the normal state in the advantageous section;
Counting means for counting the number of occurrences of a specific event after controlling to the normal state;
prescribed number selection means for selecting a prescribed number at the start of the normal state;
After controlling to the normal state, a termination lottery means determines by lottery whether or not to terminate the normal state;
Equipped with
The state control means includes:
Control to a normal state with the start of the advantageous section,
When the number of occurrences of the specific event reaches the predetermined number selected by the predetermined number selection means based on the counting result of the counting means in the normal state, or the number of occurrences of the specific event reaches the predetermined number. When it is determined by the termination lottery means to terminate the normal state before the normal state is reached, the normal state is terminated and controlled to the specific state;
The normal state that is controlled after the end of the specific state includes a first normal state that is controlled by ending the advantageous section and starting the advantageous section again after the end of the specific state, and a first normal state that is controlled after the end of the specific state. , a second normal state in which the control is performed while the advantageous section continues; the specific state controlled from the second normal state is more advantageous than the specific state controlled from the first normal state;
The termination lottery means is capable of performing a lottery to determine whether or not to terminate the normal state with the same probability in the first normal state and the second normal state; The selection means selects the specified number such that an expected value of the specified number selected at the start of the second normal state is smaller than an expected value of the specified number selected at the start of the first normal state. choose,
The state control means controls the second normal state at a higher rate when the amount of gaming value acquired by the player in the specific state is less than or equal to a predetermined amount than when it exceeds the predetermined amount.

Images